Home

T-BERD/MTS 5800 Ethernet Testing Manual

1. 00 22000 ec e aes 294 Fault Type result ccc oy oS aA Re Sg hs 294 Distance M result 0 2 0 eee 295 Skew ns result ce rsrirang d es tdaane ba Stead Sealy eae 295 Polarity result eerca o a eack ae oe ve ace fa a ee 295 Pairesult 0 Ocean wht Vel al ee Soa th tele ty aoa 295 SLAKE ceases titid ol tae Rath Bod shh Ce aha 6g BD et a 296 Interface resultes acoso hace eae Bias Sa eo DA ee Bae 296 L2 Link Stats results 0 0 000000 eee 296 L2 Link Counts results 0 200 0000 eee eee 299 L2 Filter Stats results 0 0 0 000 00000 eee ee 302 L2 Filter Counts results sinang smeta iia ae a a eee 305 J Proof transparency results 20 naaa 306 L2 BERT Stats results 0000 cece eee 307 CDMA Receiver Status results 0 000000 e aes 308 CDMA GPS Receiver Log 0 0 e eee eee 308 Service OAM results 00 0000 cee eee 309 L OAM Modes results 0 00000 c eee eee 310 L OAM Counts resultS 00000 c eee eee 310 L OAM States results senina nag mme aaa e a aae eee 311 xii Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Contents L OAM Error History results 1 0 0 000 e eee eee 311 L3 Link Stats results 0 2 00 0000 0 020 cee ee 312 L3 Link Counts results 0 0000 313 L3 Filter Stats results 0 0 0 0 000 0002 eee ee 313 L3 Filter Counts results 0 00 cece 314 L3 IP Config Status results
2. Start traffic at the rate calculated above Wait 3 seconds Do atest restart Wait 5 seconds Get the L2 Avg Util For 1 accuracy Throughput is calculated as The integer value of L2 Avg Util 10 divided by 10 For 01 accuracy Throughput is calculated as The integer value of L2 Avg Util 100 divided by 100 NOTE The minimal throughput values for mismatched asynchronous rates are 100k to 10G Anything below 100k such as 10k that comes into a 10G unit will not be detected because it is below the threshold granularity supported 0 001 of 10G 100k Verifying Phase The load is set to the calculated throughput value and transmitted for the Throughput Duration time If the frame loss tolerance is exceeded instructions are provided for testing the link manually for intermittent problems and the test is aborted Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Throughput test results Pass fail threshold Latency RTD test About the latency test Chapter 10 Automated Testing Automated RFC 2544 The following results are reported for every frame length selected Cfg Length Mbps The bit rate for transmitted traffic expressed in Mbps at which no frames were lost for a particular frame length Measured Rate Mbps The measured bit rate expressed in Mbps at which no frames were lost for a particular frame length Measured Rate The bit rate expr
3. About Triple Play and Multiple Streams testing 146 Features and capabilities Before running Triple Play or Multiple Streams applications be certain you are comfortable configuring and running basic layer 2 layer 3 and layer 4 tests For details refer to Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing on page 21 Chapter 5 TCP UDP Testing on page 127 Features and capabilities include the following when running Triple Play or Multiple Streams applications 10 100 1000 electrical 1 GigE optical and 10 GigE LAN testing You can configure up to ten streams of layer 2 or layer 3 or layer 4 traffic per port for a total of 20 streams if your instrument is configured for dual port testing 10 GigE WAN testing You can configure and transmit up to eight streams of layer 2 layer 3 or layer 4 traffic Uniquely characterize each stream of traffic For example you can verify that a network handles VLAN tagged traffic properly by assigning a high priority to one stream and a lower priority to a second stream IPv6 support lf you purchased the IPv6 Traffic option you can transmit and analyze multiple streams of IPv6 traffic using the terminate and loop back applications When configuring your test you can specify the required addresses manually or you can use stateless or stateful auto configuration to assign addresses for you Triple Play testing You can transmit and analyze up to five
4. Automated RFC 2544 Unit Parameter Options Layer 4 appli Traffic Mode TCP cations only UDP Source Service Type Select from list Source Port User entry Destination Service Select from list Type Destination Port User entry Test selection After all connection parameters have been defined the user is able to select which tests are to be included in the automated sequence In addition to the standard RFC 2544 tests Throughput Latency Frame Loss Back to Back and System Recovery loopback only additional tests are included for Packet Jitter Burst and Extended Load loopback only Choosing tests to be included 1 Upon opting to select which tests to run one of the following screens appears RFC 2544 Tests 2 Select Tests o System Recovery Loopback only and requires Throughput Extended Load Loopback only RFC 2544 Tests Configuratio Figure 67 Enhanced RFC 2544 test options Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 241 Chapter 10 Automated Testing Automated RFC 2544 242 The Enhanced FC tests include Throughput Latency Frame Loss Back to Back Buffer Credit and Buffer Credit Throughput FC Tests 2 Select Tests Not Running FC Tests Configuration Templates FC Tests Utilization Figure 68 Enhanced FC 2544 test options 2 Select the tests that are to be included in the Enhanced RFC 2544 or FC automated test by checking the box in front of the tests desired Note tha
5. Layer 3 Triple Play Under MAC Address setup indicate whether you want to use the factory default address or specify your own Under Customer Information in Source Type indicate whether you want to use DHCP to assign a single source IP address to all streams for all services manually assign a static address to be carried in streams for all services or assign a unique source IP address to each stream To specify a single static address in Source Type select Static and then specify the source IP address default gateway and subnet mask for the customer To specify an address for each stream in Source Type select Static Per Stream and then specify the addresses on the tabs corresponding to each type of service see Specifying layer 2 and layer 3 settings for Triple Play services on page 164 4 Press Configure Triple Play Services The Define Triple Play Services dialog box appears Specify the following Voice service If you intend to simulate and analyze voice traffic select the checkbox next to Simulated Specify the Codec sampling rate in ms and the number of calls to emulate Your instrument automatically calculates the bandwidth utilized by each call in kbps the total rate in Mbps for all calls and the frame size in Bytes Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 163 Chapter 6 Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing Triple Play testing Specifying layer 2 and layer 3 se
6. 0 0 0 eee Capturing packets n naana anna eee Manually capturing packets anuanua aaae Capturing packets based on a trigger n naana aaau Saving or exporting captured packets anaana aae How long will it take to save the PCAP file 0 Analyzing the packets using Wireshark 000 005 Analyzing the packets using J Mentor 0 00 e ee eae Loopback testing 00 cece eee eee eee eee eee eens Inserting errors or pause frames 0 000 02 eee eee eee eee Inserting alarms or defectS 00 cece eee eee Measuring round trip delay or packet jitter Measuring one way delay 00 ce eee eee ee eee eee CDMA GPS receivers 1 0 eae ATP GPS test packets ienee ae a eaaa a eee Network diagram 0 0 0 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 64 88 96 vii Contents Things to consider 2 eee ee eee ebb eee eee eee 103 About the One Way Delay test option and accessory kit 104 CDMA Receiver Kit 0 0 0 104 GPS Receiver Kit 3 2 0 eh ee he he eae ee ee eet 104 Step 1 Connecting the receivers to your instruments 104 Connecting the CDMA Receiver 0 00 eee eee 105 Connecting the GPS receiver 0 0 0 ee 105 Step 2 Measuring one way delay 00 eee eee eee 106 Measuring service disruption time 00s scene eee 107
7. Capture results on page 320 Sync Status Messages on page 321 AutoNeg Status results on page 321 Login Status results on page 323 PTP Link Counts results on page 324 PTP Link Stats results on page 325 PTP Graphs on page 326 L4 Link Stats results on page 327 Detailed L4 Stats on page 327 Cumulative L4 results on page 328 L4 Link Counts results on page 328 L4 Filter Stats results on page 329 L4 Filter Counts results on page 329 J Profiler results on page 329 Disabling automatic graph generation on page 330 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP LEDs Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results Table 33 describes the LEDs provided during Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP testing Only the LEDs that are applicable for your test appear in the LED panel For example layer 2 Ethernet layer 3 IP and layer 4 TCP UDP LEDs do not appear if you configure your unit for a layer 1 test If the instrument loses any of the LED events the green Status LED extin guishes and the red Alarm LED in the history column illuminates indicating an error condition has occurred Table 33 describes the LEDs and indicates whether each LED is applicable when testing Ethernet and IP Table 33 Ethernet IP
8. TCP throughput is measured For descriptions of the available result catego ries test results and graphs refer to CPRI OBSAI test results on page 285 You can also optionally create a report detailing the TCP Host settings that you used when measuring TCP throughput NOTE The tool used to run the TCP Host application may take up to two seconds to launch This impacts test results derived using the timestamp provided in traffic carrying an ATP payload such as latency delay measurements packet jitter or packet jitter When configuring the TCP Wirespeed applications many of the settings are the same as those used to run the TCP Host application When running TCP Wirespeed consider the following Optimal window size When turning up TCP service you can test using a variety of window sizes to determine the size that provides the best layer 4 throughput Customer traffic emulation When running the application your instru ment emulates a true TCP client server allowing you to establish up to 64 stateful TCP connections and collect pertinent throughput latency and loss results for many sessions This provides a more accurate assessment of the network s ability to carry application traffic than layer 3 throughput tests and provides the data you need to assure customers that issues are not due to poor layer 4 throughput Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 141 Chapter 5 TCP UDP Testing Running
9. Applications with Mac in Mac MiM encapsulated traffic Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 87 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Capturing packets for analysis 88 What is captured Test traffic Control plane traffic How much can be stored in the buffer Why use packet slicing All received traffic test traffic control plane traffic and live traffic that satisfies the user specified criteria on the Filter setup tab can be captured for all supported interfaces All transmitted traffic test traffic control plane traffic and live traffic that satis fies the user specified criteria on the Capture setup tab can be captured for all supported interfaces up to 1 Gigabit Ethernet When capturing transmitted traffic from a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface only control plane traffic is captured Ethernet frames ranging from 64 to10000 bytes long can be captured but the 4 byte Ethernet FCS is not stored in the capture buffer Test traffic is the traffic generated and transmitted by your test instrument carrying an ATP or BERT payload Test traffic can be captured when it is trans mitted looped back and then captured when it is received or it can be captured when received from a transmitting instrument on the far end You can capture received test traffic for all supported interfaces you can capture transmitted test traffic for all supported interfaces except 10 Gigabit Ethernet Control plane tra
10. The Protocol Analysis utility automates the capture decode process by passively detecting a packet for a selected protocol and then providing the user relevant information decoded from the packet This utility detects and decodes port data in LAN networks configured using the Cisco Discovery Protocol CDP or the Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP Protocol Analysis can be used to recover the switch and port data supplied during configuration to determine port availability on a network To analyze protocol 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select a Traffic Monitor test application for the interface you are testing Refer toTable 7 on page 25 for a list of layer 2 and layer 3 applications NOTE The Protocol Analysis utility is provided in all Layer 2 and Layer 3 Ethernet traffic monitoring applications from 10 100 1000 to 10GigE interfaces 10GigE WAN excluded 2 Select the Toolkit soft key and then select the Protocol Analysis 3 Select the Protocol to Analyze CDP or LLDP Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 37 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 1 BER testing 4 To initiate the protocol analysis click the Start Analysis button The utility displays the configured parameters of the ports analyzed CDP Device Identifier Name specified for the device containing the port Port Identifier Name specified for the port VLAN ID Name specified for the VLAN int
11. To specify source addresses and ports on the local unit do the following Ifyou want to assign a unique source MAC address to each layer 2 stream be certain to specify Per Stream as the Source MAC Mode on the All Streams setup tab then specify the source MAC addresses on the tabs corresponding to each enabled stream Ifyou want to assign a unique source IP address to each layer 3 stream be certain to specify Static Per Stream as the Source Type on the All Streams setup tab then specify the source IP addresses on the tabs corresponding to each enabled stream Ifyou want to assign a unique source port number to each layer 4 stream specify the port number on the tabs corresponding to each enabled stream 7 On the far end unit do the following a Ensure that automatic traffic generation is not enabled If it is not disabled the unit will not respond to the loop up command b If you are looping back multiple streams of TCP UDP traffic specify a listen port for each enabled stream that matches the destination port in the corresponding stream received from the near end unit 8 On the near end unit select Loop Up to put the far end unit in loop back mode The following occurs A confirmation message appears in the message bar of the near end unit indicating that the loop back was successful For layer 4 loop backs if a confirmation message appeared the ATP listen port or ports for multiple streams on the
12. 0 eee 315 PING resule eny peves nue NER ENEA SEAT VATER ROTA NA CER 316 Traceroute results nannan 0000 cece eee 317 Error Stats results 3 0 danced ae aaa a a ela Actin a a 317 Error Stats Layer 1 BERT 00002 e eee eee 317 Error Stats Layer 2 Traffic anaa uaaa aaa 318 Error Stats Layer 3 Traffic 2 0 2 0 cee eee 319 Capt re results 2 25 en bald Bede PE p Ad DRS BA ad De tnt 320 Sync Status Messages 0 0 ee eae 321 AutoNeg Status results 0 2 ce eee 321 Login Status results 0 2 ee 323 Implicit or Explicit E Port login 0 0 cee eee 323 Explicit Fabric N Port login 0 0 2 2 0 00 eee 323 PTP Link Counts results 0 0000 00 e eee eee 324 PTP Link Stats results 0 0000020 eee ee 325 PIP Graphs ordian aa aaa a de a ad ala 326 L4 Link Stats results 0 0 2 00000 cece eee 327 Detailed L4 Stats 20 0 0 00 e eee 327 Cumulative L4 results 0 0 000000 eee 328 L4 Link Counts results 00002 cece eee ee eee 328 L4 Filter Stats results 0 0 0 00000 cee eee eee 329 L4 Filter Counts results 00 0200s 329 J Profiler results 00 000 000 329 Graphical results 50005 oe es cee te ed ee as Gees See 330 Disabling automatic graph generation 00000 ee eee 330 Histogram resultS 0 000 eee eee 331 Event Log resultS 00 0c cee eee eee eee eee eee 331 Time testresults errer ere
13. 0 000 c eee eee 31 Adjusting the frequency of transmitted optical signals 31 Enabling automatic traffic transmission 2200005 32 Prerequisites for traffic transmission 2 22000 000 32 Issues to consider rra o bed eae ce eae ee eae he 32 Enabling the feature 222s054 cp eebisgaeia eter eee atau 33 Discovering another JDSU test instrument using J Connect 33 Discoverable instruments 0 0000 cee ee eae 33 Prerequisites 0 0 ea a eee 34 Discovering an instrument 0 0 0 0 0 00 cee eae 34 About the Refresh key 0 0 0 cee 35 Sorting discovered instruments 2 00 cee eee eee 35 Application names 00 000 eee tee 35 Observing details for an instrument 0000 ee eee 37 Protocol AnalySisS 0 00 cece eee eee eee eee 37 Layer 1 BER testing 00 cece eee eee eee eee eee 38 BER testing layer T vi sce acelin eden bh Piece Gea ERER 38 Monitoring layer1 BER teie iaie NE ep AEAN 40 Layer 2 testing ireira aR RA A EAA RE E 40 Specifying interface settings 0 0c ee eee 41 Specifying Ethernet frame settings 0 0 0 eee eee 43 Things to Consider arisan 2 2 been ne cee epee nee eey esau 43 Specifying the settings 0 2 0 0 cece eee 44 Configuring VLAN tagged traffic 0 2 eee eee 47 Configuring Q in Q traffic 2 eee 48 Configuring stacked VLAN traffic 0 0 00 eee eee 48
14. 128 A Configure Outgoing Packets Source IP Address Dest IP Address Figure 6 IP Packet Settings 24 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Ethernet and IP test applications Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing About Ethernet and IP testing For details on each of the settings see Specifying transmitted IPv4 packet settings on page 77 and Specifying IPv4 filter settings on page 79 This release supports the layer 2 and layer 3 applications listed in Table 7 MiM applications are listed in Table 8 on page 25 Layer 4 TCP UDP applications are listed in Table 15 on page 129 of Chapter 5 TCP UDP Testing Multiple Streams applications are listed in Table 16 on page 148 of Chapter 6 Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing Triple Play applications are listed in Table 18 on page 160 of Chapter 6 Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing Loop back applications are listed in Table 19 on page 171 of Applications used for loop back testing on page 171 Table 7 Ethernet and IP applications Application Layer 1 BERT Layer 2 Patterns Layer 2 Traffic Layer 3 Ping Layer 3 Traceroute Layer 3 Traffic Test Mode Terminate Monitor Through 10 100 1000 100M Optical Dual Through Terminate 1 GigE Optical N me o y Ni Monitor Through Dual Through N A V y y Fw oo o o Swe ooo o y Termin
15. 5 In Source Type specify whether the source MAC address uses a factory default MAC or User Defined If User Defined enter the MAC address If you selected VLAN Encapsulation enter the VLAN ID and Priority 7 Ifyou selected Q in Q Encapsulation do the following a Enter the SVLAN ID DEI Priority and TPID b Enter the CVLAN ID and Priority 8 Specify whether the Source IP Type is a Static address or DHCP 9 If you selected Static IP specify the Source IP Gateway and Subnet Mask The Ethernet frame and IP settings are specified Ethernet IP TCP UDP Fibre Chan VoIP and Video Testing Manual Chapter 8 VoIP Testing Specifying VoIP settings Specifying VoIP settings Before placing or receiving VoIP calls you must specify the VoIP settings To specify VoIP settings 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the test appli cation for the interface you are testing Refer to Table 21 on page 183 fora list of applications 2 Select the Setup soft key and then select the VoIP tab 3 In the panel on the left side of the tab select General and then specify the following a d Select Auto Answer and then specify whether to automatically answer calls Select Call Control Standard and then specify a call control standard SIP is Session Initiation Protocol It is an application layer protocol used to establish modify and terminate conference and telephony sessions over IP based network
16. 65 127 Byte Frames A count of filtered Ethernet frames with lengths between 65 and 127 bytes inclusive 68 124 Byte Frames A count of filtered Fibre Channel frames with lengths between 68 and 124 bytes inclu sive Broadcast Frames The number of filtered Ethernet broadcast frames since the last test restart Multicast Frames The number of filtered Ethernet multicast frames received since the last test restart Rx Acterna Frames A count of received Acterna frames including errored frames Rx Acterna OWD Frames The number of filtered ATP GPS frames received since test restart Rx Frame Bytes A count of the total number of frame bytes received since the test was started The count starts at the Destination Address and continues to the Frame Check Sequence The count does not include the preamble or start of frame delimiter The count does include errored frames Rx MPLS Frames A count of filtered MPLS frames since the test was started including errored frames Rx Q in Q Frames A count of filtered Q in Q frames since the test was started including errored frames Rx Stacked VLAN Frames A count of received stacked VLAN frames as defined in IEEE 802 p q since the test was started including errored frames Rx VLAN Frames Rx VPLS Frames Span Tree Frames Tx ATP Frame Count Unicast Frames Valid Rx Frames 306 J Proof transparency results A count of
17. Chapter 10 Automated Testing Launching a single automated test 226 Table 24 Automated Tests Automated Test Enhanced RFC 2544 Test Table 24 lists the available automated tests for each application Application Ethernet Layer 2 Traffic Layer 3 Traffic Layer 4 Traffic SAM Complete Ethernet Layer 2 Traffic FTP Throughput Ethernet Layer 3 Traffic Layer 4 Traffic HTTP Throughput Ethernet Layer 3 Traffic Layer 4 Traffic TCP Throughput Ethernet Layer 2 Traffic Layer 3 Traffic Layer 4 Traffic Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 10 Automated Testing Automated RFC 2544 Table 24 Automated Tests Automated Test Application TrueSpeed Test Ethernet 10 100 1000 or 1GigE Optical Layer 4 TCP Wirespeed a The RFC tests are not available when running NextGen GFP applications To launch an automated test 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test menu to select the appro priate application Be certain to select Terminate or Dual Terminate mode 2 Connect the modules on the near end and the far end to the circuit 3 If you are testing an optical interface on both units select the Laser button to turn the laser on 4 Onboth modules verify that the green Signal Present Sync Acquired and Link Active LEDs are illuminated 5 If you are running the test with layer 3 traffic and you enabled AR
18. Configuring TrueSpeed tests within TrueSAM on page 220 If TrueSpeed test has not been selected go to Saving TrueSAM profile on page 222 Configuring J Proof test within TrueSAM If layer 2 testing is being done and the J Proof test has been selected the J Proof frames screen appears By default a single test frame appears in the frame list You can specify a name for the frame the control protocol format the number of frames of this type to transmit the count the frame rate and the time out period 1 To modify the settings for the transmitted frame a lf you want to name the frame select Test Frame in the Name column and then enter a name of up to twenty characters on the pop up keypad or the remote keyboard Select OK to close the keypad and store the name b Inthe Protocol column select the control protocol format for the frame from the drop down options c Inthe Count column specify the number of frames you want to transmit d In Rate fr sec column enter the rate at which you want to transmit the frames Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 219 Chapter 10 Automated Testing TrueSAM e In Time out msec column enter the number of milliseconds the instrument will wait to receive the looped back frame before stopping transmission of frames 2 If you want to transmit control frames for different protocols do one of the following Select the Add Frame soft key Specify
19. Description A count of Ethernet frames containing Frame Check Sequence FCS errors When receiving Ethernet jumbo frames containing FCS errors the FCS error count does not increment Instead these frames are counted as Jabbers A count of Fibre Channel frames that have a byte value greater than the maximum 2140 frame length and an errored CRC A count of Fibre Channel frames under the minimum 28 byte frame length containing CRC errors The ratio of frames lost to the number of frames expected A count of received Ethernet frames that have a byte value greater than the maximum 1518 frame length or 1522 bytes for VLAN tagged frames or 1526 bytes for Q in Q encapsulated frames and an errored FCS A count of lost Acterna test frames in the traffic For example if the T BERD MTS 5800 detects sequence numbers 1 2 3 6 7 8 frames 4 and 5 were not detected the lost frame count is incremented by two frames 4 and 5 are lost If the TT BERD MTS 5800 then detects sequence numbers 9 10 14 15 16 frames 11 12 and 13 are missing the lost frame count is incremented by three resulting in a total count of five lost frames NOTE If the TTBERD MTS 5800 receives frames containing errors in the sequence number field the Lost Frames count may be incorrect A count of each instance where the T BERD MTS 5800 detects out of sequence Acterna test frames in the filtered traffic For example if the TBERD MTS 5800 detects sequence numbe
20. Error Free Seconds Errored Seconds Pattern 3 PRBS31 Pattern 2 A Seed Pattern 1 Description B Seed The percentage of seconds that the 4 received pattern is error free A count of the number of seconds that Ni the received pattern contained at least one error Error Free Seconds A count of the number of seconds the 4 pattern is received without any errors Pattern Errors Pattern Error Rate Pattern Error Free Seconds A count of the number of received pat Ni Ni terns that do not match the expected pattern The ratio of pattern errors to received Ni patterns since initially acquiring pattern synchronization The percentage of seconds that the 4 4 received pattern is error free Pattern Errored Seconds A count of the number of seconds that the received pattern contained at least one error Pattern Error Free Seconds Pattern Loss Seconds Total Bits Received Error Stats Layer 2 Traffic A count of the number of seconds the pattern is received without any errors A count of the number of seconds during Ni Ni which pattern synchronization is lost A count of the total number of bits Ni received since the last test restart For layer 2 Ethernet and Fibre Channel test applications to view the layer 2 Error Stats results described in Table 58 set the result category to Error Stats Table 58 Error Stats results layer 2 traffic Test Result
21. Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 113 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing MAC in MAC testing Turning AIS or RDI analysis ON Sending LBM or LTM messages 7 Press Results to return to the Main screen NOTE Before turning the laser ON if you are testing on an optical circuit and starting traffic be certain to verify that the filter settings on the receiving instrument match the settings for transmitted traffic on the traffic originating unit For example be certain to specify the same protocol or data length for transmitted traffic on the traffic originating unit and filtered traffic on the receiving unit 8 At the bottom of the main page select the Laser tab on the action bar then click Laser to On 9 Select the Action tab on the action bar and then click Start Traffic 10 Select the OAM tab on the action bar and then click BDI and or FDI to begin insertion of Backward and or Forward Defect Insertion The OAM settings are specified If you want to analyze traffic for AIS or RDI during the course of your test you must turn AIS or RDI analysis ON To turn AIS or RDI analysis ON 1 On the Main screen select the OAM action panel 2 Select AIS or RDI AIS or RDI analysis is on and your instrument will indicate whether AIS or RDIs have been detected When AIS analysis is On pressing Restart will not interrupt analysis you must turn AIS analysis off to clear AIS test results If you turned
22. RDI Indicates whether or not remote defect indication is ON or OFF RDI Seconds Count of the number of seconds during which an RDI was declared since starting or restarting the test Total Rx Frames Count of the number of CCM frames received since the last OAM setting was specified or changed Total Tx Frames Count of the number of CCM frames transmitted since the last OAM setting was specified or changed Unexpected MEG Level ON indicates that CCM frames have been received with a maintenance entity group level lower than that specified as the maintenance domain level when you configured the OAM settings for the transmitting instrument Unexpected MEP ON indicates that a CCM was received from a different maintenance end point than that specified as the instrument s peer MEG End Point Unexpected Period ON indicates that a CCM was received with the correct maintenance domain level maintenance association ID and maintenance end point ID but with a period value that was not the same as the instrument s CCM rate AIS AIS Indicates whether or not AIS is ON or OFF AIS Seconds Count of the number of seconds during which an AIS was declared since starting or restarting the test Total Rx Frames Count of the number of frames received since AIS was declared Total Tx Frames Count of the number of frames transmitted since AIS was declared Unexpected Period ON indicates that an AIS was received with the correct maintenance domain level mainten
23. Stream MAC Address VLAN ID 1 00 06 5B 15 04 03 2 2 00 06 5B 15 04 04 3 3 00 06 5B 15 04 05 4 4 00 06 5B 15 04 06 5 5 00 06 5B 15 04 07 6 To increment configured MAC addresses or VLAN IDs 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the layer 2 Multiple Streams test application for the interface you are testing refer to Table 16 on page 148 and Table 18 on page 160 for a list of applications 2 Select the Setup soft key and then enable the streams you intend to transmit see Enabling multiple streams on page 152 Be certain to enable stream 1 Select the tab for stream 1 then select the Ethernet sub tab 4 Specify the frame settings see Specifying layer 2 stream settings on page 156 then do the following If you want to increment the configured MAC addresses for the remaining streams on the graphic of the frame select DA then specify the destination MAC address for the first stream Select Enable Incre ment During Copy If you want to increment the configured VLAN ID for the remaining streams specify VLAN or Q in Q as the frame encapsulation then select VLAN on the graphic of the frame Specify the VLAN ID for the first frame then select Enable Increment During Copy 5 Select Copy Setups to other Streams The instrument copies the values for stream 1 to each stream and increments the values for the MAC address or VLAN ID as you specified When running layer 3 and layer 4 Mult
24. T BERD MTS 5800 Handheld Network Test Family Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual T BERD MTS 5800 Handheld Network Test Family Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Network and Service Enablement Jn JDSU One Milestone Center Court Jd Germantown Maryland 20876 7100 USA Toll Free 1 855 ASK JDSU e Tel 1 301 353 1560 Fax 1 240 404 1996 www jdsu com Notice Copyright Copyright release Trademarks Terms and conditions FCC Notice Ordering information WEEE and Battery Directive Compliance Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this manual was accu rate at the time of printing However information is subject to change without notice and JDS Uniphase reserves the right to provide an addendum to this manual with information not available at the time that this manual was created Copyright 2013 JDS Uniphase Corporation All rights reserved JDSU Net work and Service Enablement and the JDSU logo are trademarks of JDS Uniphase Corporation JDS Uniphase All other trademarks and regis tered trademarks are the property of their respective owners No part of this guide may be reproduced or transmitted electronically or otherwise without written permission of the publisher Reproduction and distribution of this guide is authorized for Government pur poses only JDS Uniphase JDSU MTS 5800 and T BERD 5800 are trademarks or regis tered tr
25. 128 255 Byte Packets 314 IPv4 IPv6 Description v 4 4 A count of filtered Ethernet IP packets with a length greater than 1500 bytes A count of filtered Ethernet IP packets with lengths between 1024 and 1500 bytes inclusive 4 A count of filtered Ethernet IP packets with lengths between 128 and 255 bytes inclusive Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Table 53 L3 Filter Counts results Continued Test Result 20 45 Byte Packets 256 511 Byte Packets 46 63 Byte Packets 512 1023 Byte Packets IPv6 2 Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results Description A count of filtered Ethernet IP packets with lengths between 20 and 45 bytes inclusive A count of filtered Ethernet IP packets with lengths between 256 and 511 bytes inclusive A count of filtered Ethernet IP packets with lengths between 46 and 63 bytes inclusive A count of filtered Ethernet IP packets with lengths between 512 and 1023 bytes inclusive 64 127 Byte Packets A count of filtered Ethernet IP packets with lengths between 64 and 127 bytes inclusive Broadcast Packets The number of filtered Ethernet broadcast IP packets received since the last test restart Multicast Packets Received Packets Unicast Packets L3 IP Config Status results lt 4 4 The number of filtered Ethernet multicast IP packets received since the las
26. 3bits 1 bit 8 bits Figure 9 Generic MPLS header When configuring traffic for MPLS testing be certain to specify labels that have already been instantiated by routers on the network For details on specifying MPLS settings for transmitted traffic see Specifying Ethernet frame settings on page 43 For details on filtering received MPLS traffic see Specifying Ethernet filter settings on page 49 Key MPLS test applications include End to end testing of MPLS networks For this application you configure your unit to transmit layer 3 traffic without MPLS labels to a second unit on the far end of the circuit The ingress provider edge PE router then adds the MPLS header and sends the encapsulated packet through the network The egress PE router removes the MPLS header and then forwards the data to a second unit on the far end The far end unit then analyzes the layer 3 traffic PE router to CE router emulation For this application you configure a unit on the near end to emulate an ingress PE router transmitting MPLS encapsu lated traffic to a second unit on the far end The far end unit is configured to emulate a customer edge CE router If the network uses routers which do not use ARP you may also need to specify the MAC address of the PE router that your near end unit is connected to Transmitted traffic is then routed through the MPLS network using the MPLS header settings you specified The egress PE router rem
27. Alignment Errors Code Violation Rate Code Violation Seconds Code Violations Description A count of the number of frames received containing both a framing error and an FCS error Only applicable when testing on 10 100 Mbps circuits The ratio of code violations to bits received since the last test restart A count of the number of seconds during which code violations occurred A count of each invalid 66 bit code word in the bit stream due to synchronization header errors For 10GigE streams code words with PCS block errors are also counted as code viola tions CRC Errored Frames A summed count of Fibre Channel frames containing Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC errors When receiving Fibre Channel jumbo frames containing CRC errors the CRC error count does not increment Instead these frames are counted as Fibre Jabbers Errored Frames 318 For Ethernet a summed count of FCS Errored Frames Jabbers and Undersized Frames For Fibre Channel a summed count of CRC Errored Frames Fibre Jabbers and Undersized Frames Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results Table 58 Error Stats results layer 2 traffic Continued Test Result FCS Errored Frames Fibre Jabbers Fibre Runts Frame Loss Ratio Jabbers Lost Frames OoS frames Runts Symbol Errors Undersized Frames Error Stats Layer 3 Traffic
28. Before you transmit layer 2 traffic over a MiM trunk you must specify Interface settings see Specifying interface settings on page 41 Frame characteristics of the transmitted traffic see Specifying Ethernet frame settings on page 115 Frame characteristics used to filter received traffic see Specifying Ethernet filter settings for MiM traffic on page 118 Traffic load settings see Specifying traffic load settings on page 120 After you specify the layer 2 settings you are ready to transmit and analyze the traffic To transmit and analyze layer 2 traffic 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the MiM termi nate test application for the interface you are testing 2 Select the Setup soft key and then select the Interface tab to specify settings that control the Ethernet interface see Specifying interface settings on page 41 3 Select the Ethernet tab to specify settings that define the frame character istics of the transmitted traffic see Specifying Ethernet frame settings on page 115 4 Select the Ethernet Filter tab to specify settings that filter the received traffic based on specified frame characteristics see Specifying Ethernet filter settings for MiM traffic on page 118 5 Select the Traffic tab to specify the type of load the unit will transmit see Specifying traffic load settings on page 120 6 Press Results to re
29. To save automated test report data 1 When the report dialog box appears if you would like to append a prog ress log to the end of the report select the option on the dialog box then reply with Yes or No If you select Yes specify the following The customer s name Your name The test location Any additional comments you might have concerning the test A message appears asking you to wait as a PDF of the report is gener ated After the report is complete the path and file name of the PDF appear with a message instructing you to press Close to return to the Main screen 2 Select Close to close the dialog box and return to the Main screen The report is saved NOTE You can not view Chines or Japanese PDFs on your test instrument if you save the report in a PDF format you must export the PDF then load it onto a PC or workstation with a PDF Viewer If you need to view Chinese or Japanese reports on the test instrument save the report data as an HTML file Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Test Results This chapter describes the categories and test results that are available when performing Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP tests Topics discussed in this chapter include the following About test results on page 284 Summary Status results on page 284 CPRI OBSAI test results on page 285 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP
30. When running the TCP Wirespeed application detailed statistics are provided for each established connection including bandwidth measurements delay measurements window statistics and frame counts TrueSpeed If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so you can use it to run the TrueSpeed Test This test uses the Wirespeed application and automates TCP throughput testing per the IETF draft standard ippm tcp throughput frame work and to allow TCP throughput testing for up to 64 connections For more information see TrueSpeed Test on page 268 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 143 Chapter 5 TCP UDP Testing TrueSpeed 144 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing This chapter provides information on testing triple play services and multiple Ethernet layer 2 IP layer 3 or TCP UDP layer 4 streams of traffic Topics discussed in this chapter include the following About Triple Play and Multiple Streams testing on page 146 Multiple Streams testing on page 147 Triple Play testing on page 160 Looping back multiple streams on page 165 Running the TCP Host script on page 165 Playing audio clips on page 165 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 145 Chapter 6 Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing About Triple Play and Multiple Streams testing
31. and TCP Pass which is the percent of the CIR required to pass the Not Running throughput test Run Walk the Window Test Automatically find MTU size Connect to Port TCP Pass i i Number of Connections Total Test Time s 240 MTU Size bytes 1500 Local Remote VLAN ID 15 Priority 0 lowest Type MOE TOS 000000 Upstream CIR Mbps 100 0 Connect Channel Figure 64 TrueSpeed Asymmetrical Turnup Configuration a Specify or confirm whether to Run the Walk the Windows Test by selecting the checkbox b Specify or confirm whether to Automatically find MTU size by selecting the checkbox If not checked enter the desired MTU Size in bytes c Enter or confirm the IP Prioritization for both the local and remote end if necessary Select TOS and enter the value or select DSCP and enter its value d Enter or confirm the CIR in Mbps This will be unavailable for entry if Set Bottleneck Bandwidth to match RFC 2544 Max Bandwidth when loading TrueSpeed configuration was checked on previous screen e To further configure the remote network setting select the Advanced button Define the Port Connection TCP Pass the MTU Upper Limit in bytes and whether Multiple Connections are desired When these have been defined select Back left green arrow After all parameters have been specified select Next the green arrow Saving TrueSAM profile 1 The Save Profile window appears Do one of the following a_Ifno Pro
32. and TCP Threshold among others which will be used on all subsequent TrueSpeed tests After all parameters have been specified select the Next arrow 2 The Step Configuration window appears see Figure 90 Step Configuration 1 ae TrueSpeed Steps mp Path MTU K RIT Walk the Window Q TCP Throughput Traffic Shaping Ke O cm True Speed Ctl Step Config Path MTU Figure 90 TrueSpeed Step Configuration Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 275 Chapter 10 Automated Testing TrueSpeed Test Select the steps that are to be included in the TrueSpeed test To learn more about each step see About the test steps on page 269 When all desired steps are chosen select the Next arrow 3 The Path MTU window appears Specify the MTU Upper Limit this value represents the starting point the upper value with which the test set will begin the Path MTU search Then select the Next arrow 4 The RTT window appears Enter the Duration of the Round Trip Delay test this test will calculate the inherent latency of the network in seconds Then select the Next arrow 5 The Walk the Window screen appears Specify the test Window Sizes Connections to each window and Test Duration and Max Segment Size in bytes if Path MTU is not selected Select Next the green arrow 6 The TCP Throughput window appears Specify the Window Size in bytes File Size per Co
33. and TCP UDP LEDs LED Acterna Detect ATP Frame Sync Frame Detect IP Packet Detect LPAC L1 Pattern Sync Indicates Ethernet MiM IP Green 4 Ni A frame with an Acterna payload has been detected Red An Acterna payload was detected and then not present for gt 1 second Green Synchronization with a received ATP frame has been achieved Red Synchronization has been lost since the last test restart TCP UDP Green y y y y Valid frames have been detected Red Frames were detected and then not present for gt 1 second Green Ni Ni An IP Packet has been detected Red An IP Packet was detected and then not present for gt 1 second Red A valid frame was not received within 10 sec onds of the last test start or restart Green Synchronization with the received layer 1 pat terns has been achieved Red Synchronization has been lost since the last test restart Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Fibre Channel 291 Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results Table 33 Ethernet IP and TCP UDP LEDs Continued LED L2 Pattern Sync Link Active Local Fault Detect Indicates Green Synchronization with the received layer 2 pat terns has been achieved Red Synchronization has been lost since the last test restart Green Auto negotiation was s
34. be received within the calculated interval see CCM Rate Specify the rate at which the instrument will transmit CCM messages The instrument will transmit CCM mes sages at the rate specified if it does not receive the number of messages back that you specify as the threshold within the cal culated interval CCM Rate times LOC Threshold messages the instrument declares a loss of continuity LOC Select one of the following Unicast Select Unicast to send CCMs to its destination address Multicast Select Multicast to send CCMs to a reserved multicast MAC address This setting does not appear when running Mac in Mac applications 111 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing OAM service and link layer testing Setting MEG End Point ID Peer MEG End Point ID Maintenance Domain Level Specify Domain ID Maintenance Domain ID Specify Domain ID must be Yes Maintenance Association ID Value Specify the Maintenance Entity Group End Point ID for the instrument The instrument encodes the ID that you specify in the CCMs that it sends to its peer Specify the Maintenance Entity Group End Point ID for the instrument s peer The instrument uses the peer ID that you specify to indicate whether CCMs are detected with unexpected MEG End Point IDs Specify the level for the Maintenance Domain MD The instrument uses the level that you specify to indicate whether CCMs for unex pected lower l
35. destination port numbers and the type of payload carried Port 0 zero is reserved by TCP UDP for networking therefore it is not avail able when you configure your traffic The following port numbers are also reserved and should not be used during testing 53 3000 68 3001 111 5353 1022 8192 1023 If DHCP is enabled in the near end unit a far end unit should not send UDP traffic to port 68 for IPv4 and 546 for IPv6 Such UDP traffic may cause the near end unit to lock up To specify the TCP UDP settings for transmitted traffic 1 Using the Test Menu select the Layer 4 Traffic application for the circuit you are testing refer to Table 15 on page 129 for a list of applications 2 Select the Setup soft key and then select the TCP UDP tab 3 Specify the following settings Setting Parameter Traffic Mode Indicate whether you want to transmit TCP or UDP traffic Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 5 TCP UDP Testing Specifying layer 4 settings Setting Parameter ATP Listen IP Type To analyze ATP traffic carrying the source IP address of your unit as the destination address select Auto Obtained To analyze ATP traffic carrying a different destination address for example a multicast address select User Defined Refer to Understanding the ATP Listen IP and Port on page 130 for illustrations explaining the ATP Listen settings for end to end
36. in your application settings then run the J QuickCheck application again Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Test at configured Max Bandwidth Layer 2 Quick Test Asymmetrical tests Chapter 10 Automated Testing Automated RFC 2544 Basic Load Test The load test can not take place until a remote loop is established or detected If a loop is in place the near end instrument automatically transmits a full load of traffic 100 at the selected line rate using the frame or packet size that you specified for the application The instrument then calculates the average layer 2 bandwidth utilization and displays it as a percentage With this option selected the RFC 2544 test will automatically be run upon completion of the J QuickCheck test using the Max Bandwidth setting pre configured on the Setup All Tests tab This option may both be selected simultaneously with the Layer 2 Quick Test The Layer 2 Quick Test extended test option operates in the symmetric loop back mode only thereby eliminating the number of configuration options The test can be configured to set the length of time the test is to be run and to configure the CIR in the RFC 2544 settings with a percentage of the Throughput value detected The default value will be 100 i e CIR will be 100 of the JQuickCheck Throughput This option may both be selected simultaneously with Test at configured Max Bandwidth When testing upstream
37. or select Don t Care l Tag Service ID Specify the backbone service instance Filter ID carried in the filtered traffic by selecting Specify Value or select Don t Care l Tag Service ID If you set the l Tag Service ID Filter to Specify Value specify the service instance ID carried in the filtered traf fic This setting only appears if l Tag Ser vice ID Filter is set to Specify Value 4 Select the Data field on the illustration of the backbone frame and then specify the following for the customer frame Setting Value Encapsulation Select one of the following None To analyze unencapsulated traffic select None VLAN To analyze VLAN tagged traffic select VLAN and then select the VLAN field on the illustra tion of the customer frame to specify the ID and pri ority Q in Q To analyze Q in Q tagged traffic select Q in Q and then select the SVLAN field on the illustration of the customer frame to specify the SVLAN set tings and the VLAN field to specify the VLAN ID and priority Don t Care To analyze all customer frames irre spective of encapsulation select Don t Care For details on the VLAN or Q in Q filter settings refer to Specifying Ethernet filter settings on page 49 Frame Type Select one of the following DIX 802 3 5 Select the Data field on the illustration of the customer frame and then do one of the following If you want the instrument to monitor and analyze live Eth
38. the loop back unit is placed in loop back mode All TBERD MTS 5800s are shipped with the ability to generate and transmit traffic therefore when running loop back applications using two T BERD MTS 5800s both instruments should be placed in terminate mode Previously loop back tests were always performed with both the local traffic transmitting unit and the loop back unit in Terminate mode Assuming both units can transmit traffic this is still the case When you purchase an Multiple Services Application Module you can order a unit that is capable of generating transmitting and analyzing Ethernet traffic or you can order a unit that simply loops back traffic received from another transmitting unit The loop back unit is not capable of generating its own traffic it functions simply as a loop back device If you are using a loop back only unit at the far end you must place the local unit in Terminate mode the loop back unit must be placed in Loop back mode Configure and transmit traffic from the local unit just as you would for an end to end test and verify that the filter settings on the loop back unit will allow traffic to pass from its receiver through to its transmitter You can still initiate the loop back from your local unit using the Loop Up action button or you can actively loop traffic back from the loop back unit using the LLB action button Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Key loop back concep
39. then you can conclude that a straight through cable is used You must know the cable type used to determine the MDI MDIX status of the far end port using the near end MDI MDIX Status result For example if you know you are using a straight through cable and the near end port detects MDIX you can conclude that the wiring at the far end port is MDI Table 34 illustrates each of the possible resolutions Table 34 E1 Tester Ethernet MDI MDIX Resolution Far end port Cable Near end port MDIX straight through MDI MDI cross over MDI MDI straight through MDIX MDIX cross over MDIX NOTE If the speed detected on the line is 1G electrical the MDI MDIX Status results are not applicable and therefore do not appear on the Cable Diag nostics screen If a link is inactive and a fault is detected the instrument indicates the type of fault detected Open Short or Unknown and the fault s relative distance from the tester within 1 meter If you do not connect the cable to a far end device completing the circuit you can also use the Open detection feature to measure the length of a cable Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Distance m result Skew ns result Polarity result Pair result Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results Fault types are defined as follows Open Indicates there is a cut on the pair or that the cable is not connected to a device at th
40. you can specify the addresses for one stream and then copy them to the other streams The Transport Module and Multiple Services Application Module use an ATP Listen IP Address and ATP Listen Port to determine whether received layer 4 traffic carries an ATP payload If you issue a Loop Up command from a local unit after the local unit receives a response from the loop back unit indicating that the loopup was successful the local unit s ATP Listen IP Address and ATP Listen Port are automatically set to the destination IP address and destination port number carried in the Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Understanding the graphical user interface Loop back action buttons Loop back messages Loop back tests Chapter 7 Loop back Testing About Loop back testing looped back traffic The loop back unit s ATP Listen IP Address and ATP Listen Port will also automatically be set to the destination IP address and destination port carried in the traffic it receives from the local unit If you use the LLB action button on the loop back unit it is essential that you specify the destination IP address and port carried in received traffic as the ATP Listen IP Address and ATP Listen Port when you configure tests that require an ATP payload such as delay measurements out of sequence counts lost frames counts and packet jitter measurements When running loop back tests the user interface looks much like it does
41. 1 V Png ga Skip Connect y Mode TrueSpeed Ctl Figure 88 TrueSpeed Troubleshooting Connection Settings NOTE All settings will be set to defaults upon selecting the troubleshoot mode Do the following a Inthe Local Settings portion of the window define the parameters of the local connection including MAC IP addresses and encapsulation if any b Inthe Remote portion of the window define the IP address of the remote connection To verify that there is a device at the address spec ified select the Ping button If there is a device a green check mark will appear beside the Remote IP address c To continue with the configuration select the right pointing green arrow on the right at the bottom of the screen Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 10 Automated Testing TrueSpeed Test 1 The TrueSpeed Controls window will appear see Figure 89 This step will configure global settings for all subsequent TrueSpeed steps This includes the CIR dasi Committed Information Rate and TCP Threshold which is the percent of the CIR required to pass the EZS wy throughput test Connect to Port 5001 TCP Throughput 95 0 Local Remote CIR Mbps 3 Tos Type TOS 3 100 0 ooo TOS 000000 Figure 89 TrueSpeed Troubleshooting Controls Configuration This window provides for the configuration of the parameters pertaining to the Committed Information Rate CIR
42. 2012 09 28713 45 11 Select 4 Create View vj o View report after creation Report Report Skip Report Creation mg End Create Report Figure 81 SAMComplete Report Window Do the following a Select the items to be included in the report by putting a checkmark in front of the item Entire groups may be selected or individual items within a group To expand the group listing to see the individual items select the in front of the group name b Select the format in which the report is to be saved by selecting the radio button under Format Specify the filename of the report d You may view saved reports by selecting the View Report button e To show a copy of the current report after saving it check the View report after creation checkbox The report will automatically load into the appropriate reader if available depending upon the format in which it has been saved f When ready to save the report select the Create Report button After it has been saved and viewed select the right pointing green arrow 5 The post report results window appears All options available on this window are described in step 3 with the excep tion of the Exit Y 1564 test To exit the SAMComplete application select the Go arrow after Exit Y 1564 test Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 10 Automated Testing Automated VLAN tests 6 The Exit window appears Exit
43. 4 After initializing the TrueSAM main page appears Show Steps Test E Figure 56 TrueSAM Main Page This page is used to initiate some of the major actions in the application Actions that are not valid at any given time will be grayed out For example when the test is first initiated the Run TrueSAM button will be grayed out because the test has not yet been configured To view the component parts of these major actions the Show Steps checkbox can be selected The configuration steps are displayed and can be used to access these component steps by selecting them see Figure 57 Configuration steps not applicable for the chosen sequence of Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 211 Chapter 10 Automated Testing TrueSAM tests will be grayed out Show Steps re Select Tests Local Settings RFC 2544 Configure Report Info Run Tests 3 E View Report Report Figure 57 TrueSAM Main Page with Steps shown From this page you can initiate the following actions Configure TrueSAM To define all the parameters for the test at this time select Configure TrueSAM For more information on configuring the TrueSAM tests go to step 5 Run TrueSAM To initiate a configured test script select Run TrueSAM For more information on running the TrueSAM tests go to Running TrueSAM on page 224 View TrueSAM Report To review a detailed report of the results obt
44. 4 applications Explanation of these settings can be found at Specifying interface settings on page 41 Before transmitting layer 3 traffic you must specify whether you are transmit ting IPoE or PPPoE traffic if you are testing on an electrical 1 GigE optical or 100 Mbps optical circuit and provide the appropriate link initialization settings To specify the data mode and initialization settings 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the test appli cation for the interface you are testing Refer to Table 7 on page 25 through Table 8 on page 25 for a list of layer 3 applications Table 15 on page 129 lists layer 4 applications Select the Setup soft key and then select the Ethernet tab In Encapsulation select one of the following None If you do not want to encapsulate transmitted traffic select None VLAN If you want to transmit VLAN tagged frames select VLAN and then refer to Configuring VLAN tagged traffic on page 47 Q in Q If you want to transmit VLAN stacked Q in Q frames select Q in Q and then refer to Configuring Q in Q traffic on page 48 MPLS If you are testing on an MPLS network and you want to transmit traffic with a MPLS header select MPLS and then refer to Configuring MPLS traffic on page 49 NOTE If you selected a Terminate application and you want to filter received traffic using MPLS criteria you must select MPLS encapsula
45. 5800 the full unit identifier appears in the messages If you are observing the messages on other JDSU Ethernet testers such as the FST 2802 or the HST with an Ethernet SIM the identifier will be truncated and will display only the first ten characters Using LLB to loop received traffic back to the local unit 172 You can loop received traffic through to a unit s transmitter and back to the local traffic originating unit by selecting the LLB action button provided on the loop back unit To loop received traffic back using LLB 1 If you haven t already done so on both units launch the layer 2 layer 3 layer 4 triple play or multiple streams application for the circuit you are testing see Step 1 Selecting a test application on page 2 If you are looping back traffic on an Ethernet circuit and both units are capable of transmitting traffic place each in Terminate mode otherwise if the loop back unit is not capable of generating traffic place it in Loop back mode Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 7 Loop back Testing Using LLB to loop received traffic back to the local unit Refer to the sections below for a list of available applications Ethernet and IP applications on page 25 MiM applications on page 25 TCP and UDP applications on page 129 Multiple Streams testing on page 147 2 On the local unit specify the link initializat
46. Calculated in milliseconds Delay Min ms The minimum round trip delay for the pings sent and successfully received by the E1 Tester Calculated in milliseconds DNS Errors Count of the DNS errors received during the course of trying to ping the host Lost Pings Count of Ping requests sent by the E1 Tester for which replies were not received within 3 seconds 316 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Table 55 Ping results Continued Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results Test Result Description Lost Pings The percentage of the total test seconds during which replies were not received within 3 seconds Ping Replies Rx Count of the ping replies received in response to the ping requests sent by the E1 Tester Ping Replies Tx Count of the ping replies sent from the T BERD MTS 5800 Ping Requests Rx Count of the ping requests received by the E1 Tester in other words requests sent to the E1 Tester s IP address from another Layer 3 device on the network Ping Requests Tx Count of the ping requests sent from the E1 Tester Traceroute results Error Stats results Error Stats Layer 1 BERT Table 56 describes the results associated with the Traceroute application Table 56 Traceroute results Test Result Description Delay ms The round trip delay for the packet Calculated in millisec onds Hop Displays the hop number for each hop the packet takes while cro
47. Destination Type enter the corresponding MAC address in the field provided In Encapsulation do the following If you want to monitor VLAN Q in Q or MPLS encapsulated traffic select the encapsulation and then specify the corresponding filter settings If you want to monitor traffic with no encapsulation select None If you don t care whether they are tagged select Don t Care Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Capturing packets for analysis 6 If you want to filter the received packets based on their source IP address destination IP address type of service or IP version select the IP Filter tab and then proceed to step 7 otherwise proceed to step 8 7 In IP Filter select Enable and then specify the following filter criteria To filter traffic for a specific source IP address select Yes and then type the source address To filter traffic for a specific destination IP address select Yes and then type the destination address Specify whether you want to filter traffic in a single direction or in either direction To filter traffic for a specific source or destination subnet select Prefix Length or Subnet Mask and they type the corresponding value in the field provided To filter traffic for a specific type of service or DSCP select TOS or DSCP and then type the corresponding value see Specifying trans mitted IPv
48. Eth Layer 2 Loopback TermEth10ML2Traffic 10 100 1000 Eth Layer 2 Traffic Term TermEth10ML3Loopback 10 100 1000 Eth Layer 3 Loopback TermEth10ML3Ping 10 100 1000 Eth Layer 3 Ping Term TermEth10ML3Traffic 10 100 1000 Eth Layer 3 Traffic Term TermEth10ML4Loopback 10 100 1000 Eth Layer 4 Loopback TermEth10ML4 Traffic 10 100 1000 Eth Layer 4 Traffic Term TermEth1GL2Loopback 1GigE Layer 2 Loopback TermEth1GL2Patterns 1GigE Layer 2 Patterns Term TermEth1 GL2Traffic 1GigE Layer 2 Traffic Term TermEth1 GL3Loopback 1GigE Layer 3 Loopback TermEth1 GL3Ping 1GigE Layer 3 Ping Term TermEth1 GL3Traffic 1GigE Layer 3 Traffic Term TermEth1 GL4Loopback 1GigE Layer 4 Loopback TermEth1GL4 Traffic 1GigE Layer 4 Traffic Term TermOc192Sts192cEthL2Loopback 10GigE WAN OC 192c Layer 2 Loopback TermOc192Sts192cEthL2Traffic 10GigE WAN OC 192c Layer 2 Traffic Term TermOc192Sts192cEthL3Loopback 10GigE WAN OC 192c Layer 3 Loopback TermOc192Sts192cEthL3Ping 10GigE WAN OC 192c Layer 3 Ping Term TermOc192Sts192cEthL3Traffic 10GigE WAN OC 192c Layer 3 Traffic Term TermStm64Au464cVc464cEthL2Loopback 10GigE WAN STM 64 Layer 2 Loopback TermStm64Au464cVc464cEthL2Traffic 10GigE WAN STM 64 Layer 2 Traffic Term TermStm64Au464cVc464cEthL3Loopback 10GigE WAN STM 64 Layer 3 Loopback TermStm64Au464cVc464cEthL3Ping 10GigE WAN STM 64 Layer 3 Ping Term TermStm64Au464cVc464cEthL3Traffic 10GigE WAN STM 64 Layer 3 Traff
49. Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 10 Automated Testing TrueSAM a Place acheck mark in the box in front of the each test where a pass fail threshold is desired b Enter or confirm the threshold value in the entry box after the test name c Select Next the green arrow All RFC 2544 tests have been configured If doing layer 2 testing and J Proof has been selected got to Configuring J Proof test within TrueSAM on page 219 If TrueSpeed test has been selected go to Configuring TrueSpeed tests within TrueSAM on page 220 If TrueSpeed test has not been selected go to Saving TrueSAM profile on page 222 Configuring SAMComplete test within TrueSAM The configuration of the SAMComplete test initiated from within TrueSAM is nearly identical to that for the standalone SAMComplete test The configuration of the TrueSAM version can be accomplished by starting on step 2 of Config uring SAMComplete test settings on page 251 with one exception the local and remote connection settings step 5 and step 6 will have already been configured by J QuickCheck Skip to step 7 and continue After SAMComplete configuration step 11has been completed return to this point in the TrueSAM configuration procedure If doing layer 2 testing and J Proof has been selected got to Configuring J Proof test within TrueSAM on page 219 If TrueSpeed test has been selected go to
50. Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 5 Chapter 1 Basic Testing Running multiple tests 6 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 3 072G Optical Testing This chapter provides information on testing 3 072G Optical services using the T BERD MTS 5800 Topics discussed in this chapter include the following About 3 072G Optical testing on page 8 BER Testing 3 072G Optical Layer 1 on page 8 Monitoring 3 072G Optical Layer 1 on page 9 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 7 Chapter 2 3 072G Optical Testing About 3 072G Optical testing About 3 072G Optical testing The 3 072G Optical test is used to validate that the underlying dark fiber DWDM network is configured correctly to support 3 072G protocol without errors If your instrument is equipped with the option it supports both 3 072G Optical Terminate and Monitor modes BER Testing 3 072G Optical Layer 1 To BER test 3 072G Optical Layer1 1 Using the Test Menu select the 3 072G Optical Layer 1 BERT Terminate application To specify the BER pattern do the following a Select the Setup soft key and then the Pattern tab b Select a pattern e Pattern 2423 1 ANSI 2423 1 Inv ANSI Delay Description Selects the 223 1 pseudorandom pattern which gener ates a maximum of 22 sequential Os and 23 sequential 1s Usually used to simulate live data for DS3 and SONET c
51. Go wap re Change Configuration and Rerun Test Go y View Detailed Results Go ip cz co Fun Tests RIT Figure 80 SAMComplete Post test Window Do one of the following To create a report of the results of the test that just completed select the Go arrow on the Create Report line Go to step 4 To repeat the test that just ran select the Go arrow on the Repeat Test line Go back to Choosing SAMComplete tests on page 259 To reconfigure the test and then run it again select the Go arrow on the Change Configuration and Rerun Test line Go to step 2 of Configuring SAMComplete test settings on page 251 To view detailed results of the performance achieved during the test select the Go arrow on the View Detailed Results line The detailed results are presented on a sequence of windows that vary depending upon the steps in the test that were selected to be run On the last page of the results select the right pointing green arrow Go to step 5 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 261 Chapter 10 Automated Testing SAMComplete 262 4 The Report window appears RT dx 97 15 56 09 28 2012 Re qs Not Running Format Report Groups M User Info POF cd O CSV O Tester Comments mi Device Under Test Text M Report Logo O HTML O Screenshots SAMComplete R O XML File Name SAMComplete
52. Green SVLAN tagged Ethernet frames have been detected Red SVLAN tagged Ethernet frames were detected and then not present for gt _1 second Green Synchronization is established Red Synchronization has been lost since the last test restart Ethernet IP Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results TCP UDP Fibre Channel TCP Packet Detect UDP Packet Detect VLAN Frame Detect Green TCP packets have been detected Red TCP packets were detected and then not pres ent for gt 1 second Green UDP packets have been detected Red UDP packets were detected and then not pres ent for gt 1 second Green VLAN tagged Ethernet frames have been detected Red VLAN tagged Ethernet frames were detected and then not present for gt _1 second VLAN Stack Frame Detect Green VLAN stack tagged Ethernet frames have been detected Red VLAN stack tagged Ethernet frames were detected and then not present for gt 1 second 1 The Signal Present LED is not applicable when testing 10 100 1000 Ethernet Cable Diagnostic results cable diagnostics on an electrical link Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual The Cable Diagnostics screen shows measurements associated with running 293 Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results 294 MDI or
53. IP Username Password Local RAS Port Call Control Port Gatekeeper RAS Port Time Zone Description Specify the gatekeeper mode NO GATEKEEPER means no RAS registration admission and status messages will be used AUTO DISCOVER automatically discovers the gatekeeper STATIC allows you to enter the gatekeeper address Specify whether authentications is supported or required Enter the gatekeeper IP address Enter the username to register with the gateway Enter the password associated with the username Enter the UDP port that is used locally for registra tion RAS messages Enter the UDP port that is used for call control mes sages for placing and receiving calls Enter the UDP port that the gatekeeper uses for registration RAS messages Select the time zone where you are located 7 Inthe left panel on the side of the tab select Audio Codec and then specify the following Setting Primary Codec Speech Per Frame Description Select the codec type to be advertised supported for receiving audio packets The codec on the receiving and transmitting end should match The call may not be successful if the codecs don t match Specify the number of milliseconds of speech per transmission frame the unit can receive Ethernet IP TCP UDP Fibre Chan VoIP and Video Testing Manual 187 Chapter 8 VoIP Testing Specifying VoIP settings Setting Jitter buffer Transmit Source Languag
54. IP Address If testing layer 4 streams in slave mode and the address mode is unicast enter the IP destination address of the master Master MAC Address If testing layer 2 streams in slave mode and the address mode is unicast enter the MAC destina tion address of the master Encapsulation Specify the encapsulation VLAN or None VLAN ID and Priority If Encapsulation is set to VLAN specify the ID and priority for the VLAN Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 123 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Transmitting and analyzing PTP 1588 traffic 124 Setting TOS Type TOS DSCP Announce Rx Timeout Announce Sync Delay Request Query Lease Duration Priority 1 Priority 2 Class Time Source Clock Accuracy Description If testing layer 4 streams specify the TOS type TOS or DSCP If TOS type is TOS specify the TOS code If TOS type is DSCP specify the DSCP code DSCP values are shown as codepoints with their decimal values in following Exam ple EF 46 If in Slave mode specify the amount of time that has to pass without receipt of an announce mes sage to trigger a Timeout event Specify the announce message rate the rate at which announce messages are transmitted NOTE When using multicast address mode the announce rate must match for the Master and Slave Although the Master controls the rate the Slave must use the same rate otherwise time outs occur
55. IPv4 test application for the interface you are testing Refer to Table 7 on page 25 through Table 8 on page 25 for lists of layer 3 applications Table 15 on page 129 lists layer 4 applications Select the Setup soft key and then select the Filters tab In the panel on the left side of the tab select Basic then set the Filter Mode to Detailed Specify the Ethernet filter settings see Specifying Ethernet filter settings on page 49 To specify layer 3 filter settings in the panel on the left side of the tab select IP Set the IP Filter to Enable then do the following a If you are running an application in Monitor mode in IP Version select IPv4 In Address Filter select one of the following Single Direction To pass through the filter traffic must satisfy the source and destination address criteria you specified for the filter to be reflected in the L3 Filter Counts and L3 Filter Stats result categories Either Direction The filter will not care which direction the traffic is coming from therefore the source address carried in the filtered traffic can be the source address of the near end unit or port or the source address of the far end unit or port Traffic from either source will be reflected in the L3 Filter Counts and L3 Filter Stats result categories On the illustration of the IP packet select the TOS DSCP Protocol Source IP or Destination IP field and then enter the filter criteria This is
56. If the average packet jitter is less than or equal to that specified for the threshold the test indicates that the test passed If it exceeds the threshold the test indicates that the test failed If you intend to run the System Recovery test the Enhanced RFC 2544 mode must be Symmetric and you must also select and run the Throughput test Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual About the System Recovery test System Recovery test results Frame Loss test About the frame loss test Frame Loss test results Back to Back Frames test Burst test About the Back to Back Frames test Chapter 10 Automated Testing Automated RFC 2544 The instrument uses the Throughput test to determine the maximum band width at which no frames were lost then the System Recovery test transmits traffic at 110 of the bandwidth referred to as the overload rate to force the receiving network element to drop frames for each frame length you selected The instrument transmits the overload rate for at least 60 seconds then reduces the transmission rate to 50 percent of the overload rate referred to as the recovery rate The instrument then measures the time it takes for the network element to reach a state where it is no longer dropping frames If the Throughput test reaches the lowest bandwidth limit without ever success fully receiving all transmitted frames in otherworlds it lost frames the System Recovery test
57. If you indicated that you only want to save part of the buffer by selecting Partial Buffer specify one of the following Start of buffer End of buffer If you indicated that you only want to save part of the buffer by selecting Partial Buffer specify one of the following The number of MB to save up to 256 MB The percentage of the buffer to save By default the instrument does not compress the file If you want to save the packets in a compressed gz for mat select this setting If you want to launch Wireshark immediately after sav ing the packets in the capture buffer select this setting 5 Select the Save button at the bottom of the dialog box A dialog box appears above the Main screen showing the percentage of the buffer that has been saved When buffer is saved the box closes If you indicated that you wanted Wireshark to launch immediately after saving the buffer the Wireshark application appears The packets in the capture buffer are saved or exported CANCELLING THE SAVE PROCESS You can cancel the save process by pressing the Cancel button provided on the Save Capture Buffer dialog box The length of time it take to cancel the save process varies depending on the amount of data stored in the cap ture buffer More data in the buffer results in a longer cancellation process Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 95 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Capturing packe
58. L OAM Counts results Table 47 describes the L OAM Counts results such as the number of trans mitted and received variable requests variable responses and loop back control frames The Link OAM State must be On to observe these results Table 47 L OAM Counts results Test Result Information Event Notification Variable Request 310 Description A count of Information frames transmitted or received since starting the test A count of Event notification frames transmitted or received since starting the test A count of variable request frames transmitted or received since starting the test Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results Table 47 L OAM Counts results Continued Test Result Description Variable Response A count of Variable Response frames transmitted or received since starting the test Loopback Control A count of Loopback Control frames transmitted or received since starting the test Duplicate Event A count of duplicate Event notification frames transmitted or received since starting the test Unsupported A count of unsupported frames transmitted or received since starting the test Organization Specific A count of Organization Specific frames transmitted or received since starting the test L OAM States results Table 48 describes the L OAM States results such as the Discovery state and Dying Gasp events The L
59. LACP VLAN BRDGSTP and 802 1d frames Encapsulation Select one of the following and then specify the asso ciated VLAN and if applicable SVLAN settings None Select None if you do not want to transmit encapsulated frames VLAN Select VLAN to transmit VLAN tagged frames then specify the associated settings For details refer to step c on page 70 Q in Q Select Q in Q to transmit Q in Q encapsu lated frames and then specify the associated cus tomer and service provider settings For details refer to step c on page 70 6 Select OK to store the settings and populate the Frames List 7 Optional f you would like to change settings for one or more of the frame types do so The frame types are generated After you configure the traffic originating instrument verify that the Encapsula tion setting for the Ethernet filter is set to Don t Care This ensures that traffic will be looped back After you configure the traffic originating instrument and check the far end instrument s filter settings you can initiate the transparent loopback To initiate the transparent loopback 1 If you are verifying transparency on an optical circuit turn the Laser ON 2 On the Main screen select the Actions action panel then select Loop Up The instrument sends the loop up frame When the receiving instrument is placed in J Proof transparent loopback mode a message appears stating that the remote transparent loop up was
60. LLC and SNAP SPTS Single Program Transport Stream STP Spanning Tree Protocol SVLAN Stacked VLAN Used in Q in Q traffic to provide a second encap sulation tag expanding the number of VLANs available Often considered the VLAN assigned to the service provider as opposed to the customer Sync Synchronization T TAM Test Access Management Appli cation used to provision network elements using your instrument at a remote location TCP Transmission Control Protocol Layer 4 protocol that allows two devices to establish a connection and exchange streams of data TCP Window Size The maximum number of bytes that a port can transmit over a TCP connection before being acknowledged by the receiving port Term See Terminate Terminate An application where the instrument is terminating the circuit In these applications the instrument sends and receives traffic Through An application where the instrument is used in series with a network circuit to monitor the traffic on that circuit TL1 Language used to manage optical and broadband access infrastructure in North America TL1 is used in input and output messages that pass between Operations Systems OSs and Network Elements NEs Using the test access management tool on your instrument you can establish a connection to an NE then issue TL1 commands to configure the NE remotely or monitor activity TOH Tr
61. Loop back testing 168 Loop back terminology Local unit Loop back unit Terminate mode Loop back mode If your instruments are configured and optioned to do so you can use two Transport Modules or other JDSU compliant Ethernet test instruments to transmit Ethernet IP or TCP UDP traffic from one instrument and then loop the traffic through a second instrument back to the sending instrument By transmitting and then looping traffic back you are essentially emulating a longer circuit on the network Before looping back traffic it is important to understand the terminology and concepts in the following sections The following terms are used to explain loop back testing in this chapter Used in this chapter to refer to the traffic originating unit which is always placed in Terminate mode Used in this chapter to refer to the unit that loops received traffic back to the traffic originating local unit If the loop back unit is capable of generating traffic place it in terminate mode when you want to loop traffic through to the transmitter If the loop back unit is not capable of generating traffic it is a loop back only unit place it into loop back mode Mode used for loop back applications when both the local unit and the loop back unit are capable of generating traffic Also used by local unit to generate traffic that will be looped back by a unit that is only capable of looping received traffic back In this scenario
62. MDIX Status result Fault Type result After running the Cable Diagnostics tool the screen lists results for one of the following states Active 10M or 100M link If a 10M or 100M link is established the MDI MDIX status see MDI or MDIX Status result on page 294 is reported Active 1G electrical link If a 1G electrical link is established the pair status polarity and pair skew for each MDI pair is reported See Skew ns result on page 295 Polarity result on page 295 and Skew ns result on page 295 Inactive link If the link is inactive the unit indicates the type of fault and the fault s relative distance from the tester see Distance m result on page 295 Results associated with cable diagnostics are also provided in the L2 Link Stats result category see L2 Link Stats results on page 296 The MDI MDIX Status result indicates the resolved wiring MDI or MDT x of the near end unit s RJ 45 jack For example if the far end can not auto configure its interface in other words the wiring is fixed this result can help you deter mine whether a straight through or crossover cable is being used or the MDI MDIX wiring of the far end port You must know the fixed MDI MDIX status of the far end port to determine the type of cable using the near end MDI MDIX Status result For example if you know that the far end port is fixed at MDI and the near end port detects MDIX
63. Manual Histograms about 5 viewing 5 HTTP Throughput test automated 266 Incrementing MAC addresses 156 VLAN IDs 156 Interface settings Ethernet 41 74 Fibre Channel 199 IP Video 184 IP Config Status results 315 IP test results IP Config Status 315 L3 Config Status 315 L3 Filter Counts 314 L3 Filter Stats 313 L3 Link Counts 313 L3 Link Stats 312 IP testing capturing packets 87 191 classic RFC 2544 test 237 filter settings 79 81 monitoring traffic 86 packet settings 77 80 Ping 83 running Traceroute 85 traffic loads 58 transmitting 82 IP Video testing action buttons 179 filter settings 184 graphical user interface about 179 interface settings 184 layered results view 180 LEDs 179 populating address book 183 typical encapsulation illustrated 178 understanding MPEG streams 178 IPTV encapsulation illustrated 178 J J Connect about 33 application names 35 discovering instruments 34 discovering JDSU instruments 33 observing instrument details 37 prerequisites 34 JDSU Discovery 33 discoverable instruments 33 discovering instruments 34 observing details for an instrument 37 prerequisites 34 refresh soft key 35 sorting instruments 35 Jitter testing packet 101 J Profiler about 125 test results 329 J Proof testing See Transparency testing 69 J QuickCheck running before RFC 2544 244 Index L L2 BERT Stats results 307 L2 Filtered Counts results 305 L2 Filtered Stats resu
64. Manual 105 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Measuring one way delay 3 Connect the 1PPS signal between the GPS receiver and the instrument using the BNC to SMA cable from OUT B on the GPS receiver to the EXT REF connector on your instrument as shown in Figure 25 DB9 USB Optional GPS monitoring using Spectrum TM 4 Control SW on PC RJ45 DB9 Right side view Top view Figure 25 GPS Connection Diagram MTS5800 Optional Connect the DB9 to USB serial cable from the Control Port on the GPS receiver to a PC 4 Power ON the instrument and verify it is synchronized with GPS time by checking the GPS Sync and 1 PPS Sync LEDs When synchronized the LEDs will be illuminated Time Source ToD The 1PPS minimum pulse width that can be detected is 20uS The GPS receivers are now connected for OWD testing Step 2 Measuring one way Two synchronized instruments are required to measure one way delay On delay both instruments you select a traffic application for the line rate of the circuit you are testing and you configure the traffic to carry an Acterna payload This payload carries frames with time stamps enabling the receiving instrument to calculate the delay To measure one way delay 1 On each instrument use the Test Menu to do one of the following Select the layer 2 or layer 3 traffic terminate test application for the interface you are testing refer to Table 7 on page 25 through Table 8 on pa
65. OAM service and link layer testing 0 00 eee eee eee 108 Service layer features 0 0 0 cee tee 108 Link layer features 2 c coe race bee aie rate heated ea te de ees ae 109 Specifying OAM settings 0 0 ee eee 109 Turning AIS or RDI analysis ON 0 0000 eee 114 Sending LBM or LTM messages 0 0c eee eee eee 114 MAC in MAC testing 20 c cece 114 Understanding MAC in MAC test results 004 115 Understanding the MAC in MAC LEDs 004 115 Configuring layer 2 MAC in MAC tests 0 00 0 e ee eee 115 Specifying interface settings 0 0 cee ee eee 115 Specifying Ethernet frame settings 20 0000 115 Specifying Ethernet filter settings for MiM traffic 118 Specifying OAM settingSs 0 2 0 cee 120 Specifying traffic load settings 0 0 c eee eee 120 Transmitting layer 2 MiM traffic 2 au ee 120 Inserting errors or pause frames 1 6 0 eee 121 Measuring round trip delay and packetjitter 121 Measuring service disruption time 00 00 e eee ee eee 121 Monitoring layer 2 MiM traffic 2 2 0 0 ee eee 121 Synchronous Ethernet testing 0 000 eee eee eee eee 122 Transmitting and analyzing PTP 1588 traffic 122 About PTR a ea a aaa aa o a ts bearers 123 Arayana PTP traffic eres taS r Eran E DAE PERE tcp EEANN 123 Discovering traffic us
66. Random Par Random Total Mbps 0 1696 v OK XM cancel Figure 44 Define Triple Play Services dialog box 4 Inthe Voice section do the following a Select the Simulated Voice type a stream of Acterna test packets b Specify the Codec sampling rate in ms and the number of calls to emulate as described in step 4 on page 163 IMPORTANT The audio will work properly only when the Codec type matches on the receiving and transmitting unit Verify the Ethernet and IP settings on the Voice tab Select the Results soft key to return to the test result menu Select the Play Audio action button to transmit the audio stream oN OO Verify the audio by doing the following Observe the Frame Detect LED for Sim Voice It illuminates when audio packets are received Use a headset to listen to the audio 166 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Loop back Testing This chapter provides information on looping back Ethernet IP TCP UDP and multiple streams of traffic Topics discussed in this chapter include the following About Loop back testing on page 168 Specifying a unit identifier on page 172 Using LLB to loop received traffic back to the local unit on page 172 Using Loop Up to initiate a loop back from the local unit on page 174 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 167 Chapter 7 Loop back Testing About Loop back testing About
67. SLA SLA Thresholds Figure 79 SAMComplete SLA Burst screen Do the following a d Specify whether burst testing will be performed by selecting the radio button next to Yes or No If No is selected go to step 10 If Yes is selected enter the CBS in kB where kB 1000 bytes Select whether to run the Committed Burst Size or the CBS Policing test by selecting the radio button next to either To further refine the SLA Burst test select the Set Advanced Burst Setting link If desired select the Ignore Pause frames checkbox If CBS Policing was selected specify the desired and tolerance to specify Pass values from expected Select the BACK button left green arrow to return to the SLA Burst screen Select Next the green arrow 10 The SLA Performance page appears a Specify the desired Threshold values Each service may have its own values Frame Loss Ratio The maximum ratio allowed of frames lost to total frames Frame Delay The maximum allowed average OWD delay latency for all throughput values Delay Variation The maximum allowed frame delay variation for all throughput values 11 Select Next the green arrow The Test Controls page appears 258 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Choosing SAMComplete tests Chapter 10 Automated Testing SAMComplete a Specify the Service Configuration and Service Performance settings Number of steps below CIR Th
68. TCP Host applications Filters When running the Wirespeed application filter settings apply to the background streams they do not impact the TCP connections Traffic off load You can determine whether the proper CoS QoS settings are specified in the network and verify proper prioritization of background streams by offloading up to four concurrent streams of traffic for analysis Iperf compatibility You can use the TCP Wirespeed application with Iperf to sectionalize TCP performance issues and demonstrate to the customer that CPE equipment may be the root cause of performance problems J Mentor data analysis When running the TCP Wirespeed application from 1 Gigabit Optical Ethernet interfaces you can capture the data and then analyze it using the J Mentor application provided on your instrument The TCP Wirespeed application is not available for 100 Mbps optical circuits 802 3 frames or Q in Q encapsulated traffic IPv6 traffic is also not supported in this release muy NOTE TCP connections If you issue a loopup command to an instrument that is actively running the TCP Wirespeed application the command tears down any TCP connec tions that were established Pressing Restart while running the application will not tear down the TCP Connections it will simply refresh your test results To run the TCP Wirespeed application 1 2 Verify that you are not running any other tests If you haven t already done so use
69. Take decoupled SD measurements exclusive of other measurements as the decoupling has varying affects on other measurements Disable the decoupling before making any other measurements or analysis Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 107 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing OAM service and link layer testing To measure service disruption time 1 9 On both units use the Test Menu to select the layer 2 or layer 3 traffic terminate test application for the interface you are testing refer to Table 7 on page 25 through Table 8 on page 25 for a list of applications Configure the traffic originating unit to transmit a constant load of traffic For instructions on configuring a constant load of traffic to transmit to another instrument see Transmitting a constant load on page 58 Select Results to return to the Main screen Connect the near and far end units to the circuit under test Blinking LEDs on the connector panel indicate which connectors to use for your test If you are testing on an optical circuit on the traffic originating unit select the Laser button On the instruments verify that the green Signal Present Sync Acquired and Link Active LEDs are illuminated On the traffic originating unit start traffic If desired Enable Decouple Tx and RX Laser Actions Errors OAM Capture Start Loop Loop LLB Pause Frame Reset Service Traffic Up Down Insert Disruption Test Tx and Fix Th
70. Test Access Management TAM If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so you can now use it to remotely log into and provision network elements such as switches and routers from a Mobility Switching Center MSC You can also use your instrument to emulate a router on the network end of the Ethernet Transport Service ETS run an RFC 2554 script to put a Network Interface Device NID in loop back mode transmit traffic then analyze looped back traffic to determine link characteristics such as throughput and latency For details see The TrueSpeed test has been run on page 278 of Chapter 10 Automated Testing Stacked VLAN You can configure transmit and analyze L2 traffic carrying SVLAN and CVLAN tags per IEEE 802 1ad to verify that your network can support and prioritize traffic for multiple customers without conflicts You can also specify a user defined TPID for the service provider when transmitting and filtering stacked VLAN encapsulated traffic For details see Configuring stacked VLAN traffic on page 48 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 23 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing About Ethernet and IP testing Trigger support The instrument supports packet capture based on a trig gering event For details see Capturing packets based on a trigger on page 91 Filter on byte pattern The instrument supports filtering on a 16 byte pattern For details see Filter
71. Threshold errored frames Errored Frame Period Event Event Window total frames Event Threshold errored frames Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing OAM service and link layer testing Parameters Specify the duration of the frame window in terms of the number of 100 ms period intervals For example 2 indicates that the window spans a 200 ms period inter val Specify the number of detected errored frames required within the window speci fied for an error to be declared Specify the duration of the window in terms of frames Specify the number of frame errors that must occur in the window to declare an error Errored Frame Second Summary Event Event Window 100ms intervals Event Threshold errored sec Specify the duration of the period in terms of the 100 ms interval Specify the number of errored frame sec onds that must occur in the window to declare an error 6 To specify service OAM settings do the following a In the left pane under S OAM select CCM and then specify the following settings Setting Continuity Checking LOC Threshold messages CCM Rate CCM Type non MAC in MAC applications only Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Value Select one of the following On Select On if you intend to test for loss of continuity LOC Off Select Off if you do not intend to test for loss of continuity Specify the number of messages that must
72. UDP results on page 289 Graphical results on page 330 Histogram results on page 331 Event Log results on page 331 Time test results on page 332 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 283 Chapter 11 Test Results About test results About test results After you connect the instrument to the circuit and press the START STOP button results for the configured test accumulate and appear in the Result Windows in the center of the screen The result groups and categories avail able depend on their applicability to the test you configured For example if you select configure and start a SONET test application 10 Gigabit Ethernet LAN categories are not available because they are not applicable when running a SONET application A number of enhancements have been made to the test result layout for details see Step 5 Viewing test results on page 4 The following sections describe the test results for each of the categories Summary Status results 284 When running most applications the Summary Status category displays a large ALL SUMMARY RESULTS OK message on a green background if no errors anomalies alarms or defects have been detected see Figure 94 Summary Status ALL SUMMARY RESULTS Figure 94 ALL SUMMARY RESULTS OK message If errors anomalies alarms or defects have been detected the background is red and the errored re
73. VLAN ID and Source MAC Address Both VLAN IDs and the source MAC address will be considered The traffic does not need to carry a VLAN tag to be included in the profile VLAN ID Source MAC and Destination MAC Similar to VLAN ID and Source MAC Address but also considers the destination MAC address Use this setting if you want to observe MAC to MAC conver sations VLAN ID and Source IP Address Both VLAN IDs and the source IP address will be considered The traffic does not need to carry a VLAN tag but it must have a source IP address to be included in the profile VLAN ID and well known 0 1023 TCP UDP port Both VLAN IDs and the TCP UDP port number will be considered The traffic does not need to carry a VLAN tag but it must be TCP or UPD traffic to or from a well known port to be included in the profile Use this setting if you want to see which services are running well known ports typically identify services MPLS Labels with VLAN ID Both MPLS labels and VLAN IDs will be considered The traffic does not need to carry a VLAN tag to be included in the profile PW Pseudowire Labels with VLAN ID Both MPLS labels and PW labels along with VLAN IDs will be considered The traffic does not need to carry a VLAN tag to be included in the profile Source IP Destination IP Source Port and Destination Port All four parameters will be considered These parameters form the two ends of a TCP or UDP conversatio
74. VLAN and Q in Q traffic 169 VPLS traffic 169 MAC addresses incrementing for multiple streams 156 MAC in MAC testing See MiM testing MDI MDIX Pair Status result 294 Measurements cable diagnostic 31 expanding and collapsing 5 Measuring IP packet jitter 101 packet jitter 101 round trip delay See Delay service disruption time See Service disruption time Messages D channel decode LAPD unnumbered frames 338 Messages PPPoE 77 MGCP defined 186 MiM testing about results 289 applications 25 26 configuring tests 115 filter settings 118 frame settings 115 inserting errors 121 inserting pause frames 121 LEDs 115 measuring delay 121 OAM settings 120 test results 115 traffic loads 120 transmitting traffic 120 Monitoring 3 072G optical 9 17 Fibre Channel traffic 208 layer 2 traffic Ethernet 64 122 layer 2 traffic Fibre Channel 208 layer 3 traffic IP 86 MPEG video transport streams understanding 178 MPLS testing encapsulation settings 49 74 loop back settings 170 overview 28 specifying labels 43 184 MPLS TP testing results 299 302 running 64 69 Multiple Streams testing about test results 138 149 applications 148 capturing packets 87 191 enabling streams 152 features and capabilities 146 graphical results changing properties 150 graphical results viewing 138 150 incrementing MAC addresses 156 incrementing VLAN IDs 156 LEDs 138 148 looping back streams 165 Pipe display 148 runnin
75. a Select or confirm the tests to be run b Select Next the green arrow 6 The Utilization window appears to specify the bandwidth parameters the Bandwidth Unit and the Max Bandwidth can be selected To choose whether the bandwidth units used for the tests are chosen from Layer 1 or Layer 2 make the selection in the Bandwidth Unit drop down box Then enter the Max Bandwidth in Mbps in the entry box Upstream and or Downstream for non symmetric test To further refine the Utilization configuration select Set advanced Utili zation settings and then select Allow True 100 Traffic if desired Select Back to return to previous screen Select Next the green arrow 7 The Frame Lengths screen appears to allow the definition or confirmation of the frame or packet length parameters a Select whether the length type of Frames or Packets b Select the number of frame or packet lengths to be tested by checking the appropriate number of boxes and then entering a value for each checked Upstream and or Downstream depending on the symmetry selection Frame or Packet length to be tested c Select Next the green arrow 8 If selected the Throughput Test screen appears to allow selection or confirmation of the throughput parameters a Select or confirm whether the RFC 2544 Standard or the JDSU Enhanced zeroing in process is to be used b Confirm or define the Measurement Accuracy from the drop down box values c Select Next the gr
76. a stream as having a Burst load type automatically changes any other stream defined as Burst to the Constant Load Type To configure the load unit on a stream with burst load type 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the Multiple Streams test application for the interface you are testing refer to Table 16 on page 148 Select the Setup soft KEY Select the All Streams tab Verify that a burst Stream has been specified in the Stream Selection portion of the window If not specified select the desired stream from the drop down list in Burst Stream Select the tab of the individual stream specified as being the Burst Stream Select a Load Unit from the drop down box accessed by clicking the up down arrows at the end of the Load Unit field Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 153 Chapter 6 Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing Multiple Streams testing Specifying the load unit for multiple streams Specifying common traffic characteristics for multiple 154 streams If you selected Burst Time and Information Rate a Enter a desired Burst Time b Enter the desired units for the Burst time If you selected Bytes and Information Rate a Enter the desired Burst Kbytes Actual Kbytes will be recalculated and will display in the window b The Information Rate will display based on the value entered when configuring the individual stream If you selected a Multiple Strea
77. analysis take less time A dense file takes longer to open IMPORTANT Wireshark Support JDSU is distributing Wireshark on the instrument under the GNU General Public License version 2 It is not a JDSU product For technical support go to the product website at www wireshark org To analyze captured packets 1 On the Capture toolbar select the Wireshark action key The Open Capture File dialog box appears 2 Navigate to and select the file you want to analyze The Wireshark splash screen appears then a small dialog box appears while the application loads the packets in the file you selected Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Capturing packets for analysis 3 After the packets are loaded a screen similar to the one in Figure 20appears Hx 8 2 as F ZJE e Save As Chse Refresh Print Find Back Forward Jump to Top Bottom Cobrize Zoom In Spanning tree for bridges STP Conf Root 100 00 22 be ea fc 34 Cost 3004 29 3 191649550 JdsuFran_10 00 3c Broadcast ARP Who has 10 10 52 2 Tell 10 10 52 192 30 3 202207650 10 10 52 2 224 0 0 2 HSRP Hello state Active b Frame 26 74 bytes on wire 74 bytes captured b Ethernet ll Sre Cisco_72 5c 00 00 22 be 72 5c 00 Dst IPv4mcast_00 00 0a 01 00 5e 00 00 0a D Internet Protocol Sre 10 10 52 2 10 10 52 2 Dst 224 0 0 10 224 0 0 10 b Cisco EIGRP 0000 01 00 5e 00 00 0a0
78. and downstream circuits at different line rates you must run an asymmetric RFC test Two JDSU Ethernet test instruments must be used at each end of the circuit One test instrument operates as the master instrument and executes the RFC test The other instrument operates as a slave instrument and is controlled remotely by the master instrument Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 231 Chapter 10 Automated Testing Automated RFC 2544 Throughput test JDSU zeroing in method 232 The throughput test is used to determine the highest possible bandwidth at which no frames are lost The JDSU zeroing in method functions as follows Attempting Phase The test starts transmitting traffic at the Maximum Bandwidth then waits 3 seconds The test does a restart then waits 5 seconds The test calculates the average layer 2 bandwidth utilized L2 Avg Util Ifthe Bandwidth Accuracy is 1 and the L2 Avg Util is less than 99 98 the throughput is the integer value of the measurement Other wise throughput is 100 Ifthe Bandwidth Accuracy is 1 or 01 For 1Gig the test increases the load 3 over the L2 Avg Util measured above For 10 Mb we increase the load 30 over the L2 Avg Util measured above For 100 Mb we increase the load 3 over the L2 Avg Util measured above or to 100 if the above increase would exceed 100 Ifthe Bandwidth Accuracy is 1 or 01
79. and loop back tests ATP Listen IP Address Specify the destination IP address carried in the if ATP Listen IP Type is ATP traffic that you want to analyze User Defined NOTE If your unit has been looped up by another unit the ATP Listen IP Address will automatically be populated for you Listen Port Service Type To analyze ATP traffic with a specific service type select the type The ATP Listen Port will automatically be assigned for you To analyze ATP traffic with a service type that is not pre defined select User Defined ATP Listen Port Specify the port number carried in the ATP traffic if Listen Port Service that you want to analyze Type is User Defined Source Port Select a a pre defined port number or select User Defined to enter a different number Destination Port Select a a pre defined port number or select User Defined to enter a different number Data Select one of the following Acterna To transmit packets that contain a sequence number and time stamp so that lost packets round trip delay and jitter can be cal culated select Acterna and then specify the byte value that will be used to fill the rest of the payload using a 1 byte hexadecimal for mat Fill Byte To transmit packets with payloads populated with a specific pattern of bytes select Fill Byte and then specify the byte value using a 1 byte hexadecimal format 4 Ifyou need to specify other settings for the test select t
80. buffer for example 128 MB with small packets for example 46 byte ping packets it will take a long time to fill the buffer If you configure the capture for a small buffer with large packets it will take much less time To capture packets on the instrument 1 Launch a single or multiple stream layer 2 Ethernet layer 3 IP or layer 4 TCP UDP application 2 If you haven t already done so on the Main screen select the Capture tool bar then enable the capture feature 3 Select the Setup soft key and then do one of the following Specify the settings required to filter received traffic for the type you want to capture and analyze Clear all of the filters to capture all received traffic For details refer to Specifying filter settings on page 89 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Capturing packets based ona trigger Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Capturing packets for analysis 4 Select the Capture setup tab and then specify the following settings Setting Parameter Capture buffer size MB Specify a size ranging from 1 to 256 MB ina 1 MB increment The default buffer size is 16 MB Capture frame slicing If you want to capture the first 64 or 128 bytes of each frame and ignore the rest of the frame select 64 or 128 otherwise select None If you select None the default the entire frame is captured When capture buffer is If you want to overwrite the oldest packets with
81. by no frame transmissions during the specified gap interval See Figure 14 Gap between bursts 100 Bandwidth Time _ Figure 14 Bursty traffic When you configure bursty traffic if you are running a standard Ethernet appli cation you can specify the burst load as a percentage of the duty cycle by specifying the burst and gap intervals in units of time or bytes and Information Rate IR If the burst load is specified as a percentage of the duty cycle along with the number of frames per burst the instrument automatically calculates the burst gap NOTE If you configure a bursty load of traffic with a low percentage of the line rate duty cycle and a large number of frames per bust it may appear that traffic transmission has stopped periodically This is because the calculated inter val gap between bursts will be longer A higher percentage of the line rate and a lower number of frames per burst results in a shorter interval gap To configure the instrument to transmit bursts of traffic 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the test appli cation for the interface you are testing Refer to Table 7 on page 25 through Table 8 on page 25 for a list of layer 2 and layer 3 applications Table 15 on page 129 lists layer 4 applications Select the Setup soft key and then select the Traffic tab In Load Type select Burst 4 In Load Unit select one of the following Bytes
82. characteristics For example if you are running a Layer 3 Triple Play application you can setup all voice streams to use Q in Q encapsulation all SDTV or HDTV video streams to use VLAN tags and all data streams to use no encapsulation You can also transmit an actual audio stream pre recorded voice tone or voice conversation to test the audio quality of a triple play network with specific traffic levels before deployment This release supports the Triple Play applications listed in Table 18 Table 18 Triple Play applications Circuit Application 10 100 1000 Layer 2 Triple Play Layer 3 Triple Play 1GigE Optical Layer 2 Triple Play Layer 3 Triple Play 10GigE LAN Layer 2 Triple Play Layer 3 Triple Play Test Mode Terminate Terminate Terminate Terminate Terminate Terminate When you select a Triple Play application the module provides LEDs in the panel for each type of traffic transmitted in each enabled stream see Figure 39 Figure 39 Triple Play LEDs Layer 3 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 6 Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing Triple Play testing Streams pipe Triple Play Figure 40 illustrates the Streams Pipe Display for Layer 3 Triple Play streams streams View Overview Addressing Traffic Loads VLAN Configure Triple Play Services Figure 40 Streams Pipe Display Layer 3 Triple Play streams You can start and stop traffic direct
83. complete The report will list each URL the number of times you visited it during the test the size of the site in bytes and the minimum maximum and average rate in Mbps that it took to connect to the site Automated TCP Throughput tests If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so you can use it to run the TCP Throughput test This test is used to establish a TCP connection to a peer and then estimate the maximum TCP throughput on a link for a variety of window sizes ranging from 8 Kbps to 64 Kbps when running up to 10000 parallel sessions and factoring in the average delay The window size repre sents the maximum number of bytes that can be transmitted before waiting to receive an acknowledgement that the receiving port is receiving frames packets For example the test may show that with a current average delay of 10 25 ms the maximum possible throughput for one TCP session with a window size of 8 Kbps would be 0 098 Mbps The average delay value is obtained from the measurement provided in the L2 Link Stats result category Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 267 Chapter 10 Automated Testing TrueSpeed Test To run the TCP Throughput test 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the Layer 3 or Layer 4 Traffic application for the circuit you are testing see Launching a single automated test on page 225 and connect the instrument to the circuit For details
84. delay on a 10 Gigabit circuit in RTD Setup indicate whether you want to measure delay with a high degree of precision or a low degree of precision In most instances you should select High Precision Low Delay NOTE You must select an Acterna payload to measure round trip delay and count lost packets For details see Measuring round trip delay on page 207 BERT To transmit frames with payloads filled with the BERT pattern you specify select BERT and then select a pattern Various pseudo random and Fixed patterns are available The Pseudo random patterns continue from one frame into the next The fixed patterns restart each frame such that the frame will always start with the beginning of the pattern If you set the BERT Pattern to User Defined in the User Pattern field specify the 32 bit fixed pattern that will be repeated in the payload NOTE The E1 Tester and Transport Module transmit the bytes in user defined pat terns from left to right the FST 2802 transmits the bytes in user defined pat terns right to left For example a user defined hexadecimal pattern of 12345678 populates the frame as 12345678 Using the same hexadecimal pattern the FST 2802 would populate the frame as 78563412 4 In Frame Length select one of the listed frame lengths or select User Defined and then enter a specific frame length in the USER Frame Length field 5 Under Frame Channel Details specify the following settings for
85. do the following a Ifyou are testing a 1GigE optical circuit select the Actions tab and then press the Start BERT Pattern button This is not necessary if you are using the Delay pattern or testing a 10GigE LAN or WAN circuit b Verify that the green L1 Pattern Sync LED illuminates If you are testing a 1GigE optical circuit and the LED is not illuminated stop transmitting the pattern from the other instrument and then transmit it again The LED will illuminate 8 Ata minimum observe the test results in the following categories Summary Error Stats Layer 1 BER testing is complete When running the L1 BERT application your LEDs may indicate that you have L1 Pattern Sync without word sync The word sync status is indicated on your unit using a red Syne Acquired LED if word sync was obtained then lost or an extinguished LED if word sync was never obtained since starting your test This is usually due to a temporary loss of signal or word sync when receiving an L1 pattern that does not contain Ethernet compliant link characters for example IDLE To resolve this stop transmitting the L1 pattern momentarily to allow the receiver to regain sync and then begin transmitting the pattern again The exception is when using the Delay using any pattern other than Delay If this occurs be certain to determine why the signal or word sync was lost temporarily Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 39 Chapte
86. experiencing extraneous bit errors or sync losses If you continue to see BERT bit errors after performing a test restart this indicates a problem with the circuit under test ATP Fill Pattern can be used if you do not wish to analyze BERT data Byte sequence The T BERD MTS 5800 transmits the bytes in user defined patterns from left to right the FST 2802 transmits the bytes in user defined patterns right to left For example a user defined hexadecimal pattern of 12345678 populates the frame as 12345678 Using the same hexadecimal pattern the FST 2802 would populate the frame as 78563412 Consider this when testing using the FST 2802 To specify Ethernet frame settings 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the test appli cation for the interface you are testing Refer to Table 7 on page 25 through Table 8 on page 25 for a list of layer 2 and layer 3 applications Table 15 on page 129 lists layer 4 applications Select the Setup soft key and then select the Ethernet tab In Encapsulation select one of the following None If you do not want to encapsulate transmitted frames select None VLAN If you want to transmit VLAN tagged frames select VLAN and then refer to Configuring VLAN tagged traffic on page 47 Q in Q If you want to transmit VLAN stacked Q in Q frames select Q in Q and then refer to Configuring Q in Q traffic on page 48 Stacked VLAN If you want to t
87. filtered VLAN frames as defined in IEEE 802 p q since the test was started including errored frames A count of filtered VPLS frames since the test was started including errored frames Appears in the L2 SP Link Counts category A count of filtered 802 1d spanning tree frames since frame detection after the last test start or restart A count of transmitted ATP frames at Layer 2 The number of filtered Ethernet unicast frames since the last test restart Count of the number of filtered error free frames since the test was started Table 42 describes the Transparency results associated with the loop back of control frames for various protocols To view the Transparency results launch the Layer 2 Traffic application and then run the transparency test see Using Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results J Proof to verify layer 2 transparency on page 69 Table 42 Transparency results Test Result Description Name Displays the name specified when you configured the test frame Tx A count of the number of test frames for a particular test frame type transmitted by the instru ment since the last test start or restart Rx A count of the number of test frames for a particular test frame type received by the instrument since the last test start or restart Status Displays one of the following N A Indicates that a particular test frame
88. following a If you would like the test to continue when a failure occurs un check the Stop on failure box b Select the Start button The test begins As the tests are run the status display bars will show the results of each test In each case you may view detailed results of that test by selecting the magnifying glass icon when it appears on the status bar While the tests are running the status panel near the top of the screen displays a blue progress bar and indicates the estimated time remaining to complete the testing 260 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 10 Automated Testing SAMComplete After the test finishes the pass fail results appear green check mark or red X on each of the tests The status panel near the top of the screen displays an overall OK PASS or FAIL result NOTE To switch between the test and the Setup panel on the user interface click the Go To button at the top of the screen and then click the Results button in the dialog This function is intended allow you to verify the settings Note that the RFC2544 button is yellow to indicate it has been launched You should not change the settings during a test as you may get undesired results To return to the test click the RFC2544 button c Once the testing is completed select Next the green arrow 3 The Test Complete page appears What do you want to do next Create Report Go ij Repeat Test
89. following issues and behavior before enabling automatic traffic generation This is not a global setting This setting does not affect all Ethernet LAN IP and TCP UDP applications you must enable automatic traffic genera tion for each individual application After you enable the setting for a partic ular application it will remain enabled until you disable it Changing setups while tests are running Your unit is designed to handle traffic transmission appropriately when you change key setups while a test is running In some instances if you change key setups while running a test traffic stops temporarily as a result of the changed setup and then starts again In other instances changing a setup stops traffic entirely until you actively start it again Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Enabling the feature Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Discovering another JDSU test instrument using J Connect This is still the case when automatic traffic generation is enabled f you change a setup that causes the unit to stop transmitting traffic entirely you must actively start it again by pressing the Start Traffic action button Loop back testing Ensure that your unit is not placed in loop back mode by verifying that the LLB action button is gray If you intend to issue a command to loop up another unit make certain automatic traffic genera tion is not enabled on the far end unit If it is not disa
90. for a particular stream or streams do the following Select the tab corresponding to the stream b Select the Traffic sub tab c In Load Type select Ramp and then specify the time step in seconds and the load step in Mbps or as a percentage of the line rate For details see Transmitting a ramped load on page 60 NOTE When configuring a ramped load of traffic for a stream the trig gers used to stop the ramp are not available d Repeat step a through step c for each ramped stream of traffic and then proceed to step 4 Select the Streams Pipe soft key and then select Configure Streams The Load Distribution screen appears Do one of the following If you are transmitting a constant load of traffic for every enabled stream and you want to distribute the load evenly across the streams select Auto Distribute The module automatically calculates the load for each stream Ifyou are transmitting one or more ramped streams of traffic or a combination of constant and ramped loads enter the load for each enabled stream Select OK to store the loads and return to the Streams Pipe dialog box If you do not need to specify other settings select the Results soft key to return to the Main screen The traffic load is specified If a burst signal is necessary in a multiple streams signal any stream may be defined to carry that bursty signal Only one stream may be defined as carrying a bursty signal Defining
91. for the circuit you are testing see Launching a single automated test on page 225 and connect the instrument to the circuit For details refer to the Getting Started Manual that shipped with your instrument or upgrade Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 263 Chapter 10 Automated Testing Automated FTP Throughput tests 3 Specify the settings required to initialize the link see Specifying Ethernet frame settings on page 43 and to establish a connection to the network see Layer 2 testing on page 40 and Layer 3 testing on page 73 4 Launch the VLAN test see Launching a single automated test on page 225 and then wait for the VLAN ID Ranges screen to appear Depending on the number of processes you have running this may take several seconds 5 Select the Add Range button at the bottom of the screen The Specify a Range of VLAN IDs screen appears 6 In Beginning of range enter the ID for the first VLAN in the range to be tested 7 In End of range enter the ID for the last VLAN in the range to be tested and then select OK to return to the Range of VLAN IDs screen 8 In Time per VLAN s enter the number of seconds to transmit loopback and receive frames for each VLAN in the range The test period can range from 5 seconds to 604 800 seconds 1 full week 9 Torun the test select Start 10 The VLAN Test dialog box appears providing the status for each test Success or FA
92. frame and IP settings you can transmit ping request packets to verify connectivity To transmit ping packets 1 Use the Test Menu to select the layer 3 Ping test application for the inter face you are testing refer to Table 7 on page 25 through Table 8 on page 25 for a list of applications 2 Select the Setup soft key and then select the Interface tab to specify settings that control the Ethernet interface see Specifying interface settings on page 41 3 Select the Ethernet Frame tab to specify settings that define the frame characteristics of the transmitted traffic and then select the IP tab to specify settings that characterize the ping packets see Specifying IP settings for Ping and Traceroute testing on page 83 Press Results to return to the Main screen Connect the instrument to the circuit If you are testing an optical interface select the Laser button N Oo Oo fF Verify that the green Signal Present Sync Acquired and Link Active LEDs are illuminated 8 On the Main screen select the Ping button to transmit the packet or packets 9 Ata minimum observe the ping and IP configuration status test results You have transmitted ping request packets Before you run the traceroute application to determine where problems in the network are occurring you specify the interface settings frame characteristics of the traffic and settings that control the traceroute application such as the source and de
93. frame characteristics of the transmitted traffic such as an 802 3 frame type or a VLAN ID and priority see Specifying Ethernet frame settings on page 43 If you are running the test with layer 3 Ethernet IP traffic select the Ethernet tab to enable or disable ARP and then select the IP tab to specify settings that define the packet characteristics of the transmitted traffic such as the destination IP address see Specifying transmitted IPv4 packet settings on page 77 If running two 5800 instruments end to end keep in mind that the instru ment s PPPoE server is a demo server and does not support full server functionality Thus round trip delay cannot be measured To measure round trip delay use a network server Ifyou are running the test with layer 4 traffic select the TCP UDP tab to specify the listen port settings and indicate whether you want to transmit TCP or UDP traffic see Specifying TCP UDP settings for transmitted traffic on page 132 2 Verify the following settings Payload analysis is ON for your current test application You can not run the RFC 2544 test when the module is configured to analyze live traffic Traffic is not VPLS or MPLS encapsulated You can not run the RFC 2544 test with VPLS or MPLS encapsulated traffic The module is not configured to run a timed test You can not run the RFC 2544 test during a timed test 3 Select the Results soft key to return to th
94. frame loss even with the overage percentage the test fails Max Load Display Calculated from the values of CIR and EIR and changes based upon policing selection it is the maximum rate of traffic to be generated If policing is not selected Max Load is CIR EIR If policing is selected Max Load is CIR 1 25xEIR or when EIR is less than 20 of CIR Max Load is 1 25xCIR EIR M Tolerance or delta in traffic rate which is allowed to be received above CIR EIR before declaring a policing failure For some applica tions the desired M value is specified on the SLA Throughput page For Multistream or Truespeed applications M will be entered ona following page labeled SLA Policing Specify the desired value for M If it is desired to transmit the burst at a true 100 load in those circuits that can handle the signal select Set Advanced Traffic Settings and then check the Allow True 100 traffic checkbox Select the left green arrow to return to SLA Throughput screen Select Next the green arrow Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 257 Chapter 10 Automated Testing SAMComplete 9 The SLA Burst page appears If SLA Policing appears see discussion of M above in step 8 Set advanced Burst Settings SLA Bist Not Running Would you like to perform burst testing No Yes Burst Test Type Committed Burst Size CBS Policing MEF 34 CBS kB SLA SLA Throughput
95. group and then choose a category to view Error Stats Counts L1 Inband Protocol You are testing CPRI layer 2 Inserting errors Action buttons on the Main screen allow you to insert errors into the CPRI signal If you turn on a particular error insertion rate the error insertion continues even after you restart a test or change the test configuration To insert errors 1 If you are inserting errors select one of the following error types Code K30 7 BIT TSE 2 Do the following Specify the Insertion Style Single or Rate If you specified Rate select a rate 3 Press the Error Insert button Error or pause frame insertion starts If you are inserting errors at a particular rate the associated button turns yellow To stop insertion press the corre sponding button again Error insertion stops and the associated button turns gray Monitoring CPRI or OBSAI layer 1 If your instrument is optioned to do so you can monitor CPRI or layer 1 OBSAI links Ethernet IP TCP UDP Fibre Chan VoIP and Video Testing Manual 17 Chapter 3 CPRI OBSAI Testing Monitoring CPRI or OBSAI layer 1 To monitor CPRI or layer1 OBSAI 1 Using the Test Menu select a CPRI or OBSAI BERT Monitor Thru applica tion Protocol Frequenc Monaru q y Applications CPRI Layer 1 614 4M P1 Mon Thru P2 Mon Thru 1228 8M P1 Mon Thru P2 Mon Thru 2457 6M P1 Mon Thru P2 Mon Thru 3072 0M P1 Mon Thru P2 Mon Thru 9
96. have already been instantiated by routers on the network For details on specifying VPLS settings for transmitted traffic see Specifying Ethernet frame settings on page 43 For details on filtering received VPLS traffic see Specifying Ethernet filter settings on page 49 In a VPLS network customer sites are connected to the service provider network see Figure 7 on page 27 via PE routers Each PE router in the network is connected together using tunnels and can be connected to any other PE router residing on the network Each tunnel is comprised of multiple channels which are used to carry different types of service between the PE routers Key VPLS applications include End to end testing of VPLS networks For this application you configure your unit to transmit layer 2 traffic without a VPLS header to a second unit on the far end of the circuit The ingress provider edge PE router then adds the VPLS header and sends the encapsulated traffic through the network The egress PE router removes the tunnel label If the VPLS header also carries a VC label the router forwards the traffic to the appropriate interface Finally the far end unit analyzes the received layer 2 traffic Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 27 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing About Ethernet and IP testing 28 Configuring MPLS over Ethernet tests MPLS test applications PE router emulation For this application you con
97. help enable the actual voice conversation There are several standards for maintaining a phone call H 323 This is an umbrella recommendation from ITU which contains a large set of standards for multimedia communication over packet switched networks Session Initialization Protocol SIP SIP is a contender to H 323 being developed by IETF multiparty multimedia session control working group This alternative is lighter and easier to setup than the H 323 standard VoIP is transmitted using several layers of encapsulation A common example of how VoIP is transmitted is RTP gt UDP gt IP gt L2 data link protocol IPOE PPPoE Figure 45 is an example of the levels of encapsulation and where the voice sample is stored EE Network Dependent ij Always Present in VoIP ME implementation Manufacturer Dependent Figure 45 VoIP Encapsulation Ethernet IP TCP UDP Fibre Chan VoIP and Video Testing Manual Chapter 8 VoIP Testing Understanding the graphical user interface 3 Analog to digital data conversion compression and vice versa This involves sampling the audio and providing some digital outputs This is done using codecs Some examples of codecs used in VoIP are G 711 U law G 711 Alaw G 723 5 3K G 723 6 3K G 729A G 726 32K and G 722 64K Understanding the graphical user interface Action buttons Understanding the LED panel When you configure your module for testing the main screen provides four
98. key to specify the load unit see Enabling multiple streams on page 152 and to access the Load Distribution dialog box The Load Distribution dialog box is used to enable the streams that you want to transmit see Enabling multiple streams on page 152 and to specify the traffic load carried in each stream see Specifying the load type for all streams on page 152 148 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 6 Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing Multiple Streams testing Figure 34 illustrates the Streams Pipe display for layer 4 traffic streams View Overview Addressing Traffic Loads VLAN Rx Load Rx Source Rx Destination Tx Traffic x Load Tx Source Tx Destination Tx Listen Port Port Mode Port Port Port Streams Selection and Configuration EA Load Unit Percent Configure Streams Figure 34 Streams Pipe Display layer 4 streams You can start and stop traffic from the pipe display You can also specify the load unit and press the Configure Streams button to enable specific streams and specify the traffic load carried in each stream m NOTE When observing the pipe for layer 2 or layer 3 traffic the Frame Length or Packet Size displayed represents the maximum length or size received for each individual stream When transmitting multiple VPLS encapsulated streams the frame length on the Streams Pipe Display represents the customer frame length the lo
99. network see Layer 3 testing on page 73 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 10 Automated Testing Automated FTP Throughput tests 4 Launch the FTP Throughput test see Launching a single automated test on page 225 and then wait for the Current Script dialog box to appear Depending on the number of processes you have running this may take several seconds 5 Select or create a new configuration for your test Refer to Configuring the Enhanced RFC 2544 or Fibre Channel tests for detailed instructions After you select an existing configuration or create a new one the Config uration Summary dialog box appears listing the current settings for your test 6 To modify the settings press Next The Destination Configuration dialog box appears Specify the Server ID Login Name and Password required to establish a connection for the file transfer and then press Next The File Configuration dialog box appears 7 Select the sizes of the files that you want to transfer and then specify number of trials for the transfers Press Next to proceed to the Theoretical Calculation dialog box 8 To estimate the throughput you must specify a theoretical bandwidth utilized by the link delay and if applicable encapsulation for the simulated traffic Specify each of these values and then press Next The Configuration Summary dialog box appears listing the settings that you specified 9 Revi
100. network in one direction Measurements D Loopback Local Traffic is generated locally and measurements are taken locally 2 Downstream and Upstream Traffic is generated locally and remotely and measurements are taken in E Requires remote JDSU test instrument Connect Channel RFC 2544 L3 Network Settings Local Figure 59 Symmetric Connection Bidirectional Option Asymmetric used where upstream and downstream parameters in a bi directional test are individually specified and may be different RFC 2544 4 Symmetry Ee iettanning Throughput Symmetric Downstream and Upstream throughputs are the same o Remote Asymmetric Downstream and Upstream throughputs are different Unidirectional J T Only test the network in one direction Measurements ae Downstream and Upstream i Local Traffic is generated locally and remotely and measurements are taken in 2 each direction Oo Requires remote JDSU test instrument Connect Channel RFC 2544 L3 Network Settings Local Figure 60 Asymmetric Connection Option muy NOTE ARP must be enabled on both units if running a bi directional TrueSAM test in L3 or Wirespeed applications Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 215 Chapter 10 Automated Testing TrueSAM 216 Unidirectional test is only conducted in one direction May be either upstream or downstream REG 25
101. page 15 Layer 2 OBSAI testing on page 16 Inserting errors on page 17 Monitoring CPRI or OBSAI layer 1 on page 17 Ethernet IP TCP UDP Fibre Chan VoIP and Video Testing Manual 11 Chapter 3 CPRI OBSAI Testing About CPRI OBSAI testing About CPRI OBSAI testing Common Public Radio Interface CPRI protocol is used on LTE and 3G 4G wireless network deployments to implement a more cost effective distributive wireless base station architecture CPRI is the communication protocol used to synchronize control and transport data between the radio controller and remote radio heads The CPRI test is used to validate that the underlying dark fiber DWDM network is configured correctly for these new rates and meet CPRI service requirements Open Base Station Architecture Initiative Reference Point 3 OBSAI RP3 refers to the interface between the baseband and RF components within a cellular base station The OBSAI test is used to verify the CWDM links between the Central Office and the base station CPRI Layer 2 testing enables field technicians to verify that fiber installation is correctly performed and CPRI Link is functional before the Radio Equipment Controller at the central office is installed and connected to the overall system Layer 1 BER CPRI or OBSAI Testing 12 If your instrument is optioned to do so you can BERT over CPRI or OBSAI To BER test CPRI or OBSAI 1 Using the Test Menu selec
102. right facing green arrow at the bottom of the screen Configuring RFC 2544 within TrueSAM The next number of screens are used to configure the RFC2544 test if selected in step 6 of TrueSAM Initiation and communication configuration on page 212 1 The Symmetry screen appears a Select the Throughput type Symmetric used where only one set of throughput parameters are defined because upstream and downstream transmission is identical as the signal is being looped back to the source or transmitted both down stream and upstream RFC 2544 4 Symmetry Z Not Running Throughput Symmetric Downstream and Upstream throughputs are the same D Asymmetric Downstream and Upstream throughputs are different Unidirectional Only test the network in one direction Measurements Loopback Traffic is generated locally and measurements are taken locally Downstream and Upstream Traffic is generated locally and rernotely and measurements are taken in each direction Exit Next K3 Connect Channel RFC 2544 L3 Network Settings Local Figure 58 Symmetric Connection Loopback Option Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 10 Automated Testing TrueSAM RFC 2544 Symmetry Throughput Symmetric Downstream and Upstream throughputs are the same Remote D Asymmetric Downstream and Upstream throughputs are different D Unidirectional Only test the
103. settings on page 49 Specifying traffic load settings on page 58 Specifying transmitted IPv4 packet settings on page 77 Specifying IPv4 filter settings on page 79 Specifying TCP UDP settings for transmitted traffic on page 132 Specifying the frame or packet length for transmitted traffic on page 134 Filtering received traffic using layer 4 criteria on page 134 Press Results to return to the Main screen Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 5 TCP UDP Testing Inserting errors or pause frames 5 Select the Action tab and then select Start Traffic if you configured a constant or bursty load or Start Ramp if you configured a ramped traffic load The instrument transmits traffic over the circuit Inserting errors or pause frames You can use the instrument to insert errors such as TCP UDP checksum errors or pause frames into layer 4 traffic when you perform end to end and loop back tests For details on error and pause frame insertion see Inserting errors or pause frames on page 99 Loop back testing Loop back testing allows you to transmit traffic from one JDSU Ethernet test set and then loop the traffic back through a second unit on the far end of a circuit For details refer to Chapter 7 Loop back Testing Running TCP Host applications If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so the TCP Host app
104. settings for 10 100 1000 Ethernet traffic Turn auto negotiation for 10 100 1000 or 1 Gigabit Ethernet optical circuits on to tell the instrument to negotiate its capabilities with another Ethernet device before transmitting idle traffic If you need to validate the auto negotiation capabilities of the device you are negotiating with you can change each of the instrument s default capabilities NOTE For 10 100 1000 Ethernet if you turn auto negotiation ON and the Duplex setting is FULL flow control is also ON by default The instrument also advertises that it is capable of transmitting and receiving pause frames If you turn auto negotiation OFF flow control is user configurable If you turn auto negotiation OFF you must use a cross over cable to connect to the circuit Specify the source of the reference Signal Clock Internal where synchronization with incoming signal is not necessary default Recovered from timing signals embedded in incoming signal Sync E External stable reference signal input into connectors on the interface panel To specify interface settings 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the test appli cation for the interface you are testing Refer to Table 7 on page 25 through Table 8 on page 25 for a list of layer 2 and layer 3 applications Table 15 on page 129 lists layer 4 applications 2 Select the Setup soft key and then select the Interface tab Et
105. so use the Test Menu to select the test appli cation for the interface you are testing Refer to Table 8 on page 25 for a list of MiM applications Select the Setup soft key and then select the Ethernet Filter tab Specify the settings required to filter received traffic for analysis Frame Label Setting B TAG B Tag VLAN ID Filter B Tag VLAN ID B Tag Priority B Tag DEI BIT Value If you don t want to filter traffic for a specific VLAN select Don t Care oth erwise select Specify Value Enter the ID for the backbone VLAN used as the path to the destina tion This setting only appears if B Tag VLAN ID Filter is set to Specify Value Enter the priority code point PCP ID representing the type of service the fil tered traffic is emulating or select Don t Care Indicate whether the filtered traffic is drop eligible by setting the DEI bit for the traffic or select Don t Care Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing MAC in MAC testing Frame Label Setting Value I TAG l Tag Priority Enter the priority code point PCP ID representing the type of service the fil tered traffic is emulating or select Don t Care l Tag DEI Bit Indicate whether the filtered traffic is drop eligible by setting the DEI bit for the traffic or select Don t Care l Tag UCA Bit Indicate whether the filtered traffic uses the customer address by setting the bit
106. successful You are ready to transmit the test frames Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Starting the frame sequence Observing transparency results Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 3 testing After turning the laser ON if you are testing on an optical circuit and placing the second test instrument into transparent loopback mode you can transmit the test frames The frames are transmitted sequentially in the sequence used on the Frames List To transmit test frames On the Main screen if you haven t already done so select the Actions action panel then select Start Frame Sequence The instrument trans mits the frames sequentially as they appear in the Frames List The test frames are transmitted After transmitting and looping back test frames you can observe results asso ciated with transparency testing in the J Proof category To observe transparency results On the Main screen set the result group to Ethernet and the result cate gory to J Proof Counts of transmitted and received frames and the pass fail status appears for each protocol Transparency results are displayed For detailed result descriptions refer to J Proof transparency results on page 306 NOTE When your instrument is in Transparent test mode Payload Analysis is automatically turned OFF If you return to Traffic mode Payload Analysis is turned back ON Layer 3 testing Using the instrum
107. summary result buttons that allow you to display physical link quality results transaction log transport streams quality results and content streams quality results Setup tabs are provided that allow you to specify items such as the destination phone number and codec Other setups may appear depending on the call control When running VoIP applications buttons appear at the bottom of the Main screen that allow you to select an SFP or specify the wavelength for an optical connector if applicable turn the laser on or off and register with the manage ment entity also called gateway proxy or call manager depending on which signaling protocol you are using or place and receive a call When you select a VoIP application LEDs appear next to the result window on the Main screen see Figure 46 Content ntent Rating Figure 46 VoIP LEDs The LEDs allow you to quickly determine whether a signal is present synchro nization has been acquired and whether or not the link is active LEDs also indicate the content rating Ethernet IP TCP UDP Fibre Chan VoIP and Video Testing Manual 179 Chapter 8 VoIP Testing Understanding the graphical user interface Understanding the VoIP call 180 bar Understanding VoIP test results Layered view Quality Layer Buttons The VoIP call bar is located in the area just above the results It allows entry of the destination phone number and quick selection of setu
108. tab and then specify the following settings Seitings Parameters Local IP Enter the source IP address for traffic generated by your unit This address is used as the remote IP address for the PPPoE client Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask Remote IP Enter remote IP address for the instrument server This address is used as the local source IP address on the client side of the connection muy NOTE The instrument s PPPoE server is a demo server and does not support full server functionality 5 If you need to specify other settings for the test do so otherwise return to the Main screen and do the following a Press the PPPoE Client Log On or PPPoE Server Log On Action key The unit discovers the MAC address of the PPPoE peer and then uses the MAC address in combination with a session ID to uniquely identify the session b Observe the messages and events associated with the PPPoE login process For a list of potential messages see PPPoE messages on page 77 The PPPoE session is established The instrument will continuously send PPP echoes and replies to keep the session established 76 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual PPPoE messages Table 13 PPPoE messages Message PPP Authentication Failed PPPoE Timeout Data Layer Stopped PPP LCP Failed PPP IPCP Failed PPPoE Failed PPP Up Failed Internal Error Restart PPPoE Terminating a PPPoE session Specifying transmitted I
109. tab because they will be provided by a PPPoE server Server Select Server mode if the unit must operate as a PPPoE server For example if the unit is positioned before a BBRAR Broadband Remote Access Router it must function as a server If you select Server mode you must specify the Local IP Subnet Mask or Remote IP settings on the IP setup tab User Name Enter a valid user name for the ISP Internet Ser vice Provider Password Enter the password for the user name that you specified Remember passwords are often case sensitive Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 75 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 3 testing Settings Parameters Service Provider If the ISP requires the provider s domain name be included with the User Name for example joe smith provider net select this setting and then specify the provider name An at sign and the provider name will automatically be appended to the User Name that you specified and will be car ried in the packet Service Name Select this setting if you want to specify a service name If you specify a service name your unit will only attempt to establish a PPPoE session with the service you specify The default service name is JDSU 4 Do one of the following Ifthe instrument is emulating a PPPoE client proceed to step 5 The unit will use a static IP address Ifthe instrument is emulating a PPPoE server go to the IP setup
110. technical option for guaranteed frequency accuracy and stability because it is impervious to the effects of traffic load On a Sync E network each node in the network recovers the clock To test Sync E 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the test appli cation for the interface you are testing Refer to Table 7 on page 25 through Table 8 on page 25 for a list of layer 2 and layer 3 applications Table 15 on page 129 lists layer 4 applications 2 Press the Setup soft key and then select the Interface tab 3 On the Physical Layer tab check the box beside Enable Synchronous Ethernet This specifies whether SSM messages are transmitted decoded and have statistics collected about them Ifitis desired to transmit SSM messages Enable the SSM Tx To define the rate of transmission in PDUs sec select the Tx Rate from the drop down box Select whether the message type will be Informational or Event Select the quality level QL Value of the clock EEC2 EEC1 or DNU Connect the instrument to the circuit Select the Laser button to turn on the laser Select Start Traffic to transmit traffic over the circuit N Oo Oo fF Use the Actions buttons to add positive or negative frequency offset on the transmit line frequency It should appear in the Rx Freq Deviation result on the far end in the Interface category 8 Observe the test results in the Signal category in the Interface group and
111. test Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 243 Chapter 10 Automated Testing Automated RFC 2544 When the overall test control configuration items have been set select Next the green arrow 5 The RFC 2544 test has ben completely configured a lf itis not desired to save this configuration profile at this time go to step 6 b To save the profile of this configuration specify the filename under which it is to be saved by entering the desired filename in the File Name box To discover the name of previously saved files click on Select To preserve the configuration so it won t be changed by future users select the Save as read only checkbox When all file attributes have been set select the Save Profiles button and then select OK to return to the previous screen Select Next the green arrow 6 The Run Edit screen appears Do one of the following To return to the beginning and modify the current configuration select the Go arrow after Change Configuration Go to Manually configuring all parameters on page 239 To load a previously saved set of configuration parameters select the Go arrow after Load Configuration from a Profile Go to Retrieving configuration from previously saved file on page 239 Torun the test as configured select the Go arrow after Run Tests The Run J QuickCheck screen appears Go to Running Enhanced RFC 2544 and FC tests on
112. test For an example see Figure 49 on page 181 Ethernet IP TCP UDP Fibre Chan VoIP and Video Testing Manual 181 Chapter 8 VoIP Testing Understanding the graphical user interface To optimize the number of results that appear on your display the result windows appear in the Full Size view by default when you run VoIP applica tions Oest View Reports Tools Help P P1 1GigE Eth VoIP Term P1 1GigE Eth YoIP Term Level dBm Messages logged Setup Freq Dev ppm Q Auto Dial by Phone Number 5551234 G 711 U law 64K 40 Answer Dial by Dest Phone Number Primary Codec Jitter Buffer Restart Summary Transport Qos Local Current Minimum Maximum QoS History Audio Delay ms NIA NIA NA NIA NIA Audio Jitter ms NIA NIA NA NIA NIA Count QoS History Lost Audio Packets NIA NIA NIA NIA Toolkit oH Remote Current Minimum Maximum QoS History Audio Delay ms NIA NIA NA NIA NIA severed Audio Jitter ms NIA NIA NA NA NA E Count QoS History Lost Audio Packets NiA NIA NIA Address Book es R Ei Main Capture SFP1 T Place Connector EA Register Call Figure 50 VolP results Transport quality Navigating the results display When navigating through the VolP results consider the following When you launch an application for the first time the Summary group and Status category appear This is also referred to as the layered v
113. test application for the 1GigE Optical interface Select the Setup soft key The Setup tab appears 3 Select a pattern To Select Emulate a worst case scenario for deterministic jitter CRPAT by transmitting frames with a broad spectral content Stress the timing margins in the received eye by CJPAT exposing the data sampling circuits to large system atic phase jumps Emulate a worse case scenario for power supply CSPAT noise within network transceivers Press Results to return to the Main screen Connect the instrument to the circuit If you are testing an optical interface select the Laser button Verify that the green SIGNAL LED is illuminated Select Start Pattern to transmit the pattern over the circuit oO AON OO a fF At a minimum observe the summary and pattern statistic test results You have transmitted layer 2 patterns Use the layer 2 traffic monitor application whenever you want to analyze the received signal You can also pass the signal bit for bit through to the unit s transmitter if you select Connect Rx to Tx When you configure your test you can specify settings that indicate the expected received payload and determine Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 63 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 2 testing which frames will pass through the receive filter and be counted in the test result categories for filtered layer 2 traffic The settings may also impact other resu
114. test of the TrueSAM automated test sequence Per the IETF draft standard this test includes five steps described in the following section In the turnup option the test is configured to run the Path MTU if user selected RTT Walk the Window and TCP throughput steps Steps 1 2 3 and 4 Bidirectional tests can only be used in this mode When troubleshooting an existing circuit it is recommended that the user run all five steps for the first test and then run specific tests to further diagnose issues This is because the automated test uses results from prior steps i e RTT as input for subsequent steps and eliminates much of the manual config uration IMPORTANT NOTE During this automated test a 6000 Server or Iperf server must be active and the 6000 Client the 6000 running the automated test must be configured to communicate with the IP of the Server This is specified in the All Test config uration tab step 2 of TrueSpeed Circuit Turnup Option on page 271 and step of TrueSpeed Circuit Troubleshooting Option on page 274 Step 1 Determine the path MTU Packetization Layer Path MTU Discovery PLPMTUD is a method for TCP to dynamically discover the MTU of a path by probing with progressively larger packets It resolves many of the robustness problems of the classical tech niques PMTUD since it does not depend on the delivery of ICMP messages The general strategy is for the Packetization Layer to
115. test provides graphical test results which visually indicate whether the bottleneck link is traffic shaped or policed Configuration of the TrueSpeed test can be broken into two segments The first segment is common to all configurations and the second is specific for the turnup option or the troubleshooting option Configuring the TrueSpeed test 1 Verify that the local and remote instrument are using the same firmware rev The test may not provide the expected result if the versions are different 2 If not already selected use the Test Menu to select the L4 TCP Wirespeed application for the interface you are testing Refer to Table 24 on page 226 for a list of applications Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 10 Automated Testing TrueSpeed Test 3 Verify that a TCP Server such as another 6000A running TCP Wirespeed is activated or an Iperf server is available and that the IP address is spec ified 4 On the right side of the main screen select TrueSpeed Test soft button 5 The Test Configuration options screen appears To configure all options yourself select the green arrow to the right of Configure Test Settings Manually Go to step 7 To load configuration settings set from a previously saved file select the green arrow to the right of Load Configuration from a Profile 6 The Profile selection window appears The filenames of the saved profiles will be listed on the left side of the screen a
116. testing SFP Small form factor pluggable module Used throughout this manual to represent pluggable optical modules XFP 10 Gigabit small form factor pluggable module Used throughout this manual to represent pluggable optical modules used to connect to the family of 10 Gbps circuits ranging from 9 95 Gbps to 11 3 Gbps Ethernet IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual About this Manual Ethernet IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Ethernet IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual This is the Ethernet IP and TCP UDP testing manual for the MT BERD MTS 5800 The manual is application oriented and contains infor mation about using these instruments to test service carried on each of the listed networks It includes an overview of testing features instructions for using the instruments to generate and transmit traffic over a circuit and detailed test result descriptions This manual also provides contact information for JDSU s Technical Assistance Center TAC Use this manual in conjunction with the following manuals The PDH SONET and SDH Testing Manual provides detailed instructions for testing on each of the listed networks The Getting Started Manual provides basic instructions for setting up the T BERD MTS 5800 instrument specifications and contact information for JDSU s Technical Assistance Center TAC Help The topics addressed in the testing manuals are also available on the T BERD MTS 5800 in an HTML for
117. that the green Signal Present Sync Acquired and Link Active LEDs are illuminated 10 At a minimum observe the delay test results in the Fibre Channel L2 Link Stats category Round trip delay is measured Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 207 Chapter 9 Fibre Channel Testing Monitoring layer 2 traffic Monitoring layer 2 traffic Use the layer 2 traffic monitor application whenever you want to analyze the received signal When you configure your test you can specify settings that indicate the expected received payload and determine which frames will pass through the receive filter and be counted in the test result categories for filtered layer 2 traffic The settings may also impact other results muy NOTE You must turn the laser on using the associated button to pass the signal through the unit s transmitter To monitor layer 2 traffic 1 oOo a Aa Q If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the layer 2 monitor through test application for the interface you are testing refer to Table 22 on page 197 for a list of applications Select the Setup soft key and then select the Fibre Channel Filter tab and then specify the filter settings for the traffic you want to monitor see Specifying Fibre Channel filter settings on page 202 Press Results to return to the Main screen Connect the module to the circuit On the Main screen select the Laser button Verify that
118. the report and the filename in which to save it You may view the report before and or after its creation by selecting the View Report button and or checking the View report after creation checkbox The report will automatically load into the appropriate reader if available depending upon the format in which it has been saved When ready to save the report select the Create Report button After it has been saved and viewed select the right pointing green arrow 6 The post report results window appears All options available on this window are described in step 3 with the excep tion of the Exit TrueSpeed test To exit the TrueSpeed application select the Go arrow after Exit TrueSpeed test 7 The Exit window appears Do one of the following To start the TrueSpeed test from the beginning select the Start Over button Go to step 5 in Configuring the TrueSpeed test on page 270 To restore the configuration setups to their default values when leaving the application check the box Restore Setups on Exit To completely exit the TrueSpeed application select Exit To return to the previous window select Cancel The TrueSpeed test has been run Testing using TAM automation Non trunk ports carry traffic to a portion of the customer s network No 802 1q tags are in this traffic If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so you can use it to remotely log into and pro
119. the Sync Status Messages category in the Ethernet group For details see Interface results on page 296 and Sync Status Messages on page 321 of Chapter 11 Test Results You have tested Synchronous Ethernet Transmitting and analyzing PTP 1588 traffic 122 You can use the instrument during turn up or installation of PTP links or trou bleshooting an active link Features include the following Verify that the link can support PTP Verify that the PTP Master is reachable and can be communicated with Verify that PTP timing messages are received Provide packet delay variation PDV measurements Load network background traffic stream simultaneously with PTP session to see effect network traffic has on PTP Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual About PTP Analyzing PTP traffic Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Transmitting and analyzing PTP 1588 traffic Connect an optional GPS as timing source Capability to measure master to slave and slave to master delay Due to growing wireless traffic volume 3G and 4G networks are being deployed In order to ensure accuracy and that inter cell handoffs are manage able every base transmission station in the network needs to be able to trace its frequency synchronization back to a primary reference clock Without synchronization the mobile devices lose lock which can adversely affect voice and data services or result in dropped
120. the Test Menu to select the TCP Wirespeed application for the interface you are testing refer to Table 15 on page 129 for a list of applications Select the Setup soft key and then select the Interface tab to specify the settings required to initialize the link see Specifying interface settings on page 41 Configure the traffic streams see Configuring the streams on page 139 Specify the TCP Host settings see Specifying TCP Host settings on page 139 Press Results to return to the main screen and then do the following a lf you are measuring throughput on an optical circuit turn the laser on b Select the Actions tab c If your instrument is operating as a client select Start Traffic to transmit the background streams d Select Start TCP Server or Start TCP Client depending on the mode you specified 142 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 5 TCP UDP Testing TrueSpeed 7 Ataminimum observe the following test results To verify layer 2 or layer 3 performance set a result group to Link and then display and observe results in the corresponding Link Stats cate gory To verify layer 4 TCP performance set a result group to TCP Host and then display and observe results in the L4 Link Stats and Output categories Throughput Latency RTD Packet Jitter and Frame Loss graphs are also available in the All Streams result group The application is running
121. the capture process may stop very soon after you start it because the buffer reaches capacity quickly This is expected behavior If you specify VoIP filter settings see Specifying VoIP Filters on page 189 the settings determine which received traffic is captured to the buffer The Capture Toolbar illustrated in Figure 53 indicates whether filters are active or inactive Transmitted frames are always captured to the buffer Capturing packets involves launching and configuring a VoIP application specifying the capture settings and if you are capturing received traffic spec ifying the filter settings Ethernet IP TCP UDP Fibre Chan VoIP and Video Testing Manual 191 Chapter 8 VoIP Testing Capturing packets for analysis While capturing packets in the VoIP application it is recommended that you do not save the captured packets until the call is ended the phone is on hook When capturing packets bear in mind that configuring the capture for a large buffer for example 256 MB with small packets for example 46 byte ping packets it will take a long time to fill the buffer If you configure the capture for a small buffer with large packets it will take much less time To capture packets on the instrument 1 Select the Setup soft key and then do one of the following Specify the settings required to filter received traffic for the type you want to capture and analyze Clear all of the filters to captur
122. the settings listed in step 1 Repeat this step for each type of frame desired Select Remove frame to remove the highlighted frame from the list or Use the Quick Config soft key populate the frame list with a group or all protocol control frame types See Using Quick Config to configure test frames on page 71 for more information 3 Select Next the green arrow The J Proof test within TrueSAM is configured If TrueSpeed test has been selected go to Configuring TrueSpeed tests within TrueSAM on page 220 If TrueSpeed test has not been selected go to Saving TrueSAM profile on page 222 Configuring TrueSpeed tests within TrueSAM The next two screens are used to configure the TrueSpeed test within TrueSAM if selected in step 6 of TrueSAM Initiation and communication configuration on page 212 1 The first screen allows for the setting or confirmation of how the throughput is to be configured a Ifitis desired to obtain throughput parameters from the RFC 2544 test Set Bottleneck Bandwidth to match RFC 2544 Max Bandwidth when loading TrueSpeed configuration is checked and other throughput options are grayed out TrueSpeed 1 Symmetry Not Running How will your throughput be configured Set Bottleneck Bandwidth to match RFC 2544 Max Bandwidth when loading Truespeed configuration RFC 2544 Test Thresholds True Speed TrueSpeed Controls Figure 62 TrueSAM TrueSpeed throu
123. the trans mitted frames Settings Values D_ID Type the destination ID of the port the frames will be trans mitted to using a 3 byte format S_ID Type the source ID for the port transmitting the frames using a 3 byte format SEQ_ID Type the sequence ID for the frames using a 1 byte hexa decimal format OX_ID Type the originator exchange ID for the frames using a 2 byte hexadecimal format RX_ID Type the responder ID for the frames using a 2 byte hexa decimal format 6 If you need to specify other settings for the test select the appropriate tab otherwise press Results to return to the Main screen The frame settings are specified Before transmitting layer 2 traffic you can specify settings that indicate the expected received payload and determine which frames will pass through the receive filter and be counted in the test result categories for filtered layer 2 traffic The settings may also impact other results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Specifying traffic load settings Chapter 9 Fibre Channel Testing Configuring layer 2 Fibre Channel tests For example the incoming frames must pass the filter to be analyzed for a BERT pattern Local loopback is also only performed on frames that pass the filter To specify Fibre Channel filter settings 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the layer 2 terminate test application for the interface you are testing re
124. then specify the following Source MAC Address Select Factory Default or User Defined User MAC Address If you specified User Defined enter the source MAC address using a 6 byte hexadecimal format Select the Filter tab and then specify the Ethernet filter settings for the destination type source type and encapsulation In addition to the settings you specify to establish an Ethernet link when estab lishing a PPPoE session available for IPv4 Terminate applications only you also specify settings that allow you to log in to the PPPoE peer The settings indicate whether you want your unit to emulate a PPPoE client or server and provide the user name password and other information required to establish the session To specify the PPPoE settings and establish a connection 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select an IPv4 test application in Terminate mode for the e10 100 1000 electrical interface Select the Setup soft key and then select the Ethernet tab Verify that the Data Mode is set to PPPoE Go to the PPP setup tab then specify the following settings The Provider Name Password and Service Name you specify for the instrument must match those of its PPPoE peer Settings Parameters PPP Mode Client In most instances the instrument should emulate a PPPoE client If you select Client mode you do not need to specify the Local IP Subnet Mask or Remote IP settings on the IP setup
125. then determine the TCP throughput window size and latency associated with the connection For details refer to Running TCP Host applications on page 137 Playing audio clips When running layer 3 triple play applications you can transmit an audio stream a tone to simulate voice This allows testing of the audio quality of a triple play network with specific traffic levels before deployment To play audio clips 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the layer 3 Triple Play test application for the interface you are testing refer to Table on page 160 for a list of applications 2 Select the Setup soft key and then select the All Services tab Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 165 Chapter 6 Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing Playing audio clips 3 Tap the Configure Triple Play Services button The Define Triple Play Services dialog box appears see Figure 44 Define Triple Play Services SA Voice Sampling Per Gall Total Rate Total Basic Frame Codec Rate ms Gils Rate kbps Mbps Size Bytes Simulated G 711 U law 30 g g 84 8 0 1696 Video Channels Compression Rate Mbps Total Basic Frame Size Bytes soy 2 MPEG 2 8 0000 1372 HDTV 1 MPEG 2 19 0000 1372 Data Start Rate Mbps Load Type Time Step Sec Load Step Mbps Total Basic Frame Size Bytes m Data 1 12 5000 Constant s Random aes Data2 12 5000 Constant
126. tion for transmitted traffic In Data Mode specify IPoE or PPoE If you want the unit to issue an ARP request to determine the destination MAC address of the instrument s link partner in ARP mode select Enabled otherwise select Disabled and then be certain to manually specify the destination MAC address see Specifying Ethernet frame settings on page 43 If you enabled ARP and you only want to respond to ARP requests from devices on the same VLAN specified for transmitted traffic select Match VLAN ID s NOTE If you need your unit to respond to ARP requests from other devices for example a second test instrument on the circuit be certain to enable ARP In Frame Type specify DIX or 802 3 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Specifying PPPoE settings Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 3 testing In Length Type indicate whether you want to specify the length as a frame size or as a packet length Frame Size If you select Frame Size select a pre defined size or select User Defined or Jumbo and then specify the size The calcu lated packet length in bytes appears to the right of the field Packet Length If you select Packet Length select a pre defined length or select User Defined Jumbo or EMIX and then specify the length The calculated frame size in bytes appears to the right of the field If you want to specify a source address for the traffic select SA and
127. two units in an end to end configuration to measure the service disruption time resulting from a switch in service to a protect line The traffic originating unit must transmit a constant rate of traffic to obtain accurate measurements For detailed instructions see Measuring service disruption time on page 107 Use the MiM Traffic Monitor Through application whenever you want to analyze received traffic When you configure your test you can specify settings that indicate the expected received payload and determine which frames will pass through the receive filter and be counted in the test result categories for filtered layer 2 traffic The settings may also impact other results NOTE If you are testing from an optical interface you must turn the laser on using the associated button to pass the signal through the unit s transmitter For detailed instructions see Monitoring layer 2 traffic on page 64 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 121 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Synchronous Ethernet testing Synchronous Ethernet testing Synchronous Ethernet Sync E is the ability to provide frequency distribution through an Ethernet port Physical layer timing transport is required to guar antee frequency distribution to the extent necessary for encapsulated signals to meet network performance requirements Although other methods may be used for this purpose physical layer Sync E provides the best
128. unit select DA on the frame graphic Enter the MAC address into the Destination MAC entry box Select Next the green arrow 256 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual k a Chapter 10 Automated Testing SAMComplete Depending on the application selected a number of other Network Connection parameters will need to be defined on a number of addi tional pages For more detail on these settings see Specifying Ethernet frame settings on page 43 On the final Network Connection parameters page select the Next the green arrow at bottom of screen The SLA Throughput page appears Specify the SLA values Each service will have its own values Depending upon the application selected the SLA Threshold and Throughput can be specified for both the Local and Remote unit CIR Committed Information Rate The threshold used to indicate the maximum sustained throughput guaranteed by the SLA If the CIR is 0 the CIR test is skipped EIR Excess Information Rate The threshold used to indicate the maximum sustained throughput allowed by the SLA by which a service can exceed the CIR The throughput between CIR and EIR is not guar anteed If the EIR is 0 the EIR test is skipped Policing Selects that policing be applied to the test All traffic greater than CIR EIR is removed by the policier If the test shows frame loss the test passes it indicates the policier is doing its job If there is no
129. will only measure round trip delay because it can not measure one way delay on traffic that has travelled both directions in a round trip Instrument A will measure round trip delay for the returned looped back traffic Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 103 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Measuring one way delay About the One Way Delay test option and accessory kit CDMA Receiver Kit GPS Receiver Kit Step 1 Connecting the receivers to your instruments 104 Although it might seem like you can estimate the one way delay from instrument B to instrument A by subtracting the one way delay measure ments reported on B from the round trip delay measurements reported on A the calculation will not be correct Round trip delay measurements include internal loopback delays which vary and depend on the size of looped back frames Therefore the estimate will not be accurate and the delay measured will be slightly exaggerated The two instruments used to measure one way delay must use the same BERT software version in order to synchronize timing One way delay testing is offered as a test option for your instrument When you purchase an OWD test option CDMA or GPS you receive an accessory kit The accessory kit can be used with the T BERD MTS 5800 6000A with MSAM 8000 with DMC or 8000 with Transport Module so not all parts are used for a given product Preecis2 CDMA Receiver Package This packa
130. with a high degree of precision or a low degree of precision In most instances you should select High Precision Low Delay NOTE You must select an Acterna payload to measure round trip delay count lost packets and measure jitter BERT To transmit frames with payloads filled with the BERT pattern you specify select BERT and then select a pattern Various pseudo random and Fixed patterns are available The Pseudo random patterns continue from one frame into the next The fixed patterns restart each frame such that the frame will always start with the beginning of the pattern If you set the BERT Pattern to User Defined in the User Pattern field specify the 32 bit fixed pattern that will be repeated in the payload 10 If you need to specify other settings for the test select the appropriate tab otherwise press Results to return to the Main screen The frame settings for transmitted traffic are specified To configure VLAN tagged traffic 1 After selecting VLAN as your encapsulation under Configure outgoing frames select VLAN and then enter the VLAN ID transmitted in the Tag Control Information field in a decimal format ranging from 0 to 4095 2 In User Priority select the priority 0 to 7 from the drop down menu 3 Do one of the following lf you are configuring traffic for a layer 2 application return to Speci fying Ethernet frame settings If you are configuring traffic for a layer 3
131. you need to specify other settings for the test select the appropriate tab otherwise press Results to return to the Main screen The filter settings for IPv6 packets are specified Before you transmit layer 3 IP traffic you must specify Interface settings see Specifying interface settings on page 41 IP characteristics of the transmitted traffic see Specifying transmitted IPv4 packet settings on page 77 IP characteristics used to filter received traffic see Specifying IPv4 filter settings on page 79 Traffic load settings see Specifying traffic load settings on page 58 After you configure the layer 3 IP settings and you either manually specify the destination device s MAC address or the unit determines the address using ARP you are ready to transmit traffic over the link To transmit and analyze IP traffic 1 Use the Test Menu to select the layer 3 IP traffic terminate test application for the interface you are testing refer to Table 7 on page 25 through Table 8 on page 25 for a list of applications Select the Setup soft key and then select the Interface tab to specify settings that control the Ethernet interface see Specifying interface settings on page 41 Specify settings that define the Ethernet frame and the IP packet charac teristics of the transmitted traffic see Specifying transmitted IPv4 packet settings on page 77 Select the Setup soft key and then sele
132. you select Frame Size you must specify the size on the Ethernet tab then return to the IP tab to specify the remaining settings Packet Length If you select Packet Length select a pre defined length or select User Defined Jumbo or Random and then specify the length The calculated frame size in bytes appears to the right of the field If you selected Random use the Configure Random button to specify user defined random frame sizes or select Reset to transmit frames of randomly generated sizes based on the seven RFC 2544 frame length recommendations On the illustration of the IP packet select the Traffic Class field and then specify a number representing the traffic class using a hexadecimal format ranging from 0x0 to OxFF Select the Flow Label field If you are certain the routers on the circuit support flow labels for traffic prioritization specify the flow label using a hexidecimal format ranging from 0x0 to OxFFFFF otherwise use the default 0x0 Select the Next Header field then specify the code representing the type of data carried in the next header in the packet using a hexidecimal format ranging from 0x0 to OxFF Select the Hop Limit field then specify the time after which a packet can be deleted by any device on a circuit as a number of hops The default Hop Limit setting is 64 hops Select the Source Address field then select one of the following Stateful Select Stateful if you want to obtain th
133. 0 22 be 725c 00 08 00 45c0 E 0010 00 3c 00 00 00 00 02 58 99 94 Oa 0a 34 02 e0 00 lt X 4 0020 00 0a 02 05 ee cd 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0030 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 01 00 0c 01 00 01 00 00 00 ANAN NAN NENAN NA AN NAR NN N1 ne Fie acte ma use ndishbert capture live pcap 84 j Packets 83 Displayed 83 Marked 0 Zz 4 Figure 20 Sample Wireshark screen 4 Use the controls at the top of the screen to locate and evaluate the packets For technical support and product documentation go to www wireshark org You are analyzing captured packets Analyzing the packets using If you want a summarized analysis of the packets you can use the J Mentor J Mentor utility provided on your instrument The utility is only available for analysis of packets captured on 10 100 1000 Mbps electrical 100M optical and 1G optical circuits J Mentor can only be used to analyze PCAP files with 50 000 or less captured packets To analyze captured packets 1 On the Capture toolbar select the J Mentor action key The Open Capture File dialog box appears 2 Specify the link bandwidth in Mbps This is the line rate at which you captured the traffic 3 Navigate to and select the file you want to analyze 4 Ifyou want to observe key details for the PCAP file select Get PCAP Info This is wise if you suspect the file might exceed the 50000 packet limit for analysis on your instrument Ethernet Fibre Chann
134. 0 L3 Link Stats results Test Result Packet Rate Packet Size Rx Mbps Cur L3 Total Util Tx Mbps Cur L3 312 Description Indicates the number of errors that must occur in the window to cause an event A count of the number of errored seconds in the period A count of errored frames since in the period A count of the number of errors since starting the test A count of the number of events since starting the test Table 50 describes the L3 Link Stats results such as the average packet rate peak packet rate and the maximum minimum and average round trip delay measurements Description Average The average rate of received packets calculated over the time period elapsed since the last test restart Current The current rate of received packets This measurement is an average taken over the prior second of test time Minimum The minimum rate of received packets over a one second period Peak The maximum rate of received packets over a one second period The packet rate is expressed in packets per second Average The average size of packets received since IP packet detection Minimum The minimum size of packets received since IP packet detection Maximum The maximum size of packets received since IP packet detection The current bandwidth utilized by the received IP traffic expressed in megabits per sec ond This measurement is an average taken over the prior second o
135. 0 cee eee eee 165 Chapter 7 Loop back Testing 167 About Loop back testing 000 cece eee 168 Loop back terminology 000 e eee eee 168 LOCAU otare vedas dente E A ethene aa ate 168 Loop back unit suie iiai u anA cee 168 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual ix Contents Terminate imode 2 2s4 0 8 4 h44 de eta bee a es ead aay 168 Loop back mode 20 cee eects 168 Key loop back concepts 000 00 ee eee eee eee 169 ARP SOUNS i005 Sune ees nde Auld patie pede eae EREE 169 Address swapping 000 00 eee e eee eee eee 169 Filter criteria on the loop back unit 169 LOOP TYPESi i i ais te te lig aviv ats Where jatar ald EAE a gece aval 169 CBM Traffic siete sah sions ed aud eacstamadech a and aie aa 169 VLAN and Q in Q traffic 0 0 0 0202 169 VPLS ilabelS 2 2140207 00 pe ba cae E A eee ae eek Bs 169 VPLS service provider and customer destination addresses 169 MPLS lABEIS es ovsdoeeee a beet ta ae aed capac 170 MPLS destination addresses 2220000c eee eee 170 TCP UDP ATP Listen IP Address and Listen Port 170 Understanding the graphical user interface 171 Loop back action buttons 20000 cee ee eee 171 Loop back messageS 0 cee eet ee 171 Loop back tests 0 02 000 eee eee 171 Specifying a unit identifier anaana nananana 172 Using L
136. 0101100110 Figure 3 Test pattern D6 6 D25 6 frames for OBSAI Sync Byte 1x CPRI hyperframe 163840b Sync Byte 1 x CPRI hyperframe h RD 1 be 163840b K28 5 RD 1 1100000101 K28 5 RD 1 0011111010 D25 6 RD 0 1001100110 D6 6 RD 0 0110010110 D26 6 RD 0 0101100110 Figure 4 Test pattern PRBS frames for CPRI To measure round trip delay use the Delay pattern NOTE There must be a loop at the far end hard cable fiber loop or far end test set in Mon application with Rx Tx selected to measure round trip delay Specify whether to link the Rx pattern to the Tx pattern d Select the Tx Pattern If you did not link the Rx pattern to the Tx pattern also specify the Rx pattern e Select the Payload Analysis checkbox if you d like to see pattern sync bit errors etc reported in the Results f Press Results to return to the Main screen 3 Connect the module to the circuit Select either SFP1 or SFP2 If you are testing an optical interface select the Laser button 5 If the Tx Frequency needs to be offset select the Actions tab at the bottom of the page and then select the Offset Tx Freq button This will activate the available offset frequency options Select the desired offset 6 To insert errors into the transmission select the Error tab at the bottom of the page and then select from the available Error Types Insertion Types and insertion Rates Press the Ins
137. 140 Byte Frames 128 255 Byte Frames 128 252 Byte Frames 256 511 Byte Frames A count of received Fibre Channel frames with lengths between 1024 and 2140 bytes inclusive A count of received Ethernet frames with lengths between 128 and 255 bytes inclu sive A count of received Fibre Channel frames with lengths between 128 and 252 bytes inclusive A count of received Ethernet frames with lengths between 256 and 511 bytes inclu sive 256 508 Byte Frames A count of received Fibre Channel frames with lengths between 256 and 5088 bytes inclusive 512 1023 Byte Frames A count of received Ethernet frames with lengths between 512 and 1023 bytes inclu sive 28 64 Byte Frames 512 1020 Byte Frames 64 Byte Frames 68 124 Byte Frames 65 127 Byte Frames A count of received Fibre Channel frames with lengths between 28 and 64 bytes inclusive A count of received Fibre Channel frames with lengths between 512 and 1020 bytes inclusive A count of received Ethernet frames with a length of 64 bytes A count of received Fibre Channel frames with lengths between 68 and 124 bytes inclusive A count of received Ethernet frames with lengths between 65 and 127 bytes inclu sive Broadcast Frames The number of Ethernet broadcast frames received since the last test restart Class 1 Frames A count of received Fibre Channel Class 1 frames since the last test start or restart Class 2 Frames
138. 33 features and capabilities 128 filter settings 134 filtering traffic 134 inserting errors 137 looping back traffic 137 Running automated Throughput test 267 running TCP Host Script 165 specifying frame length 134 specifying layer 2 and 3 settings 131 specifying packet length 134 traffic loads 58 transmitting traffic 136 well known ports 132 Technical assistance xix Test applications Ethernet 25 Fibre Channel 197 IP 25 Loop back 171 Loopback 171 MiM 25 26 Multiple Streams 148 selecting 2 specifying parameters 2 TCP UDP 129 Triple Play 160 Test results 1G Pair Status 295 about 10 Gigabit WAN 289 about Ethernet 289 about Fibre Channel 289 about graphs 5 about IP 289 about MiM 115 289 about NewGen 289 about VoIP 180 about VPLS 289 Cable Diagnostic 293 changing layout 5 collapsing 5 custom 5 expanding 5 Fault 294 histograms 5 J Profiler 329 MDI MDIX Pair Status 294 Pair Skew 295 populating custom 5 setting category 4 setting group 4 setting the group and category 4 Summary 284 Time 332 using entire screen 5 viewing 4 viewing cable diagnostic 31 353 Index 354 Test settings H 323 186 187 SCCP 185 SIP 185 VoIP 185 188 Testing configuring parameters 2 connecting instrument to circuit 3 selecting an application 2 starting a test 3 turning laser ON or OFF 3 viewing results 4 5 Time results 332 Traceroute running 85 Traffic loads about Ethernet 58 about Fibre Channel 203 about MiM t
139. 4 packet settings on page 77 8 If you need to specify other settings for the test select the appropriate tab otherwise press Results to return to the Main screen 9 Connect the instrument to the circuit 10 If you are testing an optical interface select the Laser button 11 Verify that the green Signal Present Sync Acquired and Link Active LEDs are illuminated 12 If you selected an optical application select Connect Rx to Tx This setting does not appear for electrical applications 13 At a minimum observe the summary layer 3 link statistics and counts layer 3 filter statistics and counts layer 3 configuration status and error statistics Layer 3 IP traffic is monitored Capturing packets for analysis If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so you can use it to capture transmitted and received packets save it on the instrument or to an external USB key and then either send the packets to another technician for analysis or analyze it yourself using the Wireshark protocol analyzer or the J Mentor utility provided on the instrument muy NOTE The term packets is used interchangeably with frames throughout the fol lowing section and represents any of the layer 2 layer 3 or layer 4 data grams carried in the traffic stream You can capture packets when running any of the single stream or multiple stream Ethernet IP or TCP UDP applications with the following exceptions
140. 44 Symmetry a Not Running Throughput Symmetric Downstream and Upstream throughputs are the same mm Remote Asymmetric Downstream and Upstream throughputs are different Unidirectional Only test the network in one direction Measurement Direction Upstream Traffic is generated locally and measured by the remote test instrument Downstream Requires remote JDSU test instrument Traffic is generated remotely and is measured by the local test instrument A O C Connect Channel RFC 2544 L3 Network Settings Local Figure 61 Unidirectional Connection Options b Depending upon the chosen Throughput Type select Loopback or One Way Transmission and Direction if needed Loopback only available with Symmetric throughput type as the signal is being looped back to the source thus identical parameters are required One Way Transmission tests are only conducted in a single direction For Unidirectional Throughput type direction Upstream or Downstream must be specified Note that the diagram on the right of the interface page indicates the type of testing to be done and indicates if a second JDSU test instru ment is required at the remote location c Select Next the green arrow 2 If layer 3 testing has been selected the Local Network Setting screen appears to define the IP prioritization of the Local unit If layer 2 testing is being done go to step 4 a Enter the TOS value or
141. 450 Button Configure Appears At all times 5 Use the buttons at the bottom of the screen to do the following Used to Configure the NE port with the values you specified and take you to the Status tab The NE IP address must be specified before the port can be config ured Restore At all times Restore the NE s original con figuration values and takes you to the Status tab Exit At all times Exit the TAM script Upgrade If the TAM script is Install a detected upgrade from launched and the instru ment detects an upgrade on an attached USB key a USB key and take you to the Status tab The TAM settings are specified After a connection is established you can use the TAM script to configure and monitor the network element You can observe the status of each command executed on the Status tab The current version of the TAM server software appears on the Version tab For details on using TAM automation refer to the Q7 600 Ethernet and Triple Play Probe User Interface Guide Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 281 Chapter 10 Automated Testing Saving automated test report data Saving automated test report data 282 When each automated test is complete a dialog box appears asking if you would like to save a test report You can optionally append the progress log the text that appeared while you were running the test to the end of the report
142. 8 Understanding the graphical user interface on page 179 Populating the Address Book on page 183 Specifying interface settings on page 184 Specifying Ethernet frame and IP settings on page 184 Specifying VoIP settings on page 185 Specifying VoIP Filters on page 189 Placing and receiving calls on page 189 Capturing packets for analysis on page 191 Ethernet IP TCP UDP Fibre Chan VoIP and Video Testing Manual 177 Chapter 8 VoIP Testing About VoIP testing About VoIP testing Features and capabilities Understanding VoIP basics 178 If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so you can use it to verify the proper installation and configuration of Voice over IP VoIP service The VoIP option allows you to Place and receive calls call setup and teardown Voice conversation generate tone IP voice announce Auto answer Real time packet metrics delay jitter packet loss E model QoS and RTCP statistics User selectable CODEC MOS and R Factor results VoIP refers to a collection of standards and technologies for transporting Voice over Internet Protocol There are three basic functions that need to be performed in order for a voice conversation to take place 1 The first requirement to maintaining a voice conversation is call manage ment signaling This includes call setup teardown and maintenance These protocols standards
143. 8 Outputs Connections 00 e eee 339 One Way Delay Connections 0 0000 eee eee 339 Glossary 341 Index 349 Xiv Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual About this Manual This prefix explains how to use this manual Topics discussed include the following Purpose and scope on page xvi Assumptions on page xvi Terminology on page xvi Ethernet IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual on page xvii Conventions on page xvii Safety and compliance information on page xviii Technical assistance on page xix Ethernet IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual XV About this Manual Purpose and scope Purpose and scope The purpose of this manual is to help you successfully use the Ethernet IP and TCP IP test capabilities of the T BERD MTS 5800 This manual includes task based instructions that describe how to configure use and troubleshoot the general functions of your instrument Assumptions This manual is intended for novice intermediate and experienced users who want to use the T BERD MTS 5800 effectively and efficiently We are assuming that you have basic computer experience and are familiar with basic telecommunication concepts terminology and safety Terminology xvi The T BERD 5800 is branded as the MTS 5800 in Europe and it is inter changeably referred to as the T BERD 5800 MTS 5800 MTS 5800 MTS5800 and Med
144. 830 4M P1 Mon Thru P2 Mon Thru CPRI Layer2 614 4M Mon Thru 1228 8M Mon Thru 2457 6M Mon Thru 3072 0M Mon Thru OBSAI Layer 1 768M P1 Mon Thru P2 Mon Thru 1536M P1 Mon Thru P2 Mon Thru 3072 0M P1 Mon Thru P2 Mon Thru OBSAI Layer 2 768M Mon Thru 1536M Mon Thru 3072 0M Mon Thru 6144 0M Mon Thru 2 To specify the BER pattern select the Setup soft key and then the Pattern tab For Layer 1 CPRI OBSAI Select the Payload Analysis checkbox if it is desired to check for BERT pattern errors This will cause pattern sync bit errors etc to be reported in the results For Layer 2 CPRI OBSAI Select the Pattern tab Select the Pattern Mode desired Select the desired Pattern from the drop down list 3 For Layer 2 OBSAI To specify the OBSAI Rx parameters select the OBSAI tab Select the RP3 address of the OBSAI receiver Select the RP3 type from the drop down list 18 Ethernet IP TCP UDP Fibre Chan VoIP and Video Testing Manual 7 8 9 Chapter 3 CPRI OBSAI Testing Monitoring CPRI or OBSAI layer 1 For Layer 2 CPRI OBSAI If service disruption detection is desired select the Service Disruption tab Click the Enable checkbox Define the Separation Time and Threshold Time parameters by entering the desired values Click the Event triggers tab Click the events on the tabs for which service disruption notifications are desired Press Results to return to the Main screen Connect the module to t
145. A count of received Fibre Channel Class 2 frames since the last test start or restart Class 3 Frames A count of received Fibre Channel Class 3 frames since the last test start or restart Class F Frames A count of received Fibre Channel Class F frames since the last test start or restart Customer Tx Frame Bytes A count of the total number of VPLS customer frame bytes transmitted since the test was started The count starts at the Destination Address and continues to the Frame Check Sequence The count does not include the preamble Far End B B Credits Count of the number of credits communicated by the far end during ELP login 300 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results Table 39 L2 Link Counts results Continued Test Result MPLS TP Frames MPLS TP Tunnel Label MPLS TP Tunnel Priority MPLS TP Tunnel TTL Description A count of received MPLS TP frames since the test was started including errored frames Appears in the L2 SP Link Counts category Displays the tunnel label of the last MPLS TP encapsulated frame Appears in the L2 Customer Link Counts category Displays the tunnel priority of the last MPLS TP encapsulated frame Appears in the L2 Customer Link Counts category Displays the tunnel TTL value of the last MPLS TP encapsulated frame Appears in the L2 Customer Link Counts category MPLS
146. After choosing the tests you are ready to run the test To run tests 1 From the J QuickCheck page do one of the following Select the Start button The J QuickCheck test using the source and destination data entered verifies that the connections detailed in the test setup are functioning as needed for the proper operation of the test As J QuickCheck is completing its analysis of the circuit graphics along the top of the page provide a visual indication of the circuit structure and its suitability for the selected test If a remote device is necessary J QuickCheck first checks to see if a connection to the remote device has been established If it has not a message is displayed indicating the connection must first be estab lished For Loopback tests J QuickCheck tests the Local port for proper oper ation and then checks for loopback in a remote device If no remote active loop is detected it then verifies whether a hard loop is in place After J QuickCheck completes select Next the green arrow Go to step 2 To skip the J QuickCheck test select the Skip J QuickCheck button at the bottom of the window 2 The Run Y 1564 Tests page appears There is a display bar for each service under Service Configuration and also for each test verdict under Service Performance These indicate the status of each test to be run Please refer to the Test Status Key at the bottom of the page to interpret these display bars Do the
147. Bandwidth Figure 15 Ramped traffic You can also specify criteria to tell the instrument to stop ramping if an error or errors occurs in a load step NOTE When configuring a ramped load of traffic for a particular stream when run ning a multiple streams application the triggers for stopping the ramp are not available To configure the instrument to transmit a ramped load of traffic 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the test appli cation for the interface you are testing Refer to Table 7 on page 25 through Table 8 on page 25 for a list of layer 2 and layer 3 applications Table 15 on page 129 lists layer 4 applications 2 Select the Setup soft key and then select the Traffic tab 3 In Load Type select Ramp and then specify the following settings a Time Step sec Enter the time step in seconds b Load Step Enter the load step as a percentage of the total band width 4 Optional If you want to stop the ramp from incrementing when certain errors occur under Stop Load Increments specify the following Errored Frames If you want to stop incrementing the load if FCS errored frames are detected select Yes and then enter the number of errored frames that must be detected to stop the ramp Dropped Frames If you want to stop incrementing the load if dropped frames are detected select Yes and then enter the number of dropped frames that must be detected to stop the ramp N
148. CP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Capturing packets for analysis 9 Select the Capture tab and specify a Post Trigger Size This is the amount of data in MB to capture after the trigger event occurs If set to zero the capture stops immediately after the trigger event muy NOTE When capturing packets based on a trigger the capture buffer saves in wrap around mode overwrite the oldest packets with new packets when the buffer becomes full 10 Select the Capture toolbar and then select Start Capture A message appears in the message bar indicating that the capture has started and the action key states Capture Started The capture will begin when the trigger event occurs which will be when the data matches the filter criteria Captured packets are stored temporarily in the capture buffer A count of the number of packets processed is provided in the Ethernet result group in the Capture category w WARNING Changing applications or turning OFF the instrument You will lose the entire contents of the capture buffer if you launch a new application on the port that you are capturing packets on or if you turn your instrument OFF To ensure that the packets are stored save the capture buffer before changing applications or turning the instrument OFF Triggering using the filters and byte pattern simultaneously as a trigger 1 Press the Setup soft key 2 Select Capture tab and then set Capture to Enable 3 Se
149. Capturing packets for analysis The buttons on the Capture toolbar illustrated in Figure 18 are used to enable or disable the capture feature start and stop the capture process save the packets in the capture buffer to the internal USB drive or an external drive or launch Wireshark or J Mentor to analyze the packets on the instrument a Laser Actions Capture Enable Save Capture Capture Buffer Figure 18 Capture Toolbar Wireshark J Mentor Buffer J 38 The Buffer Full gauge shows the percentage of the available buffer capacity that is used When you capture traffic at a high bandwidth or specify a small buffer size if you configure the capture to wrap overwrite the oldest packets in the buffer with new captured packets in 1 MB increments the buffer gauge may appear to jump around If you do not wrap the packets the capture process may stop very soon after you start it because the buffer reaches capacity quickly This is expected behavior If you specify filter settings when you configure the application the settings determine which received traffic is captured to the buffer The Capture Toolbar illustrated in Figure 18 indicates whether filters are active or inactive Transmitted control plane frames are always captured to the buffer When capturing frames on circuits at rates up to 1 Gigabit Ethernet all other trans mitted frames are captured To specify filter settings before capturing f
150. Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Measuring one way delay 102 CDMA GPS receivers ATP GPS test packets Network diagram To accurately measure delay in one direction the time on both nodes must be precisely synchronized The instruments use external CDMA receivers to ensure that both instruments are synchronized providing measurements that are accurate within 10 us A CDMA base station is synchronized to GPS time and broadcasts this time to the receivers which are connected to your instruments The receivers provide periodic messages with Coordinated Universal Time UTC time and an accurate 1PPS signal into the BNC connector on your instrument A GPS receiver obtains highly accurate timing information directly from the GPS Satellite Each T BERD MTS 5800 in the system that needs to be synchronized must have its own GPS receiver The receivers provide periodic messages with Coordinated Universal Time UTC time via a DB9 or RJ 45 connector and an accurate 1PPS signal into the BNC or SMA connector on your instrument Whether connected to a CDMA or GPS receiver your instrument uses the messages and signals to synchronize its internal clock with GPS time Outgoing packets are then marked with GPS timestamps see ATP GPS test packets on page 102 When your test instrument is synchronized to GPS Time via the CDMA or GPS receiver it tags outgoing Acterna Test Packets ATP with GPS timestamps The timestamps are required for
151. Configuring VPLS traffic 0 2 eee 48 Configuring MPLS traffic esie ere eerie oeut eeri etra ee 49 Configuring LBM Traffic anaa aaa aaua 49 Specifying Ethernet filter settings nannaa aaa 49 Filtering traffic using Q in Q criteria 2 0 2 2 ee eee 52 Filtering traffic using stacked VLAN criteria 53 Filtering traffic using VPLS criteria 000002 ue 54 Filtering traffic using MPLS criteria 000002 ae 55 Filtering traffic using byte pattern criteria 56 Filtering traffic using payload criteria 20 000 57 vi Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Contents Specifying traffic load settings 0 0 0 0 c ec ee Transmitting a constant load 0 0 cee ee Transmitting a bursty load 2 aaa aaua ee Transmitting a ramped load 0 c eee ee Transmitting and analyzing layer 2 traffic 0 2000 Transmitting and analyzing layer 2 patterns 040 Monitoring layer 2 traffic 6 ee Transmitting and analyzing layer 2 MPLS TP T MPLS or MPLS traffic About MPES TP siseseid ee aaidle eee bales tbl whe aug ad Analyzing MPLS TP OAM 000 e eee eee Transmitting and analyzing MPLS TP traffic Using J Proof to verify layer 2 transparency 0 00 eee Understanding transparent loopbacks Configuring the traffic originating i
152. Create Report Go pa 6 Repeat Test Go ica on Change Configuration and Rerun Test Go p View Detailed Results Go imaj K co Run Tests RTT Figure 91 TrueSpeed Post test Window Do one of the following To create a report of the results of the test that just completed select the Go arrow on the Create Report line Go to step 4 To repeat the test that just ran select the Go arrow on the Repeat Test line Go back to step 2 To reconfigure the test and then run it again select the Go arrow on the Change Configuration and Rerun Test line Go to step 7 of Configuring the TrueSpeed test on page 270 To view detailed results of the performance achieved during the test select the Go arrow on the View Detailed Results line The detailed results are presented on a sequence of windows that vary depending upon the steps in the test that were selected to be run On the last page of the results select the right pointing green arrow Go to step 6 4 The Report Info window appears Enter the desired information into the fields and identify the location of a logo that should be added to the report When all desired information has been defined select the Next arrow 5 The Report window appears Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 277 Chapter 10 Automated Testing Testing using TAM automation Identify the location where the report is to be saved the format of
153. Current Tx Collisions Tx Frame Bytes Tx Late Collisions Unicast Frames L2 Filter Stats results Table 40 L2 Filter Stats results Test Result Description A count of the current number of credits the transmitter can use to send frames Each time a frame is transmitted the count decreases by one each time a frame is acknowledged from the far end through an R_RDY the count increases by one up to the maximum value established during login A count of the number of times the unit has transmitted a frame and then received a jam signal in the time slot for the frame Result only appears for half duplex 10 100 Ethernet tests A count of the total number of frame bytes transmitted since the test was started The count starts at the Destination Address and continues to the Frame Check Sequence The count does not include the preamble A count of the number of times the unit has transmitted a frame and then experi ences a collision more than 64 byte times after the transmission begins Result only appears for half duplex 10 100 Ethernet tests The number of Ethernet unicast frames received since the last test restart Table 40 describes the L2 Filter Stats and L2 Customer Filter Stats results for filtered traffic such as the average frame rate peak frame rate and the maximum minimum and average round trip delay measurements When testing VPLS or MPLS TP encapsulated traffic the layer 2 filter statistic results appear
154. I or MDI X pair the pair assignments for 1000M links the polarity for each MDI pair and the pair skew You can also use the instrument to verify whether or not Power over Ethernet PoE service is available on the link per IEEE 802 3af Finally if the link is inactive you can use the instrument to determine the nature of the fault Cable diagnostics should not be run in PPPoE Data Mode when running layer 3 test applications Running cable diagnostics Running cable diagnostics involves connecting to the link launching the Cable Diagnostics tool and then observing the measurements provided on the Cable Diagnostics screen To run cable diagnostics 1 If you haven t already done so turn ON the T BERD MTS 5800 and launch a 10 100 1000 electrical Ethernet application and verify that Auto negotiation is turned ON 2 Select the Toolkit softkey and then select the Cable Diagnostics tool The Cable Diagnostics screen appears 3 Connect the T BERD MTS 5800 to the link 4 Verify that traffic is not being transmitted The Start Traffic action button should be gray 5 To start the diagnostics select Analyze Cable 6 Observe the cable results and measurements Cable diagnostics are complete 30 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Adjusting the frequency of transmitted optical signals Viewing cable measurements Cable measurements appear automatically on the Cable Diagnostics scre
155. ILED 11 When the test is complete a dialog box appears asking if you would like to save a test report For details see Saving automated test report data on page 282 The VLAN test is complete The report will provide the total number of VLANs tested the total number of successes and the total number of failures It can also optionally include the test progress log that appeared as you were running the test Automated FTP Throughput tests 264 If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so you can use it to run the FTP Throughput test This test is used to transfer files of a known size using FTP and then measure the actual FTP throughput When calculating the throughput the test considers key factors such as the link speed frame size latency on the link delay and the TCP window size For details contact Customer Care for a copy of the FTP Throughput Testing white paper To run the FTP Throughput test 1 Establish a LAN connection to the network using one of the Ethernet test interfaces on the E1 Tester or MSAM Do not use the RJ 45 connector provided on the base unit 2 Ifyou haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the Layer 3 or Layer 4 Traffic application for the circuit you are testing see Launching a single automated test on page 225 3 Specify the settings required to initialize the link see Specifying interface settings on page 41 and to establish a connection to the
156. L File Name RFC 2544 2013 09 22720 21 11 Select View report after creation Create View R Report Report ga Skip Report Creation aap Report Info End Create Report Fig ure 73 RFC 2544 Report Window Do the following a Select the format in which the report is to be saved by selecting the radio button in Format pane Specify the filename of the report To review the filenames of other currently saved reports on the unit select the Select button You may view saved reports by selecting the View Report button To show a copy of the current report after saving it check the View report after creation checkbox The report will automatically load into the appropriate reader if available depending upon the format in which it has been saved When ready to save the report select the Create Report button After it has been saved and viewed select the right pointing green arrow 6 The post report results window appears All options available on this window are described in step 2 with the excep tion of the Exit RFC 2544 test To exit the RFC 2544 test application select the Go arrow after Exit RFC 2544 test Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 249 Chapter 10 Automated Testing SAMComplete 7 The Exit window appears 4 Are you sure you want to exit Restore Setups on Exit Start Over T Exit X cancel Figure 74 E
157. LB to loop received traffic back to the local unit 172 Using Loop Up to initiate a loop back from the local unit 174 Chapter 8 VoIP Testing 177 About VolP testing 5 eeac bee cle Se et ee ke aerate ee 178 Features and capabilities 20 2 000 eee ees 178 Understanding VoIP basics 0 0000 cee ee ee 178 Understanding the graphical user interface 179 Action buttons e iia D ia I a oa cece 179 Understanding the LED panel anuanua aaae 179 Understanding the VoIP call bar 0 0 cee eee 180 Understanding VoIP test results 000 eee 180 Layered view Quality Layer Buttons 000 180 Layered View Button Colors a an aaaea ccc eee 181 Navigating the results display 000 c ee eee eee 182 VoIP test applications 0 002 cee ee 183 Populating the Address Book 200 eee ee eee eee eee 183 Specifying interface settings 02 cee eee eee 184 Specifying Ethernet frame and IP settings 184 Specifying VoIP settingS 0 0c e eee eee eee eee 185 Specifying VoIP Filters 0 0 cece eee 189 Placing and receiving CallS 0 0c e eee eee eee 189 Registering with the server 0 000 c eee ee eee 189 Placing Galle 484d eee ot Sob ea is By a ah Da il 190 Receiving calls manually 0 0 000 cee ee eee 190 Automatically answering calls 0 0 2 0 e
158. LBM LBR or LTM LTR on when you configured the OAM settings you can send LBM ping messages or LTM trace messages and then ensure that you receive LBR or LTR messages to verify OAM connectivity To send an LBM or LTM message 1 On the Main screen select the OAM action panel 2 Select LBM or LTM The instrument sends an LBM or LTM and reports the number of transmitted LBM or LTM frames and received LBR or LTR frames in the OAM result cate gory MAC in MAC testing 114 If you purchased the MAC in MAC option for your instrument a series of MAC in MAC MiM applications are available which allow you to transmit and analyze unicast layer 2 Ethernet traffic carried on a PBB Provider Backbone Bridged trunk When configuring the traffic you specify a backbone destina tion address B DA backbone source address B SA and backbone tag B TAG which designate the path for the backbone frame to the destina tion You can also characterize the customer frame carried in the backbone frame by specifying the frame type I TAG settings encapsulation settings and frame size Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Understanding MAC in MAC test results Understanding the MAC in MAC LEDs Configuring layer 2 MAC in MAC tests Specifying interface settings Specifying Ethernet frame settings Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing MAC in MAC testing When analyzing MiM traffic you can set up a filter on the recei
159. OTE Acterna frames carry a sequence number which the unit uses to determine whether frames were dropped therefore you must configure your unit to transmit an Acterna payload turn payload analysis on and loop the far end device back to the traffic originating unit Pause Frames If you want to stop incrementing the load if pause frames are detected select Yes and then enter the number of pause frames that must be detected to stop the ramp Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 61 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 2 testing 62 Transmitting and analyzing layer 2 traffic 5 If you need to specify other settings for the test select the appropriate tab otherwise press Results to return to the Main screen The instrument is configured to transmit ramped traffic Before you transmit layer 2 traffic you must specify Interface settings see Specifying interface settings on page 41 Frame characteristics for the transmitted traffic see Specifying Ethernet frame settings on page 43 Frame characteristics used to filter received traffic see Specifying Ethernet filter settings on page 49 Traffic load settings see Specifying traffic load settings on page 58 After you specify the layer 2 settings you are ready to transmit and analyze the layer 2 traffic NOTE Layer 2 BERT testing Layer 2 BERT patterns carried in a BERT payload are not compatib
160. OUT PPPOE FAILED PPP LCP FAILED PPP AUTHENTICATION FAILED PPP IPCP FAILED PPP UP FAILED INVALID CONFIG Source IP Address N Displays the IP address assigned by the DHCP server to the currently selected port Src Global IP Address Displays the global address assigned to the instru ment manually or during the auto configuration pro cess for IPv6 connections Src Link Local IP Address 4 Displays the link local address of the instrument if you are running an IPv6 application DAD duplicate address detection must determine that there are no other devices with the link local address before the address appears Subnet Prefix Length Ni Displays the subnet prefix length used to generate the required IPv6 global address for the instrument Preferred DNS Address 4 The address of the preferred DNS server Alternate DNS Address 4 The address of the alternate DNS server Resolved Name N Ni The resolved hostname The domain name associ ated with the IP address Ping results Table 55 describes the Ping results associated with the transmission of Ethernet Ping packets Table 55 Ping results Test Result Description Delay Avg ms The round trip delay for all pings sent and successfully received by the E1 Tester since the last test restart Calculated in milliseconds Delay Max ms The maximum round trip delay for the pings sent and successfully received by the E1 Tes ter
161. Optical Optical LAN WAN Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Layer 2 Traffic V V V V V Layer 2 Multi y y V V V ple Streams Layer 3 Traffic V V V V V Layer 3 Multi y y V V V ple Streams Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 171 Chapter 7 Loop back Testing Specifying a unit identifier Table 19 Applications used for loop back testing Continued 107100 100 FX 1 GigE 10GigE 10 GigE Application 1000 Optical Optical LAN WAN Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Layer 4 Traffic V V V V N A Layer 4 Multi y V V V N A ple Streams 1 If both units are capable of generating traffic select a Terminate mode application for each unit If the loop back unit cannot generate traffic place it in Loop back mode Specifying a unit identifier You can specify an identifier to be carried in all loop up and loop down frames originating from your unit This allows a technician on the far end to determine where the loop commands came from The default identifier for the T BERD MTS 5800 is JDSU 5800 To specify a unit identifier 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the application for the interface you are testing 2 Select the Setup soft key and then select the Interface tab 3 Select the Unit Identifier setting and then type the identifier using up to 25 characters The identifier is specified NOTE If you are observing loop up or loop down messages on another T BERD MTS
162. P observe the Message Log to verify that ARP successfully determined the destination MAC address 6 On the Main screen do one of the following Ifyou are running the RFC 2544 test press the Enhanced RFC 2544 Test soft key and proceed to Configuring the Enhanced RFC 2544 or Fibre Channel tests on page 237 Ifyou are running the automated multiple Ethernet service verification SAMComplete test press the SAMComplete soft key and proceed to SAMComplete on page 250 Ifyou are running the FTP Throughput or HTTP Throughput automated test press the press the Toolkit soft key and then select the test you want to run from the Select Tool menu Proceed to Automated FTP Throughput tests on page 264 or Automated HTTP Throughput tests on page 266 If you are running the TCP Throughput automated test press the Toolkit soft key and then select TCP Throughput Proceed to Running TCP Host applications on page 137 of Chapter 5 TCP UDP Testing The automated test is launched Automated RFC 2544 If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so you can use it to run tests that automate the procedures recommended in RFC 2544 for layer 2 Ethernet layer 3 IP or layer 4 TCP UDP The tests prompt you to select key parameters for throughput round trip delay frame loss rate and back to back frame tests run the tests and then automatically generates a text file of results for the tests a
163. P 1588 Terminate Layer 4 PTP 1588 1GigE Optical Layer 2 PTP 1588 Terminate Layer 4 PTP 1588 When you use the instrument to test 10 Gigabit WAN interfaces you can specify settings that characterize the SONET or SDH network in addition to the settings used to characterize the Ethernet data Essentially the setup tabs are a combination of those used to specify SONET or SDH settings and those used for the Ethernet applications discussed in this chapter When configuring the instrument to test a WAN interface refer to the PDH SONET and SDH Testing Manual for details on each of the SONET SDH setup tabs NOTE When configuring for WAN testing default SONET SDH overhead values are per IEEE 802 3ae Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Configuring Ethernet VPLS tests VPLS tunnels Virtual channels VPLS test applications Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing About Ethernet and IP testing The instrument allows you to configure and transmit layer 2 VPLS traffic see Figure 7 by specifying tunnel and virtual circuit label settings PE CE Service Provider wise 9 MPLS Backbone Figure 7 VPLS network Figure 8 illustrates generic tunnel and virtual circuit VC labels which together comprise a VPLS header Shaded fields are user configurable Stack S 1 bit Stack S 1 bit Figure 8 Generic tunnel and VC labels When configuring traffic for VPLS testing be certain to specify labels that
164. PS Option Package Contents Category Description GPS Receiver Model TM 4M Spectrum Instruments Antenna Attenuator J Bullet attenuator 500 Ohm JDSU Cables Coaxial BNC to BNC Coaxial SMA to BNC Coaxial SMA to SMA RS232 DB 9F to RJ 45 RS232 DB 9 to DBY Adapter Coaxial SMA to BNC Converter RS 232 to USB Carrying Case Documentation TM 4M User s Manual Spectrum Instruments Software TM 4M Windows OS Spectrum Instruments Ethernet IP TCP UDP Fibre Chan VoIP and Video Testing Manual Appendix A GPS Option for Timing Verification and Analysis Outputs Connections Outputs Connections The TM 4M GPS has two reference outputs a Time of Day ToD signal on an RS 232 DB9 connector and a 1PPS timing signal on a BNC coaxial connector The manner in which the signals are introduced into the JDSU equipment varies depending upon the application with which they are being used Refer to the Hard Card delivered with the GPS Option Kit for information concerning how to prepare your instrument for use One Way Delay Connections Depending on the options purchased and the configuration of your equipment you will have to use cabling appropriate for your equipment Figure 97 shows the cabling and connectors for the GPS option to be used to conduct One Way Delay measurements with the instrument MTS 5800 Diagram for OWD Configuration Right side view Top view A 6 ft Cable se
165. Post test Window Do one of the following To create a report of the results of the test that just completed select the Go arrow on the Create Report line Go to step 3 To repeat the test that just ran select the Go arrow on the Repeat Test line Go back to Running Enhanced RFC 2544 and FC tests on page 244 To reconfigure the test and then run it again select the Go arrow on the Change Configuration and Rerun Test line Go to step 2 of Manu ally configuring all parameters on page 239 To view detailed results of the performance achieved during the test select the Go arrow on the View Detailed Results line The detailed results are presented on a sequence of windows that vary depending upon the steps in the test that were selected to be run On the last page of the results select the right pointing green arrow Go to step 3 3 The report info screen will display This screen allows the user to enter information about the test environ ment which will be added to the report This information includes Customer Name Technician ID Test Location Work Order Comments Notes Custom Logo from memory 4 After all the desired data is entered into the entry boxes select Next the green arrow 248 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 10 Automated Testing Automated RFC 2544 5 The Report window appears Tso Format PDF CSV Text HTML XM
166. Pv4 packet settings Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 3 testing The following messages may appear in the during the PPPoE login process Typically Indicates The user name password or pro vider name you specified were not accepted by the PPPoE server The instrument is not physically connected to a PPPoE server or it is configured to use a service that is not supported by the server The physical Ethernet link to the instrument is lost There is a problem with the server The PPPoE server dropped a suc cessful PPPoE session The instrument experienced an internal error Resolution It is possible that the user name and pass word you specified were not recognized by the PPPoE server Verify that you specified the correct name and password If the PPPoE server requires a provider name verify that the name you specified when you configured the PPP settings is correct It is possible that the PPPoE server does not require a provider name if so specify ing one in the PPP settings results in a failed authentication Set the Provider Name setting to No and then try to estab lish the session again Try to establish a new session with the server Verify that the instrument is physically con nected to the server Verify that the service name you specified is correct or if a service name is not required by the server set the Service Name setting to No Try to establish a new session with the se
167. S and then specify the following Setting MOS Scaling Jitter Threshold Delay Threshold Loss Threshold Content Threshold Description Specify the scale used for MOS results Specify the pass and fail thresholds for the jitter result Specify the pass and fail thresholds for the delay result Specify the pass and fail thresholds for the loss result Specify the pass and fail thresholds for the MOS results The VoIP settings are specified 188 Ethernet IP TCP UDP Fibre Chan VoIP and Video Testing Manual Chapter 8 VoIP Testing Specifying VoIP Filters Specifying VoIP Filters If you wish to capture VoIP packets you can specify filters to capture specific types of packets To specify VoIP filter settings 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the test appli cation for the interface you are testing Refer to Table 21 on page 183 fora list of applications 2 Select the Setup soft key and then select the VoIP Filters tab 3 Specify the type of filter Setting Description Signaling Only incoming and outgoing signaling control packets shall be captured Incoming signaling control packets destined for the unit based on destination IP address of incoming packets shall only be sent to the capture buffer Signaling packets shall include RTCP packets H 323 SIP SCCP call control packets Audio Only audio packets for the call in progress shall be sent to the capture buffer Incoming pa
168. Sliding Window match the pattern any where in the header Byte Pattern In the graphic of the Byte Pattern click on the individual bit and set the hex pattern and the mask The mask specifies whether to match both bits FF one bit OF or FO or don t care 00 You can filter traffic using payload criteria or you can turn payload analysis off entirely To specify payload filter settings 1 Inthe panel on the left side of the tab select Rx Payload then specify the following Setting Value Payload Analysis Specify one of the following Off If you want the instrument to monitor and analyze live Ethernet traffic by suppressing lost frames LF or BERT errors in their associated result counts and as triggers for LEDs during pay load analysis select Off On If you want to analyze traffic carrying a par ticular BERT pattern select On Use Tx BERT set Specify one of the following tings Ifyou want the instrument to monitor and analyze traffic carrying a different BERT pattern than the one specified for transmitted traffic un check the box Ifyou want to analyze traffic carrying the same BERT pattern carried in transmitted traffic check the box Rx Payload Specify Acterna or BERT Payload Analysis On and Use Tx BERT settings un checked Rx BERT Pattern If you unchecked Use Tx BERT settings specify the Payload Analysis On BERT pattern carried in the filtered traffic and Use Tx BERT settings
169. Specify the sync message rate the rate at which sync messages are transmitted Specify the delay request message rate the rate at which delay request messages are transmit ted If testing in the Slave mode and using unicast address mode specifies the rate at which unicast messages are transmitted If testing in the Slave mode and using unicast address mode specifies the unicast lease dura tion in seconds In Master mode specify the priority 1 value the priority is used in the execution of the best mas ter clock algorithm In Master mode specify the priority 2 value the priority is used in the execution of the best mas ter clock algorithm Specify the clock class the traceability of the time and frequency distributed by the grandmas ter clock Specify the source of time used by the grand master clock Specify the estimated accuracy of the grandmas ter clock Press Results to return to the Main screen If testing toward a unit that is in loopback the stream bandwidth should be limited to 95 on the All Streams tab using Configure Streams Connect the instrument to the circuit If you are testing an optical interface select the Laser button If testing layer4 streams the Stream IP destinations must complete ARP successfully before PTP Session can be started Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Discovering traffic using J Pro
170. Stream and then specify the addresses on the tabs corresponding to each enabled stream see Specifying layer 2 stream settings on page 156 To specify the LBM LBR traffic mode on Layer 2 Traffic Terminate appli cations select LBM Traffic from the options in the Test Mode drop down box This option is not applicable to VPLS streams and will auto matically change VPLS Mode to Disabled when selected Layer 3 MPLS streams If you want to transmit MPLS encapsulated traffic set MPLS mode to Enabled and then specify the source MAC address Enable or disable ARP mode If you enable ARP mode specify the source IP for this hop the destina tion IP address and subnet mask for the next hop Next specify source IP address default gateway and subnet mask for the customer Layer 3 These addresses will be used for all enabled streams Layer 3 Non MPLS streams If you do not want to transmit MPLS encapsulated traffic set MPLS Mode to Disabled then enable or disable ARP mode In the Layer 3 section of the window define the Source IP Type Indicate whether it is desired to use DHCP to assign a single source IP address to all enabled streams to manually assign a static address to be carried in all enabled streams or to assign a unique source IP address to each enabled stream To specify a single static address in Source Type select Static and then specify the source IP address default gateway and subnet mask for the c
171. TL value for the last received MPLS encapsulated frame Displays the maximum number of MPLS TP labels for all frames received since starting the test Result appears in the L2 SP Link Stats category MPLS TP Label Depth Min Displays the minimum number of MPLS TP labels for all frames received since starting the test Result appears in the L2 SP Link Stats category Packet Jitter us Preceding SVLANs Rx Mbps Cur L1 Rx Mbps Cur L2 Instantaneous The current Packet Jitter measured over the prior second of test time Average The smoothed average value of the packet delay variation since the last test restart per RFC 1889 calculated in microseconds Max Average The maximum Packet Jitter Avg us measured since the last test restart calculated in microseconds Peak The highest packet delay variation measured since the last test restart calculated in microseconds Displays the SVLAN ID priority and DEI of stacked VLANs The current bandwidth utilized by the received traffic expressed in megabits per second This measurement is an average taken over the prior second of test time The current data rate of received frames calculated over the prior second of test time Data rate is the frame bandwidth excluding the preamble start of frame delimiter and minimum inter frame gap Rx Pause Length ms The duration in milliseconds of currently received pause frames taken over the prior second
172. TP VC Label Displays the VC label of the last MPLS TP encapsulated frame Appears in the L2 Customer Link Counts category MPLS TP VC Priority Displays the VC priority of the last MPLS TP encapsulated frame Appears in the L2 Customer Link Counts category MPLS TP VC TTL Multicast Frames Near end B B Credits Pause Frames Received Frames Rx Acterna Frames Rx Collisions Displays the VC TTL value of the last MPLS TP encapsulated frame Appears in the L2 Customer Link Counts category The number of Ethernet multicast frames received since the last test restart Count of the number of credits communicated by the near end during Implicit login A count of pause frames received from a remote Ethernet device Pause frames are utilized for flow control and alert the transmitting device that it must reduce the outgo ing frame rate or risk a receiver overflow on the far end resulting in dropped traffic A count of frames received since the last test restart including errored frames A count of received Acterna frames including errored frames A count of the number of times the unit has received a jam signal while it was not transmitting frames Result only appears for half duplex 10 100 Ethernet tests Rx Frame Bytes Rx MPLS Frames A count of the total number of frame bytes received since the test was started The count starts at the Destination Address and continues to the Frame Check Sequence The count doe
173. The Time category provides the current date time and the time elapsed since the last test start or restart Table 74 describes each of the Time results Table 74 Time results Result Description Current Date Current day and month Current Time Current time of day in hours minutes and seconds hh mm ss Test Elapsed Time Amount of time in hours minutes and seconds hh mm ss since the last test restart 332 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Troubleshooting This chapter describes how to identify and correct issues encountered when testing using the instrument If you experience problems when testing using your instrument you may be able to solve these problems on your own after referring to this section If you experience significant problems with the instru ment call the Technical Assistance Center see Technical assistance on page xix Topics discussed in this chapter include the following Before testing on page 334 Performing tests on page 334 Upgrades and options on page 335 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 333 Chapter 12 Troubleshooting Before testing Before testing The test application need is not available l am receiving unexpected errors when running optical applications Resolution The following section addresses questions that may be asked about assem bling the various components before testing Some applica
174. Y 1564 Are you sure you want to exit Restore Setups on Exit Exit MX cance e Start Over Figure 82 SAMComplete Exit page Do one of the following To start the SAMComplete Y 1564 test from the beginning select the Start Over button Go to Configuring SAMComplete test settings on page 251 To restore the configuration setups to their default values when leaving the application check the box Restore Setups on Exit To completely exit the SAMComplete application select Exit To return to the previous window select Cancel The SAMComplete test has been run Automated VLAN tests If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so you can use it to run the automated VLAN test This test is used to test a range of VLANs by transmit ting and looping back frames for each VLAN in the range for a user specified test period and then comparing the number of frames transmitted to the number received If all transmitted frames are received within the test period the test is considered a success for the VLAN If one or more frames are lost the test is considered a failure To test a range of VLANs 1 Establish a LAN connection to the network using one of the Ethernet test interfaces on the E1 Tester or MSAM Do not use the RJ 45 connector provided on the base unit 2 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the Layer 2 Layer 3 or Layer 4 Traffic Terminate application
175. a high degree of precision or a low degree of preci sion In most instances you should select the high precision setting 6 To specify additional settings for each individual stream see Specifying layer 2 stream settings on page 156 Specifying layer 3 stream settings on page 157 or Specifying layer 4 stream settings on page 158 7 Ifyou do not need to specify other settings select the Results soft key to return to the Main screen Common traffic characteristics are specified You can specify the frame type frame size and encapsulation settings for each individual stream when configuring standard Multiple Streams applica tions or for each type of stream VoIP SDTV HDTV Data 1 and Data 2 when configuring Triple Play applications After specifying settings for a stream or type of stream you can optionally copy the settings to every stream To specify layer 2 stream settings 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the Multiple Streams Triple Play or TCP Wirespeed test application for the interface you are testing refer to Table 16 on page 148 and Table 18 on page 160 for a list of applications 2 Select the Setup soft key and then select the tab corresponding the stream or type of stream you are configuring 3 Select the Ethernet sub tab and then specify the frame type length type and optional encapsulation settings For details refer to Specifying Ethernet frame sett
176. a test frames in the traffic For example if the T BERD MTS 5800 detects sequence numbers 1 2 3 6 7 8 frames 4 and 5 were not detected the lost frame count is incremented by two frames 4 and 5 are lost If the T BERD MTS 5800 then detects sequence numbers 9 10 14 15 16 frames 11 12 and 13 are missing the lost frame count is incremented by three resulting in a total count of five lost frames NOTE If the T BERD MTS 5800 receives frames containing errors in the sequence number field the Lost Frames count will be incorrect A count of each instance where the T BERD MTS 5800 detects out of sequence Acterna test frames in the filtered traffic For example if the TBERD MTS 5800 detects sequence numbers 1 2 3 6 7 8 frame 6 is detected immediately following frame 3 the out of sequence count is incremented by one resulting in a count of one instance of out of sequence frames If the T BERD MTS 5800 then detects sequence numbers 9 10 14 15 16 frame 14 is detected immediately following frame 10 the out of sequence number is incremented again by one resulting in a total count of two instances of out of sequence frames The ratio of lost packets to the number of total packets A count of Ethernet frames under the minimum 64 byte frame length containing Frame Check Sequence FCS errors Seconds during which 30 or more of the frames were lost contained FCS errors or Loss of Link was detected The following cal
177. able modify this profile check the box Save as read only d To save the file to memory select the Save Profiles button Then select Next the green arrow 13 The Run Edit window appears Do one of the following To return to the beginning and modify the current configuration select the Go arrow after Change Configuration Go to step 2 of To configure test settings on page 251 To load a previously saved set of configuration parameters select the Go arrow after Load Configuration from a Profile Go to step 1 of To configure test settings on page 251 Torun the test as configured select the Go arrow after Select and Run Tests Go to Choosing SAMComplete tests on page 259 SAMComplete has been configured After specifying test settings you must choose whether to run one or both of the tests Service Configuration or Service Performance Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 259 Chapter 10 Automated Testing SAMComplete To choose the tests 1 Onthe Select Y 1564 Tests page select Enable if you wish to run the Service Configuration and or Service Performance tests 2 If you wish to include the optional throughput measurement in the test check the box to enable the test and then specify the Max throughput allowed 3 Select Next the green arrow The J QuickCheck page appears Go to Running SAMComplete tests on page 260 Running SAMComplete tests
178. able test results You will need a USB stick for transferring the files To export a RFC configuration 1 Verify that you have a USB stick inserted into the instrument 2 After specifying the settings for your Enhanced RFC test save the config uration 3 Exit the test 4 From the Tools menu select Export to USB and then Saved Test Config 5 Locate the expert_rfc file or files you wish to export Click on the file to select it click again to un select it Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Configuring the Enhanced RFC 2544 or Fibre Channel tests Specifying the external test settings Chapter 10 Automated Testing Automated RFC 2544 6 Do one of the following If exporting multiple files and you wish to zip them before exporting click the Zip selected files as box and specify a file name for the resulting tar file and then click Zip amp Export If exporting files without zipping or are exporting a single file Click Export The files are copied to the USB stick To import a RFC configuration 1 Verify that you have a USB stick inserted into the instrument 2 From the Tools menu select Import from USB and then Saved Test Config 3 Locate the file or files you wish to import Click on the file to select it click again to un select it 4 Do one of the following Ifimporting a zipped file click Unzip amp Import If importing one or more files that are not compressed
179. accurate one way delay measurements The receiving instrument recognizes these packets and uses them when measuring one way delay Figure 22 shows a typical placement of the test instruments and their relation ship to the CDMA receivers and base stations In this configuration synchro nized instrument B measures the delay in traffic received from instrument A and synchronized instrument A measures the delay in traffic received from instrument B Each instrument operates in terminate mode and only measures delay on the inbound link Base Stations yt broadcast GPS time a CDMA Receiver CDMA Receiver connected to A connected to B ATP GPS Transport Network ATP GPS Instrument B Instrument A Figure 22 Typical one way delay configuration Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Things to consider Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Measuring one way delay Both test ports can be used on the instruments allowing you to measure one way delay for two different circuits simultaneously Figure 23 illustrates a configuration used to measure one way delay from A to B and from A to C You could also transmit traffic from instruments B and C and measure delay for both circuits on two independent ports on Instrument A Instrument C Instrument A Figure 23 Dual Port configuration For systems utilizing GPS receivers instead of CDMA receivers the system is very similar except that the GPS receiver
180. ace If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so you can use it to verify layer 4 performance by transmitting and analyze TCP or UDP traffic verifying that routers are prioritizing traffic for various ports properly and verifying that the bandwidth allocated to a customer per their Service Level Agreement is available Features and capabilities of the instrument include the following when testing TCP UDP Performance measurements Layer 4 bandwidth data loss out of sequence jitter and latency measurements are available when evaluating layer 4 performance Stateless firewall verification You can configure and transmit TCP and UDP traffic destined for a particular port and then verify that the traffic successfully passes through a stateless firewall TCP connection support The instrument can establish a TCP connec tion enabling you to verify that traffic destined for a particular port can pass through stateful devices on the network Multiple stream testing You can transmit and analyze up to ten streams of layer 4 traffic with each stream depicting a particular type of traffic After transmitting the streams you can analyze each stream to verify that network routing and switching devices are handling the traffic properly based on each stream s priority For details see Specifying layer 4 stream settings on page 158 Layer 4 Toolkit When running multiple streams applications a var
181. action The Link OAM State must be On to observe these results Table 46 L OAM Modes results Remote and Local Operation Test Result Mode Parser Action Muxer Action Vendor OUI Vendor Specific Info Max PDU Size Description Displays the current mode Active or Passive for the local or remote instrument Indicates the local or remote receiver is currently forwarding looping back or discarding non OAM PDUs Indicates the local or remote transmitter is currently forwarding or discarding non OAM PDUs Displays the Vendor OUI Organizationally Unique Identifier for the local or remote instrument Displays vendor specific information for the local or remote instrument Displays the maximum PDU Protocol Data Units size supported by the local or remote instru ment Unidirectional Indicates whether the local or remote instrument advertises that it is capable of sending OAM PDUs when the receive path is non operational Link Events Indicates whether the local or remote instrument is configured to monitor link events Loopback Indicates whether the local or remote instrument advertises that it provides loopback support Variable Retrieval Indicates whether the local or remote instrument supports sending Variable Response OAM PDUs Revision Displays the current TLV Type Length Value revision for the local or remote instrument MAC Address Displays the MAC address for the remote instrument
182. ad percentage displayed represents the load as configured for the service pro vider Understanding multiple When running Multiple Streams applications you can observe cumulative test streams test results results for the entire link detailed test results for a particular stream and graphical results for all analyzed streams Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 149 Chapter 6 Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing Multiple Streams testing 150 Viewing results for a specific stream Viewing cumulative link results Viewing graphical results for all streams Changing graph properties You can view detailed test results for a particular stream on the result display by specifying the stream number as the result group and then selecting the category with the results you want to observe Figure 35 illustrates the L2 Link Results for Stream 1 and the Summary Status results for all enabled streams Summary Status Total Util Avg Total Util Cur Total Util Min Frame St M A ALL SUMMARY l RESULTS Out Of Range O K Out Of Range Out Of Range a Out Of Range 0 Packet Jitter fus Figure 35 Multiple Streams result display You can observe cumulative link results for all transmitted streams by selecting the Link group and then the corresponding Stats Counts Error Stats or AutoNeg Status category Throughput latency RTD packet jitter and frame loss resul
183. ademarks of JDS Uniphase in the United States and or other countries Cisco is a registered trademark of Cisco and or its affiliates in the U S and cer tain other countries NetFlow is a trademark of Cisco Systems Inc in the United States and certain other countries Wireshark is a registered trademark of the Wireshark Foundation All trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective companies Specifications terms and conditions are subject to change without notice The provision of hardware services and or software are subject to JDSU s stan dard terms and conditions available at www jdsu com terms This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment gen erates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interfer ence to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at their own expense The catalog number for a printed getting started manual is CSGSG The cata log number for a printed Ethernet testing manual is COETHERNET The cata l
184. age 278 System recovery testing per RFC 2544 You can use the instrument to determine the amount of time it takes for a network element to recover from a state where it is dropping frames Exporting and importing of configurations for the Enhanced RFC test Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 10 Automated Testing Automated RFC 2544 The Enhanced RFC tests supports both round trip delay RTD and one way delay OWD If your instrument is optioned and configured for one way delay you can choose whether to run a Latency RTD or Latency OWD test TCP Wirespeed test This is a 5 step test to test TCP throughput for 64 connections About loopbacks During the automated tests the instrument checks for a loopback It could be one of the following types Active loop the destination has responded to a loop command Hard loop the source and destination addresses are the same for both the returned frames and the outgoing frames Permanent loop the source and destination addresses are switched in the returned frames Permanent loop is not available L2 or in L3 when ARP is disabled J QuickCheck Running the J QuickCheck application involves configuring the instrument for the RFC 2544 test using the standard interface and then launching the Enhanced RFC 2544 test Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 229 Chapter 10 Automated Testing Automated RFC 2544 Und
185. age 54 MPLS layer 3 applications only The instru ment will analyze only VPLS encapsulated traffic for the parameters you specify See Filtering traffic using MPLS criteria on page 55 Don t Care The instrument will analyze traf fic satisfying all other filter criteria regardless of encapsulation VLAN If you specified VLAN as the encapsulation type on the graphic display of the frame select VLAN and then specify the VLAN ID carried in the fil tered traffic 50 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Setting User Priority Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 2 testing Value If you specified VLAN as the encapsulation type and you want to filter for traffic with a specific user priority specify the priority or select Don t Care b In Frame Type specify one of the following Frame Type DIX EtherType 802 3 Data Length bytes Don t Care Description To analyze DIX frames only select DIX If you specified DIX as the frame type specify the Ethertype by selecting the Type field on the graphic of the frame If you do not specify the EtherType the instrument will filter the traffic for DIX frames with the currently specified EtherType value To analyze 802 3 frames only select 802 3 If you specified 802 3 as the frame type specify the data length by selecting the Length field on the graphic of the frame If you do not specify the length the instrument will filte
186. ained from running the test select View TrueSAM Report For more information on viewing the TrueSAM reports go to Running TrueSAM on page 224 Guided Configuration To follow a guided path accessing every appli cable page in the configuration and testing sequence the Guide Me green arrow may be selected at the bottom of the window Continue selecting the green arrow at the bottom of every page until the neces sary configuration selections have been made and the entire configura tion and testing sequence is completed 5 A status screen will momentarily appear with the current action being implemented highlighted in the list This list will appears at various times while using the TrueSAM application to inform the user of the current action and to indicate to the user actions that are valid Valid actions will be preceded by a green check mark 6 The Select Tests screen appears 212 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 10 Automated Testing TrueSAM The following tests are available to be included in the TrueSAM test J QuickCheck automatically selected for all users to verify the ability to run other tests Enhanced RFC 2544 not able to be run simultaneous with SAMCom plete For more information about this test see Automated RFC 2544 on page 227 SAMComplete not able to be run simultaneous with Enhanced RFC 2544 For more information about this test see SAMCompl
187. alarme 443 34404 h4e0d4eas bbaseteee hebes a aa 16 Layer 2 OBSAI testing 0c eee eee eee 16 Inserting CINOMS 666 6 ek oie ee one hh este eee de bee vielen 17 Monitoring CPRI or OBSAI layer 1 000 eee e eee eee 17 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual v Contents Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing 21 About Ethernet and IP testing 00 0c eee eee eee 22 Features and capabilities 00 0 00 eee 22 Understanding the graphical user interface 2000 24 Frame settings n serrar tie wth eaon EEA EREE S 24 Packet SettingS 244 004045 44 40 04b4 dad bo aan h aga edb 24 Ethernet and IP test applications 20200000050 25 MiM test applications 0 200000 cee ee 25 MPLS TP test applications 002 ee 26 PTP 1588 test applications 00 0002 ee 26 Configuring 10 Gigabit Ethernet WAN tests 04 26 Configuring Ethernet VPLS tests 0 000 e eee eee 27 VPLS TDS Enie i ETT R E EE EERENS TA 27 Virtual ChannelS 4 008 0 4444 cana oi a eie eE edad AERE 27 VPLS test applications nnana naana 27 Configuring MPLS over Ethernet tests 000002 ae 28 MPLS test applications nonna aaaea 28 Configuring IPv4 and IPv6 tests 2 eee ee 29 Cable Diagnostics 000 c eee 30 Running cable diagnostics 0 0 0 0 0 0 eee 30 Viewing cable measurements
188. all streams on page 152 Optional lf you want to use the same settings for all enabled streams select Copy Setups to other Streams Traffic load settings are not copied Load settings must be configured for each individual stream If you do not need to specify other settings select the Results soft key to return to the Main screen The layer 4 traffic characteristics are specified Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Transmitting multiple streams Chapter 6 Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing Multiple Streams testing Before transmitting multiple traffic streams you must Specify the interface settings required to initialize the link see Specifying interface settings on page 41 Specify the load unit for the transmitted traffic Bit Rate or Percent This setting indicates whether you want to specify the load for each stream as a bit rate or as a percent of the line rate For details see Enabling multiple streams on page 152 Enable the streams you want to transmit see Enabling multiple streams on page 152 or Specifying layer 2 and layer 3 settings for Triple Play services on page 164 Specify common traffic characteristics for all enabled streams For example if you intend to use the factory default source MAC address and a static IP address as the source addresses for every enabled stream these are specified on the All Streams tab For details see Specifying
189. als are complete the running total is divided by the number of trials to come up with a total trial average If the Throughput test reached the lowest bandwidth limit without ever success fully receiving all transmitted frames in other words it lost frames the average delay will also be unavailable Delay measured under 4 microseconds Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 233 Chapter 10 Automated Testing Automated RFC 2544 Pass fail threshold Packet Jitter test About the Packet Jitter test Packet Jitter test results Pass fail threshold About the System Recovery 234 test is averaged as 4 microseconds Unavailable measurements are not included in the total trial average NOTE When running the Latency test in asymmetric mode after looping up the instrument on the far end the instrument performs a symmetric throughput test Because the instrument loops up the far end instrument the upstream and downstream latency measurements in asymmetric mode are actually the same measurement All other tests are performed end to end no loop back is performed You can configure the test to optionally indicate whether the Latency test passed or failed To do so you specify the Latency RTD Pass Threshold If the total trial average for measured average delay is equal to or less than the threshold the test indicates that the test passed for each transmitted frame length If it exceeds the threshold
190. ames NOTE Jumbo frames are counted in this category A count of filtered Ethernet frames between 1024 bytes and 1518 bytes 1024 to 1522 bytes for VLAN tagged frames 1024 to 1526 bytes for Q in Q encapsulated frames Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 305 Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results Table 41 Test Result 1024 2140 Byte Frames 128 252 Byte Frames 128 255 Byte Frames 256 508 Byte Frames 256 511 Byte Frames 28 64 Byte Frames L2 Filter Counts results Continued Description A count of filtered Fibre Channel frames with lengths between 1024 and 2140 bytes inclusive A count of filtered Fibre Channel frames with lengths between 128 and 252 bytes inclusive A count of filtered Ethernet frames with lengths between 128 and 255 bytes inclusive A count of filtered Fibre Channel frames with lengths between 256 and 5088 bytes inclusive A count of filtered Ethernet frames with lengths between 256 and 511 bytes inclusive A count of filtered Fibre Channel frames with lengths between 28 and 64 bytes inclu sive 512 1020 Byte Frames A count of filtered Fibre Channel frames with lengths between 512 and 1020 bytes inclusive 512 1023 Byte Frames A count of filtered Ethernet frames with lengths between 512 and 1023 bytes inclusive 64 Byte Frames A count of filtered Ethernet frames with a length of 64 bytes
191. ance association ID and maintenance end point ID but with a period value that was not the same as the instrument s AIS rate LBM Total Rx LBM Frames Count of the total number of LBM frame received since the last OAM setting was specified or changed Total Tx LBM Frames Count of the total number of LBM frames transmitted since the last OAM set ting was specified or changed Total Rx LBR Frames Count of the total number of LBR frames received since the last OAM setting was specified or changed Total Tx LBR Frames Count of the total number of LBR frames transmitted since the last OAM set ting was specified or changed Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 309 Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results Table 45 Service OAM results Continued Test Result Description LTM Total Rx LTM Frames Count of the total number of LTM frame received since the last OAM setting was specified or changed Total Tx LTM Frames Count of the total number of LTM frames transmitted since the last OAM set ting was specified or changed Total Rx LTR Frames Count of the total number of LTR frames received since the last OAM setting was specified or changed Total Tx LTR Frames Count of the total number of LTR frames transmitted since the last OAM set ting was specified or changed L OAM Modes results Table 46 describes the L OAM Modes results such as the remote and local mode parser action and muxer
192. and Information Rate Proceed to step 5 Burst Time and Information Rate Proceed to step 5 Bytes and Gap Time Proceed to step 5 Burst Time and Gap Time Proceed to step 5 Frames and Duty Cycle Proceed to step 6 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 59 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 2 testing Transmitting a ramped load 60 5 If you selected any of the combinations of Time Rates and Byte the following parameters may need to be set NOTE Values may be automatically normalized rounded to nearest appropriate values from values entered a Information Rate Enter the average throughput rate in Mbps up to the maximum rate of the interface layer 2 only Burst KBytes Enter the number of Kbytes of data desired to be trans mitted in each burst of traffic Burst Time Enter the amount of time that each burst of traffic should be transmitted will round to the nearest frame transmit time Time Unit Select unit for time entry sec msec usec or nsec Gap Idle Time Enter the amount of time between each burst The valid range for this setting adjusts depending on the Burst Time that you enter to ensure that the duty cycle is at least 1 in 0 001 inter vals will round to the nearest 0 001 The following parameters may be displayed as a result of the above selections Bit Rate calculated Bits Time Unit from Burst average throughput rate will round kb down to the n
193. another router in the core of the network The far end unit then analyzes received traffic based on the MPLS filter criteria you specified to determine the characteristics of the inter mediary core router Packet analysis monitor mode For this application you configure a near end unit to transmit layer 3 IP traffic to a ingress PE router The PE router then adds the MPLS header and sends it through the network Using a second unit you connect to the circuit from a port provided by a core router and then monitor and analyze the MPLS encapsulated traffic Packet analysis through mode For this application configure a near end unit to transmit layer 3 traffic to a ingress PE router The PE router then adds the MPLS header and sends it through the network Using a second unit you connect to the circuit between two routers monitor and analyze the received MPLS encapsulated traffic and then pass the traffic through the unit to transmit it to the next router on the network If you purchased the IPv6 option applications are provided that allow you to transmit and analyze either IPv4 or IPv6 traffic Table 11 lists the key differ ences between the applications IPv4 and IPv6 applications IPv6 Uses one of the following Stateful Auto configuration also known In PPPoE mode uses the client server PPPoE login process For details see Specifying PPPoE settings on page 75 A single IP address is assigned to the in
194. ansport Overhead TU Tributary unit Tx Transmit or transmitter or output U UAS Unavailable seconds UDP User Datagram Protocol Layer 4 protocol that offers a limited amount of service when messages are exchanged between devices on an IP network UDP uses IP to transmit data from one device to another device however unlike TCP UDP does not divide a message into packets and then reassemble the packets at the far end UI Unit Interval One bit period at the data rate being measured us Microseconds also expressed as us Ethernet IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual USB Universal Serial Bus A bus designed to handle a broad range of devices such as keyboards mouses printers modems and hubs V VDC Volts Direct Current VLAN Virtual LAN VNC Virtual Network Computing A thin client system that enables you to run applications on a VNC server from any other computer connected to the Internet Using VNC you can run the instrument from a remote workstation Glossary VPLS Virtual Private LAN Service An MPLS application which provides multi point to multi point layer 2 VPN services allowing geographically dispersed sites to share an ethernet broadcast domain by connecting each site to an MPLS based network W WAN Wide area network X XFP 10 Gigabit Small Form Factor Pluggable Module Ethernet IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 347 Glo
195. application return to Speci fying transmitted IPv4 packet settings Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 47 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 2 testing 48 Configuring Q in Q traffic Configuring stacked VLAN traffic Configuring VPLS traffic VLAN settings are specified To configure Q in Q traffic 1 After selecting Q in Q as your encapsulation on the graphic of the frame select SVLAN and then specify the SVLAN ID SVLAN User Priority DEI Bit and SVLAN TPID for the service provider You can now specify a User Defined TPID if you choose to 2 Select CVLAN and then specify the VLAN ID and User Priority for the customer s traffic 3 Return to Specifying Ethernet frame settings for details on specifying the remaining settings Q in Q settings are specified To configure stacked VLAN traffic 1 After selecting Stacked VLAN as your encapsulation on the graphic of the frame select VLAN Stack and then specify the stack depth number of VLANs 2 For each VLAN specify the SVLAN ID SVLAN User Priority DEI Bit and SVLAN TPID for the service provider You can now specify a User Defined TPID if you choose to 3 Select CVLAN and then specify the VLAN ID and User Priority for the customer s traffic 4 Return to Specifying Ethernet frame settings for details on specifying the remaining settings Stacked VLAN settings are specified To configure VPLS traffic 1 Af
196. appropriate tab otherwise press Results to return to the Main screen Connect the units to the circuit On the Main screen select the Laser button Verify that the green Signal Present Sync Acquired and Link Active LEDs are illuminated On the near end unit do the following a Start traffic b Clear the service disruption time by selecting the Reset Service Disrup tion Test button Initiate the switch to the protect line Observe the service disruption result in the Fibre Channel L2 Link Stats category Service disruption time is measured Inserting errors Buttons on the Main screen allow you to insert errors into the traffic stream If you turn on a particular error insertion rate the error insertion continues even after you restart a test or change the test configuration To insert errors 1 Select one of the following error types Code CRC Bit BERT payload only 206 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 9 Fibre Channel Testing Measuring round trip delay 2 Do the following Specify the insert type Single Burst or Rate If you specified Burst enter the quantity of errors in the burst and then select OK If you specified Rate select the rate 3 Press the Error Insert button Error insertion starts and the associated button turns yellow To stop error insertion press the button again Error insertion stops and the associated button turn
197. apturing packets on or if you turn your instrument OFF To ensure that the packets are stored save the capture buffer before changing applications or turning the instrument OFF When troubleshooting problems that occur intermittently or inconsistently the trigger feature allows capture to begin based on a given event For this scenario the filters are used as triggers Triggering using only the byte pattern as a trigger 1 Press the Setup soft key 2 Select Capture tab and then set Capture to Enable Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 91 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Capturing packets for analysis 92 Set Use Filters as to Filter 4 Select the Filters tab and then in the panel on the left side select Summary Select the Clear All Filters button to clear any current filter settings In the panel on the left side select Byte Pattern 7 Set Use Byte Pattern as to Trigger and then specify the trigger filter as described in Filtering traffic using byte pattern criteria on page 56 8 Select the Capture tab and specify a Post Trigger Size This is the amount of data in MB to capture after the trigger event occurs If set to zero the capture stops immediately after the trigger event 9 Select the Results soft key to return to the Main screen NOTE When capturing packets based on a trigger the capture buffer saves in wrap around mode overwrite the oldest packets with new packets when the
198. ate Monitor Through Dual Through J J J J J J 10 GigE LAN Ni 10 GigE WAN Ni 1 IPv4 and IPv6 applications are available IPv4 and IPv6 applications are also available when running layer 3 and layer 4 multiple streams applications MiM test applications If your instrument is optioned to do so this release supports the MiM MAC in MAC applications listed in Table 8 Table 8 MiM applications Interface Application Test Mode 10 100 1000 MiM Traffic Terminate Monitor 100M Optical MiM Traffic Terminate Monitor 1GigE Optical MiM Traffic Terminate Monitor 10GigE LAN MiM Traffic Terminate Monitor Through Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 25 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing About Ethernet and IP testing MPLS TP test applications PTP 1588 test applications Configuring 10 Gigabit Ethernet WAN tests 26 If your instrument is optioned to do so this release supports the MPLS TP applications listed in Table 9 Table 9 MPLS TP applications Interface Application Test Mode 10 100 1000 Layer 2 MPLS TP Traffic Terminate 100M Optical Layer 2 MPLS TP Traffic Terminate 1GigE Optical Layer 2 MPLS TP Traffic Terminate 10GigE LAN Layer 2 MPLS TP Traffic Terminate If your instrument is optioned to do so this release supports the PTP 1588 applications listed in Table 10 Table 10 PTP 1588 applications Interface Application Test Mode 10 100 1000 Layer 2 PT
199. ation paths are provided for these options The following topics are discussed in this section TrueSpeed test steps on page 268 Configuring the TrueSpeed test on page 270 Running the TrueSpeed test on page 276 If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so you can use it to run the TrueSpeed Test for the purpose of troubleshooting a circuit experiencing reduced performance or when turning up a new circuit This test uses the Wire speed application and automates TCP throughput testing per the IETF draft standard ippm tcp throughput framework and to allow TCP throughput testing for up to 64 connections Unlike the RFC 2544 test which uses layer 2 3 this test uses layer 4 The troubleshooting option validates that the network is tuned as expected verifies prioritization of services and can eliminate finger pointing between the end user and the network provider Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual About the test steps Chapter 10 Automated Testing TrueSpeed Test In addition the more basic turn up testing is a mostly automated test that provides push button pass fail testing of a newly installed circuit The upload and download CIR s need to be added to the configuration before it is run These parameters can be obtained from the RFC 2544 test that is often run immediately prior to a TrueSpeed test NOTE TrueSpeed is run in the turnup mode when activated as a component
200. b Select the DSCP value c To further configure the local network settings select the Set Time to Live link at the end of the IP prioritization pane Set the number of hops constraint and then select the Back button left green arrow d Select Next the green arrow 3 The Remote Network Setting screen appears to define the IP prioritization of the remote unit a Enter the TOS value or Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 10 Automated Testing TrueSAM b Select the DSCP value c To further configure the remote network setting select the Set Time to Live link at the end of the IP prioritization pane Set the number of hops constraint and then select the Back button left green arrow d Select Next the green arrow 4 The configuration template screen appears allowing the user to select from a number of pre configured templates to define the parameters to test different types of networks a Ifa configuration template is desired select the Yes radio button b Select the desired template from those available in the drop down box c When the selected parameters have been applied a notice is given Select OK to return to configuration template screen d Select Next the green arrow 5 The Select Tests Window appears to allow the selection of the desired tests to be run If a configuration template has been applied certain selec tions will be predefined but all options may be changed if desired
201. ble when running MAC in MAC multiple stream IPv6 IP Video or Triple Play applications Discoverable test instruments include The T BERD MTS 5800 The T BERD MTS 8000 Transport Module The T BERD MTS 6000A MSAM HSTs with Ethernet SIMs Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 33 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Discovering another JDSU test instrument using J Connect Prerequisites Discovering an instrument 34 To be discoverable JDSU test instruments must Run a software version that supports the J Connect feature Be configured to be discoverable Have a unique source IP address JDSU test instruments of the same type for example T BERD MTS 5800s ship from the factory with the same default source IP address If you want to discover the instrument on the subnet be certain to specify a different source IP address On the transmitter side destination addresses and port numbers can be discovered On the receiver side source addresses and port numbers can be discovered If you want to use a discovered instrument s MAC and IP addresses or port numbers to configure the settings on your instrument verify the following In the Ethernet menu verify that the Destination Type is Unicast In the Ethernet Filter verify that the Source Type is Unicast In the IP Filter verify that the filter is enabled and that the Source IP setting is checked In the TCP UDP Filter verify that the f
202. bled the far end unit will not respond to the loop up command Issues specific to certain applications are explained in the associated proce dures provided in this chapter To enable automatic traffic generation 1 Using the Test menu launch the test application for the optical interface you are about to test 2 Select the Setup soft key and then do the following a Select the Interface tab b Select the Physical Layer sub tab c Set Auto start traffic when laser turned on to Yes Traffic will be transmitted after you turn the laser on and the criteria listed in Prerequisites for traffic transmission on page 32 is satisfied Discovering another JDSU test instrument using J Connect Discoverable instruments You can automatically detect other JDSU test instruments on the same subnet and determine their capabilities You can then optionally configure key param eters for your test automatically based on a discovered instrument s settings When your instrument discovers the other instruments on the subnet it is simply providing a snapshot of the information available for the instruments at that current time If someone changes an instrument s IP address or discon nects an instrument from the circuit this will not be reflected in the snapshot To ensure that you have accurate data you should refresh the display period ically The instruments must be on the same VLAN ID and ether types The J Connect feature is not availa
203. buffer becomes full 10 Select the Capture toolbar and then select Start Capture A message appears in the message bar indicating that the capture has started and the action key states Capture Started The capture will begin when the trigger event occurs which will be when the data matches the byte pattern criteria Captured packets are stored temporarily in the capture buffer A count of the number of packets processed is provided in the Ethernet result group in the Capture category WARNING Changing applications or turning OFF the instrument You will lose the entire contents of the capture buffer if you launch a new application on the port that you are capturing packets on or if you turn your instrument OFF To ensure that the packets are stored save the capture buffer before changing applications or turning the instrument OFF Triggering using only the filters as a trigger 1 Press the Setup soft key 2 Select Capture tab and then set Capture to Enable 3 Set Use Filters as to Trigger 4 Select the Filters tab and then in the panel on the left side select Summary o Select the Clear All Filters button to clear any current filter settings In the panel on the left side select Byte Pattern 7 Set the Use Byte Pattern as to Don t Care to turn off the byte pattern as a trigger 8 On the Filters tab specify the trigger filter as described in Specifying filter settings on page 89 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and T
204. by doing the following Ensure that the duration time for the Throughput Packet Jitter and Latency RTD tests is the same Ensure that the number of trials for the Latency RTD and Packet Jitter tests is 1 one trial only If you configure the test in this manner all three tests Throughput Latency and Packet Jitter will be run simultaneously If the duration times vary or if you indicate that you want to run more than one trial each test will be executed in succession As a result the test will take longer to complete When running the Enhanced RFC 2544 test in asymmetric mode the Latency test is run after the Throughput test because it needs the symmetric Throughput measurement before it can measure latency In addition to the duration time and number of trial settings you can control the bandwidth transmitted during the course of the test If you select Top Down the test transmits traffic at the maximum band width specified and then decreases the bandwidth for each trial by the granularity you specify until you reach the minimum bandwidth specified Ifyou select Bottom Up the test transmits traffic at the minimum band width specified and then increases the bandwidth for each trial by the granularity you specify until you reach the maximum bandwidth specified The instrument allows importing and exporting of configuration files This allows consistent testing configurations which yield more reli
205. calls Precision time protocol PTP is an industry standard protocol that enables the precise transfer of frequency and time to synchronize clocks over packet based Ethernet networks It is based on IEEE 1588 The PTP protocol specifies master and slave clocks It synchronizes the PTP local slave clock on each PTP network device with a PTP system Grandmaster clock PTP distributes the timing at layer 2 or 4 using timestamps embedded within an Ethernet frame or IP UDP packet thus PTP can be transported over native Ethernet or any transport that supports IP UDP You can use the instrument to send and receive traffic to troubleshoot a PTP link To transmit and analyze PTP traffic 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the PTP 1588 application for the interface you are testing Refer to Table 10 on page 26 for a list of applications 2 Select the Setup soft key and then select the PTP tab 3 Specify the settings Setting Description Mode Specifies master or slave mode Address Mode In Slave mode specifies the type of message unicast or multicast Multicast PTP message announce sync and delay request rates configured on Master Unicast PTP message rates configured on Slave Domain Specifies the domain number that is using PTP The domain is a logical grouping of clocks that synchronize to each other using PTP Sync Type In Master mode indicates that the synchroniza tion type is two step Master
206. cify OAM settings 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the Layer 2 Traffic test application for the interface you are testing Refer to Table 7 on page 25 for a list of layer 2 applications Select the Setup soft key and then select the Interface tab to specify settings that control the Ethernet interface see Specifying interface settings on page 41 Specify the settings that characterize the transmitted traffic see Speci fying Ethernet frame settings on page 43 and then specify the filter settings see Specifying Ethernet filter settings on page 49 Select the OAM tab The pane on the left of the tab groups the link settings L OAM and service settings S OAM To specify link OAM settings do the following Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 109 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing OAM service and link layer testing a In the left pane under L OAM select Local Config then specify the following settings Setting Parameters Link OAM State If you want to enable link OAM select On otherwise select Off Mode Select one of the following Active Select Active if you want the instrument to automatically discover and monitor the peer on the link Passive Select Passive if you want the peer to initiate the discovery pro cess Vendor OUI Specify the Vendor OUI Organizationally Unique Identifier for the instrument Unidirectional Select th
207. ck status indicator in the LED panel updates Figure 52 Successful registration Placing calls After specifying configuration settings and registering with the server you can place a VoIP call To place a VoIP call 1 Select the Place Call action button The button label changes to Hang Up After the call is connected the Call status in the LED panel will update and the timer begins counting 2 While the call is up observe the Transport and Content result categories 3 Select the Hang up action button to end the call Receiving calls manually After specifying configuration settings and registering with the server you can receive a VoIP call To receive a VoIP call 1 When the instrument indicates an incoming call select the Answer Call action button The button label changes to Hang Up After the call is connected the Call status in the LED panel will update and the timer begins counting 2 While the call is up observe the Transport and Content result categories 3 Select the Hang up action button to end the call Ethernet IP TCP UDP Fibre Chan VoIP and Video Testing Manual Automatically answering Calls Chapter 8 VoIP Testing Capturing packets for analysis The Auto Answer feature allows you to verify incoming service To answer calls automatically 1 In the VoIP call bar check the box for Auto Answer 2 Place a call to the instrument from a VoIP phone or a second instrument The call is a
208. ckets shall be captured based on destination IP address and UDP port number fields of the packets Signaling and Audio Both signaling and audio packets shall be sent to the capture buffer All Traffic All incoming traffic will be captured The VoIP filters are specified Placing and receiving calls Registering with the server To verify call setup and tear down the instrument allows placing and receiving calls NOTE If testing VoIP on a MTS8000 with DMC no audio path is available You can place and receive calls to view results such as MOS scores but will not hear audio Before placing or receiving calls you must register with the server the Proxy Gateway Call Manager depending on call control If H 323 call control is used you must manually register with the server after changing any call settings If SIP or SCCP call controls are used the unit automatically deregisters and registers with the server after a change in call settings Ethernet IP TCP UDP Fibre Chan VoIP and Video Testing Manual 189 Chapter 8 VoIP Testing Placing and receiving calls 190 To register with the server Tap the Register action button to begin registering Register Figure 51 VolP registration action button w NOTE The registration action button is not available if using H 323 call control with NO Gatekeeper After successful registration the button will turn yellow and change to Registered and the Sta
209. click Import Test The files are copied to the instrument s file directory The next time you launch the test the imported configuration s appear in the configuration list Before running these tests it s important to understand which settings need to be specified externally outside of the automated test screens and how to navigate through the screens and menus presented when you run the tests The automated tests allow you to specify most required settings however certain settings need to be specified outside of the automated test screens using the procedures listed in Table 25 Table 25 RFC 2544 Setup Tab Settings Layer Setting To specify see Ethernet Layer 2 Specifying Ethernet frame settings on page 43 Frame Type Destination Type Ether Type Unit Identifier Specifying interface settings on page 41 Layer 3 ARP Specifying Ethernet frame settings on page 43 TTL Specifying transmitted IPv4 packet settings on TOS DSCP page 77 Layer 4 Specifying TCP UDP settings for transmitted traf ATP Listen Port fic on page 132 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 237 Chapter 10 Automated Testing Automated RFC 2544 To specify the external test settings 1 Select the Setup soft key and then do one of the following Ifyou are running the test with layer 2 Ethernet traffic select the Ethernet tab to specify settings that define the
210. conds during which a local fault occurred indicating that the E1 Tester could not detect a received signal could not obtain PCS block synchroni zation or detects 16 or more errored PCS block sync headers in a 125 us period Only applicable when testing 10 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces Optical Rx Level dBm Displays the receive level in dBm when testing optical interfaces Optical Rx Overload Displays ON if the received optical power level is greater than the receiver shutdown specification as stated in the specifications appendix of the Getting Started guide that shipped with your instrument or as stated in the vendor specifications for the SFP or XFP you have inserted Remote Fault Seconds Displays the number of test seconds during which the instrument transmits a remote fault indication in response to the receipt of a remote fault indication from its link part ner Only applicable when testing 10 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces Rx Frequency Hz Frequency of the clock recovered from the received signal expressed in Hz Rx Freq Deviation ppm Current received frequency deviation Displayed in PPM Rx Freq Max Deviation ppm Maximum received frequency deviation Signal Loss Seconds Number of seconds during which a signal was not present Sync Loss Seconds Number of seconds during which a synchronization was not present Tx Frequency Hz Current transmitter clock frequency expressed in Hz Tx Freq Deviation ppm Current transmitted fre
211. configured to transmit traffic with a single label the out of sequence and lost frames counts reported by the local unit may increment if the incoming frame rate is too high If your local unit is configured to transmit traffic with a single MPLS label but the loop back unit is configured to transmit traffic with a second label the local unit s receive bandwidth utilization will exceed its transmitted bandwidth utilization If you are looping back multiple streams of MPLS traffic you can specify unique labels for each individual stream or you can specify the labels for one stream and then copy them to the other streams If you initiate a loop back from a local unit using the Loop Up button and ARP is enabled on both units you must specify the destination IP address and subnet mask for the next hop on the circuit If you use the LLB button on the loop back unit to loop traffic back to the local unit and ARP is enabled on both units you must manually specify the desti nation IP addresses for the traffic transmitted from the local unit and for the traffic looped back by the loop back unit If ARP is disabled you must also specify the destination MAC address for traffic transmitted by the local unit If you are looping back multiple streams of MPLS traffic and ARP is disabled you can specify a unique destination MAC address on the Ethernet tab and a unique destination IP address on the IP tab for each individual stream or
212. ct the Ethernet filter tab to specify the Ethernet filter settings see Specifying Ethernet filter settings on page 49 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Ping testing Specifying IP settings for Ping and Traceroute testing Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 3 testing 5 Select the IP Filter tab to specify settings that filter the received traffic based on specified packet characteristics see Specifying IPv4 filter settings on page 79 6 Select the Traffic tab to specify the type of load the unit will transmit see Specifying traffic load settings on page 58 7 Press Results to return to the Main screen 8 Connect the instrument to the circuit 9 Ifyou are testing an optical interface select the Laser button 10 Select Start Traffic for constant or bursty loads or Start Ramp for ramped loads to transmit traffic over the circuit 11 Verify that the green Signal Present Sync Acquired Link Active and IP Packet Detect LEDs are illuminated 12 At a minimum observe the summary layer 2 and 3 link counts and statis tics layer 2 and 3 filter counts and statistics layer 3 configuration status and error statistics You have analyzed IP traffic Using the instrument you can verify connectivity with another layer 3 or IP device by sending ping request packets to the device The device then responds to the ping request with a ping reply if the device is responsive or with anot
213. ct the OK button to return to the setup menu 5 If you do not need to specify other settings select the Results soft key to return to the Main screen Triple Play service is characterized You can specify layer 2 and layer 3 settings for each type of service on the Voice SDTV HDTV Data 1 and Data 2 setup tabs For details see Specifying layer 2 stream settings on page 156 Specifying layer 3 stream settings on page 157 Before transmitting multiple Triple Play streams you must Specify the interface settings required to initialize the link see Specifying interface settings on page 41 Specify setting that characterize each type of service and indicate the bandwidth utilized by each type see Characterizing Triple Play services on page 163 Specify layer 2 and layer 3 settings for the streams see Specifying layer 2 stream settings on page 156 and Specifying layer 3 stream settings on page 157 To transmit multiple Triple Play streams 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the Triple Play test application for the interface you are testing refer to Table on page 160 for a list of applications Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual SAM Complete Chapter 6 Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing Looping back multiple streams 2 Select the Setup soft key and then select the Interface tab to specify the settings required to ini
214. culates the burst size required to transmit back to back frames for the duration that you specify as the Back to Back Max Trial Time It then transmits the burst of frames over the circuit If the number of frames transmitted carrying an Acterna payload does not equal the number of received frames carrying an Acterna payload indicating that frames were lost during the transmission the instrument goes through the stages described for the Throughput test see Throughput test on page 232 until no frames are lost or until the number of frames per burst from the last successful burst exceeds the Back to Back Frames Granularity by a 1 frame burst Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 235 Chapter 10 Automated Testing Automated RFC 2544 Back to Back test results Optimizing the test time Importing and exporting RFC 236 config files The test counts the number of frames received for each trial specified as the Number of Back to Back Frame Trials and each count is added to a running total After all of the trials are complete the running total is divided by the number of trials to come up with a total trial average count The test then uses this count to calculate the average amount of time a burst can be transmitted before a frame is dropped Back to Back test results are presented in a table When you configure an Enhanced RFC test in symmetric mode you can opti mize the time it takes to run the test time
215. culation is used to declare an SES FCS Error count Lost Frame count Frames Received count Lost Frames gt 0 3 The ratio of severely errored seconds to the number of available seconds A count of 1 Gigabit Ethernet 1 Gigabit 2 Gigabit Fibre Channel receive frames with at least one code violation Unavailable time is defined as ten 10 consecutive severely errored seconds These ten seconds are included in the UAS count For example if 12 consecutive SES occur the UAS count will be 12 If only 3 consecu tive SES occur the UAS count will be zero A count of frames under the minimum 64 byte with a good FCS If you capture packets to analyze using Wireshark the Capture category provides a count of the number of packets processed and displays a gauge indicating the percent of the buffer that is filled with captured packets Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results Sync Status Messages If you are testing on a GigE circuit the Sync Status Messages category provides results related to SyncE testing Table 60 describes the test results for the Layer 1 BERT patterns Table 60 Sync Status Messages results Test Result Description Decoded QL Message Decode of the last quality level QL message SSM Message Count Count of all SSM messages received Total SSM Message Count Count of the SSM Event messages received Event SSM Messag
216. d Start Up Sequence If the Start Up Sequence is Bypass specify the Protocol version Specify the Control and Management parameters if necessary HDLC rate or No HDLC Whether the Ethernet Channel is enabled If the Ethernet Channel is enabled enter the Ethernet Subchannel Number 3 Select the Pattern tab a b Select a Pattern Mode Select the desired pattern from the list of available patterns 4 If service disruption detection is desired select the Service Disruption tab and click the Enable checkbox Define the parameters to be detected from the available selections Ethernet IP TCP UDP Fibre Chan VoIP and Video Testing Manual 15 Chapter 3 CPRI OBSAI Testing Layer 2 OBSAI testing Inserting alarms 5 Ifa timed or delayed start test is required select the Timed Test tab and specify the desired start times and duration 6 Select the Results soft key to return to the Main screen 7 Select the Laser Tab at the bottom of the screen and click the Laser On button 8 Select the CPRI result group and then choose a category to view Error Stats Counts L1 Inband Protocol You are testing CPRI layer 2 You can insert alarms into a configured Layer 2 CPRI signal To insert alarms 1 Verify the laser is active Laser button is yellow 2 Select an alarm type R LOS R LOF RAI SDI 3 Press the Alarm Insert button The module inserts an alarm and the button turns yellow Test results associat
217. d and receive MPLS TP OAM messages or generate Ethernet traffic on a specific pseudo wire inside a specific tunnel and analyze any MPLS TP traffic present on the Ethernet link To analyze L2 MPLS TP OAM 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the L2 MPLS TP application for the interface you are testing Refer to Table 9 on page 26 for a list of applications Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 65 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 2 testing 66 Select the Setup soft key and then select the Ethernet tab Specify the Service Provider Frame settings Encapsulation None or VLAN Frame Type DIX or 802 3 Control Word specify ON OFF whether an optional control word fixed to all zeroes is inserted before the payload For more information on the settings see Specifying Ethernet frame settings on page 43 If VLAN was the encapsulation method selected select the VLAN field on the image of the outgoing frame at the bottom of the page Define the VLANID and the User Pri ority NOTE Only one VLAN is supported Select Control Word and specify whether an optional control word fixed to all zeroes is inserted before the payload Select the OAM tab and then do the following a Inthe options list on the left side of the tab select Common Header and then specify the settings Setting Description Type Specifies the type of OAM transport service to be used MPLS TP T MPLS
218. d in Figure 27 on page 117 Backbone Frames Calculated Backbone Frame Size bytes 534 DIX gt e Unicast 00 00 00 00 00 00 SA Figure 27 Customer Frame MiM Traffic application 6 On the customer frame graphic select Data and then specify one of the following for the Tx Payload Acterna To transmit frames that contain a sequence number and time stamp so that lost frames round trip delay and jitter can be calculated select Acterna If you are measuring round trip delay on a 10 Gigabit circuit in RTD Setup indicate whether you want to measure delay with a high degree of precision or a low degree of precision In most instances you should select High Precision Low Delay NOTE You must select an Acterna payload to measure round trip delay and count lost packets BERT To transmit frames with payloads filled with the BERT pattern you specify select BERT and then select a pattern Various pseudo random and Fixed patterns are available The Pseudo random patterns continue from one frame into the next The fixed patterns restart each frame such that the frame will always start with the beginning of the pattern If you set the BERT Pattern to User Defined in the User Pattern field specify the 32 bit fixed pattern that will be repeated in the payload NOTE The T BERD MTS 5800 transmits the bytes in user defined patterns from left to right the FST 2802 transmits th
219. d streams on a pseudo wire Displays the priority of the identified stream Displays the ID of the provider VLAN Displays the priority of the identified VLAN Displays the ID of the customer VLAN Displays the priority of the identified VLAN Displays the source MAC address for the discovered stream Displays the source IP address for the discovered stream Displays the destination MAC address for the discovered stream Displays the destination IP address for the discovered stream Displays the source port number for the discovered stream Displays the source port name for the discovered stream Displays the destination port number for the discovered stream Displays the destination port name for the discovered stream L1 Mbps Displays the Layer 1 bandwidth utilized for the discovered stream in Mbps Util Displays the current bandwidth utilized by the stream expressed as a percentage of the line rate of available bandwidth This measurement is an average taken over the prior second of test time IP DSCP Displays the DSCP value for the discovered stream Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 329 Chapter 11 Test Results Graphical results Table 73 Traffic Profiler Streams results Continued Test Result Description Frames A count of received Ethernet frames for the discovered stream Frame Size Max The maximum size of frames received for the discovered stream since frame detection Frame Size Min The mi
220. d traffic in 1 increments Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 203 Chapter 9 Fibre Channel Testing Transmitting and analyzing layer 2 traffic For details on the various loads refer to Specifying traffic load settings of Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Before configuring a traffic load for a Fibre Channel test simply select a layer 2 Fibre Channel application instead of an Ethernet application NOTE When testing from 1Gig 2Gig or 4 Gig Fibre Channel interfaces if you con figure the instrument to transmit a constant bursty or ramped load of 100 it is designed to transmit slightly less than 100 traffic 99 996 as a safe guard against overrunning network elements that can not support 100 If you are certain the elements can support true 100 traffic configure your unit to transmit a flood load see Transmitting and analyzing layer 2 traffic on page 62 Transmitting and analyzing layer 2 traffic 204 Before you transmit layer 2 traffic you must specify Interface settings see Specifying interface settings on page 199 Frame characteristics of the transmitted traffic see Specifying Fibre Channel frame settings on page 201 Frame characteristics used to filter received traffic see Specifying Fibre Channel filter settings on page 202 Traffic load settings see Specifying traffic load settings on page 203 After you speci
221. discussed in this section Setting up TrueSAM on page 210 Loading TrueSAM Profile on page 223 Running TrueSAM on page 224 Although TrueSAM is a scripting file that runs tests automatically the appro priate tests for the circuit being tested must be selected and the communica tions parameters defined to have the equipment and links between them tested NOTE If it desired that the tests included in this feature be run end to end both local and remote unit running tests both units will have to be configured and optioned to do so TrueSAM Initiation and communication configuration 1 From the Test menu select the interface and then TrueSAM Terminate Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 10 Automated Testing TrueSAM 2 The Profile Selection page appears How would you like to configure the tests Load configurations from a saved profile Go m vr Start a new profile Go wap Figure 55 TrueSAM Profile Entry Method Selection To load configuration settings set from a previously saved file select Go green arrow to the right of Load Configuration from a Profile Go to Loading TrueSAM Profile on page 223 To configure all options yourself select Go green arrow to the right of Start a New Profile Go to step 3 3 The Operating Layer Select page appears Select Go green arrow after the layer on which your service operates either Layer 2 or Layer 3
222. ds with PCS block errors are also counted as code viola tions A summed count of FCS Errored Frames Jabbers and Undersized Frames Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 319 Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results Table 59 Error Stats results layer 3 traffic Continued Test Result Errored Second Errored Second Ratio FCS Errored Frames Frame Loss Ratio IP Checksum Errors IP Packet Length Errors Jabbers Lost Frames OoS Frames Packet Error Rate Runts Severely Errored Second Severely Errored Second Ratio Symbol Errors Unavailable Second Undersized Frames Capture results 320 Description The number of available seconds during which one or more relevant errors were pres ent The ratio of errored seconds to the number of available seconds A count of Ethernet frames containing Frame Check Sequence FCS errors When receiving Ethernet jumbo frames containing FCS errors the FCS error count does not increment Instead these frames are counted as Jabbers The ratio of frames lost to the number of frames expected A count of received IP packets with a checksum error in the header A count of received IP packets that exceed the available Ethernet payload field A count of received Ethernet frames that have a byte value greater than the maximum 1518 frame length or 1522 bytes for VLAN tagged frames and an errored FCS A count of lost Actern
223. e Voice IP QOS RTP Port Min Max Silence Suppression Description Set the jitter buffer length This is the number of mil liseconds of speech that will be collected before an attempt will be made to play the speech back This allows lost late or out of sequence packets time to arrive and be reassembled before playback Select the transmit source Voice conversation transmits and receives live voice IP voice announce the unit repeats a sequence of words including the calling party s IP address Tone transmits the specified frequency If the Transmit Source is set to IP Voice Announce the Language selection becomes available This specifies the language for the transmitted voice announcement Enter a value to indicate the Voice IP Quality of Ser vice The value you enter will be both the Differentiated Services DiffServ code point and the type of ser vice ToS indicator The value will occupy a 6 bit field in the packet headers of RTP stream voice packets and will indicate how packets are treated at each hop You can specify a number from 0 to 63 to indicate the per hop behavior Specify the RTP port minimum and maximum num bers The real time transport protocol RTP port number allows you to identify voice traffic versus other traf fic Some systems only accept RTP traffic on cer tain port numbers Specify whether silence suppression is supported 8 In the left panel on the side of the tab select Qo
224. e The display of the bit rate can be shown in total kbps or Mbps To configure the instrument to transmit a constant load of traffic 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the test appli cation for the interface you are testing Refer to Table 7 on page 25 through Table 8 on page 25 for a list of layer 2 and layer 3 applications Table 15 on page 129 lists layer 4 applications 2 Select the Setup soft key and then select the Traffic tab In Load Type select Constant 4 In Load Unit select one of the following Percent If you select Percent in Load enter the duty cycle as a percentage Bit Rate If you select Bit Rate in Load Format enter the bit format as Mbps or kbps Then in Load Mbps or Load kbps enter the bit rate in Mbps or kbps The range in either case is 10 000 bps to 1 Gbps with a maximum precision of 1 000 bps 5 Select the Allow flooding check box to transmit true 100 load in those circuits that can certainly handle the signal Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Transmitting a bursty load Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 2 testing 6 If you need to specify other settings for the test select the appropriate tab otherwise press Results to return to the Main screen The instrument is configured to transmit a constant rate of traffic With a bursty load the instrument transmits frames at 100 bandwidth for a specific time interval followed
225. e Capture File dialog box appears see Figure 19 Save Capture File facterna user disk bert capture a a Name Size Type Date Modified O JDSU_ca 15 MB pcap File 6 12 09 7 50 PM File Type All files gt Save Full buffer s Compress file v Launch Wireshark after saving Delete All Delete Save Cancel Figure 19 Save Capture File dialog box Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Capturing packets for analysis 3 At the top of the dialog box select one of the following To Select this Save the captured packets to the internal acterna user bert disk capture USB drive Save the captured packets to an external acterna user usbflash USB drive 4 Specify the following settings Setting File Type File Name Save From Amount Compress File Launch Wireshark after saving Parameter If you want to see all files stored in the location you selected in step 3 select All files otherwise accept the default Pcap files If you want to specify a file name instead of accepting the default type the name using popup keypad You do not need to specify the pcap file extension the instru ment will automatically do so for you Select one of the following If you want to save all of the packets in the buffer select Full Buffer If you only want to save some of the packets in the buffer select Partial Buffer
226. e Count Count of the SSM Information messages received Information SSM Message Count Count of the SSM Malformed messages received Malformed SSM PDU Rate pps Rate of the PDU Protocol Data Unit On the Summary results page the Wrong SSM PDU Rate result may appear This alarm indicates that the PDU rate is slower than 1pps or faster than 10pps AutoNeg Status results The AutoNeg Status category displays results associated with the auto nego tiation of capabilities between two Ethernet devices Table 61 on page 321 describes each of the results for 10 100 1000 links muy NOTE AutoNeg Status results only appear when auto negotiation is turned ON on the T BERD MTS 5800 Table 61 10 100 1000 AutoNeg Status results Test Result Description 1000Base TX FDX Indicates that the Ethernet link partner is full duplex capable at 1000Base TX YES or NO 1000Base TX HDX Indicates that the Ethernet link partner is half duplex capable 1000Base TX YES or NO 100Base TX FDX Indicates whether the Ethernet link partner is full duplex capable at 100Base TX YES or NO 100Base TX HDX Indicates whether the Ethernet link partner is half duplex capable at 100Base TX YES or NO 10Base TX FDX Indicates whether the Ethernet link partner is full duplex capable at 10Base TX YES or NO 10Base TX HDX Indicates whether the Ethernet link partner is half duplex capable at 10Base TX YES or NO Duplex Indicates the negotiated duplex sett
227. e Main screen The external settings are specified Setting Connection Before running any of the RFC2544 automated tests the connection parame parameters ters must be defined so the local and remote units can link Configuration methods Upon initiation of the RFC2544 Automated configuration the user is given the option of defining all parameters manually or restoring a configuration from a previously saved file In either case any parameter may be modified prior to running the tests 238 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 10 Automated Testing Automated RFC 2544 Retrieving configuration from previously saved file 1 To select a configuration currently saved on the unit select the Go button right green arrow after Load Configuration from Profile The interface shown in Figure 66 will appear Load Profiles W Not Running Btests acterna storage bert user berttests lt a o gt amp E E Select Profiles Corect E profles 2013 06 12T14 48 22 expert_rfc Network Utilization Traffic Mode Selected Frames v Selected Tests Throughput Cfg v atanru Randwidth af Select All Unselect All Note Loading the Connect profile will connect the communications channel to the remote unit if necessary W Delete All T Delete Load Profiles K3 Skip Load Profiles mmi Figure 66 RFC 2544 Load Profiles screen 2 After se
228. e Rated Hae a hte cig ie ee aad esi a ah ea 332 Chapter 12 Troubleshooting 333 Before testing 4 2 2200 cutie ee a ee ee eee 334 The test application need is not available 334 am receiving unexpected errors when running optical applications 334 Resolution doane ia ee Bate eae dA a a a a a 334 Performing testS 0 00 cece eee eee eee eee 334 Optical Overload Protection message 00 334 Inconsistent test results 0 000 00 eee ees 334 Result values are blank 000 00 ce eee aes 334 Unit on far end will notloop up 0 202 20a ee 335 A receiving instrument is showing many bit errors 335 RFC 2544 button does not appear 2222005 335 am transmitting layer 2 Ethernet traffic with OAM frames at 10 Mbps but no frames are transmitted or received 335 Upgrades and options 000 e eee eee eee 335 How do upgrade my instrument 000 eae 335 How do install test options 0202020 0s 335 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual xiii Contents Appendix A GPS Option for Timing Verification and Analysis 337 GPS and Precision Timing 0 cece eee eee eee 338 Use of GPS Hardware in Testing 000ce eee e eee ees 338 GPS Option Hardware and Software 0000e eee eee 338 GPS Option List of Contents 2 0000 00 e eee 33
229. e Technical Assistance Request form at www jdsu com Ethernet IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual xix About this Manual Technical assistance XX Ethernet IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Basic Testing This chapter explains basic testing concepts and procedures common to each Ethernet IP and TCP UDP test Detailed information about concepts and procedures shared by all supported test applications are provided in the Getting Started manual that shipped with your instrument Topics discussed in this chapter include the following Step 1 Selecting a test application on page 2 Step 2 Configuring a test on page 2 Step 3 Connecting the instrument to the circuit on page 3 Step 4 Starting the test on page 3 Step 5 Viewing test results on page 4 Running multiple tests on page 5 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 1 Chapter 1 Basic Testing Step 1 Selecting a test application Step 1 Selecting a test application The Test menu on the Main screen lists each of the available test applications If you have a dual port chassis by default the first application you select will be for port 1 P1 To select an application 1 Select Test The Test menu appears 2 Select the technology for example Ethernet signal payload and test mode for your test application The instrument displays a message asking you to wait while it loads the applicati
230. e Traffic Type and the Address Type carried in the received traffic you want to capture Ifyou launched a layer 3 or layer 4 application and you want to specify detailed filter information select Basic and then set the filter mode to Detailed Use the Ethernet IP and TCP UDP selections in the pane on the left to display the filter settings for your particular test and then specify the settings that capture the received traffic that you want to analyze see Specifying Ethernet filter settings on page 49 Specifying IPv4 filter settings on page 79 and Filtering received traffic using layer 4 criteria on page 134 The filter settings are specified for the capture There are two ways to capture packets manually starting and stopping the capture capturing packets based on a triggering event Capturing packets involves launching and configuring an Ethernet IP or TCP UDP application specifying the capture settings and if you are capturing received traffic specifying the filter settings If you are capturing received traffic only you can start the capture process immediately If you intend to capture transmitted or looped back traffic you must actively start traffic transmission The traffic can then be looped back to be captured by the transmitting instrument or captured by a second receiving instrument on the circuit When capturing packets bear in mind that configuring the capture for a large
231. e address carried in each frame for a specific number of frames ARP mode If you are transmitting layer 3 traffic you can enable ARP mode to determine the layer 2 destination MAC address of the destination or gateway router automatically or you can disable ARP mode and then manually specify the destination MAC address You can also indicate that the instrument should only ARP to devices on the same VLAN specified for transmitted traffic You can also assign a user defined source MAC address to your instru ment to determine whether network problems originate with a particular address for an Ethernet device Changing BERT patterns or payload type In order for a BERT analysis to be reliable the test configuration must not change for the entire duration of the test Changing any part of the configuration including the pattern or source of the frames being analyzed including changes in loopback may result in momentary BERT bit errors and a pattern sync loss detected by the receiver after the traffic resumes Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 43 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 2 testing Specifying the settings 44 If you do experience bit errors and sync losses after changing the test configuration including initiating loop up and starting traffic press the Restart soft key to clear the initial burst of errors If you no longer make configuration changes you can stop and start traffic without
232. e all received traffic For details refer to Specifying filter settings on page 191 2 Select the Capture setup tab and then specify the following settings Setting Parameter Capture buffer size MB Specify a size ranging from 1 to 256 MB ina 1 MB increment The default buffer size is 16 MB Capture frame slicing If you want to capture the first 64 or 128 bytes of each frame and ignore the rest of the frame select 64 or 128 otherwise select None If you select None the default the entire frame is captured When capture buffer is If you want to overwrite the oldest packets with filled new packets when the buffer becomes full select Wrap Capture otherwise select Stop Capture Select the Results soft key to return to the Main screen 4 Select the Capture toolbar and then select Start Capture A message appears in the message bar indicating that the capture has started and the action key states Capture Started 5 If you want to manually stop capturing packets for example after the instrument has transmitted and received a certain number of frames select the Capture Started action key The action key turns gray and a message appears in the message bar indicating that the capture is complete Packets were captured and are stored temporarily in the capture buffer A count of the number of packets processed is provided in the Ethernet result group in the Capture category w WARNING Changing applicati
233. e bytes in user defined patterns right to left For example a user defined hexadecimal pattern of 12345678 populates the frame as 12345678 Using the same hexadecimal pattern the FST 2802 would populate the frame as 78563412 7 Ifyou need to specify other settings for the test select the appropriate tab otherwise press Results to return to the Main screen The transmitted frame settings are specified Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 117 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing MAC in MAC testing Specifying Ethernet filter settings for MiM traffic 118 Before transmitting or monitoring layer 2 traffic on a MiM trunk you can specify settings that indicate the expected received payload and determine which backbone frames will pass through the receive filter and be counted in the test result categories for filtered layer 2 traffic The settings may also impact other results If you want to observe results for the Customer Link counts or statistics ensure that the B TAG and I TAG filter settings and the Customer filter settings match those carried in the analyzed traffic NOTE During layer 2 BER testing incoming frames must pass the filter to be ana lyzed for a BERT pattern Local loopback is also only performed on frames that pass the filter Use the filter when analyzing BERT frames and non test frames are present To specify Ethernet filter frame settings 1 If you haven t already done
234. e coupling selection is only available if testing full duplex 100M 1G or 10G LAN optical circuits Initiate the switch to the protect line 10 Observe the service disruption result in the Ethernet L2 3 Link Stats result category You have measured service disruption time OAM service and link layer testing 108 Service layer features You can position the instrument at various endpoints in a Maintenance Domain MD or Maintenance Association MA area to verify that no trunk problems occur per ITU T Rec Y 1731 and IEEE 802 1ag You can also use the instrument to verify point to point link layer performance per IEEE 802 3ah You can observe results associated with your test in the OAM result category For details refer to Service OAM results on page 309 of Chapter 11 Test Results When using your instrument for service layer OAM testing you can do the following Specify the Maintenance Domain MD level Maintenance Entity Group MEG End Point IDs and Maintenance Association MA IDs Specify the Continuity Check Message CCM transmission rate Specify the CCM and LBM Multicast address when running non MAC in MAC applications Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Link layer features Specifying OAM settings Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing OAM service and link layer testing Choose from a variety of defect and continuity detection options Conti nuity Verification CV Fas
235. e far end of the circuit and that the tester has detected an impedance exceeding 333 ohms The distance from the near end tester to the end of the cable or the cut is also provided Short Indicates a positive and negative line on the same pair are touching and that the tester has detected an impedance less than 33 ohms Unknown Indicates the tester has detected impedance outside of the ranges stated for Open and Short faults or that the cable is properly terminated into another Ethernet port Unknown does not necessarily indicate that a fault was detected NOTE If the far end of the cable is connected to a powered down IP phone and the phone is an older model there is a filter that connects between pairs 1 2 and 3 6 in the phone Depending on the characteristics of the filter your tes ter may report a fault for pairs 1 2 and 3 6 For each fault detected the distance from the T BERD MTS 5800 to the fault is listed If no fault is detected N A appears The Skew result is a measurement of timing differences between the MDI pairs on active 1G electrical links Timing differences may occur for a variety of reasons For example if different insulating materials are used on the pairs a variance in the signal velocity skew may occur If the skew is significant transmission of the signal may be impaired to such a degree that the received signal can not be synchronized Pair skew is reported in 8 ns increments The Polari
236. e for the remote unit s IP will last It should be the same as the requested lease time but the server may limit it to a smaller value in some cases Optional If it appears that the discovery server is not responding use the Ping button to verify that the discovery server or at least some thing responds at the specified IP address Click Back to return to the Connect to Remote page Enter the IP address of the Destination device If you are using a discovery server this will be automatically populated and grayed out On Layer 3 or Layer 4 applications to verify that there is a device at the address specified select the Ping button If there is a device a green check mark will appear beside the Remote IP address To connect to the remote unit press the Connect to Remote button Depending on the line rate the local port and auto negotiation connec tions are configured and turn green when ready Then if using a discovery server the T BERD MTS 5800 obtains the destination IP Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 255 Chapter 10 Automated Testing SAMComplete from the discovery server and the display turns green if the server granted the requested lease time or yellow if the server grants a limited time less than requested amp System E Tests 10 41 AM Connect to Remote Test Aborted Is VLAN Tagging used on the Local network port No Yes Destination IP Local Port Auto Nego
237. e graphic and then entering or selecting a value Colored fields can be edited fields in gray can not be modified Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 5 TCP UDP Testing About TCP UDP testing Figure 29 illustrates the TCP packet details for a layer 4 traffic test Configure Outgoing TCP Packets Figure 29 TCP Packet Details For details on specifying layer 4 traffic characteristics see Specifying TCP UDP settings for transmitted traffic on page 132 TCP UDP test applications If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so the applications listed in Table 15 are supported Table 15 TCP and UDP applications Circuit Application Test Mode 10 100 1000 Layer 4 Traffic Terminate Loopback Layer 4 Multiple Streams Terminate Loopback 100M Optical Layer 4 Traffic Terminate Loopback Layer 4 Multiple Streams Terminate Loopback 1GigE Optical Layer 4 Traffic Terminate Loopback Layer 4 Multiple Streams Terminate Loopback 10GigE LAN Layer 4 Traffic Terminate Layer 4 Multiple Streams Terminate 1 When running loopback tests if both units are capable of transmitting traffic select a Termi nate mode application for each unit If the loopback unit cannot transmit traffic place it in Loopback mode Loopback mode does not appear if your unit is capable of transmitting traf fic In addition to the single stream applications you can also transmit and analyze up to ten streams
238. e number of frames you want to transmit e In Rate fr sec enter the rate at which you want to transmit the frames f In Timeout msec enter the number of milliseconds the instrument will wait to receive the looped back frame before stopping transmission of frames 5 If you want to transmit control frames for different protocols do the following for each protocol a Select the Add Frame softkey b Specify the settings listed in step 4 for each type of frame or use the Quick Config softkey populate the frame list with all types of control frames or frame types for a particular protocol family You can also assign common encapsulation settings to all of the frame types that appear in the list using the Quick Config softkey see Using Quick Config to configure test frames on page 71 6 Press Results to return to the Main screen The traffic originating instrument is configured for a layer 2 transparency test You can quickly populate the Frames List with frame types for all available protocols or a particular family of protocols When you do so all current frame settings will be overwritten and the frame types generated by the instrument will all share the same encapsulation settings After populating the list using the Quick Config softkey you can then optionally edit the settings for the generated frame types For example you can assign different VLAN priorities to the frame types To quickly generate and configure
239. e number of steps in information rate needed to reach the CIR The corresponding number of Step Values CIR appear The default values will be equal parts based on the number of steps for example if 3 steps are used each will be 25 The values can be changed if required Step Duration The duration in seconds that traffic is generated for each step Step Values CIR Advanced These will be automatically popu lated with the equal part values calculated from the Number of Steps below CIR parameter but can be changed to any value between 0 and 100 Test Duration The duration in minutes that traffic is generated before the service performance test completes NOTE When running bidirectional tests the service performance test duration applies to each direction So if you run an upstream and downstream test and the test duration is set to 3 minutes the test will run for 6 minutes b Select Next the green arrow 12 The Save Profiles window appears Do one of the following a_Ifno Profile is to be saved at his time select the Skip Profiles arrow at the bottom of the window Go to step 13 b If it is desired that the configuration be saved to memory disk or USB specify the filename To save somewhere other than the default loca tion press the Select button after the filename to define the directory where it is to be stored c If itis desired that subsequent users be restricted from being
240. e of the line rate of available bandwidth NOTE The bandwidth utilization calculations are made on per second boundaries and may happen in the middle of a large frame causing the utilization to be reduced Displays the VLAN ID of the last filtered tagged frame Displays the VLAN priority of the last filtered tagged frame Displays the tunnel label of the last filtered VPLS encapsulated frame Displays the tunnel priority of the last filtered VPLS encapsulated frame Displays the tunnel TTL value of the last filtered VPLS encapsulated frame Displays the VC label of the last filtered VPLS encapsulated frame Displays the VC priority of the last filtered VPLS encapsulated frame Displays the VC TTL value of the last filtered VPLS encapsulated frame Table 41 describes the L2 Filter Counts L2 Customer Filter Counts results for filtered traffic such as the number of received frames and the number of received frames with an Acterna payload Only valid frames are counted in this category errored frames are not counted When testing VPLS encapsulated traffic layer 2 filter count results appear in the L2 Customer Filter Counts category Table 41 L2 Filter Counts results Test Result gt 1518 1522 gt 1518 1526 1024 1518 1522 1024 1518 1526 Description A count of filtered Ethernet frames with a length greater than 1518 bytes non tagged frames 1522 bytes VLAN tagged frames 1526 bytes Q in Q encapsulated fr
241. e required global default gateway and DNS server addresses from a DHCPV6 server Stateless Select Stateless if you know that routers on the network allow stateless configuration When you use Stateless configuration the instrument generates a tentative link local address and then Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Specifying IPv6 filter settings Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 3 testing performs Duplicate Address Detection to verify that the address is not already used If DAD is successful the instrument then obtains a subnet prefix from the router to build the required global address Manual Select Manual if you want to specify the source link local address global address subnet prefix length and default gateway 9 Select the Destination Address field and then specify the destination address for the traffic 10 Select the Data field and then select do the following If you want to transmit packets with a time stamp and sequence number select Acterna Indicate whether you want the payload to carry a BERT pattern or a Fill Byte pattern then specify the pattern If you are measuring round trip delay on a 10 Gigabit circuit in RTD Setup indicate whether you want to measure delay with a high degree of precision or a low degree of precision In most instances you should select High Precision Low Delay NOTE You must select an Acterna payload to measure round trip dela
242. e to see the applications used to establish a standard layer 3 IP connection IPv4 Internet Protocol Version 4 IPv6 Internet Protocol Version 6 IR Information Rate ISM In Service Monitoring ISO International Organization for Standardization ISP Internet service provider A vendor who provides access to the Internet and the World Wide Web ITU International Telecommunica tions Union based in Geneva Switzer land Ethernet IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Glossary J Jabber An Ethernet frame that exceeds the IEEE 802 3 maximum length of 1518 bytes or 1522 bytes with a VLAN tag and contains an errored FCS J Connect Utility that allows you to detect other JDSU test instruments on a particular subnet and use a detected instrument s addresses to automatically populate key traffic settings Also known as JDSU Discovery JDSU Discovery See J Connect J Mentor Utility provided on the instru ment that allows you to capture data for analysis when testing from an Ethernet interface J Proof Application used to verify Layer 2 Transparency J Scan Utility used to scan and detect the signal structure and mappings from a SONET or SDH interface Also referred to in other documents as the Auto Discovery feature Jumbo frame An Ethernet frame that exceeds the IEEE 802 3 maximum length of 1518 bytes or 1522 bytes with a VLAN tag You can transmit jumb
243. e to acquire CDMA for one hour while the Time Figure of merit has been 9 Indicates the Preecis Cf device cannot be expected to work properly due to an internal error Time Figure of Merit Indicates the GPS accuracy of the current signal Firmware Version Displays the firmware of the connected CDMA receiver CDMA GPS Receiver Log 308 The CDMA Receiver Log provides a listing of significant events and messages such as sync acquired or CDMA loss Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results Service OAM results Table 45 describes the Service OAM results such as the number of RDI seconds loss of continuity indicator and the number of transmitted and received CCM frames Table 45 Service OAM results Test Result Description CCM Loss of Continuity ON indicates that a loss of continuity has occurred Maint ID Displays the maintenance association ID configured for the CCM frame received MD Level Displays the maintenance domain level configured for the CCM frame received Mismerge ON indicates that CCM frames have been received with the same mainte nance domain level specified for transmitted frames but the received CCM frames carry a different maintenance association ID MAID Peer MEG End Point ID Displays the maintenance entity group end point ID for the instrument s peer as configured
244. e up down arrow at the right end of the File Type field displayed under the files list window 2 To manage files on the displayed list select the desired file s and then select the Delete or Delete All buttons to remove them from the memory 3 To load a profile select one from the list whose configuration is to be loaded 4 Select the Load Profile button to load the configuration for all tests After profile has successfully loaded select OK and then select the Next arrow The TrueSAM profile has been loaded 5 The TrueSAM Edit Run screen appears To change the configuration go to step 4 of TrueSAM Initiation and communication configuration on page 211 Torun the test go to Running TrueSAM on page 224 After specifying settings or loading a profile you are ready to run the test Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 10 Automated Testing Launching a single automated test To run TrueSAM 1 Select Run tests 2 The report info screen will display This screen allows the user to enter information about the test which will be added to the report that is automatically generated as the test is run This information includes Customer Name Technician ID Test Location Work Order Comments Notes Custom Logo from memory 3 After all the desired data is entered into the entry boxes select Next the green arrow 4 Anumber of screens will appear providing data about how the te
245. ear when run ning Mac in Mac applications c Inthe left pane under S OAM select LBM LBR and then specify the following settings Setting Value LBM LBR ping Select one of the following On Select On if you intend to verify connectivity by transmitting ping mes sages Off Select Off if you do not intend to verify connectivity Maintenance Domain Level Specify the level for the Maintenance Domain MD The instrument uses the level that you specify to indicate whether loopback replies LBRs for unexpected lower levels are detected in the traffic stream LBM Type Select one of the following non MAC in MAC Unicast Select Unicast to send CCMs applications only to its destination address Unicast is the default setting Multicast Select Multicast to send CCMs to a reserved multicast MAC address This setting does not appear when running MAC in MAC applications d In the left pane under S OAM select LTM LTR and then specify the following settings Setting Value LTM LTR trace Select one of the following On Select On if you intend to verify connectivity by transmitting trace mes sages Off Select Off if you do not intend to verify connectivity Maintenance Domain Level Specify the level for the Maintenance Domain MD The instrument uses the level that you specify to indicate whether loopback replies LBRs for unexpected lower levels are detected in the traffic stream
246. earest frame size Actual KBytes calculated Actual value of bytes burst Values above the line rate can not be entered 6 If you selected Frames and Duty Cycle as the load unit set the following a Duty Cycle Enter the percentage of the line rate the duty cycle during which traffic will be transmitted in the burst from 0 001 100 Frames Burst Time Select a predefined value or User Defined for the number of frames that are to be included in each burst User Burst Size If User Defined is specified for Frames Burst define the User Burst size 1 65535 frames 7 Specify the burst type for the traffic Fixed Sends a fixed number of bursts and then stops If you select Fixed enter the number of bursts Continuous Sends bursts continuously 8 Ifyou need to specify other settings for the test select the appropriate tab otherwise press Results to return to the Main screen The instrument is configured to transmit bursts of traffic With a ramped load the instrument automatically increases the load by a percentage of bandwidth specified as the load step at a particular time interval specified as the time step The process is repeated allowing you to Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 2 testing easily verify the maximum throughput of a link See Figure 15 Time step sae Te __ Load step Time ___ gt l
247. eat eRe 206 Measuring round trip delay 00 eee e eee een eee eee 207 Monitoring layer 2 traffic 0 ee eee 208 Chapter 10 Automated Testing 209 TTUCS AMS r Skee toe ioe bre ees dates ees Sere ae 210 Setting up TrUeSAM 0 0 eae 210 Loading TrueSAM Profile 0 000 eee eae 223 Running TrueSAM eana ea ee ee ea er ae ee 224 Launching a single automated test 20000eeee eee eeeee 225 Automated RFC 2544 0 ccc eee 227 Features and capabilities 0 00020 228 About loopbacks 0000 eee eee 229 JZQUICKCHOCK 3 h4 ty b ace tel bs ha EE oo ddd te Phe Rd cab edd 229 Understanding the J QuickCheck stages 230 Test at configured Max Bandwidth 0000 0 231 Layer 2 QuICk TeSt izers er tad dae ee beer ee yates 231 Asymmetrical tests 2 2 0 eee 231 Throughput testine i seta Se 8 ee os Oe cae hes GG ely 232 JDSU zeroing in method 0 0 eee 232 Throughput test results 0 0 eee 233 Pass fail threshold 0 0 0 0 eae 233 Latency RTD teSt s soso bol dh a ek iis ba ek aos 233 About the latency test 2 ee 233 Pass fail threshold sidrana e aa O eee 234 Packet Jitter test 2 0 2 cei ee eee ik ted hn ee ee 234 About the Packet Jitter test 2 eee 234 Packet Jitter test results 0 eee 234 Pass fail threshold ne tnn E EE 234 About the System Recovery test auuu na uaaa eee eee 234 About the System Recover
248. ecified on the Load Distri bution screen see Specifying the load type for all streams on page 152 The streams are configured Before running the TCP Host application you must specify TCP Host settings The TCP Host setup tab allows you to configure your instrument as a TCP client or server and specify key settings such as the TCP port that you are establishing a stateful connection to the client or server window size the maximum segment size and the type of service that the unit is emulating if your instrument is operating as a client To specify TCP Host settings 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the Layer 4 Multiple Streams or Layer 4 TCP Wirespeed application for the circuit you are testing Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 139 Chapter 5 TCP UDP Testing Running TCP Host applications Setting TCP Host Mode Connect to Server Connect to Port Listen Port Window Size Max Seg Size Bytes Type of Service Transmit Mode Number of Bytes Time sec Number of Connections Report Rate Format Report Interval 140 TCP Host Client 4 4 2 Select the TCP Host tab then select the TCP Host Settings sub tab Specify the following settings TCP TCP Host Wirespeed Server Client Ni 4 TCP Wirespeed Server Ni Value Indicate whether the unit is operating as a Cli ent or as a Server If the instrument is connec
249. ecify settings to listen for ATP traffic received Specify settings to listen for ATP traffic received from Unit B from Unit A ATP Listen IP ATP Listen IP Destination IP Address carried in Unit B traffic Destination IP Address carried in Unit A traffic ATP Listen Port ATP Listen Port Destination Port carried in Unit B traffic Destination Port carried in Unit A traffic Figure 30 ATP Listen Scenario End to End testing When initiating a loop back from the local unit using the Loop Up command no ATP listen settings need to be specified for either unit see Figure 31 Transport Network Unit A Issues Loop Up command Unit B Loops received traffic back to UnitA TCP UDP tab Swaps Destination IP Address and Destination Port ATP Listen IP and ATP Listen Port are automatically carried in received traffic with Unit A s Source IP set to Unit A s Source IP and Source Port You do Address and Source Port Sends ATP traffic back to not need to specify the Listen settings Unit A Figure 31 ATP Listen Scenario Loop Up initiated from Unit A Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 5 TCP UDP Testing Specifying layer 2 and layer 3 settings Figure 32 illustrates the settings required for Unit A when traffic is looped back from the Unit B using the LLB action Transport Network Unit A Sends traffic to UNIT B Unit B Placed into Loopback Mode using LLB TCP UDP tab Swaps Destina
250. ecify the address carried in the traffic that you want to analyze To specify additional filter settings see Filtering traffic using Q in Q criteria on page 52 Filtering traffic using stacked VLAN criteria on page 53 Filtering traffic using VPLS criteria on page 54 Filtering traffic using MPLS criteria on page 55 Filtering traffic using byte pattern criteria on page 56 Filtering traffic using payload criteria on page 57 If you need to specify other settings for the test select the appropriate tab otherwise press Results to return to the Main screen The Ethernet filter settings are specified If your instrument is configured to transmit Q in Q encapsulated traffic you can filter received traffic using Q in Q criteria To filter traffic using Q in Q criteria 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the layer 2 or layer 3 test application for the interface you are testing Refer to Table 7 on page 25 through Table 8 on page 25 for lists of applications Select the Setup soft key and then select the Ethernet tab Verify that Q in Q is specified as the encapsulation Select the Filters tab In the panel on the left side of the tab select Ethernet then specify the following a On the graphic of the frame select SVLAN and then specify the following Setting SVLAN ID SVLAN User Priority SVLAN DEI Bit SVLAN TPID hex Va
251. ect the layer 2 test application for the interface you are testing Refer to Table 7 on page 25 through Table 8 on page 25 for lists of layer 2 applications 2 Select the Capture tab and then set Capture to Enable and set Use Filters as to Filter 3 Select the Filters tab and then specify the following a Inthe panel on the left side of the tab select Summary and then select Clear All Filters to clear any previous filter settings b Inthe panel on the left side of the tab select Byte Pattern and then set Use Byte Pattern as to Filter Figure 12 explains the different filter and trigger modes You can find this table by clicking the next to Use Byte Pattern as Basic Detailed Filter Set 16 Byte Pattern Comment Filter Mode Filter Mode Extended Filter Both filters have to pass with AND coupling Trigger Mode Trigger Mode Extended Trigger No filters set they are all Don t Care Trigger on junfiltered packets The filter counts are same as link counts Filter Mode Trigger Mode Triggering occurs on filtered packets Only filtered packets will be captured Figure 12 Filter and trigger modes 56 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Filtering traffic using payload criteria Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 2 testing c Specify the following Seiting Value Match Method Select how to match the pattern Fixed offset match the pattern at the specified Pattern Off set or
252. ected a layer 2 traffic application select the Ethernet setup tab or if you selected a layer 3 traffic application select the IP setup tab Select the DATA field to specify that transmitted frames will carry an Acterna payload Ifyou are measuring delay on a 10 Gigabit Ethernet or 10 Gigabit Fibre Channel circuit verify that the RTD Setup setting is set to High Precision Low Delay 3 If you need to specify other settings for the test select the appropriate tab otherwise press Results to return to the Main screen Connect the instrument to the circuit If you are testing an optical interface select the Laser button 6 Verify that the green Signal Present Sync Acquired and Link Active LEDs are illuminated 7 Ata minimum observe the delay and jitter test results in the Ethernet L2 Link Stats or L3 Link Stats category and the L2 Filter Stats or L3 Filter Stats category If your delay results measurements display Out of Range change the RTD Setup to Low Precision High Delay and then restart the test Round trip delay and packet jitter are measured Measuring one way delay One way delay measurements are measurements of delay in a single direction from a source node to a destination node They differ from round trip delay measurements because they do not include the cumulative network delays associated with inbound and outbound traffic Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 101
253. ectivity Record and observe the route of traffic through the network using the Traceroute application Insert IP checksum errors into the traffic stream Insert Acterna payload errors into the traffic stream Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing About Ethernet and IP testing PPPoE support You can configure your unit to emulate a PPPoE client or server login to a PPP peer to establish a PPPoE session and then transmit IPv4 packets over an Ethernet circuit for analysis For details see Specifying L3 interface settings on page 74 and Specifying PPPoE settings on page 75 IPv6 support lf you purchased the IPv6 Traffic option you can transmit and analyze IPv6 traffic using the terminate and monitor thru applications When configuring your test you can specify the required addresses manu ally or you can use stateless or stateful auto configuration to assign addresses for you Packet capture and analysis lf your instrument is configured and optioned to do so you can use it to capture transmitted and received data save it on the instrument or to a USB key and then either send the data to another technician for analysis or analyze it yourself using the Wireshark protocol analyzer provided on the instrument For details see Capturing packets for analysis on page 87 MPLS and VPLS testing lf you purchase the MPLS VPLS test op
254. ed since the last test start or restart 328 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual L4 Filter Stats results Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results Table 71 describes the L4 Filter Stats result Table 71 L4 Filter Stats results Test Result Rx Mbps Cur L4 Description The current bandwidth utilized by filtered layer 4 TCP UDP traffic expressed in mega bits per second This measurement is an average taken over the prior second of test time L4 Filter Counts results Table 72 describes the L4 Filter Counts results Table 72 L4 Filter Counts results Test Result TCP Packets Description A count of filtered TCP packets received since the last test start or restart UDP Packets A count of filtered TCP packets received since the last test start or restart J Profiler results Table 73 describes the results provided when you run the J Profiler applica tion Table 73 Traffic Profiler Streams results Test Result MPLS MPLS1 Label MPLS MPLS1 Priority MPLS PW MPLS2 Label MPLS PW MPLS2 Priority VLAN SVLAN ID VLAN SVLAN Priority CVLAN ID CVLAN Priority Source MAC Source IP Destination MAC Destination IP Source Port Source Port Name Dest Port Dest Port Name Description Displays the label attached to groups of profiled streams Displays the priority of the identified stream Displays the label attached to groups of profile
255. ed with the alarm or defect appear in the Status result category Layer 2 OBSAI testing 16 If the instrument is optioned to do so the Port Type Enable LOS Force Tx Idle and define the RP3 address and Type parameters can be specified in Layer 2 OBSAI applications To configure Layer 2 CPRI testing 1 Using the Test Menu select a OBSAI Layer 2 BERT Terminate application Protocol Frequency Applications OBSAI 768 0M Layer 2 BERT Terminate 1536 0M Layer 2 BERT Terminate 3072 0M Layer 2 BERT Terminate 6144 0M Layer 2 BERT Terminate 2 Select the Setup soft key and then the OBSAI tab a Inthe Tx box specify the Port Type LOS Enable Force Tx Idle RP3 Address and RP3 Type b In the Rx box specify the RP3 Address and RP3 Type 3 Select the Pattern tab a Select a Pattern Mode b Select the desired pattern from the list of available patterns Ethernet IP TCP UDP Fibre Chan VoIP and Video Testing Manual Chapter 3 CPRI OBSAI Testing Inserting errors 4 If service disruption detection is desired select the Service Disruption tab and click the Enable checkbox Define the parameters to be detected from the available selections 5 Ifa timed or delayed start test is required select the Timed Test tab and specify the desired start times and duration Select the Results soft key to return to the Main screen 7 Select the Laser Tab at the bottom of the screen and click the Laser On button 8 Select the CPRI result
256. ee 191 Capturing packets for analysis 0 00 eee eee eee eee 191 Understanding the Capture toolbar 0 0002 e eee eae 191 Specifying filter settings 0 2 cee ee ee 191 Capturing packets s ses saiban ii stipa iaag ARR ORS a ee 191 Analyzing Audio Packets 0 0 0c eee eae 193 Chapter 9 Fibre Channel Testing 195 About Fibre Channel Testing 200 eee e eee ee eee 196 Features and capabilities nasaan 0 02 c eee ee 196 Understanding the graphical user interface 5 196 Fibre Channel test applications 200020 cae 197 X Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Contents Configuring layer 1 testS 00 cece 197 BER testing layer 1 oe 2 ganra sinta eee eee ee EAA 198 Monitoring layer 1 BER 1 2 ee 198 Configuring layer 2 Fibre Channel tests 5 199 Specifying interface settings 0 0 cece eee 199 Specifying Fibre Channel frame settings 000 201 Specifying Fibre Channel filter settings 000 202 Specifying traffic load settings 0 0 eee 203 Transmitting and analyzing layer 2 traffic 000e sees 204 Loop back testing 000 e cece eee eee eee 205 Transmitting and analyzing patterns eee eee eee 205 Measuring service disruption time 0 000 cece eens 206 Inserting GrrOrs sms sr ee See nd Wee ee ae nee EARS
257. ee 266 Automated TCP Throughput tests 20022e eee eee 267 TrueSpeed Testi 2 cerca s teria a ee eres 268 TrueSpeed test steps 0000 eee 268 About the test steps 0 0000 269 Configuring the TrueSpeed test 0 00 cee ee eee 270 Running the TrueSpeed test 0 00 eee 276 Testing using TAM automation 00e cece eee eee 278 Before testing r iee ee eee ew Ae ee ae a lee egy he 279 Connecting to the management network 0 00 eee ee 279 Connecting to the test network 0 0 00 ee ee 280 Setting up a TAM test 0 2 ee ee 280 Saving automated test report data 0 cee eee eee 282 Chapter 11 Test Results 283 About test results 00 2c e eee eee eee 284 Summary Status results 000 0 cee eee 284 CPRI OBSAI test results 000 cece eee 285 CPRI and OBSAILEDS 0 0 0 c eee ee 285 Interface Signal results 20 0 ee eee 286 CPRI OBSAI Error Stats 0 000020 ee eee 287 CPRI OBSAI Counts results 2 00 0200 eee eee eee 287 CPRI L1 Inband Protocol results 0 0 000055 288 OBSAI Status Results 00 000000 eee 288 CPRI OBSAI Payload BERT results 0 0000 e eee ee 288 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results 289 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP LEDs 291 Cable Diagnostic results 0 2 ee 293 MDI or MDIX Status result
258. een select Tools gt Capture Screenshot A screen shot will be captured and stored as a JPG file in the acterna user disk bert images folder You can include the screen shot when you create reports Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Additional test result information Chapter 1 Basic Testing Running multiple tests For detailed information on the following topics refer to the Getting Started manual that shipped with your instrument or upgrade Expanding and collapsing result measurements Changing the result layout Using the entire screen for results About histogram results Viewing a histogram About the Event log About result graphs Clearing History results Creating and maintaining Custom result groups For descriptions of each result refer to Chapter 11 Test Results Running multiple tests You can significantly reduce your testing time by terminating traffic over multiple circuits simultaneously For example if your instrument is configured and optioned to do so you can transmit traffic from the XFP and SFPs to a network element and then loop the traffic back to your unit to analyze the signals to verify that the network element is operating correctly In addition you can display two test result windows side by side using the Dual Test View button For details refer to the Getting Started manual that shipped with your instru ment or upgrade
259. een arrow 9 If selected the Frame Loss Test screen appears to allow configuration of the parameters necessary for the Frame Loss Test Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 217 Chapter 10 Automated Testing TrueSAM 218 a Select the desired Test Procedure from these options RFC 2544 Transmits traffic at the maximum bandwidth and then decreases the bandwidth for each trial by the granularity you specify The test ends after two successive trials with no frames lost This proce dure also requires specification of Bandwidth Granularity in Mbps Top Down Transmits traffic at the maximum bandwidth specified in the Test Range setting and then decreases the bandwidth for each trial by the Number of Steps specified until the minimum bandwidth is reached for the specified Test Range Bottom Up Transmits traffic at the minimum bandwidth specified in the Test Range setting and then increases the bandwidth for each trial by the Number of Steps specified until the maximum bandwidth is reached for the specified Test Range To further refine the frame loss configuration select Set advanced Frame Loss measurement settings and then choose to Measure Packet Jitter by selecting the checkbox if desired Select Back to return to previous screen c Select Next the green arrow 10 If selected the Back to Back Test screen appears to define the parameters for the Back to Back test a Set the Max Burst Duration Upstrea
260. el IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 97 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Capturing packets for analysis 98 If the file has 50 000 packets or less a summary of the data in the file appears including The number of packets captured The file and data size The capture duration start and stop time The data bit and byte rate The average packet size The average packet rate If the file has more than 50 000 packets a message appears indicating that you can not analyze the packets on the instrument If this occurs export the PCAP file and analyze it using Wireshark on your workstation To analyze the packets in the file select Analyze The utility immediately checks for the following The possible retransmissions of packets High bandwidth utilization Top talkers Detection of half duplex ports ICMP frames After analyzing the packets the Capture Analysis Summary screen appears indicating whether issues were found at layers 1 and 2 the phys ical and Ethernet layer layer 3 the IP layer or layer 4 the TCP UDP layer Green indicates everything was fine at a particular layer Red indi cates that there were issues identified at that layer See Figure 21 Ipsec_193_IPs_chop_00000_19820405212731 pcap Capture Analysis Summary Layer 4 TCP UDP Health ICMP Messages tect Layer 3 detected IP Health Details gt Choose Layer 1 2 PCAP File Ethernet Health Deta
261. el Testing on page 196 Features and capabilities on page 196 Configuring layer 1 tests on page 197 Configuring layer 2 Fibre Channel tests on page 199 Transmitting and analyzing layer 2 traffic on page 204 Loop back testing on page 205 Transmitting and analyzing patterns on page 205 Measuring service disruption time on page 206 Inserting errors on page 206 Measuring round trip delay on page 207 Monitoring layer 2 traffic on page 208 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 195 Chapter 9 Fibre Channel Testing About Fibre Channel Testing About Fibre Channel Testing If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so you can use it to provi sion Fibre Channel service verify end to end connectivity and analyze link performance by simulating different traffic conditions This release of the instrument supports 1 Gigabit 2 Gigabit and 4 Gigabit Fibre Channel testing Features and capabilities Features and capabilities of the T BERD MTS 5800 include the following when testing Fibre Channel service 1 Gigabit 2 Gigabit and 4 Gigabit testing You can run Layer 1 BER Layer 2 Traffic and Layer 2 Pattern tests over 1 2 and 4 Gigabit Fibre Channel circuits Dual port testing is possible in Terminate Monitor Thru and Dual Thru modes Fibre Channel login and flow control The instrument sup
262. en see Figure 10 Test View Reports Tools Help Results Cable Diagnostics Fault Type Distance m Skew ns Polarity Pair zE l MDI 0 open 3 MDI 1 open 3 MDI 2 open 4 MDI 3 open 3 Figure 10 Cable Diagnostics screen For detailed descriptions of each of the measurements see Cable Diagnostic results on page 293 Adjusting the frequency of transmitted optical signals If your unit is configured and optioned to do so you can adjust the frequency of transmitted optical signals in 1 PPM increments Before adjusting the frequency consider the following If you are transmitting traffic to another unit placed in LLB mode if you increase the frequency you may overrun the LLB unit As a result the transmitting unit will report lost frames and out of sequence frames in the traffic received from the LLB unit Increasing the frequency may also overrun certain network devices on the circuit you are testing To adjust the frequency 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the test appli cation for the interface you are testing Refer to Table 7 on page 25 through Table 8 on page 25 for a list of layer 2 and layer 3 applications Table 15 on page 129 lists layer 4 applications 2 Connect the instrument to the circuit 3 Select the Laser button Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 31 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Enabling automatic traffic transmissi
263. ent you can transmit monitor and analyze layer 3 IPv4 or IPv6 traffic Step by step instructions are provided in this section for the following Specifying L3 interface settings on page 74 Specifying PPPoE settings on page 75 Specifying transmitted IPv4 packet settings on page 77 Specifying IPv4 filter settings on page 79 Specifying transmitted IPv6 packet settings on page 80 Specifying IPv6 filter settings on page 81 Transmitting and analyzing IP traffic on page 82 Ping testing on page 83 Running Traceroute on page 85 Monitoring IP traffic on page 86 NOTE IPv4 applications You must select an IPv4 application if you intend to do the following Establish PPPoE sessions Transmit and analyze MPLS encapsulated traffic on electrical or optical circuits Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 73 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 3 testing Specifying L3 interface settings Specifying the data mode and link initialization settings 74 NOTE IPv6 applications You can only run a single IPv6 application at a time You can run other appli cations from other test ports for example a layer 2 Ethernet or layer 3 IPv4 application while running one IPv6 application Before you transmit traffic you can specify interface settings Specification of the interface settings is similar for Layer 2 3 and
264. ent that responds to LBM messages loops back any packet containing the LBM message In Frame Type specify the type of frame you are transmitting DIX or 802 3 If you are verifying layer 2 transparency do the following a Turn L2 Transparency On b In Control Frame Type select the frame type muy NOTE These settings are not applicable when testing 10 GigE WAN circuits 7 If you selected a layer 2 application in Frame Size Bytes select one of the seven IEEE recommended frame lengths Random EMIX or enter a specific Jumbo Undersized or User Defined frame length If the payload is something other than Acterna with BERT payload Undersized is avail able If you selected Random or EMIX use the Configure button to specify user defined random frame sizes including Jumbo or select Reset to transmit frames of randomly generated sizes based on the seven RFC 2544 frame length recommendations EMIX also adds the EMIX Cycle Length field that controls how many frame entries are sent in order before cycling back to the first frame entry and repeating To define the number of frame entries enter a number between 1 and 8 Configure Random Se Frame Size Bytes 72 gt Wea 256 512 1024 AZo lolo ol o ah a 1526 Reset F Close Figure 11 Configure Random Frame Size Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 45 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Tes
265. erature stabilized therefore they need to reach a certain temperature before you can use them to transmit a signal This is expected behavior and does not indicate that there is something wrong with the laser or test instrument It typically takes up to one minute for the temperature to stabilize If you have turned the laser on but no signal is present on the receiving instrument or device simply wait for one minute After you start a test use the buttons at the bottom of the screen to perform actions such as turning the laser on and off starting and stopping traffic starting and stopping a local loop back and inserting errors anomalies alarms or defects Table 6 lists some common Action buttons Table 6 Action buttons Button Action Laser On Off Turns the laser on or off when testing optical rates Insert Error Anomaly Inserts an error or anomaly into the transmitted traffic Insert Alarm Defect Inserts an alarm or defect into the transmitted traffic Start Traffic Stop Traffic Starts or stops transmission of traffic over the circuit Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 3 Chapter 1 Basic Testing Step 5 Viewing test results 1 You can optionally configure optical standard Ethernet applications to automatically transmit traffic after you turn the laser ON Step 5 Viewing test results Setting the result group and category Test results appear in the Results Windows of the Main screen To
266. erface select the Laser button 8 Verify that the green Signal Present and Link Active LEDs are illuminated 9 Select Start Traffic to transmit traffic over the circuit 10 Use the OAM action buttons to manually insert an AIS RDI or LBM AIS when AIS is enabled RDI when CCM is enabled or LBM when LBM is enabled 11 Observe the Ethernet Service OAM results You have analyzed MPLS TP traffic NOTE If capturing and analyzing MPLS TP data using Wireshark please note the following Ifthe transmitting unit s destination MAC address contains a 6 in the first four bits Wireshark will interpret this as the fixed version field at the start of an IPv6 packet and decode it as such Wireshark does not support decoding of T MPLS OAM PDUs and will decode OAM PDUs according to ITU T Y 1711 when it encounters label 13 OAL which will show erroneous fields You can use the instrument to verify that an Ethernet circuit can support a variety of control protocols such as CDP VTP STP and RSTP irrespective of the underlying transport method If the Test Mode is set to J Proof for your application you must actively transmit the test frames by pressing the Start Frame Sequence action button Your unit will not automatically transmit test frames in this mode even if automatic traffic generation is enabled NOTE Legacy JDSU test instruments identify the J Proof applications as Layer 2 or L2 Transparency tests througho
267. eriod the error source is accumulated if it is an error or recorded if it is an alarm GigE Used throughout this manual to represent Gigabit Ethernet Global Addresses Second IPv6 source address assigned to an interface The global address is not used locally and is broader in scope typically to get past a router If you use auto configura tion to establish a link the global address is provided automatically GMRP GARP Multicast Registration Protocol GUI Graphical User Interface Layout of commands in a user friendly environ ment See also UI user interface Ethernet IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol H HBER High bit error ratio HDX Half duplex Histogram Print output of specific results in a bar graph format Hz Hertz cycles per second IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol Inc Increment Internet Protocol Commonly referred to as IP Protocol specifying the format and address scheme of packets trans mitted over the Internet Typically used with TCP IOS Internetwork Operating System Software used on most Cisco Systems routers and current Cisco network switches The instrument allows you to use the automated TAM test to remotely provision and monitor network elements running this IOS IP See Internet Protocol IPoE Internet Protocol over Ethernet Used on the GUI and through this guid
268. ernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 10 Automated Testing Automated TCP Throughput tests site The average retrieval rate for the site is also listed see Figure 84 HTTP Throughput Test HTTP Throughput Test Test Name 10 100 1000 Eth Layer 3 Traffic Term Port 1 17 41 54 Retrieving http www jdsu com 17 42 06 62 86 KB s waw jdsu com index html saved 34231 34231 17 42 06 218 66 KB s www jdsu com includes interface cess screen css saved 28603 28603 17 42 06 10 04 MB s www jdsu com includes interface css home css saved 6023 6023 17 42 07 243 17 KB s www jdsu com includes interface scripts main js saved 771 71 77171 17 42 07 11 42 MB s www jdsu com images interface logo_jdsu gif saved 2803 2803 17 42 08 144 33 KB s www jdsu com images interface main_promotions jpg saved 35131 35131 17 42 08 19 51 MB s www jdsu com includes interface scripts flashobject js saved 6075 6075 17 42 08 4 90 MB s www jdsu com images interface home_register gif saved 1008 1008 Figure 84 HTTP Throughput Test dialog box You can select Refresh to issue a new request for the same web site or you can select New URL to connect to a different site When you are done testing select Close A dialog box appears asking if you would like to save a test report For details see Saving automated test report data on page 282 The HTTP Throughput test is
269. ernet test instrument on the circuit Essentially you must tell it to loop up a specific test instrument by specifying the correct service provider DA Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 169 Chapter 7 Loop back Testing About Loop back testing MPLS labels MPLS destination addresses TCP UDP ATP Listen IP Address 170 and Listen Port Where are the VPLS addresses specified The SP destination address is specified on the Ethernet tab by selecting the DA field for the service provider frame the customer destination address is specified by selecting the Data field for the SP frame and then selecting the DA field for the customer frame displayed graphically underneath the SP frame Looping back multiple streams of VPLS traffic If you are looping back multiple streams of VPLS traffic you must specify a destination SP address for all enabled streams on the All Streams tab but you can specify a unique customer destination address for each individual stream on it s corresponding setup tab You can also copy the customer desti nation address for one stream to all enabled streams Before received traffic is passed through to the loop back unit s transmitter the labels for the traffic are automatically replaced with the labels specified for traffic transmitted from the loop back unit therefore If your local unit is configured to transmit traffic with a second MPLS label but the loop back unit is
270. ernet traffic by suppressing lost frames LF or BERT errors in their associated result counts and as triggers for LEDs during payload analysis turn Payload Analysis Off If you want to filter traffic for a particular pattern turn Payload Analysis On and then specify the BERT pattern Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 119 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing MAC in MAC testing 120 Specifying OAM settings Specifying traffic load settings Transmitting layer 2 MiM traffic 6 If you need to specify other settings for the test select the appropriate tab otherwise press Results to return to the Main screen The received frame settings are specified You can position the instrument at various endpoints in a Maintenance Domain MD or Maintenance Association MA area to verify that no OAM trunk prob lems occur For details refer to OAM service and link layer testing on page 108 Before transmitting layer 2 traffic over a MiM trunk you can specify the type of traffic load the unit will transmit Constant Burst or Ramp The settings vary depending on the type of load When configuring a load you can specify the bandwidth of the transmitted traffic in 0 001 increments for 1 Gigabit or 10 Gigabit circuits or 0 01 incre ments for 10 100 1000 Mbps electrical or 100 Mbps optical circuits For an overview of the available traffic loads see Specifying traffic load settings on page 58
271. erstanding the J QuickCheck stages 230 At each of the three stages of the J QuickCheck application the instrument automatically performs certain actions Some actions must occur before others can take place For example the local port must be up before a loopback can take place Local Port If the application for an optical circuit indicates that the local port is down indi cated by a red Not Connected button if you are running the application for an optical circuit verify that the laser is ON on both near and far end instru ments If you are running the application for an electrical circuit verify that frame sync and link LEDs are illuminated on both instruments Auto negotiation Auto negotiation can not take place until the physical link is established indi cated by a green UP button for the local port If the local port is UP during the auto negotiation stage the instrument does the following Ifthe near end instrument determines that the far end instrument adver tises that it supports auto negotiation the near end instrument automati cally turns auto negotiation ON and indicates the negotiated speed and duplex capabilities Ifyou are running the application on an electrical circuit and the near end instrument determines that the far end instrument does not support auto negotiation the near end instrument automatically turns auto negotiation OFF sets the duplex setting to FULL and the line rate to the d
272. ert Error button to initiate error inser tion 7 Press the Start BERT Pattern action button to start inserting the BERT pattern Ethernet IP TCP UDP Fibre Chan VoIP and Video Testing Manual Chapter 3 CPRI OBSAI Testing Layer 2 CPRI testing This button appears when using the typical BERT patterns it does not apply if you are using the Delay pattern 8 Verify that the green Signal LED is illuminated 9 Observe the test results in the following categories LED Sync Acquisition Frame Sync and L1 Pattern Sync Payload Analysis enabled Interface Signal BERT Error Stats pertaining to Code Violations Frame Sync Pattern Sync Bit Errors and Error Free durations if using typical BERT patterns if using the Delay pattern Round Trip Delay BERT Error Counts pertaining to Rx and Tx Code Word and Frame Counts Also Rx K30 7 Word Count CPRI OBSAI layer 1 BERT is complete Layer 2 CPRI testing If your instrument is optioned to do so you can set Overhead Bytes configure a payload and perform BER testing with optional alarm insertion of your CPRI circuit To configure Layer 2 CPRI testing 1 Using the Test Menu select a CPRI Layer 2 BERT Terminate application Protocol Frequency Applications CPRI 2457 6M Layer 2 BERT Terminate 3072 0M Layer 2 BERT Terminate 6 14 4M Layer 2 BERT Terminate 1228 8M Layer 2 BERT Terminate 2 Select the Setup soft key and then the CPRI tab a b Define the Port Type an
273. esent Pointer Present and BERT Pattern Sync Present Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Unit on far end will not loop up Resolution A receiving instrument is showing many bit errors Resolution RFC 2544 button does not appear Resolution lam transmitting layer 2 Ethernet traffic with OAM frames at 10 Mbps but no frames are transmitted or received Resolution Chapter 12 Troubleshooting Upgrades and options The unit on the far end will not respond to a Loop Up command Verify that the application running on the far end is not configured to automat ically transmit traffic when the laser is turned on If so it can not respond to a Loop Up command Turn the setting off am transmitting an ATP payload carrying a BERT pattern and the receiving instrument is showing a large number of bit errors Verify that the receiving instrument supports ATP payloads carrying BERT patterns The RFC 2544 button does not appear on the Main screen Verify the following Payload analysis is ON for your current test application You can not run the RFC 2544 script when the instrument is configured to analyze live traffic Traffic is not VPLS or MPLS encapsulated You can not run the RFC 2544 with VPLS or MPLS encapsulated traffic The instrument is not configured to run a timed test You can not run the RFC 2544 script during a timed test When your instrument is configured to transmit Ethern
274. ess the timing margins in the received eye CJPAT by exposing the data sampling circuits to large systematic phase jumps Emulate a worse case scenario for power sup CSPAT ply noise within network transceivers Press Results to return to the Main screen Connect the module to the circuit On the Main screen select the Laser button Verify that the green SIGNAL LED is illuminated oN O oO Ff Select Start Pattern to transmit the pattern over the circuit Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 205 Chapter 9 Fibre Channel Testing Measuring service disruption time 9 Ata minimum observe the test results in the following categories Summary Pattern Stats You have transmitted layer 2 patterns Measuring service disruption time You can use two instruments in an end to end configuration to measure the service disruption time resulting from a switch in service to a protect line To measure service disruption time 1 On the near end and far end units if you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the layer 2 terminate test application for the interface you are testing refer to Table 22 on page 197 for a list of applications On the near end unit select the Setup soft key and then select the Traffic tab to configure a constant load of traffic see Transmitting a constant load on page 58 If you need to specify other settings for the test on the near end unit select the
275. essages received in each of the following groups Control Measurement WCDMA FDD WCDMA TDD GSM EDGE TETRA CDMA2000 WLAN Loop back Frame Clock Burst Ethernet RTT WiMAX Virtual HW Reset LTE Generic Packet Multi hop RTT Table 30 shows the CPRI specific L1 Inband Protocol results Table 30 CPRI Counts results Rx Protocol Version Rx C amp M HDLC Rate Rx C amp M Ethernet Subchannel Number Start up State Tx Protocol Version Tx C amp M HDLC Rate Tx C amp M Ethernet Subchannel Number Port Type Received CPRI protocol version Received HDLC bit rate for the slow C amp M channel Received subchannel number at which the control words for the Ethernet channel starts within a hyperframe Current state of start up sequence Transmitted CPRI protocol version Transmitted HDLC bit rate for the slow C amp M channel Transmitted subchannel number at which the control words for the Ethernet channel starts within a hyperframe Current status of port type selection Master Slave Table 29 shows the CPRI OBSAI Error Stats test results Table 31 OBSA Status results Rx State R Scrambler Seed Current state of the OBSAI receiver Captured scrambler seed by the receiver Table 32 shows the CPRI OBSAI payload BERT results Table 32 CPRI OBSAI Payload BERT results Pattern Sync Losses Count of the number of times pattern sync was lost
276. essed as a percentage of the line rate at which no frames were lost for a particular frame length Measured Rate frms sec The peak frame rate expressed in frames per second at which no frames were lost for a particular frame length Pause Detected Indicates whether or not pause frames were detected at the point where no frames were lost for a particular frame length These results are also reported when you run the Latency and Packet Jitter tests You can configure the test to optionally indicate whether the Throughput test passed or failed To do so you specify the bandwidth for the Throughput Pass Threshold If the highest rate at which frames are not lost is equal to or exceeds the threshold the test indicates that the test passed for each transmitted frame length If it falls below the threshold the test indicates that the test failed If the Latency test is a desired part of the test the Throughput test must also be run The Latency test transmits traffic at a specified percentage of the bandwidth at which no frames were lost determined using the Throughput test for each frame length you selected The average delay is then measured after transmit ting traffic for each frame length for the period of time that you specified as the Latency RTD Trial Duration The test measures delay for each trial specified as the Number of Latency RTD Trials and each measurement is then added to a running total After all of the tri
277. et Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 11 Test Results Histogram results Histogram results The Histogram result category provides a display of test results in a bar graph format Histograms enable you to quickly identify spikes and patterns of errors over a specific interval of time seconds minutes or hours A sample histogram is provided in Figure 96 Summary A Mt Date 31 01 2008 Time 01 31 40 Lic Alarm Summary Error Summary Ext Clock Loss Invalid Rx Signal Signal Loss Frm Syn Loss Frm Wd Errs B1 Errors B2 Errors REI L Errs 01 31 30 Figure 96 Sample histogram Results are updated once per second NOTE Histograms are best viewed using single result window See Changing the result layout on page 5 Event Log results The event log result category provides a display listing any significant events errors or alarms that occur during the course of your test The log displays the value for each error or alarm and provides the date and time that the error or alarm occurred Events are updated once per second For instructions on customizing your event log display see About the Event log on page 5 NOTE Event logs are best viewed using single result window See Changing the result layout on page 5 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 331 Chapter 11 Test Results Time test results Time test results
278. et traffic with OAM frames at a low speed 10 Mbps and low bandwidth for example 001 of the line rate the instrument gives the OAM frame the priority and sends it every second As a result regular traffic is stalled because the instrument is only sending the OAM frames at regular intervals This is expected behavior Try the following Increase the bandwidth Turn Link OAM and Service OAM OFF Run the test without the OAM frames Frames will be counted as trans mitted and received Upgrades and options How do upgrade my instrument How do install test options The following section addresses questions that may be asked about upgrading or installing test options for the instrument Upgrades are installed from a USB key Instructions are provided with each software upgrade Test options are enabled by entering a JDSU provided challenge code Instruc tions are provided when you order test options Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 335 Chapter 12 Troubleshooting Upgrades and options 336 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual GPS Option for Timing Verification and Analysis This appendix provides details about the hardware and software that are included in the GPS receiver option available from JDSU Information about critical steps in its setup and usage as a precision timing reference are also provided Topics discussed in this appendix include the f
279. ete on page 250 J Proof used to verify Layer 2 transparency layer 2 services only For more information about this test see Using J Proof to verify layer 2 transparency on page 69 TrueSpeed used to determine Throughput and Performance of the circuit For more information about this test see TrueSpeed Test on page 268 If a test is not applicable for the current configuration it is grayed out Select the tests to be included in the TrueSAM test then select Next right pointing green arrow Configuring communication channels 1 The Connect Local Settings parameters screen appears Specify the communication parameters for the local unit a Choose whether the Source MAC address is to be User Defined or should the Factory Default be accepted b For Layer 3 services select the L3 Source Type Static or DHCP c Enter the Source IP Subnet Mask and Default Gateway to be used for this test Select Next the green arrow 2 The Connect Channel parameters screen appears Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Specify the channel communication parameters for the remote unit Specify the Encapsulation Method None VLAN or Q in Q Specify the FrameType DIX or 802 3 Specify the Interface connector if multiple interfaces are available Select Details to access the Interface parameters and change frequency offset or flow control settings Specify the Destina
280. etected speed A warning also appears informing you that it s possible the far end port is in half duplex mode If you are running the application on an optical circuit and the near end instrument determines that the far end instrument does not support auto negotiation the near end instrument automatically turns the laser OFF turns auto negotiation OFF then turns the laser back ON It then indicates the speed and duplex settings If at any time during this phase the link or frame synchronization is lost the instrument will alert you and will then restart the application automatically Remote Loop A remote loop up can not take place until the physical link is established and auto negotiation succeeds is either ON or OFF The instrument sends a loop down followed by a loop up If the second attempt fails Ifrunning a Layer 2 test The instrument checks for a hardware loop If a hardware loop is not found we check for a permanent loop If a permanent loop is not found the instrument declares No Loop Found If running a Layer 3 or 4 test The instrument checks for a permanent loop If a permanent loop is not found and if ARP is Disabled the instrument checks for a hardware loop If a hardware loop is not found the instrument declares No Loop Found If ARP is Enabled the instrument declares No Loop Found If all three attempts fail verify that the correct destination address or port is specified
281. evels are detected in the traf fic stream Select one of the following Ifyou are testing per IEEE 802 1ag select Yes If you are testing per ITU T Rec Y 1731 select No If you indicated that you want to specify a domain ID enter the ID using up to 22 characters The instrument uses the ID that you specify to indicate whether CCMs are detected with different IDs Specify the Maintenance Association ID using up to 22 characters The instrument uses the ID that you specify to indicate whether CCMs are detected with different IDs b In the left pane under S OAM select AIS and then specify the following settings Setting AIS State Maintenance Domain Level AIS Rate Parameters If you want to test AIS select On other wise select Off Specify the level for the Maintenance Domain MD The instrument will indicate whether AIS for the specified level are detected in the traffic stream Specify the rate at which the instrument will transmit AIS NOTE 3 33ms and 10ms rates are not supported 112 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing OAM service and link layer testing Setting Parameters AIS Type Select one of the following non MAC in MAC applica Unicast Select Unicast to send AIS tions only to its destination address Multicast Select Multicast to send AIS to a reserved multicast MAC address This setting does not app
282. ew the settings If they reflect the scenario that you want to emulate press Start to run the script 10 The FTP Throughput dialog box appears providing the status of the connection each of the file transfers and throughput measurements See Figure 83 FTP Throughput Pesas Test Name 10 100 1000 Eth Layer 3 Traffic Term Port 1 Testing Connection Success Starting Trial 1 06 24 08 05 58 21 PM Put 1 MB file completed Time 1 54 seconds Rate 5 12 Mbps Get 1 MB file completed Time 3 35 seconds Rate 2 32 Mbps Put 2 MB file completed Time 3 05 seconds Rate 5 12 Mbps Get 2 MB file completed Time 6 04 seconds Rate 2 56 Mbps Trial 1 complete Starting Trial 2 06 24 08 05 58 21 PM Put 1 MB file Abort Test Figure 83 FTP Throughput dialog box When the test is complete a dialog box appears asking if you would like to save a test report For details see Saving automated test report data on page 282 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 265 Chapter 10 Automated Testing Automated HTTP Throughput tests The FTP Throughput test is complete The report will provide asummary of the parameters that you specified when you configured the test and then it will provide a summary with the minimum and maximum time in Mbps that it took to send and receive files for each size selected A table listing theoretical and measured values follows the summaries Automated HTTP Throug
283. f test time Average The average bandwidth utilized by the received IP traffic This measurement is an average taken over the prior second of test time Current The current bandwidth utilized by the received IP traffic Minimum The minimum bandwidth utilized by the received IP traffic since the last test restart Peak The peak bandwidth utilized by the received IP traffic since the last test restart Bandwidth utilization is expressed as a percentage of the line rate of available band width NOTE The bandwidth utilization calculations are made on per second boundaries and may happen in the middle of a large frame causing the utilization to be reduced The current bandwidth utilized by the transmitted IP traffic expressed in megabits per second This measurement is an average taken over the prior second of test time Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual L3 Link Counts results Table 51 L3 Link Counts results Test Result gt 1500 Byte Packets Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results Table 51 describes each of the L3 Link Counts results such as the number of received packets number of transmitted packets and number of unicast multicast or broadcast packets The Received Packets result includes errored packets all other results count valid packets only Checkmarks indicate whether the result is provided for IPv4 or IPv6 traffic IPv4 IPv6 Descripti
284. f the line rate of available bandwidth Peak The peak bandwidth utilized by the received traffic since the last test restart expressed as a percentage of the line rate of available bandwidth NOTE The bandwidth utilization calculations are made on per second boundaries and may happen in the middle of a large frame causing the utilization to be reduced The current bandwidth utilized by the transmitted traffic expressed in megabits per second This measurement is an average taken over the prior second of test time The current data rate of transmitted frames calculated over the prior second of test time Data rate is the frame bandwidth excluding the preamble start of frame delimiter and minimum inter frame gap Displays the VLAN ID of the last received tagged frame Displays the VLAN priority of the last received tagged frame Displays the maximum number of VPLS labels for all frames received since starting the test Result appears in the L2 SP Link Stats category Displays the minimum number of VPLS labels for all frames received since starting the test Result appears in the L2 SP Link Stats category Displays the tunnel label of the last received VPLS encapsulated frame Displays the tunnel priority of the last received VPLS encapsulated frame Displays the tunnel TTL value of the last received VPLS encapsulated frame Displays the VC label of the last received VPLS encapsulated frame Displays the VC priority of the last rece
285. face you are testing refer to Table 22 on page 197 fora list of applications Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 9 Fibre Channel Testing Configuring layer 2 Fibre Channel tests 2 To specify the BER pattern for the traffic you are monitoring select the Setup soft key select the Pattern tab and then select the Rx Pattern Connect the module to the circuit On the Main screen select the Laser button Verify that the green Signal LED is illuminated O a A Q At a minimum observe the test results in the following categories Summary Error Stats You are monitoring layer 1 traffic carrying the BERT pattern that you specified Configuring layer 2 Fibre Channel tests Specifying interface settings Using the instrument you can transmit monitor and analyze layer 2 Fibre Channel traffic Step by step instructions are provided in this section for the following Specifying interface settings on page 199 Specifying Fibre Channel frame settings on page 201 Specifying Fibre Channel filter settings on page 202 Specifying traffic load settings on page 203 Before you transmit layer 2 traffic you can specify interface settings which Turn flow control on and specify the login method Implicit Explicit E Port or Explicit Fabric N Port and the number of transmit or receive buffer to buffer credits to communicate to the module s link partner dur
286. fer to Table 22 on page 197 for a list of applications Select the Setup soft key and then select the Fibre Channel Filter tab If you want to filter received traffic for a specific destination or source ID or using routing control data type or sequence control criteria under Frame Channel Details select the corresponding field enable the filter by selecting Yes and then specify the filter value Settings Values R_CTL Enter the routing control for filtered frames D_ID Enter the destination ID for filtered frames S_ID Enter the source ID for filtered frames Data Type Enter the data type for filtered frames SEQ_CNT Enter the sequence ID for filtered frames If you want to filter traffic using payload criteria select Data on the Fibre Channel graphic and then do the following In Payload Analysis select On To use the Tx BERT pattern as the Rx BERT pattern in Rx lt Tx select On otherwise select Off Ifyou are analyzing BERT data and you turned Rx Tx Off specify a BERT pattern If you need to specify other settings for the test select the appropriate tab otherwise press Results to return to the Main screen The filter settings are specified Before transmitting layer 2 traffic you can specify the type of traffic load the unit will transmit Constant Bursty Ramp or Flood The settings vary depending on the type of load When configuring a load you can specify the bandwidth of the transmitte
287. ffic VPLS results and Fibre Channel results do not appear because they are not applicable to your test Categories discussed in this section include the following Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 289 Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results 290 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP LEDs on page 291 Cable Diagnostic results on page 293 SLA KPI on page 296 Interface results on page 296 L2 Link Stats results on page 296 L2 Link Counts results on page 299 L2 Filter Stats results on page 302 L2 Filter Counts results on page 305 J Proof transparency results on page 306 L2 BERT Stats results on page 307 CDMA Receiver Status results on page 308 CDMA GPS Receiver Log on page 308 Service OAM results on page 309 L OAM Modes results on page 310 L OAM Counts results on page 310 L OAM States results on page 311 L OAM Error History results on page 311 L3 Link Stats results on page 312 L3 Link Counts results on page 313 L3 Filter Stats results on page 313 L3 Filter Counts results on page 314 L3 IP Config Status results on page 315 Ping results on page 316 Traceroute results on page 317 Error Stats results on page 317
288. ffic is traffic used to establish a connection with another network element or instrument request information from the element or to verify connectivity with the element Examples of control plane traffic include ARP packets Ping packets and software application layer datagrams such as HTTP TCP UDP or FTP control packets You can capture transmitted and received control traffic from all supported interfaces When you configure your instrument to capture packets you can control the size of the buffer by specifying a size ranging from 1 MB to 128 MB in 1 MB increments You can also control how your instrument handles the packets when the buffer becomes full The instrument can stop capturing packets entirely or it can wrap overwrite the oldest packets in the buffer with new captured packets in 1 MB increments After capturing packets to the buffer you can save them to a a PCAP packet capture file which can optionally be compressed using gzip for efficient storage When you configure your instrument to capture packets you can tell the instru ment to capture only the first 64 or 128 bytes of each packet This allows you to analyze the most important data carried in the packet headers at the begin ning of the packets and to capture and store more packets in the buffer Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Understanding the Capture toolbar Specifying filter settings Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing
289. fic indicate how you want the unit to handle flow control provide the pause quanta for transmitted pause frames and identify all traffic originating from your particular instrument For detailed instructions on specifying these settings refer to Specifying inter face settings on page 41 Before you transmit layer 2 Ethernet traffic over a PBB trunk you can specify the frame characteristics of the traffic such as the backbone source address destination address tag settings and payload Acterna test frames or BER patterns To specify Ethernet frame settings 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the test appli cation for the interface you are testing Refer to Table 8 on page 25 for a list of MiM applications Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 115 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing MAC in MAC testing 2 Select the Setup soft key and then select the Ethernet tab A graphical display of a MiM frame appears Backbone Frames Calculated Backbone Frame Size bytes 534 00 00 00 00 00 00 Figure 26 Backbone frame MiM Traffic application 3 In Frame Size Bytes select one of the seven IEEE recommended frame lengths Random to transmit frames of randomly generated sizes based on the seven RFC 2544 frame length recommendations or enter a specific Jumbo Undersized or User Defined frame length muy NOTE Undersized is available in the Frame Size menu if the TX pay
290. figure a unit on the near end to emulate an ingress PE router transmitting VPLS encapsulated traffic to a second unit on the far end Transmitted traffic is then routed through the VPLS network using the tunnel label you specified The egress PE router removes the tunnel label If the VPLS header also carries a VC label the router forwards the traffic to the appropriate interface Traffic analysis monitor mode For this application you configure a near end unit to transmit layer 2 Ethernet traffic to an ingress PE router The PE router then adds the VPLS header and sends it through the network Using a second unit you connect to the circuit from a port provided by a router and then monitor and analyze the VPLS encapsulated traffic Traffic analysis through mode For this application you configure a near end unit to transmit layer 2 Ethernet traffic to an ingress PE router The PE router then adds the VPLS header and sends it through the network Using a second unit you connect to the circuit at a point between the two routers monitor and analyze the received VPLS encapsulated traffic and then pass the traffic through the unit to transmit it to the next router on the network The instrument allows you to transmit layer 3 IP traffic over a MPLS network by specifying MPLS label settings Figure 9 illustrates a generic MPLS header Shaded fields are user configurable Label ID Priority Stack S Time to Live TTL 20 bits
291. file is to be saved at his time select the Skip Profiles arrow at the bottom of the window Go to step 3 b If it is desired that the configuration be saved to memory disk or USB specify the filename To save somewhere other than the default loca tion press the Select button after the filename to define the directory where it is to be stored 222 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Loading TrueSAM Profile Chapter 10 Automated Testing TrueSAM c If itis desired that subsequent users be restricted from being able modify this profile may be modified if saved under different filename check the box Save as read only d To save the file to memory select the Save Profiles button Then select the Next arrow NOTE Any TrueSAM AMS profile saved prior to T BERD MTS 5800 software v 4 is not compatible with the subsequent versions of the application These profiles must be re configured and saved again to remove the incompatible settings Attempts to configure a unit programmed with T BERD MTS 5800 software older than v 4 with profiles saved on a current unit transferred on USB stick over network etc will also be unsuccessful 2 Do one of the following Enter the desired name of the profile in the File Name box and then select Save Profile Select Next to continue without saving the profile 3 The TrueSAM Edit Run screen appears Go to step 4 of TrueSAM Initiation and communicati
292. filer 7 Select the Start PTP session button 8 Verify that the green Signal Present and Link Active LEDs are illuminated mummy NOTE When running a PTP test it is recommended you avoid CPU intensive actions such as launching another application launching Wireshark or sav ing a capture These can cause a spike in PDV stats 9 Observe the PTP Link Stats and PTP Link Counts muy NOTE The PTP session will be terminated if a loop down request is received If you wish to save the test results do so before looping down You have analyzed PTP traffic Discovering traffic using J Profiler If your instrument is optioned and configured to do so you can use the J Profiler application to automatically discover and monitor up to 128 streams of traffic that satisfy your profile criteria on 10 100 1000 electrical 100M optical and 1GigE optical circuits After discovering the streams you can sort them based on the bandwidth utilized by each stream to identify the top talkers for the discovered streams If there are less than 128 streams present on the link this represents the top talkers for the link If there are more than 128 streams present on the link this represents the top talkers for the streams satisfying your profile criteria When running the J Profiler application standard link and filtered results are provided in addition to the Traffic Profiler Streams results To discover traffic using J Profiler 1 Use the Te
293. filled new packets when the buffer becomes full select Wrap Capture otherwise select Stop Capture Include frames from If you want to capture transmitted frames the Traffic tab traffic load which is specified on the Traffic tab select Yes 5 Select the Results soft key to return to the Main screen If you are capturing transmitted or looped back traffic select Start traffic 7 Select the Capture toolbar and then do the following a Select Start Capture A message appears in the message bar indicating that the capture has started and the action key states Capture Started b If you want to capture packets that shows how the traffic is impacted by various events use the buttons on the Actions Errors and Fault Signaling tool bars to insert the events into the transmitted traffic stream 8 If you want to manually stop capturing packets for example after the instrument has transmitted and received a certain number of frames select the Capture Started action key The action key turns gray and a message appears in the message bar indicating that the capture is complete Packets were captured and are stored temporarily in the capture buffer A count of the number of packets processed is provided in the Ethernet result group in the Capture category WARNING Changing applications or turning OFF the instrument You will lose the entire contents of the capture buffer if you launch a new application on the port that you are c
294. find an appropriate Path MTU by probing the path with progressively larger packets If a probe packet is successfully delivered then the effective Path MTU is raised to the probe size The packet probe size is raised until the packets fail to be delivered this implies that the IP Do Not Frag DF bit is set on all packets Step 2 Determine the baseline RTT Before stateful TCP testing can begin it is important to baseline the round trip delay and bandwidth of the network to be tested These measurements provide estimates of the ideal TCP window size which will be used in subsequent test steps This test is equivalent to a TCP Ping and transfers a light load TCP traffic stream from the client to the server and provides RTT values Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 269 Chapter 10 Automated Testing TrueSpeed Test Configuring the TrueSpeed 270 test Step 3 Run an enhanced walk the windows scan This step runs the traditional Walk the Window test with four different window sizes but the Results screens are enhanced to show measured versus expected throughput results Step 4 Measure TCP throughput This step estimates and measures the maximum TCP throughput on a link for a specific window size and allows the user to specify a file size to transfer between the client and the server This test produces a throughput dashboard result screen which clearly shows the expected versus measured TCP t
295. for standard end to end or multiple streams tests Three action buttons are used for the purpose of initiating or ending loop back tests and placing a unit into loop back mode Loop Up Press Loop Up when you want to initiate the loopup of another unit on the circuit from your unit In this scenario you are initiating the loopup from the local unit Loop Down Press Loop Down when you want to end the loopup of another unit on the circuit In this scenario you are ending the loopup from the ocal unit LLB Press LLB to loop received traffic back through to a units transmitter or to stop looping traffic back through to the transmitter In this scenario you are initiating or ending the loopup from the oop back unit itself During loop back testing if you initiate or end the loop back from the local unit using the Loop Up and Loop Down actions messages are sent to each loop back partner indicating the status of the loop back These messages appear in the Message Bar provided on the Main screen of the user interface When you configure your unit for a loop back test you can specify a Unit Iden tifier which will be provided in each loop up or loop down frame sent from the unit If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so you can run a loop back test using each of the applications listed in Table 19 Table 19 Applications used for loop back testing 10 100 100 FX 1 GigE 10 GigE 10 GigE Application 4000
296. frames Pause Length Quanta Select the field to enter the quanta to be carried by transmitted pause frames To determine the pause duration the receiving device performs the following cal culation 10 GigE LAN optical Quanta x 51 2 ns 4 Optional If you want to transmit an ID to identify all loop up loop down frames originating from the instrument select the Unit Identifier field and then type the ID The default ID is JDSU 5800 5 If you need to specify other settings for the test select the appropriate tab otherwise press Results to return to the Main screen The interface settings are specified Before you transmit traffic you can specify the frame characteristics of the traffic such as the frame type DIX 802 3 control frame type CDP VTP STP or RSTP encapsulation VLAN Q in Q VPLS or MPLS and payload Acterna test frames or BER patterns Consider the following before specifying the settings CDP VTP STP or RSTP headers When configuring traffic with these headers you can optionally specify EtherType settings LLC SNAP settings for 802 3 traffic are assigned automatically Simulating traffic from a number of sources If you would like to transmit traffic carrying a variety of source MAC addresses to simulate traffic from a number of sources you can specify a beginning MAC address or use the factory assigned MAC address and then indicate that the unit should automatically increment th
297. frames received since frame detection Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 297 Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results Table 38 L2 Link Stats results Continued Test Result Tag MPLS Label Depth Max MPLS Label Depth Min MPLS1 ID MPLS1 Priority MPLS1 TTL MPLS2 ID MPLS2 Priority MPLS2 TTL MPLS TP Label Depth Max Description Displays the following for the last received backbone frame Value Displays the value carried in the l Tag field Service ID Priority DEI Use Customer Address in a hexadecimal format Service ID Displays the service ID carried in the last frame Priority Displays the priority carried in the last frame DEI Displays the drop eligible bit carried in the last frame Use Customer Address Displays the use customer address bit carried in the last frame Displays the maximum number of MPLS labels for all frames received since starting the test Displays the minimum number of MPLS labels for all frames received since starting the test Displays label 1 of the last received MPLS encapsulated frame Displays the label 1 priority of the last received MPLS encapsulated frame Displays the label 1 TTL value for the last received MPLS encapsulated frame Displays label 2 of the last received MPLS encapsulated frame Displays the label 2 priority of the last received MPLS encapsulated frame Displays the label 2 T
298. fy the layer 2 settings you are ready to transmit and analyze the layer 2 traffic To transmit and analyze layer 2 traffic 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the layer 2 terminate test application for the interface you are testing refer to Table 22 on page 197 for a list of applications 2 Select the Setup soft key and then select the Interface tab to specify settings that control the Fibre Channel interface see Specifying interface settings on page 199 3 Select the Fibre Channel tab to specify settings that define the frame characteristics of the transmitted traffic see Specifying Fibre Channel frame settings on page 201 4 Select the Fibre Channel Filter tab to specify settings that filter the received traffic based on specified frame characteristics see Specifying Fibre Channel filter settings on page 202 5 Select the Traffic tab to specify the type of load the unit will transmit see Specifying traffic load settings on page 203 NOTE The Gap Idle time parameter that rounds to 0 001 in Ethernet applications rounds to the nearest 1 in Fibre Channel applications 6 Press Results to return to the Main screen 7 Connect the module to the circuit 8 On the Main screen select the Laser button Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 9 Fibre Channel Testing Loop back testing 9 Select Start Traffic for constant bursty or flood loads o
299. fying the length as a packet length set the Length Type to Packet Length and then select or specify the size The automatically calculated frame size appears to the right of the Length Type setting The frame or packet length is specified If you want to filter received traffic using layer 2 or layer 3 criteria set the Filter Mode to detailed on the Filters tab select Ethernet or IP on the left pane and then specify the criteria For details see Specifying Ethernet filter settings on page 49 Specifying IPv4 filter settings on page 79 or Specifying IPv 6 filter settings on page 81 of Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing IPv6 traffic is not supported when running the TCP Wirespeed application You can specify settings that determine which packets will pass through the layer 4 TCP UDP receive filter and be analyzed and reported in the test result categories or looped back to another unit Traffic that does not pass filter criteria is not reported or looped back FILTER TIPS Ifyou want to analyze all received traffic Filter Mode is set to Basic If you want to analyze only layer 4 traffic be certain to set the Filter Mode to Detailed and then Enable the TCP UDP filter To specify TCP UDP filter criteria 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the Layer 4 application for the circuit you are testing refer to Table 15 on page 129 for a list of applications Select the Set
300. g TCP Host script 165 specifying common traffic characteris tics 154 specifying layer 2 settings 156 specifying layer 3 settings 157 specifying layer 4 settings 158 specifying load types 152 specifying load unit 154 transmitting streams 159 Multiple tests running 5 N Network discovery 37 NewGen configuring layer 2 tests 115 inserting errors 121 inserting pause frames 121 measuring packet jitter 121 measuring round trip delay 121 measuring service disruption time 121 monitoring traffic 121 test results about 115 transmitting layer 2 traffic 120 NewGen testing about results 289 O OAM testing about service layer 108 results 309 310 311 sending LBM messages 114 specifying settings 109 turning RDI analysis ON 114 One way delay measuring 101 107 results 304 Optimizing RFC test time 236 OTN testing inserting defects 16 100 P Packet jitter measuring IP 101 Packet settings IP 77 80 Packet slicing about 88 Pair Skew result 295 Parameters specifying test 2 Patterns CJPAT 63 205 CRPAT 63 205 CSPAT 63 205 transmitting layer 2 Ethernet 63 transmitting layer 2 Fibre Channel 205 PBB testing See MiM testing Performance G 826 results 320 Ping results 316 testing 83 316 Placing calls 190 Populating custom results 5 Ethernet IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Ports ATP listen 130 well known TCP UDP 132 PPPoE testing messages 7 See also IP testing PTP analyzing t
301. ge 25 for a list of applications 2 Verify that your instrument is synchronized with GPS time by checking the CDMA Sync and 1PPS Sync LEDs When synchronized the LEDs will be illuminated 3 On each instrument select the Setup soft key and then do the following a lf you selected a layer 2 traffic application select the Ethernet setup tab or if you selected a layer 3 traffic application select the IP setup tab 106 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Measuring service disruption time b Select the Data field to specify that transmitted frames will carry an Acterna payload The payload can be populated with a BERT pattern or Fill Byte pattern c Select the Interface tab and then on the CDMA GPS Receiver tab do the following Enable the CDMA or GPS receiver Choose a Channel Set The selections the vary based on which CDMA or GPS receiver is being used 4 Ifyou need to specify other settings for the test select the appropriate tab otherwise press Results to return to the Main screen 5 Connect the instruments to the circuit For details refer to the Getting Started manual that shipped with your instrument or upgrade 6 Ifyou are testing an optical interface select the Laser button Select the Restart button 8 Verify that the green Signal Present Sync Acquired and Link Active LEDs are illuminated on each instrument 9 Ata minimum observe the one wa
302. ge includes a CDMA receiver AC power adapter Ethernet cable DB 9 to RJ 45 adapter Mg mount 14 antenna and documentation for the items in the package Antenna stub and magnetic mount antenna J Bullet attenuator 500 ohm JDSU BNC male to BNC male cable SMA to BNC Adapter SMA to BNC cable SMA to SMA cable RS 232 Serial cable RS 232 to USB converter Serial DB 9 to RJ 45 cable Spectrum Instruments TM 4M GPS receiver Antenna J Bullet attenuator 500 ohm JDSU BNC male to BNC male cable SMA to BNC Adapter SMA to BNC cable SMA to SMA cable RS 232 Serial Cables DB9 female to RJ 45 1 DB9 to DB9 1 RS 232 to USB converter Documentation and software for items in the package Before measuring one way delay you must connect the receivers CDMA or GPS to each of the test instruments The CDMA receivers will communicate with each other to establish synchronization The GPS receivers will establish synchronization by using the common signal from the GPS satellite Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Connecting the CDMA Receiver Connecting the GPS receiver Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Measuring one way delay The stability of the signal produced by the GPS receiver is a function of the length of time it has been operating in a stable environment Please refer to the Hard Card shipped with your GPS option
303. ghput definition 220 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 10 Automated Testing TrueSAM NOTE Use the Set Bottleneck Bandwidth to match RFC 2544 Max Bandwidth setting when the bandwidth is L1 L2 Mbps or L1 L2 Kbps b If throughput parameters are not obtained from the RFC 2544 test select either My downstream and upstream throughputs are the same or My downstream and upstream throughputs are different c Select Next the green arrow 2 The next screen provides for the configuration of the parameters pertaining to the Committed Information Rate CIR and TCP Threshold TrueSpeed Controls awx this step will configure global settings for all subsequent TrueSpeed steps This includes the CIR iss Committed Information Rate and TCP Pass which is the percent of the CIR required to pass the Y throughput test Yi Run Walk the Window Test Automatically find MTU size Connect to Port oO rien of caer Total Test Time s 240 MTU Size bytes 1500 Local Remote VLAN ID 15 Priority 0 lowest CIR Mbps oe 100 0 Type Tos j TOS 000000 eW Connect Channel Save Figure 63 TrueSpeed Symmetrical Turnup Configuration Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 221 Chapter 10 Automated Testing TrueSAM TrueSpeed Controls LJ a This step will configure global settings for all subsequent TrueSpeed steps This includes the CIR 435 Committed Information Rate
304. haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the Multiple Streams test application for the interface you are testing refer to Table 16 on page 148 for a list of applications 2 Select the Setup soft key and then select the All Streams tab 3 Depending upon the application being used it may be desired to set one of the following Layer 2 VPLS streams If you want to transmit VPLS encapsulated traffic set VPLS mode to Enabled and then specify the SP source and destination MAC addresses and the customer s source MAC address Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 6 Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing Multiple Streams testing NOTE Although the SP source and destination MAC addresses and the customer s source MAC address are assigned to every enabled stream you can specify a unique customer destination MAC address for each individual stream See Specifying layer 2 stream settings on page 156 Layer 2 Non VPLS streams If you do not want to transmit VPLS encapsulated traffic set VPLS mode to Disabled You can optionally specify source MAC address to be carried in every enabled stream of traffic or you can specify a unique MAC address for each stream To specify a single address in Source MAC Mode select Single and then indicate whether you want to use the factory default address or specify your own To specify an address for each stream in Source MAC Mode select Per
305. he appropriate tab otherwise press Results to return to the Main screen The layer 4 settings are specified for transmitted traffic Configuring the traffic load Before transmitting TCP or UDP traffic you can specify the type of traffic load the unit will transmit Constant Bursty or Ramp in 0 001 increments begin ning at 0 001 For details on configuring a traffic load see Specifying traffic load settings on page 58 of Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 133 Chapter 5 TCP UDP Testing Specifying layer 4 settings Specifying the frame or packet length for transmitted 134 traffic Filtering received traffic using layer 2 or layer 3 criteria Filtering received traffic using layer 4 criteria Before transmitting TCP or UDP traffic you must indicate the frame or packet length for each transmitted packet or datagram To specify the frame or packet length 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the Layer 4 Traffic application for the circuit you are testing refer to Table 15 on page 129 for a list of applications 2 Select the Setup soft key and then do the following a Go to the Ethernet tab b If you are specifying the length as a frame size set the Length Type to Frame Size and then select or specify the size The automatically calculated packet length appears to the right of the Length Type setting c If you are speci
306. he bandwidth received and transmitted for each stream Addressing This view shows the source and destination IP addresses carried in each transmitted stream The default gateway and subnet mask for each stream are also provided Traffic Loads This view provides more detailed information for the traffic carried in each stream such as the currently received frame size the received bandwidth the transmitted traffic load type constant or ramped the transmitted bandwidth and a count of transmitted Acterna frames VLAN VPLS These views show key encapsulation data for each stream For example if you are analyzing layer 2 Q in Q streams the SVLAN ID and priority for received and transmitted streams appears The buttons on the Main screen are used to perform actions for all enabled streams For example if stream 1 stream 2 and stream 3 are enabled or if you have selected a voice HDTV and data stream pressing the Start Traffic button transmits traffic for all three streams simultaneously Multiple Streams testing If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so you can use it to transmit multiple streams of layer 2 layer 3 or layer 4 traffic You can configure each individual stream to depict a particular type of traffic transmit the streams and then analyze each stream to verify that network routing and switching devices are handling each stream properly based on the stream s priority You can also obser
307. he circuit If necessary select either SFP1 or SFP2 Select the Laser button Verify that the green Signal LED is illuminated Press the Restart soft key You are monitoring CPRI or OBSAI Ethernet IP TCP UDP Fibre Chan VoIP and Video Testing Manual 19 Chapter 3 CPRI OBSAI Testing Monitoring CPRI or OBSAI layer 1 20 Ethernet IP TCP UDP Fibre Chan VoIP and Video Testing Manual Ethernet and IP Testing This chapter provides information on testing Ethernet and IP services using the T BERD MTS 5800 Topics discussed in this chapter include the following About Ethernet and IP testing on page 22 Cable Diagnostics on page 30 Adjusting the frequency of transmitted optical signals on page 31 Enabling automatic traffic transmission on page 32 Discovering another JDSU test instrument using J Connect on page 33 Protocol Analysis on page 37 Layer 1 BER testing on page 38 Layer 2 testing on page 40 Layer 3 testing on page 73 Capturing packets for analysis on page 87 Loopback testing on page 99 Inserting errors or pause frames on page 99 Inserting alarms or defects on page 100 Measuring round trip delay or packet jitter on page 101 Measuring one way delay on page 101 Measuring service disruption time on page 107 OAM service and link layer tes
308. hen you test each of the Ethernet interfaces Before you monitor traffic you can specify interface settings and settings that characterize and filter the received IP traffic NOTE If you are analyzing traffic on an optical circuit be certain to turn the laser on To monitor IP traffic 1 Use the Test Menu to select the layer 3 monitor through application for the interface you are testing refer to Table 7 on page 25 through Table 8 on page 25 for a list of applications Select the Setup soft key and then select the Interface tab to specify settings that control the Ethernet interface see Specifying interface settings on page 41 Do one of the following If you want to filter the received packets based on their Ethernet frame settings select the Ethernet Filter tab and then proceed to step 4 and step 5 otherwise proceed to step 8 If you want to filter received MPLS packets based on the MPLS packet settings select the Ethernet Filter tab set encapsulation to MPLS and then specify the filter criteria see Filtering traffic using MPLS criteria on page 55 Under Configure incoming frames do the following In Destination Type specify the destination address type corre sponding to the Destination Address in the received frames In Source Type specify the source address type corresponding to the Source Address in the received frames lf you specified a Unicast or Multicast Source or
309. her message indicating the reason no ping reply was sent Ping testing tells you if the destination device is reachable how long it took the ping packet to travel to the destination device and back to the instrument and if ping packets were dropped or lost along the way Before you transmit ping request packets you must specify Interface settings see Specifying interface settings on page 41 Ethernet Frame settings see Specifying Ethernet frame settings on page 43 Bear in mind that Jumbo packets are only supported for DIX traffic the 802 3 specification does not support jumbo packets Jumbo frames are also not supported when the instrument is configure to transmit fast ping packets IP settings see Specifying IP settings for Ping and Traceroute testing on page 83 After you specify the ping settings you are ready to transmit ping request packets Before you transmit ping request packets or run the Traceroute application you can specify settings indicating the source of the IP address static or assigned by a DHCP server and the destination type IP address or host name and attributes of the ping request packets type size type of service and time to live ARP is always enabled when running Ping and Traceroute applications Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 83 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 3 testing To specify IP settings 1 If you haven t a
310. hernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 41 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 2 testing 3 Select the Physical Layer sub tab and then specify the following settings Interface Settings 10 100 1000 1 Gigabit Auto Negotiation If you want to negotiate capabilities with another switch select On oth erwise select Off Auto Negotiation is always On when your unit is configured to test a 1000 BaseT interface Pause Length Quanta Select the field to enter the quanta to be carried by transmitted pause frames To determine the pause duration the receiving device performs the following cal culation 10 Mbps electrical Quanta x 51 2 ms 100 Mbps electrical Quanta x 5 12 ms 1000 Mbps electrical Quanta x 512 ns 10BaseTX FDX HDX 100BaseTX FDX HDX 1000BaseTX FDX HDX Select Yes if you want to advertise that the instrument is capable of full duplex or half duplex transmission for each rate otherwise select No These settings only appear if auto negotiation is On Flow Control If auto negotiation is OFF select On if you want the instrument to adjust the trans mitted bandwidth when it receives pause frames or Off to ignore pause frames Duplex If auto negotiation is off specify Half or Full duplex transmission Speed Mbps If auto negotiation is off specify 10 10 Mbps or 100 100 Mbps as the rate for the link This setting only appears if auto negoti ation is Off Auto Negotiati
311. hput tests 266 If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so you can use it to run the HTTP Throughput test This test is used to determine the amount of time it takes to open an HTTP connection reach a specific web server and then open the web page To run the HTTP Throughput test 1 Establish a LAN connection to the network using one of the Ethernet test interfaces on the E1 Tester or MSAM Do not use the RJ 45 connector provided on the base unit 2 Ifyou haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the Layer 3 or Layer 4 Traffic application for the circuit you are testing see Launching a single automated test on page 225 3 Specify the settings required to initialize the link see Specifying interface settings on page 41 and to establish a connection to the network see Layer 3 testing on page 73 4 Launch the HTTP Throughput test see Launching a single automated test on page 225 and then wait for the Select URL dialog box to appear Depending on the number of processes you have running this may take several seconds 5 If the URL you want to connect to appears in the selection box select it otherwise type the URL into the field provided 6 Press Start The HTTP Throughput Test dialog box appears providing the status of the connection a list of the files downloaded to build the web page Such as the style sheet and graphics and the number of bytes retrieved from the Eth
312. hroughput along with key loss and delay related metrics For the more advanced user throughput versus loss and delay graphs are also available Step 5 Evaluate traffic shaping In most cases the network connection between two geographic locations such as branch offices is lower than the network connection of the host computers An example would be LAN connectivity of GigE and WAN connec tivity of 100 Mbps The WAN connectivity may be physically 100 Mbps or logi cally 100 Mbps over a GigE WAN connection In the later case rate limiting is used to provide the WAN bandwidth per the SLA This step evaluates traffic shaping Simply stated traffic policing marks and or drops packets which exceed the SLA bandwidth in most cases excess traffic is dropped Traffic shaping employs the use of queues to smooth the bursty traffic and then send out within the SLA bandwidth limit without dropping packets unless the traffic shaping queue is exceeded Traffic shaping can provide improved TCP performance since the retransmis sions are reduced which in turn optimizes TCP throughput for the given avail able bandwidth The ability to detect proper traffic shaping is more easily diagnosed when conducting a multiple TCP connection test Proper shaping will provide a fair distribution of the available bottleneck bandwidth while traffic policing will not The traffic shaping evaluation builds upon the concepts of testing multiple connections This
313. ia Test Set 5800 throughout supporting documentation The following terms have a specific meaning when they are used in this manual T BERD MTS 5800 The Handheld Network Test Family of products may be T BERD MTS 5802 5812P and so on OC n Used to refer to each of the optical SONET rates supported by the instrument OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 and OC 192 where n represents the user selected line rate STM n Used to refer to each of the optical SDH rates supported by the instrument STM 1 STM 4 STM 16 and STM 64 where n represents the user selected line rate STS 1 Used to refer to the electrical equivalent of OC 1 51 84 Mbps supported by the instrument STM 1e Used to refer to the electrical equivalent of STM 1 155 52 Mbps supported by the T BERD MTS 5800 10 100 1000 Ethernet Used to represent 10 100 1000 Mbps Ethernet 1GigE Used to represent 1 Gigabit Ethernet 10GigE Used to represent 10 Gigabit Ethernet JDSU Ethernet test set A test set marketed by JDSU and designed to transmit an Acterna Test Packet ATP payload ATP packets carry a time stamp used to calculate a variety of test results The T BERD MTS 5800 FST 2802 TestPad the SmartClass Ethernet tester the HST with an Ethernet SIM the T BERD MTS 8000 Transport Module and the MSAM can all be configured to transmit and analyze ATP payloads and can be used in end to end and loopback configurations during
314. ic Term 36 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Observing details for an instrument Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Protocol Analysis After discovering the instruments you can observe details for a particular instrument and indicate whether or not you want to use the discovered instru ment s MAC and IP address and port number if applicable when you configure your instrument To observe details for a discovered instrument 1 Select the instrument on the Discovered Devices screen The Device Details screen appears to the right 2 If you want to automatically apply the discovered instrument s MAC or IP address or port number to your instrument s configuration do the following a To use the discovered instrument s MAC or IP address or port number as the destination MAC or IP address or port number for your trans mitted traffic highlight the checkbox under Tx and then select Configure Checked Item s b To filter received traffic using the discovered instrument s source MAC or IP address or port number highlight the checkbox under Rx and then select Configure Checked Item s 3 Press Close to return to the previous screen Details were displayed and your instrument is configured based on the settings you selected NOTE If no MAC address was discovered go to the Ethernet setup tab change the destination type to Unicast and then re discover the instruments Protocol Analysis
315. ies in the address book 1 If you haven t already done so launch a VoIP application For a list of applications see Table 21 on page 183 2 Press the Address Book soft key The address book appears A Address Book Entries Entry Name Dest Number Dest IP Dest Name URI Email ifname i 5551234 10 10 10 10 name 2 name 5551234 10 10 10 10 name 3 name 5551234 10 10 10 10 name 4 name 5551234 10 10 10 10 name 5 name 5551234 10 10 10 10 name 6 name 5551234 10 10 10 10 name a name 5551234 10 10 10 10 name 8 name 5551234 10 10 10 10 name Select and Dial Save and Close 3 In the Entry Name column tap the field to launch a keypad and then specify a name for the entry 4 Inthe Dest Number column tap the field to launch a keypad and then enter a phone number alias for the entry 5 Inthe Dest Name URI Email column tap the field to launch a keypad and then enter the destination name URI Email 6 Select either Select and Dial or Save and Close The entry is updated Ethernet IP TCP UDP Fibre Chan VoIP and Video Testing Manual 183 Chapter 8 VoIP Testing Specifying interface settings Specifying interface settings Before testing on an optical circuit you can specify interface settings which Indicate which SFP jack you are using if your unit is equipped with SFP jacks Specify the transmitted wavelength if your unit is equipped with 850 nm 1310 nm and 1550 nm connectors Allow your unit
316. iety of scripts have been provided in the Layer 4 Toolkit which allow you to deter mine the ideal window size and measure throughput and latency for a particular connection Packet capture and analysis lf your instrument is configured and optioned to do so you can use it to capture transmitted and received data save it on the instrument or to an external USB key and then either send the data to another technician for analysis or analyze it yourself using the Wireshark protocol analyzer provided on the instrument For details see Capturing packets for analysis on page 87 IPv6 support lf you purchased the IPv6 Traffic option you can transmit and analyze IPv6 traffic using the terminate and monitor thru applications For details see Configuring IPv4 and IPv6 tests on page 29 TCP Wirespeed throughput analysis lf your instrument is configured and optioned to do so you can use it to verify that your network meets or exceeds the throughput specified in service level agreements at the TCP layer and optimize layer 4 throughput by testing using a variety of window sizes For details see Running the TCP Wirespeed application on page 141 When you configure your module for testing graphical displays of TCP packets or UDP datagrams are provided on the setup tabs for the application you selected You can specify characteristics for transmitted and filtered traffic by selecting the corresponding field on th
317. iew see Layered view Quality Layer Buttons on page 180 When you launch applications subsequent times the result view that was displayed the last time you ended a test appears For example if the Transport quality results were displayed the last time you ran the applica tion the next time you launch the application the Transport quality results will appear see Figure 50 on page 182 Use the result group button to switch between the Summary Content Transport Transaction Log Miscellaneous Ethernet and Graphs groups Use the result category button to switch between the categories for each group For example when observing results in the Content group Current Call Scores and Historical Call Score Stats categories are available 182 Ethernet IP TCP UDP Fibre Chan VoIP and Video Testing Manual Chapter 8 VoIP Testing Populating the Address Book VoIP test applications If your instrument is optioned to do so this release supports the VoIP applica tions listed in Table 21 Table 21 VoIP applications Interface Application Test Mode 10 100 1000 VoIP Terminate 100M Optical Terminate 1GigE Optical Terminate Populating the Address Book The MSAM provides an Address Book which gives you quick access to phone numbers when you want to place a call Entries can include name phone number and IP address information The address book can be saved by saving the test configuration To update entr
318. if you selected a layer 3 or layer 4 test application TCP UDP Checksum errors only appear if you selected a layer 4 test application To insert errors or pause frames 1 If you are inserting pause frames specify the pause quanta on the Inter face tab see Specifying interface settings on page 41 otherwise proceed to step 2 2 Ifyou are inserting errors select one of the following error types other wise proceed to step 4 Code optical applications only FCS BIT BERT payload only Pattern Layer 1 BERT 1 GigE or 10 GigE applications only IP Checksum Layer 3 only TCP UDP Checksum Layer 4 only TCP UDP Checksum errors are only available if you are transmitting fixed BERT patterns They are not available when transmitting PRB patterns ATP Payload You must configure the instrument to transmit an Acterna payload to insert ATP Payload errors Remote Fault 10 GigE applications only Local Fault 10 GigE applications only 3 Do the following Specify the Insertion Style Single Burst or Rate If you specified Burst specify the number of errors in the burst and then select OK If you specified Rate select a rate Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 99 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Inserting alarms or defects 4 Doone of the following If you are inserting errors press the Error Insert button Ifyou are inserting pause frames select the Actions tab and then
319. ifying the load type for all streams 2000000 152 Specifying the load unit on a stream with burst 153 Specifying the load unit for multiple streams 154 Specifying common traffic characteristics for multiple streams 154 Specifying layer 2 stream settings 00 00 cee eee ee 156 Automatically incrementing configured MAC addresses or VLAN IDs 156 Specifying layer 3 stream settings 00 00 cee eee eee 157 Specifying layer 4 stream settings 00 00 cee eee 158 Transmitting multiple streams 0 0 00 ce ee 159 Triple Play testing 2000 e ce eee eee eee eee 160 Triple Play test applications 00 0202 160 Understanding the LED panel 0 0 00 160 Streams pipe Triple Play streams 200000000 161 Understanding Triple Play test results 0 0 0 00000 e eee 161 Viewing cumulative link results 0 0 00 eee 161 Viewing graphs irose i prame ayaa cae REE ha 161 Changing graph properties aaua 162 Characterizing Triple Play services aaa 163 Specifying layer 2 and layer 3 settings for Triple Play services 164 Transmitting multiple Triple Play streams n a nananana aaa 164 SAM Complete 00 0000 eee 165 Looping back multiple streams 22000 20 0 eee eee eee 165 Running the TCP Host script 0 00 cece eee eee 165 Playing audio CliPS 0
320. ifying traffic load settings on page 58 Transmitting and analyzing layer 2 traffic on page 62 Transmitting and analyzing layer 2 patterns on page 63 Monitoring layer 2 traffic on page 64 Transmitting and analyzing layer 2 MPLS TP T MPLS or MPLS traffic on page 64 Using J Proof to verify layer 2 transparency on page 69 muy NOTE If during the course of testing you change the frame length or settings that impact the calculated frame length while the unit is already transmitting traf fic the unit resets your test results but some residual frames of the old length may be counted because they are already in the traffic stream 40 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Specifying interface settings Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 2 testing Before you transmit traffic you can specify interface settings which Indicate which SFP jack you are using if you are monitoring traffic on a 1 GigE circuit and your unit is equipped with SFP jacks Specify the transmitted wavelength if you are monitoring traffic on an 10 Gigabit Ethernet circuit and your unit is equipped with 850 nm 1310 nm and 1550 nm connectors Turn flow control off to ignore pause frames sent to the instrument by its Ethernet link partner or on if you want your unit to respond to received pause frames Specify the pause quanta for transmitted pause frames Specify the speed and duplex
321. igure the destination MAC address It will be populated automatically for you If you want to loop up a specific device you can specify that you are using a Unicast loop type and then specify the destination MAC address for the device you are looping up If you are looping back layer 3 traffic you must specify the source IP address for the unit on the far end of the circuit as the destination IP address for traffic transmitted by the local unit Be certain to specify the same destination address for the filter on the receiving loop back unit If you are looping back layer 3 or layer 4 traffic and you want to use ARP to populate the units MAC addresses be certain to enable ARP on both units If you are looping back layer 4 traffic after you issue the Loop Up command from the local unit and the unit receives a response from the far end unit indicating that the loopup was successful the local unit s ATP Listen IP Address and ATP Listen Port are automatically set to the destina tion IP address and destination port number carried in the looped back traffic The far end unit s ATP Listen IP Address and ATP Listen Port will also automatically be set to the destination IP address and destination port carried in the traffic it receives from the local unit You can optionally specify unit identifiers for each unit for example SamsUnit and JoesUnit When the units send confirmation messages to each other indicating the sta
322. ils p gt Figure 21 Capture Analysis Summary screen 6 Use the Details buttons to observe detailed results for each layer For example if you want to observe a graph of the network utilization or a list of all IP conversations press the Details button for Layer 1 2 If you want to analyze another PCAP file select Choose PCAP File and repeat step 3 through step 6 otherwise select Exit to return to the Main Screen The packets were analyzed using J Mentor Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Loopback testing Loopback testing Loop back testing allows you to transmit traffic from one JDSU Ethernet test set and then loop the traffic back through a second unit on the far end of a circuit For details refer to Chapter 7 Loop back Testing Inserting errors or pause frames Action buttons on the Main screen allow you to insert errors and pause frames into the traffic stream If you turn on a particular error insertion rate the error insertion continues even after you restart a test or change the test configura tion If you selected a 10 Gigabit WAN application you can also insert SONET SDH errors and alarms as appropriate For details see the PDH SONET and SDH Testing Manual that shipped with your instrument or upgrade NOTE Only errors that are applicable to your test appear for selection For exam ple IP Checksum errors only appear
323. ilter is enabled and that the service type for the source port is User Defined Verify that you are not transmitting traffic If you want to use the discovered MAC address as the destination address turn ARP off if you are running a layer 3 or layer 4 application To discover another JDSU test instrument 1 Before testing ensure that instruments on the subnet are discoverable by doing the following for each a Launch a single stream IPv4 terminate application see Step 1 Selecting a test application on page 2 On the Main screen above the result panes select the J Connect tab and then verify that the Make this unit discoverable setting is selected Verify that a different source IP address is assigned to each instrument To observe the IP settings used for remote connections and the J Connect feature if you are running a layer 2 application go to the Network Visibility sub tab on the Interface set up tab If you are running a layer 3 or layer 4 application the source IP address appears on the IP setup tab This is also the IP address that a remote instru ment must use to connect to the instrument when running the Asym metric RFC 2544 test 2 Connect your instrument to the circuit and then do the following a Launch a single stream layer 2 layer 3 IPv4 layer 3 PING or layer 4 terminate application b Verify that the Sync Acquired and Link Active LEDs are illuminated indicating that an active link i
324. iltered MPLS encapsulated frame Displays the label 1 priority of the last filtered MPLS encapsulated frame Displays the label 1 TTL value for the last filtered MPLS encapsulated frame Displays label 2 of the last filtered MPLS encapsulated frame Displays the label 2 priority of the last filtered MPLS encapsulated frame Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 303 Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results Table 40 L2 Filter Stats results Continued Test Result MPLS2 TTL Description Displays the label 2 TTL value for the last filtered MPLS encapsulated frame MPLS TP Tunnel Label Displays the tunnel label of the last filtered MPLS TP encapsulated frame MPLS TP Tunnel Priority Displays the tunnel priority of the last filtered MPLS TP encapsulated frame MPLS TP Tunnel TTL Displays the tunnel TTL value of the last filtered MPLS TP encapsulated frame MPLS TP VC Label Displays the VC label of the last filtered MPLS TP encapsulated frame MPLS TP VC Priority Displays the VC priority of the last filtered MPLS TP encapsulated frame MPLS TP VC TTL Displays the VC TTL value of the last filtered MPLS TP encapsulated frame One Way Delay us One Way Delay Valid OWD ATP Frame Count Packet Jitter us Average The average one way delay calculated in microseconds with a resolution as follows 10 100 1000 and 1 GigE Ethernet 2 048
325. in the L2 Customer Filter Stats category When testing MiM encapsulated traffic the layer 2 filter statistic results appear in the L2 Customer Filter Stats and L2 Backbone Filter Stats categories Description B Tag 302 j Displays the following for the last filtered backbone frame Value Displays the value carried in the B Tag field VLAN ID Priority Drop Eligible in a hexadecimal format VLAN ID Displays the ID for the backbone VLAN used as the path to the destination car ried in the frame Priority Displays the VLAN priority carried in the frame DEI Displays the drop eligible bit carried in the frame Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results Table 40 L2 Filter Stats results Continued Test Result Delay us Frame Rate Frame Size l Tag MPLS1 ID MPLS1 Priority MPLS1 TTL MPLS2 ID MPLS2 Priority Description Average The average round trip delay calculated in microseconds with a resolution as fol lows 10 100 1000 and 1 GigE Ethernet 2 048 ms 1G 2G 4Gigabit Fibre Channel 2 409 ms 10 Gigabit Ethernet 2 048 ms Current The current round trip delay calculated in microseconds Maximum The maximum round trip delay calculated in microseconds Minimum The minimum round trip delay calculated in microseconds NOTE You must originate an Acterna
326. ined Jumbo or Random and then specify the length The calculated frame size in bytes appears to the right of the field If you selected Random use the Configure Random button to specify user defined random frame sizes including Jumbo or select Reset to transmit frames of randomly generated sizes based on the seven RFC 2544 frame length recommendations Packet Length Bytes Defined Length Calc Frame Length 40 gt 64 64 gt 82 128 gt 146 256 274 512 gt 530 1024 gt 1042 40 gt 64 User Defined 56 74 The Calc Frame Size is determined by using the Packet Length and the Encapsulation a Reset gt lt Close Figure 17 Configure Random Frame Size 4 On the illustration of the IP packet select the TOS DSCP field and then do the following to indicate how the network should prioritize the packet during transmission In Type select TOS or DSCP Specify the TOS or DSCP value DSCP values are shown as code points with their decimal values in following Example EF 46 5 Select the TTL field and then specify maximum number of hops to travel before the packet is dropped 6 Select the Source IP Address field and then specify the Source IP Type Default Gateway Source IP and Subnet Mask 7 Select the Destination Address field and then specify the destination address for the traffic 8 Select the Data field and then do the following If you want to t
327. ing J Profiler 00 eee e ences 125 Chapter 5 TCP UDP Testing 127 About TCP UDP testing 0 0 c eee eee eee eee eee 128 Features and capabilities 20 0 0 cece eee ees 128 Understanding the graphical user interface 128 TCP UDP test applications 02020 c eee eee 129 Understanding the ATP Listen IP and Port 130 Specifying layer 2 and layer 3 settings 0022005 131 Specifying layer 4 settings 00 2 cece eee eee 131 Well known portS 2 000 cece eee eee eee 132 Specifying TCP UDP settings for transmitted traffic 132 Configuring the traffic load 2 kee 133 Specifying the frame or packet length for transmitted traffic 134 Filtering received traffic using layer 2 or layer 3 criteria 134 Filtering received traffic using layer 4 criteria 134 Transmitting layer 4 traffic 2 0 cee 136 Inserting errors or pause frames 2000 eee eee eee 137 Loop back testing cece cee eee eee eee 137 Running TCP Host applications sasana eee eee eee 137 Changing settings during the test 0 0 cee eee eee 138 Streams pipe multiple TCP streams 222055 138 Understanding the LED panel 0 000 e eee eee 138 Understanding TCP Host test results 00000 eee 138 viii Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Test
328. ing Manual Contents Viewing results for a specific stream annan 0 0 138 Viewing cumulative link results 0 0 0 0 0 00 eee 138 Viewing TCP Host results 0 0 0 eee 138 Focusing on key results 1 0 0 cece 138 Configuring the streams 0 0 0 eee 139 Specifying TCP Host settings 0 0 0 cee eee 139 Running the TCP Host application 2005 141 Running the TCP Wirespeed application 141 Tru Speed 2 Settee eee Siti wrth Sede Sat E edd ee E alee S 143 Chapter 6 Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing 145 About Triple Play and Multiple Streams testing 146 Features and capabilities 0000s 146 Streams Pipe soft key 2 522 062 c eee ee eee ee ede eee eee 147 Using the action buttons 0 0 0 0 0 eee 147 Multiple Streams testing 0 ccc cece eee eee 147 Multiple Streams test applications 00000005 148 Understanding the LED panel 0 0 00 c eee eee 148 Streams pipe multiple streams 22 20200 cee eee 148 Understanding multiple streams test results 0 149 Viewing results for a specific stream n nuanua 0000s 150 Viewing cumulative link results 0 0 0000 eee eee 150 Viewing graphical results for all streams 0005 150 Changing graph properties 2 000 eee eee 150 Enabling multiple streams aa 2 ee 152 Spec
329. ing Party Number Type Called Party Number Plan Called Party Type Description Enter the source phone number alias Enter the destination phone number Enter the ID using up to 40 characters This is an ID element field that is sent to the Gatekeeper dur ing all registration and request messages Specify the bearer capability Voice 3 1K audio Unrestricted Digital This sets the Bearer Cap information element in the H 323 setup message for outgoing calls Specify the numbering plan if required Unknown ISDN Telephony Data Telex National Private This sets the Calling Party Numbering Plan infor mation element in the H 323 setup message for outgoing calls Specify the type of number if required Unknown International National Network Specific Sub scriber Abbreviated This sets the Calling Party Type information ele ment in the H 323 setup message for outgoing calls Specify the numbering plan if required Unknown ISDN Telephony Data Telex National Private This sets the Called Party Numbering Plan informa tion element in the H 323 setup message for outgo ing calls Specify the type of number if required Unknown International National Network Specific Sub scriber Abbreviated This sets the Called Party Type information ele ment in the H 323 setup message for outgoing calls 4 Ifyou selected SIP call control in the panel on the left side of the tab select Proxy and then specify the follo
330. ing for the link half or full Link Advt Status Indicates that the T BERD MTS 5800 has received a valid auto negotiation capabil ity advertisement from the Ethernet link partner and sent an acknowledgement Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 321 Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results Table 61 10 100 1000 AutoNeg Status results Continued Test Result p Link Config ACK Mstr Slv Resolution Remote Fault Speed Mbps Description Indicates that the Ethernet link partner has acknowledged the receipt of a valid auto negotiation capability advertisement from the T BERD MTS 5800 Indicates whether the Ethernet link partner is operating as the master providing the clock for timing or slave deriving the clock from the T BERD MTS 5800 Applica ble when testing 1000 Base Tx only If supported by the Ethernet link partner indicates a reason for auto negotiation failure If auto negotiation succeeded the result will read NO Indicates the negotiated speed setting for the link 10 or 100 Mbps Table 62 describes each of the results for 1 Gigabit Ethernet optical links Table 62 1 Gigabit Ethernet Optical AutoNeg Status results Test Result FDX Capable Flow Control HDX Capable Link Advt Status Link Config ACK Pause Capable Remote Fault 322 Description Indicates whether the Ethernet link partner is full duplex capable YES or NO Indica
331. ing the instrument to the circuit Step 3 Connecting the instrument to the circuit For detailed instructions on connecting your instrument to the circuit refer to the Getting Started Manual When connecting the unit to optical circuits bear in mind that applied power must not exceed the power level specified on the panel for each optical connector Step 4 Starting the test After you configure a test connect the unit to the circuit and if appropriate turn the laser ON Ifyou are testing an optical circuit and then actively Start Traffic using the action button If you are running an Ethernet application and you would like your unit to transmit traffic automatically you can enable the automatic traffic genera tion feature For details see Enabling automatic traffic transmission on page 32 in Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing When atest is configured to establish a connection to a remote unit the connection process queries the remote unit for its software version If the version level of the remote and local unit are different a notice will be displayed encouraging the user to update the older unit to avoid incompat ibility issues and to achieve optimal performance See Setting up the Instrument in the Getting Started Manual that shipped with this unit NOTE Temperature stabilized lasers When testing 10 Gigabit optical circuits some lasers particularly 1550 nm lasers are temp
332. ing the login process When you turn flow control on the module Generates an R_RDY message for each frame received Provides a count of received R_RDY messages Specify the connector to use for the test if more than one transceiver is inserted Specify a unit identifier to identify all traffic originating from the module The module uses it s default source ID as its port name when logging into another device To specify interface settings 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the layer 2 terminate test application for the interface you are testing refer to Table 22 on page 197 for a list of applications 2 Select the Setup soft key then select the Connector sub tab to specify which optical connector you are using for the transceiver Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 199 Chapter 9 Fibre Channel Testing Configuring layer 2 Fibre Channel tests 3 Select the Physical Layer sub tab and then specify the settings required for the type of login and if applicable topology that you specify Table 23 Fibre Channel Physical Layer settings Explicit Fabric N Port Explicit E Port Point to Point Fabric Topology Topology Setting Values Implicit FlowControl Select On if you want the instru Ni Ni Ni ment to operate as a credit based transmitter Select Off to generate frames without crediting NOTE You must turn flow control ON to specify Login
333. ing traffic using byte pattern criteria on page 56 Sync E timing If configured and optioned to do so the instrument can provide physical layer timing transport required to guarantee frequency distribution to the extent necessary for encapsulated signals to meet network performance requirements Transmit capability is available on 100M 1GE 10GE Optical all layer applications except J Profiler IPTV VoIP TOE L1 BERT and thru modes Understanding the graphical When you configure your instrument for testing graphical displays of Ethernet user interface frames and IP packets are provided on the setup tabs for the application you selected You can specify frame or packet characteristics for transmitted and filtered traffic by selecting the corresponding field on the graphic and then entering the value for transmitted or filtered traffic Colored fields can be edited fields in gray can not be modified Frame settings Figure 5 illustrates the frame settings for a layer 2 traffic test with the Data field selected Configure outgoing frames SVLAN CVLAN High Precision Lo Figure 5 Frame Settings For details on each of the settings see Specifying Ethernet frame settings on page 43 and Specifying Ethernet filter settings on page 49 Packet settings Figure 6 illustrates the IP packet settings for a layer 3 traffic test Length Type Packet Length al Calc Frame Size bytes 146 Packet Length bytes
334. ings on page 43 Configuring VLAN tagged traffic on page 47 Configuring Q in Q traffic on page 48 Configuring VPLS traffic on page 48 4 Do one of the following Select the tab corresponding to the next stream or the next type of stream you want to characterize then repeat step 3 Optional lf you want to use the same settings for all enabled streams select Copy Setups to other Streams Traffic load settings are not copied Load settings must be configured for each individual stream 5 If you do not need to specify other settings select the Results soft key to return to the Main screen Layer 2 traffic characteristics are specified When configuring layer 2 multiple streams tests you can indicate that you want the instrument to automatically increment the MAC address and VLAN ID for each stream when you configure the first stream After you specify the MAC Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Specifying layer 3 stream settings Chapter 6 Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing Multiple Streams testing address or VLAN ID for the first stream you use the Copy Setups to other Streams button to copy the values and populate the MAC addresses or VLAN IDs with incremented values Table 17 shows the values assigned for each stream s MAC address and VLAN ID if the increment options are selected for stream one Table 17 Example Incremented MAC addresses and VLAN IDs
335. ink OAM State must be On to observe these results Table 48 L OAM States results Test Result Description Discovery State Displays one of the following Fault Active Send Local Passive Wait Send Local Remote Send Any Local Displays one of the following 0 Can t complete 1 Not completed 2 Completed 3 Reserved Remote Displays one of the following 0 Can t complete 1 Not completed 2 Completed 3 Reserved Remote Events Link Fault Indicates whether a link fault occurred Dying Gasp Indicates whether an unrecoverable failure has occurred Critical Indicates whether a critical event has occurred L OAM Error History results Table 49 describes the L OAM Error History results for Symbol Period Events Frame Events Frame Period Events Frame Sec Summary Events The Link OAM State must be On to observe these results Table 49 L OAM Error History results Test Result Description Remote Timestamp Displays the time that the last event occurred Remote Window Indicates the duration of the period Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 311 Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results Table 49 L OAM Error History results Continued Test Result Remote Threshold Remote Errored Frame Sec Remote Errored Frames Remote Error Running Total Remote Running Total L3 Link Stats results Table 5
336. iod Peak The maximum rate of filtered packets over a one second period The packet rate is expressed in packets per second Average The average size of filtered packets since IP packet detection Minimum The minimum size of filtered packets since IP packet detection Maximum The maximum size of filtered packets since IP packet detection The current bandwidth utilized by filtered IP traffic expressed in megabits per second This measurement is an average taken over the prior second of test time Average The average bandwidth utilized by filtered IP traffic This measurement is an average taken over the prior second of test time Current The current bandwidth utilized by filtered IP traffic Minimum The minimum bandwidth utilized by filtered IP traffic since the last test restart Peak The peak bandwidth utilized by filtered IP traffic since the last test restart Bandwidth utilization is expressed as a percentage of the line rate of available band width NOTE The bandwidth utilization calculations are made on per second boundaries and may happen in the middle of a large frame causing the utilization to be reduced Table 53 describes each of the L3 Filter Counts results for filtered traffic such as the number of received IP packets and the number of received packets with an Acterna payload Table 53 L3 Filter Counts results Test Result gt 1500 Byte Packets 1024 1500 Byte Packets
337. ion settings If you are looping back traffic on an Ethernet circuit see Specifying interface settings on page 41 3 On the local unit specify the settings for transmitted traffic If you are looping back a single stream of layer 2 traffic refer to one of the following Layer 2 testing on page 40 Configuring layer 2 MAC in MAC tests on page 115 If you are looping back a single stream of layer 3 traffic refer to the following Layer 2 testing on page 40 Layer 3 testing on page 73 If you are looping back a single stream of layer 4 traffic refer to the following Layer 2 testing on page 40 Layer 3 testing on page 73 Specifying layer 4 settings on page 131 If you are looping back multiple streams of traffic refer to the following as appropriate for your application Enabling multiple streams on page 152 Specifying layer 2 stream settings on page 156 Specifying layer 3 stream settings on page 157 Specifying layer 4 stream settings on page 158 Specifying layer 2 and layer 3 settings for Triple Play services on page 164 4 On the loop back unit do the following a If you are running a single stream application verify that the applicable filter settings are either disabled set to Don t Care or that they match the settings for the traffic transmitted from the local unit b On the Main screen select the Action
338. iple Streams or layer 3 Triple Play appli cations you can specify layer 3 settings for each individual stream or type of stream After specifying settings for a stream or type of stream you can optionally copy the settings to every stream To specify layer 3 stream settings 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the Multiple Streams Triple Play or TCP Wirespeed test application for the interface you are testing refer to Table 16 on page 148 and Table 18 on page 160 for a list of applications Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 157 Chapter 6 Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing Multiple Streams testing 158 Specifying layer 4 stream settings 2 3 4 5 Select the Setup soft key and then select the tab corresponding the stream or type of stream you are configuring Select the IP sub tab and then specify the length type the packet length the TOS DSCP TTL and source and destination IP addresses For details refer to Layer 3 testing on page 73 Configuring MPLS over Ethernet tests on page 28 if you are trans mitting multiple streams of MPLS encapsulated traffic MPLS encapsu lation is not available when running Triple Play applications Do one of the following Select the tab corresponding to the next stream or the next type of service you want to characterize then repeat step 3 Optional lf you want to use the same setting
339. iple TCP streams Understanding the LED panel Understanding TCP Host test 138 results Viewing results for a specific stream Viewing cumulative link results Viewing TCP Host results Focusing on key results When running the TCP Host applications the instrument locks the Setup soft key and does not allow you to change application settings This is to prevent you from mistakenly bringing the connection or connections down If TCP connections come down when testing there is no way to ensure that the server will become active before the client and as a result the instrument might not be able to restore the connection automatically When running the TCP Host application you can use the Streams Pipe soft key to specify the load unit and to access the Load Distribution dialog box The Load Distribution dialog box is used to enable the background streams that you want to transmit and to specify the traffic load carried in each stream Figure 34 on page 149 of Chapter 6 Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing illustrates the Streams Pipe display for regular layer 4 traffic streams When running the TCP Wirespeed application the display is limited to the four analyzed streams You can start and stop traffic from the pipe display You can also specify the load unit and use the Configure Streams button to enable specific streams and specify the traffic load carried in each stream When you select a TCP Host applicatio
340. ircuits Selects the inverted 223 1 pseudorandom pattern which generates a maximum of 22 sequential 1s and 23 sequential Os Usually used to simulate live data for DS3 and SONET circuits 223 1 PRBS with multi Bit Error Insertion for Latency Measurement This is an unframed Layer 1 Pattern This pattern delivers energy across the entire frequency spectrum delivering a good basic Bit Error Test for the optical transmission line The periodic insertion of multi ple bit errors permit a high accuracy measurement of timing in the 100s of nanoseconds range To measure round trip delay use the Delay pattern NOTE There must be a loop at the far end hard cable fiber loop or far end test set in Mon application with Rx Tx selected to measure round trip delay Specify whether to link the Rx pattern to the Tx pattern If you did not link the Rx pattern to the Tx pattern specify the Rx pattern Press Results to return to the Main screen Connect the instrument to the circuit Select the Laser button Verify that the green Signal LED is illuminated Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 2 3 072G Optical Testing Monitoring 3 072G Optical Layer 1 6 Observe the test results in the following categories Interface Signal BERT Error Stats such as Bit Error Rate and Error Free Seconds if using typical BERT patterns or if using the Delay pattern Round Trip Delay 3 072G Optical Layer 1 BERT i
341. is not configured to be transmitted IDLE Indicates that a particular test frame is in the queue to be transmitted In Progress Indicates that a particular test frame is currently being transmitted and has not yet encountered an error Timeout Indicates that for a particular test frame a timeout was reached while waiting for a transmitted frame to return however all frames were successfully looped back before the end of the test frame s transmission Payload Errors Indicates that for a particular test frame all transmitted frames were success fully looped back but a received frame contained a payload that was not the same as its transmitted payload Header Errors Indicates that for a particular test frame all transmitted frames were success fully looped back but a received frame contained a header that was different from its trans mitted header Count Mismatch Indicates that the number of received frames for a particular test frame did not match the number of frames transmitted L2 BERT Stats results Table 43 describes the L2 BERT Stats results typically associated with the transmission of BERT patterns on a layer 2 switched network In some instances the instrument may detect BERT patterns while transmitting an Acterna payload for example if a device on the far end of the link is transmit ting an all ones BERT pattern To view the L2 BERT Stats results while BER testing transmit traffic with a BERT pattern in the payl
342. is setting if you want to advertise that the instrument is capable of sending OAM PDUs when the receiving path is non operational Remote Loopback Select this setting if the instrument sup ports OAM remote loopback mode Vendor Specific Info Enter the value used to differentiate the vendor s product models or versions Entry of a value is optional Link Events Select this setting if the instrument sup ports Link Event interpretation Variable Retrieval Select this setting if the instrument can send Variable Response OAM PDU Max PDU Size Specify the largest OAM PDU size b Inthe left pane under L OAM select Events then specify the following settings Setting Parameters Link Fault Select this setting if you want to indicate to the peer a fault has occurred Critical Event Select this setting if you want to indicate to the peer that a critical event has occurred Dying Gasp Select this setting if you want to indicate to the peer that an unrecoverable local failure condition has occurred Errored Symbol Period Event Event Window Specify the number of symbols that can total symbols be received in the period on the underly ing physical layer Event Threshold Specify the number of errored symbols in errored symbols the window specified required for an error to be declared Errored Frame Event 110 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Setting Event Window 100ms intervals Event
343. ise select Don t Care SVLAN DEI Bit If you want to filter traffic for a specific DEI Bit specify the bit value otherwise select Don t Care Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 53 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 2 testing Setting Value SVLAN TPID hex Specify the TPID carried in the filtered traffic If you are transmitting traffic with a user defined TPID your instrument will automatically use the TPID that you specified in the User SVLAN TPID hex field b On the graphic of the frame select CVLAN and then specify the following Setting Value Specify VLAN ID If you specified stacked VLAN as the encapsula tion type and you want to filter traffic for a specific CVLAN select Yes otherwise select Don t Care VLAN ID If you specified stacked VLAN as the encapsula tion type and you specified indicated that you want to filter traffic for a particular CVLAN specify the VLAN ID carried in the filtered traffic User Priority If you specified stacked VLAN as the encapsula tion type and you specified indicated that you want to filter traffic for a particular CVLAN specify the User Priority carried in the filtered traffic 4 Ifyou want to analyze detect frames carrying User Defined SVLAN TPID as Stacked VLAN traffic you have to specify the expected User Defined TPID value s on the Filters gt Rx gt TPID page The TPID values on this page are used to recognize Stacked VLAN traffic
344. ived VPLS encapsulated frame Displays the VC TTL value of the last received VPLS encapsulated frame Table 39 describes the L2 Link Counts results such as the number of received frames number of transmitted frames and number of unicast multicast or broadcast frames The Received Frames result includes errored frames all other results count valid frames only When testing VPLS or MPLS TP encapsulated traffic the link count results appear in the L2 Customer Link Counts and the L2 SP Link Counts categories Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 299 Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results When testing MiM encapsulated traffic the link count results appear in the L2 Customer Link Counts and the L2 Backbone Link Counts categories Table 39 L2 Link Counts results Test Result Jumbo Frames 1024 1518 1522 1526 Description Jumbo Oversized frames are counted in this category This includes count of received Ethernet frames with a length greater than 1518 bytes non tagged frames 1522 bytes VLAN tagged frames 1526 bytes Q in Q encapsulated frames A count of received Customer Ethernet frames between 1024 bytes and 1518 bytes 1024 to 1522 bytes for VLAN tagged frames 1024 to 1526 bytes for Q in Q encapsulated frames 1024 lt Jumbo Frames A count of received Ethernet frames between 1024 bytes and less than Jumbo frames 1024 2
345. ivity Verification to be employed CV or FFD Specifies the sixteen bit source ID of the LSR IPv6 only for the LSP Trail Source Termina tion Identifier Specifies the sixteen bit source ID of the tunnel containing the LSP Trail Source Termination Identifier data Same as above for received signal Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 67 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 2 testing 68 Transmitting and analyzing MPLS TP traffic Setting Description Frequency Specifies the transmission frequency of the FFD packet FFD only f Inthe options list on the left side of the tab if the Common Header type is set to Y 1711 MPLS select BDI and or FDI to turn on and set the Backward Defect Indication and or Forward Defect Indication settings The settings are identical for either BDI or FDI Setting Description BDI Specifies whether the Backward Defect Indica tion is activated LSP TTSI LSR ID IPv6 Specifies the sixteen bit source ID of the LSR IPv6 only for the LSP Trail Source Termina tion Identifier LSP ID Tunnel ID Specifies the sixteen bit source ID of the tunnel containing the LSP Trail Source Termination Identifier data Defect Type Specifies the type of defect indicated by the BDI or FDI Defect Location Specifies the 16 bit autonomous system num ber for the defect location g Press Results to return to the Main screen 7 Connect the instrument to the circuit 8 If you are tes
346. ize 256 bytes Not what you wanted Start Traffic Connectivity Measured Throughput Status Unknown 4 Not Determined t Not Determined End Configure Manually Run Tests Figure 69 J QuickCheck Screen a For both end running terminate application The instrument indicates that it is waiting for a link then connecting the link and provides the status of the auto negotiation capabilities If negotiation succeeds the Traffic Connectivity box will turn green and display PASS b For remote loopback The instrument sends a loop down followed by a loop up If the second attempt fails If running a Layer 2 test The instrument checks for a hardware loop If a hardware loop is not found we check for a permanent loop If a permanent loop is not found the instrument declares No Loop Found If running a Layer 3 or 4 test The instrument checks for a permanent loop If a permanent loop is not found and if ARP is Disabled the instrument checks for a hardware loop If a hardware loop is not found the instrument declares No Loop Found If ARP is Enabled the instrument declares No Loop Found The instrument checks for an active loop If there is none it issues a loopup command to establish the loop If the command fails it sends it a second time If the second attempt fails the instrument checks for a hard loop on the far end If a hard loop is not found the instrument checks for a permanent l
347. ized since starting the test Send Window Max The maximum window size utilized since starting the test RTD Cur us The current round trip delay calculated in microseconds This measurement is an aver age taken over the prior second of time RTD Avg ps The average round trip delay measured since starting the test calculated in microsec onds RTD Min us The minimum round trip delay measured since starting the test calculated in microsec onds RTD Max us The maximum round trip delay measured since starting the test calculated in micro seconds Cumulative L4 results When running the TCP Wirespeed application cumulative statistics are provided for all connections Table 70 describes the Cumulative L4 results Table 69 Detailed L4 Stats results Test Result Description Total Tx Mbps Cur Sum total of transmit throughput of all the valid connections up to 64 TCP connections Total Rx Mbps Cur Sum total of receive throughput of all the valid connections up to 64 TCP connections Total Tx Retrans Frm Sum total of Tx re transmit frame count of all the valid connections up to 64 TCP connections Established Connections Number of active connections L4 Link Counts results Table 70 describes the L4 Link Counts results Table 70 L4 Link Counts results Test Result Description TCP Packets A count of TCP packets received since the last test start or restart UDP Packets A count of TCP packets receiv
348. ket length for transmitted traffic on page 134 Filtering received traffic using layer 2 or layer 3 criteria on page 134 Filtering received traffic using layer 4 criteria on page 134 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 131 Chapter 5 TCP UDP Testing Specifying layer 4 settings Well known ports Specifying TCP UDP settings for transmitted traffic 132 NOTE If during the course of testing you change the frame or packet length or set tings that impact the calculated length while the unit is already transmitting traffic the unit resets your test results but some residual frames or packets of the old length may be counted because they are already in the traffic stream A port is an endpoint to a logical connection and the way a client program spec ifies a specific server program on a computer in a network Some ports known as well known ports have numbers that are pre assigned to them by the IANA as specified in RFC 1700 Port numbers can range from 0 to 65535 but only ports numbers 0 through 1024 are reserved for privileged services and desig nated as well known ports This list of well known port numbers specifies the port used by the server process as its contact port When configuring layer 4 traffic you can select from a list of well known ports or you can specify your own user defined port Before transmitting layer 4 traffic you must specify the traffic mode source and
349. l test is only conducted in one direction May be either upstream or downstream SAMComplete mt Symmetry 1 Not Running Throughput Symmetric Downstream and Upstream throughputs are the same a Remote D Asymmetric 4 Downstream and Upstream throughputs are different Unidirectional f Only test the network in one direction Measurement Direction Upstream Traffic is generated locally and measured by the remote test instrument Local Downstream Traffic is generated remotely and is measured by the local test Requires remote JDSU test instrument instrument Configure Connect Local Settings Figure 78 Unidirectional Connection Options b Depending upon the chosen Throughput Type select Loopback or One Way Transmission and Direction if needed Loopback only available with Symmetric throughput type as the signal is being looped back to the source thus identical parameters are required One Way Transmission tests are only conducted in a single direction For Unidirectional Throughput type direction Upstream or Downstream must be specified c Ifthe unit is configured with the One Way Delay OWD sync hardware One Way Delay will be an option in the Latency Measurement Type selection box Otherwise only RTD measurements will be available Note that the diagram on the right of the interface page indicates the type of testing to be done and indicates if a second JDSU test ins
350. l enter the label Tunnel Priority If you want to filter received traffic based on the tunnel priority set the Tunnel ID Filter to Yes otherwise select Don t Care Tunnel Priority If you indicated that you want to filter traffic for a specific tunnel select the priority number b If you want to filter received traffic using virtual circuit criteria select VC Label and then specify the following Seiting Value VC Label If you want to filter received traffic based on the tunnel ID set the VC Label to Yes otherwise select Don t Care VC Label If you indicated that you want to filter traffic for a specific label enter the label VC Priority If you want to filter received traffic based on the virtual channel priority set the priority filter to Yes otherwise select Don t Care VC Priority If you indicated that you want to filter traffic for a specific virtual channel priority select the priority number 4 Return to Specifying Ethernet filter settings to verify or specify additional filter settings VPLS filter criteria is specified Filtering traffic using MPLS criteria To filter traffic using MPLS header criteria 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the test appli cation for the interface you are testing Refer to Table 7 on page 25 through Table 8 on page 25 for lists of layer 3 applications 2 Select the Setup soft key and then select the Ethernet tab Verify that the enca
351. larms Press the Alarm Insert or Defect Insert button again mu When HP UNEQ or UNEQ P alarm defect insertion is stopped the C2 path overhead byte will be populated by the value configured on the Setup over head tab Alarm or defect insertion stops and the button turns gray Test results associated with the alarm or defect appear in the Status result category 100 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Measuring round trip delay or packet jitter Measuring round trip delay or packet jitter You can measure round trip delay or packet jitter by transmitting an Acterna payload The Acterna payload carries frames with time stamps enabling the instrument to calculate the delay and jitter To measure round trip delay you must use a loopback configuration You can measure packet jitter the difference in one way delay as experienced by a series of packets using either a loopback or an end to end configuration When measuring packet jitter your unit must receive three or more Acterna frames or packets before measurement begins To measure round trip delay or packet jitter 1 Use the Test Menu to do one of the following Select the layer 2 or layer 3 traffic terminate test application for the interface you are testing refer to Table 7 on page 25 through Table 8 on page 25 for a list of applications 2 Select the Setup soft key and then do the following Ifyou sel
352. le with BERT patterns carried in an ATP payload When testing using two instru ments be certain to configure both using the same payload type and BERT pattern To transmit and analyze layer 2 traffic 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the test appli cation for the interface you are testing Refer to Table 7 on page 25 through Table 8 on page 25 for a list of layer 2 applications 2 Select the Setup soft key and then select the Interface tab to specify settings that control the Ethernet interface see Specifying interface settings on page 41 3 Select the Ethernet tab to specify settings that define the frame character istics of the transmitted traffic see Specifying Ethernet frame settings on page 43 4 Select the Ethernet Filter tab to specify settings that filter the received traffic based on specified frame characteristics see Specifying Ethernet filter settings on page 49 5 Select the Traffic tab to specify the type of load the unit will transmit see Specifying traffic load settings on page 58 Press Results to return to the Main screen Connect the instrument to the circuit If you are testing an optical interface select the Laser button O ON Select Start Traffic for constant bursty or flood loads or Start Ramp for ramped loads to transmit traffic over the circuit 10 Verify that the green Signal Present Sync Acquired and Link Active LEDs are illumina
353. lect the Display By drop down list 3 Select the sort key The instruments are sorted using the new key Application names The application names that appear on the screen are abbreviated due to space constraints Refer to Table 12 for the application name as it is typically used Table 12 Discovered application names Discovered Name TermEth100ML2Loopback TermEth100ML2Traffic TermEth100ML3Loopback TermEth100ML3Ping TermEth100ML3Traffic TermEth100ML4Loopback TermEth100ML4 Traffic TermEth10GL2Loopback TermEth10GL2Traffic Application Name 100M Optical Eth Layer 2 Loopback Term 100M Optical Eth Layer 2 Traffic Term 100M Optical Eth Layer 3 Loopback 100M Optical Eth Layer 3 Ping Term 100M Optical Eth Layer 3 Traffic Term 100M Optical Eth Layer 4 Loopback 100M Optical Eth Layer 4 Traffic Term 10GigE LAN Layer 2 Loopback 10GigE LAN Layer 2 Traffic Term Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 35 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Discovering another JDSU test instrument using J Connect Table 12 Discovered application names Continued Discovered Name Application Name TermEth10GL3Loopback 10GigE LAN Layer 3 Loopback TermEth10GL3Ping 10GigE LAN Layer 3 Ping Term TermEth10GL3Traffic 10GigE LAN Layer 3 Traffic Term TermEth10GL4Loopback 10GigE LAN Layer 4 Loopback TermEth10GL4Traffic 10GigE LAN Layer 4 Traffic Term TermEth10ML2Loopback 10 100 1000
354. lecting one of the files on the left side the configured scripts that comprise the profile will be shown checked To prevent any portion of the saved configuration from loading un check any of the activated sections Any portion of the test may be configured after the saved file is loaded 3 Select the Load Profile button The test will be configured as saved and if the connect data is detailed in the file the unit will attempt to establish that connection 4 Ifa desired configuration is not found select the Skip Load Profiles button right green arrow Go to step 2 of Manually configuring all param eters on page 239 Manually configuring all parameters 1 To manually configure the tests to be run from the main menu select the Go button right green arrow after Configure Test Settings Manually 2 The first Connection parameters screen describes the Symmetry of the connection to be established a Select the Throughput Symmetric same parameters for up and downstream connections Asymmetric different up and downstream parameters Unidirectional only testing one direction up or downstream b Depending on the symmetry selected define the Measurement Direc tion Looped Upstream Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 239 Chapter 10 Automated Testing Automated RFC 2544 240 Downstream Select Next the green arrow 3 For all symmetry schema except loopback the Connection parameters pertaining
355. li cation for the interface you are testing Refer to Table 7 on page 25 through Table 8 on page 25 for a list of layer 2 and layer 3 applications Table 15 on page 129 lists layer 4 applications 2 Select the Setup soft key and then select the Filters tab By default a summary of all applicable filter settings appear Ethernet IP and TCP UDP 3 In the panel on the left side of the tab select Basic then set the Filter Mode to Detailed 4 To specify layer 2 filter settings in the panel on the left side of the tab select Ethernet then specify the following a If you want to filter traffic based on the type of encapsulation used specify the following Setting Value Encapsulation Select one of the following None The instrument will analyze only unen capsulated traffic VLAN The instrument will analyze only VLAN encapsulated traffic for the parameters you specify Q in Q The instrument will analyze only Q in Q encapsulated traffic for the parame ters you specify See Filtering traffic using Q in Q criteria on page 52 Stacked VLAN layer 2 applications only The instrument will analyze only stacked VLAN encapsulated traffic for the parameters you specify See Filtering traffic using stacked VLAN criteria on page 53 VPLS layer 2 applications only The instru ment will analyze only VPLS encapsulated traffic for the parameters you specify See Filtering traffic using VPLS criteria on p
356. lica tion allows you to establish a TCP connection to a peer and then measure layer 4 TCP throughput to demonstrate that poor application performance is not due to IP network issues You can also determine the window size and latency associated with the connection The TCP Host application is available when testing using a TBERD MTS 5800 Transport Module or MSAM When configuring this application you can indicate whether you want the instrument to report throughput in kilobits megabits kilobytes or megabytes per second When configuring the TCP Host application you can also specify the interval at which the instrument is to refresh reported test results mee IMPORTANT The TCP Host application is a resource intensive application To ensure optimal performance be certain to configure one instrument as the client and the other as a server if you are using a second instrument rather than an Iperf server Dual port testing is not recommended mu NOTE Interrupted Connections If a TCP connection is lost unexpectedly or intentionally for example because someone brings the link down the connection may not be restored automatically This is expected behavior because there is no way to ensure that the server will become active before the client Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 137 Chapter 5 TCP UDP Testing Running TCP Host applications Changing settings during the test Streams pipe mult
357. lication you can use it to run the SAMComplete test Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Configuring SAMComplete test settings Chapter 10 Automated Testing SAMComplete To launch the SAMComplete test 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the Traffic Terminate or Multistream application on Layer 2 or Layer 3 or the TCP Wirespeed application on Layer 4 for the circuit you are testing see Launching a single automated test on page 225 and connect the instru ment to the circuit For details refer to the Getting Started Manual that shipped with your instrument or upgrade 2 Select SAMComplete soft button If the button is grayed out the test cannot be launched This is typically due to an invalid setup setting For example you are configured for VPLS MPLS Stacked VLAN or PPPoE The test launches and the SAMComplete Configuration menu appears From the configuration page the settings be configured manually or if a profile has been previously configured and saved the test settings can be loaded To configure test settings To configure all options yourself select the green arrow to the right of Configure Test Settings Manually Go to step 2 on page 251 To load configuration settings set from a previously saved file select the green arrow to the right of Load Configuration from a Profile 1 The Profile selection window appears The filenames of the saved profiles wi
358. ll be listed on the left side of the window and all sections of the currently loaded profile will be listed on the right side of the screen Do the following a Select a profile from the list whose configuration is to be loaded b Check those sections on the right side of the screen that are to be loaded into the test If no profile has yet been selected the currently configured profile sections will be checked Any section not selected will not be configured into the test Any param eter of the test checked or not checked may be reconfigured at a later point in the configuration process c Select the Load Profiles button to load all checked sections into the test After profile has successfully loaded select OK and then select the Next arrow Go to Choosing SAMComplete tests on page 259 TIPS 1 Generally selecting the Next button right green arrow on each page will advance to the next step in the standard process but if at any time there is a need to return to the test configuration skip to running tests or review test results select the Go To button and then select the step to which it is desired to return 2 To save a view of the screen on the unit for future reference use the cam era icon to capture a screenshot 2 The first Symmetry page appears Do the following Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 251 Chapter 10 Automated Testing SAMComplete a Select the Throughput t
359. load is some thing other than Acterna with BERT payload 4 Use the graphical display of a backbone frame illustrated in Figure 26 on page 116 to specify the following Frame Label Setting Value B DA Destination MAC Enter the destination address using a 6 byte hexadecimal format B SA Source Type Select Factory Default or User Defined User MAC If you specified User Defined enter the source MAC address using a 6 byte hexadecimal format B TAG B Tag VLAN ID Enter the ID for the backbone VLAN used as the path to the destina tion B Tag Priority Enter the priority code point PCP ID representing the type of service the transmitted traffic is emulating B Tag DEI BIT Indicate whether the traffic is drop eli gible by setting the DEI bit for the transmitted traffic I TAG l Tag Priority Enter the priority code point PCP ID representing the type of service the transmitted traffic is emulating l Tag DEI Bit Indicate whether the traffic is drop eli gible by setting the DEI bit for the transmitted traffic l Tag UCA Bit Indicate whether you want to use the customer address by setting the bit l Tag Service ID Specify the backbone service instance ID for the traffic 116 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing MAC in MAC testing 5 On the backbone frame graphic select Data and then specify the settings that characterize the customer frame illustrate
360. login request Source Node Name Specify the source node name car N A N A y Ni ried in the login request 200 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 9 Fibre Channel Testing Configuring layer 2 Fibre Channel tests Table 23 Fibre Channel Physical Layer settings Continued Explicit Fabric N Port oy Explicit Setting Values Implicit E Port Point to Point Fabric Topology Topology Destination N Port Specify the destination port name N A N A N A 4 Name carried in the login request Destination Node Specify the destination node name N A N A N A Name carried in the login request Destination ID Specify the destination ID carried in N A N A 4 N A the login request Source ID Specify the source ID carried in the N A N A 4 N A login request Specifying Fibre Channel frame settings NOTE When you test flow control on a Fibre Channel circuit specify the same number of buffer credits for both the near end and far end instruments If you specify a different number of credits or if you specify a very low num ber you may not achieve desired bandwidth utilization 4 Optional f you want to transmit an ID for all loop up and loop down frames originating from the module select the Unit Identifier field and then type the ID The default ID is JDSU 5800 5 Ifyou need to specify other settings for the test select the appropriate tab otherwise press Results to return to the Main screen The interface
361. lready done so use the Test Menu to select the Ping appli cation for the interface you are testing refer to Table 7 on page 25 through Table 8 on page 25 for a list of applications Select the Setup soft key select the Ethernet tab and then specify the Ethernet frame settings see Specifying Ethernet frame settings on page 43 Be certain to set the data mode IPoE or PPPoE Select the IP tab In Source Type select one of the following Static IP To manually assign an IP address as the source address for the traffic select Static IP and then type the address subnet mask and default gateway in the corresponding fields DHCP To allow a DHCP server to assign an IP address subnet mask and default gateway select DHCP In Destination Type select IP Address or Host Name and then type the destination IP address or the host name for the ping If you selected the Ping application under Ping specify the following settings a In Ping Type indicate whether you want to transmit a Single ping packet Multiple ping packets a Continuous stream of ping packets or a Fast stream of ping packets If you specify Multiple enter the number of packets to transmit NOTE The instrument sends multiple and continuous pings at a rate of 1 ping per second It sends fast pings at a rate of once every 100 ms assuming a response is received within 100 ms If the unit doesn t receive a reply within 100 ms it will wait up t
362. lts me NOTE You must turn the laser on using the associated button to pass the signal through the unit s transmitter To monitor layer 2 traffic 1 Use the Test Menu to do one of the following Select the layer 2 monitor test application for the interface you are testing refer to Table 7 on page 25 through Table 8 on page 25 for a list of applications 2 Select the Setup soft key and then select the Ethernet Filter tab Do one of the following Ifyou are running a standard Ethernet test application specify the filter settings for the traffic you want to monitor see Specifying Ethernet filter settings on page 49 Ifyou are monitoring VPLS encapsulated traffic specify the VPLS filter settings see Filtering traffic using VPLS criteria on page 54 Press Results to return to the Main screen Connect the instrument to the circuit If you are testing an optical interface select the Laser button O a A Ww Verify that the green Signal Present Sync Acquired and Link Active LEDs are illuminated J Select Connect Rx to Tx for line loopbacks 8 Ata minimum observe the summary link statistics and counts filter statis tics and counts error statistics and layer 2 BERT statistics results Layer 2 traffic is monitored Transmitting and analyzing You can use the instrument to send and receive MPLS OAM messages or layer 2 MPLS TP T MPLS or generate Ethernet traffic on a specific p
363. lts 302 L2 Link Counts results 299 L2 Link Stats results 296 L3 Config Status results 315 L3 Filter Counts results 314 L3 Filter Stats results 313 L3 Link Counts results 313 L3 Link Stats results 312 L4 Filter Counts results 329 L4 Filter Stats results 329 L4 Link Counts results 328 L4 Link Stats results 327 Labels specifying MPLS 43 184 specifying VPLS 43 184 LAPD frames unnumbered messages 338 Laser turning ON or OFF 3 Layer 1 BER testing See Ethernet testing or Fibre Channel testing Layer 2 testing See Ethernet testing or Fibre Channel testing Layer 2 transparency about loop backs 69 configuring near end 70 initiating the loopback 72 observing results 73 starting the frame sequence 73 using Quick Config 71 verifying 69 Layer 3 testing See IP testing Layer 4 testing See TCP UDP testing Layout changing result 5 LBM messages sending 114 LEDs alarm 296 Ethernet 291 MiM 115 Multiple Streams 138 148 Triple Play 160 Loads about Ethernet traffic 58 transmitting bursty 59 transmitting constant 58 transmitting ramped 61 Login Status results 323 Loop back testing about transparent L2 69 action buttons 171 address swapping 169 applications 167 171 ARP settings 169 filter criteria 169 key concepts 169 messages 171 MPLS traffic 170 specifying unit ID 172 Ethernet IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 351 Index 352 TCP UDP traffic 170 terminology 168 using LLB 172 using Loop Up 174
364. lue Specify the SVLAN ID carried in the filtered traffic If you want to filter traffic for a specific user prior ity specify the priority otherwise select Don t Care If you want to filter traffic for a specific DEI Bit specify the bit value otherwise select Don t Care Specify the TPID carried in the filtered traffic If you are transmitting traffic with a user defined TPID your instrument will automatically use the TPID that you specified in the User SVLAN TPID hex field NOTE If you want to filter on a user defined TPID you must also enter that TPID on the RX Payload TPID setup page Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Filtering traffic using stacked VLAN criteria Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 2 testing b On the graphic of the frame select CVLAN and then specify the following Seiting Value Specify VLAN ID If you specified Q in Q as the encapsulation type and you want to filter traffic for a specific CVLAN select Yes otherwise select Don t Care VLAN ID If you specified Q in Q as the encapsulation type and you specified indicated that you want to filter traffic for a particular CVLAN specify the VLAN ID carried in the filtered traffic User Priority If you specified Q in Q as the encapsulation type and you specified indicated that you want to filter traffic for a particular CVLAN specify the User Priority carried in the filtered traffic If you want to ana
365. ly from the pipe display You can also press the Configure Triple Play Services button to select the type of services you want to emulate and specify parameters for each type For example if you are emulating voice service you can specify the Codec sampling rate and the number of calls Understanding Triple Play When running Triple Play applications you can observe cumulative test results test results for the entire interface and link You can also observe throughput latency RTD packet jitter and frame loss graphs for all analyzed streams Viewing cumulative link results You can observe cumulative link results for all transmitted streams by selecting the Link group and then the corresponding Stats or Counts category Viewing graphs Throughput latency RTD packet jitter and frame loss results can be observed graphically by selecting the Graphs group and then the category or the results that you want to observe When observing the graphs it s helpful to view the entire result window by selecting View gt Result Windows gt Single Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 161 Chapter 6 Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing Triple Play testing Changing graph properties 162 Figure 41 illustrates the Throughput Graph for Triple Play streams Graphs gt Throughput Graph gt a a Scale A Mean a r wer r in Bi I es Ta a WW vo ee ee ai merer Fi oA ferme fe my T RJ 7 Fa
366. lyze detect frames carrying User Defined SVLAN TPID as Q in Q traffic you have to specify the expected User Defined TPID value s on the Filters gt Rx gt TPID page The TPID values on this page are used to recognize Q in Q traffic with User Defined TPID If you want to analyze detect Q in Q traffic carrying the same TPID that you specified for transmitted traffic check the box for Use Tx User SVLAN TPID If you need to specify other settings for the test select the appropriate tab otherwise press Results to return to the Main screen The Q in Q filter settings are specified If your instrument is configured to transmit stacked VLAN encapsulated traffic you can filter received traffic using stacked VLAN criteria To filter traffic using stacked VLAN criteria 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the layer 2 test application for the interface you are testing Refer to Table 7 on page 25 for lists of applications Select the Setup soft key and then select the Ethernet tab Verify that Stacked VLAN is specified as the encapsulation Select the Filters tab In the panel on the left side of the tab select Ethernet then specify the following a On the graphic of the frame select SVLAN and then specify the following Setting Value SVLAN ID Specify the SVLAN ID carried in the filtered traffic SVLAN User Priority If you want to filter traffic for a specific user priority specify the priority otherw
367. m and or Downstream for non symmetric test of each test and Burst Granularity in Frames L3 b To further refine the Back to Back test select Set advanced Back to Back settings and then choose the Ignore Pause Frames checkbox Select Back to return to previous screen c Select Next the green arrow 11 If selected the Burst Test screen appears to allow the confirmation or configuration of the Burst Test parameters a Select the Burst Test Type either Committed Burst Size CBS CBS Policing MEF 34 or Burst Hunt Define the CBS in kB Upstream and or Downstream for non symmetric test CBS Duration and Burst Sizes kB Upstream and or Downstream for non symmetric test depending on which Burst test type is chosen To further refine the Burst Test select Set advanced CBS settings and then select the Ignore Pause Frames checkbox if desired Select Back to return to previous screen 12 The Test Durations screen appears for specification of whether all tests are to have common durations or are individual tests to have their dura tions specified separately a To choose common durations select or confirm the No radio button If individual setting are desired select or confirm the Yes radio button b Specify or confirm the Durations and the Number of Trials for all tests c Select Next the green arrow 13 The Test Threshold screen appears to allow setting of the pas fail threshold for the selected tests
368. mat Conventions This manual uses conventions and symbols as described in the following tables Table 1 Typographical conventions Description Example User interface actions and buttons or Press the OK key switches you have to press appear in this typeface Code and output messages appear in All results okay this typeface Text you must type exactly as shown Type a set exe in the dialog box appears in this typeface Variables appear in this typeface Type the new hostname Book references appear in this typeface a efer to Newton s Telecom Dictionary Table 2 Keyboard and menu conventions Description Example A plus sign t indicates simultaneous Press Ctrl s keystrokes A comma indicates consecutive key Press Alt f s strokes A slanted bracket indicates choosing a On the menu bar click submenu from menu Start gt Program Files Ethernet IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual xvii About this Manual Safety and compliance information Table 3 Symbol conventions AN This symbol represents a general hazard This symbol represents hazardous voltages AN This symbol represents a risk of explosion his symbol represents a Note indicating related information or tip kad This symbol located on the equipment battery or its pack D aging indicates that the equipment or battery must not be IN disposed of in a land fill site or as municipal waste and A O should be disposed of acc
369. merica Latin America Asia Pacific EMEA www jdsu com Toll Free 1 855 ASK JDSU Tel 55 11 5503 3800 Tel 852 2892 0990 Tel 49 7121 86 2222 21160056 Rev 009 10 2013 English
370. modes Configuring layer 1 tests When testing Fibre Channel service you can generate and receive layer 1 test patterns and monitor and analyze received signals When running a Layer 1 BERT test on a Fibre Channel circuit you must actively start transmission of the test pattern by pressing the Start BERT Pattern action button muy NOTE For detailed descriptions of each pattern available when testing 1 Gigabit 2 Gigabit and 4 Gigabit MF LF and HF Fibre Channel patterns refer to the IEEE 802 3 2000 Edition Annex 26A For 1 Gigabit RDPAT JTPAT and SNPAT patterns refer to the NCITS TR 25 1999 specifications Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 197 Chapter 9 Fibre Channel Testing Configuring layer 1 tests 198 BER testing layer 1 Monitoring layer 1 BER Use the layer 1 BERT terminate application to generate and receive layer 1 test patterns To BER test layer 1 1 Using the Test Menu select the layer 1 BERT terminate test application for the interface you are testing refer to Table 22 on page 197 for a list of applications 2 To specify the BER pattern select the Setup soft key select the Interface tab and do the following a If you want the unit to use the Tx BERT pattern as the Rx BERT pattern in BERT Rx lt Tx select On otherwise select Off b Select a Tx Pattern If the Rx Tx setting is Off select an Rx Pattern d_ If you are using SFPs and are testing in Monitor Thro
371. mpliant Ethernet tester or a distance extension device TX ELP Reject TX ELP Request Explicit Fabric N Port login Table 64 Login Status results Test Result Fabric Present Fabric Login Status F Port Name Fabric Name N Port Login Status Count of rejections transmitted in response to login requests from JDSU compliant Ethernet tester or a distance extension device Count of login requests transmitted to another JDSU compliant Ethernet tester or a dis tance extension device Table 64 describes each of the results when using an Implicit or Explicit E Port login Explicit Fabric N Port login Description Indicates whether a fabric is present Yes or No Indicates the status of the fabric login process by displaying one of the following In Progress Complete Failed Loop Unavailable Displays the name of the F Port that the instrument logged into Displays the name of the fabric that the instrument logged into Indicates the status of the N Port login process by displaying one of the following In Progress Complete Failed Loop Unavailable Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 323 Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results Table 64 Login Status results Explicit Fabric N Port login Continued Test Result Dest N Port ID Description Displays the port ID for the destination N port Dest N Po
372. ms 10 Gigabit Ethernet 2 048 ms 1G 2G 4Gigabit Fibre Channel 2 409 ms 10 Gigabit Fibre Channel 2 008 ms Current The current one way delay calculated in microseconds Maximum The maximum one way delay calculated in microseconds Minimum The minimum one way delay calculated in microseconds The ratio of packets containing a GPS timestamp to the total number of Acterna Test Packets received The number of ATP GPS frames received since test restart Instantaneous The current Packet Jitter measured over the prior second of test time Average The smoothed average value of the packet delay variation since the last test restart per RFC 1889 calculated in microseconds Max Average The maximum Packet Jitter Avg us measured since the last test restart calcu lated in microseconds Peak The highest packet delay variation measured since the last test restart calcu lated in microseconds Rx Acterna OWD Frames The number of filtered ATP GPS frames received since test restart Rx Mbps Cur L1 The current bandwidth utilized by the filtered traffic expressed in megabits per sec ond This measurement is an average taken over the prior second of test time Rx Mbps Cur L2 Rx Stacked VLAN Frames SVLANx ID PRI DEI Svc Disruption us The current data rate of filtered frames calculated over the prior second of test time Data rate is the frame bandwidth excluding
373. ms application the traffic load for each stream transmitted except when configured for burst can be specified in Mbps or as a percentage of the line rate If a stream is to be configured with a Burst load type only one stream may be defined to have a Burst load type see Speci fying the load unit on a stream with burst on page 153 for instructions on selecting the load unit on the stream carrying the burst signal To specify the load unit 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the Multiple Streams test application for the interface you are testing refer to Table 16 on page 148 for a list of applications 2 Select the Setup soft key 3 Inthe Stream Selection section verify that the Burst Stream is set to None and then under Load Unit select one of the following Bit Rate Percent 4 Select the Allow flooding checkbox to transmit true 100 load in those circuits that can certainly handle the signal 5 If you selected Bit Rate the Throughput Bitrate definition source must also be specified Select either Layer 1 Mbps or Layer 2 Eth IR Mbps The load unit is specified You can specify the traffic load for each stream see Specifying the load type for all streams on page 152 If you selected a Multiple Streams application common characteristics shared by all streams are specified on the All Streams tab To specify traffic characteristics shared by every enabled stream 1 If you
374. n so use this setting if you want to observe these conversations 6 Press Results to return to the Main screen 7 Connect the module to the circuit 8 Ifyou are testing an optical interface select the Laser button 9 Select Start Traffic to transmit traffic over the circuit 10 At a minimum verify that the green Signal Present Sync Acquired Link Active and Frame Detect LEDs are illuminated 11 At a minimum observe the test results in the Traffic Profile group in the Streams category For details see J Profiler results on page 329 of Chapter 11 Test Results You have discovered traffic using J Profiler 126 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual TCP UDP Testing This chapter provides step by step instructions for testing TCP UDP service Topics discussed in this chapter include the following About TCP UDP testing on page 128 Specifying layer 2 and layer 3 settings on page 131 Specifying layer 4 settings on page 131 Transmitting layer 4 traffic on page 136 Inserting errors or pause frames on page 137 Loop back testing on page 137 Running TCP Host applications on page 137 TrueSpeed on page 143 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 127 Chapter 5 TCP UDP Testing About TCP UDP testing About TCP UDP testing Features and capabilities Understanding the graphical 128 user interf
375. n the module provides LEDs in the panel for each analyzed traffic stream When running the TCP Host applications you can observe cumulative test results for the entire link and detailed test results for each analyzed back ground stream You can view detailed test results for a particular stream on the result display by specifying the stream number as the result group and then selecting the category with the results you want to observe You can observe cumulative link results for all transmitted streams by selecting the Link group and then the corresponding Stats Counts Error Stats or AutoNeg Status category You can observe summarized and detailed results associated with each TCP connection in the TCP Host result group IPerf output and layer 3 configuration status results are also available for each connection Some categories provide so much information you may need to scroll to the right significantly to observe a particular result To focus on a particular subset of results and minimize scrolling you can use the Columns key under the result panes to specify which result columns appear and hide those you are not interested in For example if you want to focus on the delay measurements for each connection you may choose to hide the Tx Mbps columns or Send Window columns You can always display them later if you need to Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Configuring the streams Specifying TCP Host set
376. n device EFM Ethernet First Mile Err Error Erred Errored Ethernet A LAN protocol Using the instrument you can test and verify Ethernet network elements and services Ethernet link partner The nearest Ethernet device on a link The instrument auto negotiates its capabilities with this device when you initialize a link ETS Ethernet Transport Service A point to point path through a specific component of a switch ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute F FCS Frame check sequence A value calculated by an originating device and inserted into an Ethernet frame The receiving device performs the same calculation and compares its FCS value with the FCS value in the frame If the values don t match suggesting the frame is errored an FCS error is declared Switching devices will discard the frame FDV Frame Delay Variation Maximum frame jitter within SLA compliance FDX Full Duplex FE Far End Used by the ITU perfor mance measures to indicate which end of the network is being tested FTP File transfer protocol Protocol used on LANs and the Internet to transfer files FTD Frame Transfer Delay Maximum frame transfer time source to destination within SLA compliance Frame Loss Loss of frame synchroni zation G GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol Gate time Time duration for error measurement During this p
377. n microseconds The maximum round trip delay since the last restart of the test expressed in microseconds Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results Test results such as link counts statistics error statistics and BER results are available when performing Ethernet Fibre Channel IP or TCP UDP testing Ifyou are testing a 10 Gigabit WAN interface SONET SDH test results are also available see the PDH SONET SDH NextGen and OTN Testing Manual that shipped with your instrument or upgrade If you are testing using VPLS encapsulated traffic link statistics link counts filter statistics filter counts and BERT statistics for the customer appear in the associated Customer result categories Link statistics and link counts for the service provider are also provided in SP categories If you are testing using MAC in MAC PBB traffic link statistics link counts filter statistics filter counts and BERT statistics for the customer frames appear in the associated Customer result categories Link statis tics and counts are also provided for the backbone frames Ifyou are testing using MPLS encapsulated traffic the standard layer 2 and layer 3 result categories are provided and test results associated with MPLS testing appear Inall cases only the results applicable to your test appear in each cate gory For example if you are performing a layer 2 Ethernet test with VLAN tagged tra
378. nation carried in the frame Priority Displays the VLAN priority carried in the frame DEI Displays the drop eligible bit carried in the frame The current bandwidth utilized by received Broadcast Unicast or Multicast traffic expressed as a percentage of the line rate of available bandwidth This measurement is an average taken over the prior second of test time You must originate an Acterna payload to measure round trip delay If a unit is in loopback mode or if the far end unit is not looped back invalid results appear because the unit is not originating the traffic Average The average round trip delay calculated in microseconds with a resolution as follows 10 100 1000 and 1 GigE Ethernet 2 048 ms 10 Gigabit Ethernet 2 048 ms 1G 2G 4Gigabit Fibre Channel 2 409 ms Current The current round trip delay calculated in microseconds Maximum The maximum round trip delay calculated in microseconds Minimum The minimum round trip delay calculated in microseconds Current The current rate of received frames taken over the prior second of test time Average The average rate is calculated over the time period elapsed since the last test restart Minimum The minimum rate is taken over a one second period Peak The maximum rate is taken over a one second period since frame detection All rates are expressed in frames per second The average maximum and minimum size of
379. nctional and mechanical interfaces used for communicating between computers terminals and modems RTD Round Trip Delay Maximum frame transfer delay when measured at source after signal is looped back from far end RTP Real time Transport Protocol Standardized packet format for delivering audio and video over the Internet MPEG video streams are often encapsulated in RTP packets Runt An Ethernet frame that is shorter than the IEEE 802 3 minimum frame length of 64 bytes and contains an errored FCS Rx Receive or receiver or input 345 Glossary 346 S SA 1 Source address 2 Service affecting SD Signal degradation Secs Seconds Service disruption time The time between Ethernet maximum inter frame gap when service switches to a protect line The Svc Disruption us result in the Link Stats category displays the service disruption time SF Signal fail SFD Start of frame delimiter Part of an Ethernet frame preamble that indicates that the destination address frame is about to begin SFP Small form factor pluggable module Used throughout this manual to represent pluggable optical transceivers modules SLA Service Level Agreement SNAP SubNetwork Access Protocol Protocol used in 802 3 frames which specifies a vendor code and an Ethertype When you transmit pings using the E1 Tester you can transmit 802 3 frames with logical link control
380. nd a log file detailing the progress of the script A PDF file is also generated which includes the test results in tabular and graphical formats The following topics are discussed in this section Features and capabilities on page 228 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 227 Chapter 10 Automated Testing Automated RFC 2544 228 Features and capabilities About loopbacks on page 229 J QuickCheck on page 229 Asymmetrical tests on page 231 Throughput test on page 232 Latency RTD test on page 233 Packet Jitter test on page 234 About the System Recovery test on page 234 Frame Loss test on page 235 Back to Back Frames test Burst test on page 235 Optimizing the test time on page 236 Importing and exporting RFC config files on page 236 Configuring the Enhanced RFC 2544 or Fibre Channel tests on page 237 Setting Connection parameters on page 238 Test selection on page 241 Running Enhanced RFC 2544 and FC tests on page 244 The instrument supports the following features when running the RFC 2544 tests J QuickCheck Before running the Enhanced RFC 2544 test you can run the J QuickCheck application to verify that the local and remote instru ments are configured properly to bring up the link verify auto negotiation of the link establish the li
381. nd all sections of the currently loaded profile will be listed on the right side of the screen Do the following a Select a profile from the list whose configuration is to be loaded b Check those sections on the right side of the screen that are to be loaded into the test If no profile has yet been selected the currently configured profile sections will be checked Any section not selected will not be configured into the test Any param eter of the test checked or not checked may be reconfigured at a later point in the configuration process c Select the Load Profiles button to load all checked sections into the test After profile has successfully loaded select OK and then select the Next arrow Go to Running the configured TrueSpeed test on page 276 7 The Mode Selection screen appears Do one of the following To continue with troubleshooting select the radio button for trouble shooting Go to TrueSpeed test steps on page 268 To proceed with a circuit turnup select the radio button for installing or turning up Continue to TrueSpeed Circuit Turnup Option TrueSpeed Circuit Turnup Option 1 The Symmetry selection screen appears Select the radio button for a Symmetrical circuit downstream and upstream throughputs are the same or Asymmetrical downstream and upstream throughputs are different Then select the Next arrow Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 271 Chap
382. near end are automati cally populated Ifa layer 4 loop back at the far end was successful and you are looping back traffic using a single stream application the ATP listen port on the far end is automatically populated 9 On the near end unit select one of the following Start Traffic if you configured a constant or bursty load Start Ramp if you configured a ramped traffic load When the far end unit receives the traffic it does the following Determines which frames or packets satisfy its filter criteria Only traffic that satisfies the criteria will be looped back to the near end unit Swaps the destination and source MAC or IP address and if appli cable port number for every frame or packet it receives Transmits the traffic back to the unit on the near end Traffic is transmitted and looped through the unit on the far end if it passes the far end unit s filter criteria To loop down the far end unit 1 On the near end unit select Stop Traffic or Stop Ramp 2 On the near end unit select Loop Down The far end unit is looped down and a confirmation message appears in the message bar of the near end unit indicating that the loop down was successful Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual VoIP Testing This chapter provides information on testing voice over IP services Topics discussed in this chapter include the following About VoIP testing on page 17
383. ned by the pattern selected PCAP File format used for packet captures on the instrument PE Provider edge PID Program ID PLM P Payload mismatch Path PM Path monitoring PMT Program Map Table PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPoE is used on the GUI and throughout this guide to see the applica tions used to establish a connection to a PPPoE peer via a login process The HST can emulate a PPPoE client or server Pseudo wires Point to point connec tions used to carry each type of service between to PE routers ina VPLS network Ethernet IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Glossary Q Q in Q Also known as VLAN stacking enables service providers to use a single VLAN to support customers who have multiple VLANs Q in Q VLANs can also be used to provide virtual access and connections to multiple services available over the ISPs ASPs and storage services QoS Quality of Service QRSS Quasi Random Signal Sequence A modified 2420 1 pseudo random test signal modified for use in AMI circuits R RDI Remote Defect Indication A terminal will transmit an RDI when it loses its incoming signal REI Remote Error Indicator RFI Remote Failure Indicator RJ 48 11 Modular telephone jack typi cally used for telephones modems and fax machines RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RS 232 Set of standards specifying electrical fu
384. nel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Running the TCP Host application Running the TCP Wirespeed application Chapter 5 TCP UDP Testing Running TCP Host applications To run the TCP host 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the Layer 4 Multiple Streams application for the circuit you are testing 2 Specify the settings required to initialize the link see Specifying interface settings on page 41 Be certain to configure a full duplex connection 3 Configure the traffic streams see Configuring the streams on page 139 4 Specify the TCP Host settings see Specifying TCP Host settings on page 139 5 Press Results to return to the main screen and then do the following a If you are measuring throughput on an optical circuit turn the laser on b Select the Actions tab c If your unit is operating as a client select Start Traffic d Select Start TCP Server or Start TCP Client depending on the mode you specified 6 Ata minimum observe the following test results To verify layer 2 or layer 3 performance set a result group to Link and then display and observe results in the corresponding Link Stats cate gory To verify layer 4 TCP performance set a result group to TCP Host and then display and observe results in the L4 Link Stats and Output categories Throughput Latency RTD Packet Jitter and Frame Loss graphs are also available in the All Streams result group
385. nerate and transmit traffic automatically whenever you turn the laser on BER testing You can verify circuit performance by sending BERT patterns over switched layer 2 and unswitched layer 1 networks You can also configure ATP payloads carrying a BERT pattern Multiple source MAC addresses When transmitting a single stream of Layer 2 traffic you can simulate traffic from multiple sources by assigning a range of MAC addresses to be carried in the frames transmitted in the stream Layer 2 transparency testing You can transmit and analyze layer 2 traffic with CDP VTP STP and R STP headers to verify that a circuit can support a variety of control protocols irrespective of the transport method For details see Using J Proof to verify layer 2 transparency on page 69 Automated VLAN testing An automated VLAN test is available that tests a range of VLANs by transmitting and looping back frames for each VLAN in the range for a user specified test period and then comparing the number of frames transmitted to the number received For details see Automated VLAN tests on page 263 Layer 3 testing You can perform end to end tests to verify throughput You can also Transmit packets and determine if any are lost when looped back to your instrument Filter traffic using layer 3 criteria Measure round trip delay Send ping requests and respond to ping requests from another Ethernet device to verify conn
386. ng Started manual that shipped with your instrument or upgrade Before monitoring or configuring a network element using the Test Access Management tool TAM you must specify the settings required to establish a connection to the NE indicate the test mode Monitor or Emulate and provide the ingress and egress flow To specify the TAM settings 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the Layer 2 or Layer 3 Traffic application for the circuit you are testing see Launching a single automated test on page 225 and connect the instrument to the circuit For details refer to the Getting Started Manual that shipped with your instrument or upgrade 2 Onthe Main screen select the Toolkit softkey then select TAM Setup The TAM Setup screen appears with tabs that allow you to specify connection settings and test port settings Tabs are also provided that allow you to observe the status of the connection and the version of the TAM application currently running on your instrument 3 On the Connection tab specify the following settings Setting Value Network Element Select the type of NE that you are monitoring or con Type figuring Network Element IP Enter the IP address for the NE Address Network Element IP Enter the port identifier for the NE s management Port port Username Enter the username you created for the test instru ment This name is used to log on to the NE and to ensu
387. ng configuration select the Go arrow after Change Configuration Go to step 7 of Configuring the TrueSpeed test on page 270 To load a previously saved set of configuration parameters select the Go arrow after Load Configuration from a a Profile or left green arrow at the bottom of the window if coming from Profile Selection Go to step 6 in Configuring the TrueSpeed test on page 270 276 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 10 Automated Testing TrueSpeed Test To run the test as configured select the Go arrow after Select and Run Tests 2 The Run TrueSpeed Tests window appears The blinking button labeled Run Test indicates that the test is not yet running To start the test press the Run Test button The button will change to a yellow background and the legend will change to Stop Test While running the turnup version of TrueSpeed a time remaining indica tion will be shown after the MTU test has been completed The trouble shooting version indicates its activity by the display of an animated Running indicator To abort the test press the Stop Test button When the test has completed if the turnup option had been selected the screen will show a pass fail indication For troubleshooting option it will not To continue after the test has been stopped or it has finished select the Next arrow 3 The post test window appears What do you want to do next
388. nhanced RFC 2544 or FC test exit page Do one of the following To start the Enhanced RFC 2544 or FC test from the beginning select the Start Over button Go to Configuration methods on page 238 To restore the configuration setups to their default values when leaving the application check the box Restore Setups on Exit To completely exit the Enhanced RFC 2544 or FC application select Exit To return to the previous window select Cancel The Enhanced RFC 2544 or FC test has been run SAMComplete Initiating the SAMComplete Test 250 This test is a multi stream test based on ITU T Y 1564 that performs a two phase test First the test verifies whether each Ethernet service is properly configured Second multiple Ethernet service instances are verified simultane ously each meeting its assigned Committed Information Rate CIR All services are transmitted at CIR and must pass all SLA parameters FDV FTD RTD and Availability The following topics are discussed in this section Initiating the SAMComplete Test on page 250 Configuring SAMComplete test settings on page 251 Choosing SAMComplete tests on page 259 Running SAMComplete tests on page 260 SAMComplete functionality is standard on all units and all Ethernet line rates supported Although all applications do not include SAMComplete function ality if your instrument is appropriately configured for a capable app
389. nimum size of frames received for the discovered stream since frame detection Bytes A count of received bytes for the discovered stream Graphical results The Graphs result group provides test results such as Latency RTD Throughput Instantaneous Packet Jitter and Errors graphically When viewing results graphically a legend is provided under the graph with colors indicating what each color represents on the graph For graphs that display time abso lute time is used You can customize the graphs to suit your needs by doing the following To simplify the graph you can select the legend and then choose the data that you want to observe and hide the rest Ifyou are running a multiple streams application you can select the legend and then choose the data that you want to observe for each analyzed stream and hide the rest Disabling automatic graph Graphs require significant system resources therefore you can optionally generation disable automatic graph generation if you intend to run other resource intense applications To disable graph generation 1 On the Main screen select Tools gt Customize The Customize User Interface Look and Feel screen appears 2 Clear the Generate Graphs setting and then select Close to return to the Main screen The T BERD MTS 5800 will not automatically generate graphs You can select the Generate Graphs setting at any time to resume automatic graph generation 330 Ethern
390. ning A key of status indicators is available on the screen for easy reference Run RFC 2544 Tests Not Running Ali RFC 2544 Tests Run Throughput oo Test Latency Packet Jitter vee Active Frame Loss Burst CBS Pass ae i Ea Complete Yl Running Scheduled Skip RFC 2544 Tests mE J QuickCheck Run J QuickCheck End Test Figure 71 RFC Run Tests status screen 1 To initiate the test sequence select the Run Test button The time remaining displays in the top tab and each test scheduled will be displayed with its current status NOTE To switch between the test and the Setup panel on the user interface click the Go To button at the top of the screen and then click the Results button in the dialog This function is intended allow you to verify the settings Note that the RFC2544 button is yellow to indicate it has been launched You should not change the settings during a test as you may get undesired results To return to the test click the RFC2544 button 2 When the tests have completed select the Next the green arrow Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 247 Chapter 10 Automated Testing Automated RFC 2544 The Test Complete page appears What do you want to do next Create Report Go Repeat Test Go nany e Change Configuration and Rerun Test Go wy View Detailed Results Go Run Tests RTT Figure 72 Enhanced RFC 2544 or FC
391. nk establish a loopback and then verify that the link can support 100 traffic utilization For details see Asymmetrical tests on page 231 Graphical output of key results When running the tests frame loss throughput and latency round trip delay results are now displayed graph ically in their own result categories Status bar A status bar is also provided that lets you know how far the test has progressed and provides an estimate of the time remaining to run the test Report output You can save the test results to a user named file in PDF XML or TXT format Enhanced test You can run the Enhanced RFC 2544 test and indicate whether you want to run a symmetrical test or an upstream downstream or combined asymmetrical test Asymmetric RFC 2544 You can run the Enhanced RFC 2544 test in asymmetric mode in an end to end configuration This is useful for testing circuits carrying traffic at different upstream and downstream line rates The test is initiated by a master tester on the near end The master tester then automatically configures the slave tester on the far end TAM Test Access Management automation lf your instrument is config ured and optioned to do so you can now use it to remotely log into and provision network elements for example switches and routers from a Mobility Switching Center MSC by issuing TL1 commands For details see The TrueSpeed test has been run on p
392. nnection or check box to Automatically find file size for 30 second transmit and Number of Connections and the RTT in ms and Max Segment Size in bytes if RTT and Path MTU are not selected Then select Next the green arrow 7 If Traffic Shaping Test has been selected the Traffic Shaping window appears 8 Specify the Test Duration and Window Size and Number of Connec tions if the RTT step is not selected Then select Next the green arrow The Save Profiles window appears Do one of the following a Ifno Profile is to be saved at his time select the Skip Profiles arrow at the bottom of the window Go to Running the TrueSpeed test on page 276 b Ifitis desired that the configuration be saved to memory disk or USB specify the filename and the location where it is to be stored If it is desired that subsequent users be restricted from being able modify this profile check the box Save as read only To save the file to memory select the Save Profiles button Then select the Next arrow Go to Running the TrueSpeed test on page 276 Running the TrueSpeed test When the TrueSpeed test has been completely configured three options are available run the test as configured reconfigure the test possibly to save as a different profile or load a saved profile except when profile has just been loaded Running the configured TrueSpeed test 1 The Run Edit window appears To return to the beginning and modify existi
393. ns Includes D6 6 D25 6 2423 1 ANSI 2423 1 Inv ANSI Delay 2431 1 only available for 9 8G test 2431 1 Inv only available for 9 8G test These patterns are formatted using the 8B 10B symbol framing format This allows these patterns to be passed by network elements that require basic synchronization messages as built into 8B 10B framing These patterns are therefore intended to confirm the ability of the Phys ical Coding Sub layer PCS of equipment that implements 8B 10B to properly synchronize to another element under specific conditions Figure 2 through Figure 4 show the details of the specific 8B 10B test patterns for CPRI and OBSAI used to verify the correct operation of the RF Baseband interface The Pseudo Random Bit Sequence PRBS will be inserted as shown in Figure 4 on page 14 1 x CPRI hyperframe 163840b 1 x CPRI hyperframe 163840b K28 5 RD 1 1100000101 K28 5 RD 1 0011111010 025 6 1001100110 D6 6 0110010110 D26 6 0101100110 Figure 2 Test pattern D6 6 D25 6 frame for CPRI Ethernet IP TCP UDP Fibre Chan VoIP and Video Testing Manual 13 Chapter 3 CPRI OBSAI Testing Layer 1 BER CPRI or OBSAI Testing 14 1 x OBSAI RP3 message group 4000b 1 x OBSAI RP3 message grou lt 4000b gt K28 5 RD 1 1100000101 K28 5 RD 1 0011111010 D25 6 1001100110 D6 6 0110010110 D26 6
394. nstrument Using Quick Config to configure test frames Verifying the far end filter settings 00 0 0 eee eee Initiating the transparent loopback 2 00 Starting the frame sequence 2 000 ee ee Observing transparency results 0 000 eee ee Layer testing 2 este ek ee Re ee ee eek is Specifying L3 interface settings 0 000 e eee eee Specifying the data mode and link initialization settings Specifying PPPoE settings 0 0 0 0 e eee ee eee PPPoE messages iii scien ee age he Mente cite Pace Ske Terminating a PPPoE session 0 0c eee ee eee Specifying transmitted IPv4 packet settings 0 Specifying IPv4 filter settings 0 0 00 eee Specifying transmitted IPv6 packet settings Specifying IPv6 filter settings 0 0 0 eee Transmitting and analyzing IP traffic 0 0 0 c ee eae Ping testing enea aa s alba Ne a a OE alt pete ta S E A availa asth ate Specifying IP settings for Ping and Traceroute testing Transmitting ping request packets 0 005 Running Traceroute 2 0 eee Monitoring IP traffic 2 6 eee Capturing packets for analysis 000 cece eee eee What is captur d eeban darad vedas Reheat de PAA Gee ACSUIUATIG che Sapp Reade Re ag tape Atle eae aes Suet anes Specifying filter settings
395. o frames using the T BERD MTS 5800 Just Justification L LAN Local Area Network A privately owned network that offers high speed communications channels to connect information processing equipment in a limited geographical area LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol LBM Loopback Message LBR Loopback Reply LCD Liquid Crystal Display LCK LoCKed defect LED Light emitting diode LLB Line Loopback 343 Glossary 344 LLC Logical link control Three bytes carried in 802 3 frames which specify the memory buffer the data frame is placed in LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol LilION Lithium lon The instrument can be equipped with a rechargeable Lithium lon battery Link Local Address Pv6 address assigned to a device locally in an IP network when there is no other assign ment method available such as a DHCP server These addresses must always go through duplicate address detection DAD even if you manually specify the address See also DAD and Global Addresses LOC Loss of Continuity LOF Loss of Frame A condition indi cating that the receiving equipment has lost frame synchronization MDI X port Medium Dependent Inter face Crossover port RJ 45 interface used by Ethernet NICs and routers that requires use of a cross over cable MDI X ports cross transmit and receive lines An MDI X port on one device connects to an MDI p
396. o one additional second for a reply If a reply is received it will then send another ping packet Therefore this setting may result in very fast ping transmissions or slower transmissions depending on the responsiveness of the network b In Packet Size Bytes enter the size of the ping request packet or packets c In TOS Type specify Type of Service or DSCP and then enter the type of service code see Specifying transmitted IPv4 packet settings on page 77 d InTime To Live specify the number of hops the packet can travel before being dropped NOTE The default TTL for ping packets is 64 If you selected the Traceroute application under Traceroute specify the following settings a In TOS Type specify Type of Service or DSCP and then enter the type of service code see Specifying transmitted IPv4 packet settings on page 77 b In Max Num Hops TTL enter the number of hops or TTL after which the TTL value stops increasing c In Response Time s enter the number of seconds the instrument will wait for a response from a hop 84 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Transmitting ping request packets Running Traceroute Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 3 testing 8 If you need to specify other settings for the test select the appropriate tab otherwise press Results to return to the Main screen The IP settings for ping testing are specified After you specify interface
397. o which the port has been configured Source MAC address MAC address of the device IP subnet address IP subnet address IP subnet address into which the device containing the port has been configured LLDP Chassis identifier Name specified for the chassis containing the port Port identifier Name specified for the port Time to Live Duration of the LLDP advertisement value Source MAC with optional VLAN identifier MAC address of the device IP subnet address and optional specified name for the VLAN into which the port has been configured Management IP address The IP address for the management port of the device MAU Type Medium Attachment Unit Type The physical component type used to transmit receive on the port identified 5 Optional To save the test results select Export Text File and then accept the given filename or click Rename button and specify a file name for the report to be saved in the Reports subdirectory and select OK twice You have completed protocol analysis Layer 1 BER testing 38 BER testing layer 1 When testing 1 Gigabit 10 Gigabit LAN or 10 Gigabit WAN Ethernet service you can generate and receive layer 1 test patterns and monitor and analyze received signals NOTE Changing BERT patterns If you change a BERT pattern during the course of your test be certain to press the Restart soft key to ensure that you regain pattern sync U
398. oad over a layer 2 network and then set a result cate gory to L2 BERT Stats When testing VPLS encapsulated traffic layer 2 BERT statistic results appear in the L2 Customer BERT Stats category me NOTE To display Layer 2 BERT Stat results the TBERD MTS 5800 must receive frames with a BERT pattern matching the pattern specified in the receive settings see Specifying Ethernet filter settings on page 49 Table 43 L2 BERT Stats results Test Result Bit Error Rate Bit Errored Seconds Description l The ratio of pattern bit errors to received pattern bits since initially acquiring frame synchronization NOTE This ratio is determined using only the bits in the payload of the frame The number of seconds during which one or more pattern bit errors occurred since initial frame synchronization Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 307 Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results Table 43 L2 BERT Stats results Continued Test Result Bit Errors Bit Error Free Seconds Bit Error Free Seconds Description A count of the number of received bits in a recognized pattern that do not match the expected value since initially acquiring frame synchronization Number of error free seconds during which error analysis has been performed since initial pattern synchronization Number of error free seconds divided by the number of seconds during which error analysis ha
399. of layer 4 traffic using the Layer 4 Multiple Streams applica tion When running the Multiple Streams application you can configure your instrument to emulate a TCP client or server and then use the TCP Host to initiate a stateful TCP session with another device For details see Specifying layer 4 stream settings on page 158 and Running the TCP Host script on page 165 of Chapter 6 Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 129 Chapter 5 TCP UDP Testing About TCP UDP testing Understanding the ATP Listen IP and Port 130 Many applications such as delay measurements out of sequence counts lost frames counts and packet jitter measurements and multiple stream tests must be performed using traffic that carries an Acterna Test Packet ATP payload Each of these packets has a time stamp and a unique sequence number which are used to calculate a variety of test results The instrument uses the ATP Listen IP Address and ATP Listen Port to deter mine whether received layer 4 traffic carries an ATP payload therefore it is essential that you specify the correct ATP Listen IP Address and ATP Listen Port on the receiving unit when you configure tests that require an ATP payload Figure 30 illustrates the settings required to analyze layer 4 traffic carrying an Acterna payload when testing end to end Transport Network Unit A TCP UDP tab Unit B TCP UDP tab Sp
400. of test time and the minimum and maximum length since starting or restarting the test Svc Disruption us The service disruption time maximum inter frame gap when service switches to a protect line calculated in microseconds SVLAN Frame DEI Displays the DEI of the last received tagged frame 298 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results Table 38 L2 Link Stats results Continued Test Result SVLAN ID SVLAN User Priority Total Util Tx Mbps Cur L1 Tx Mbps Cur L2 VLAN ID VLAN User Priority VPLS Label Depth Max VPLS Label Depth Min VPLS Tunnel Label VPLS Tunnel Priority VPLS Tunnel TTL VPLS VC Label VPLS VC Priority VPLS VC TTL L2 Link Counts results Description Displays the SVLAN ID of the last received tagged frame Displays the SVLAN priority of the last received tagged frame Average The average bandwidth utilized by the received traffic expressed as a percentage of the line rate of available bandwidth calculated over the time period since the last test restart Current The current bandwidth utilized by the received traffic expressed as a percentage of the line rate of available bandwidth This measurement is an average taken over the prior second of test time Minimum The minimum bandwidth utilized by the received traffic since the last test restart expressed as a percentage o
401. of the protocol A port in this state shall not place any PTP messages except for management messages that are a required response to another management message on its communication path DISABLED The port shall not place any messages on its communication path A port in this state shall discard all PTP received messages except for management mes sages LISTENING The port is waiting for the announce Receipt Timeout to expire or to receive an Announce message from a master PRE_MASTER The port behaves in all respects as though it were in the MASTER state except that it shall not place any messages on its communication path except for Pdelay_Req Pdelay_Resp Pdelay_Resp_Follow_Up signaling or management mes sages MASTER The port is behaving as a master port PASSIVE The port shall not place any messages on its communication path except for Pdelay_Req Pdelay_Resp Pdelay_Resp_Follow_Up or signaling messages or man agement messages that are a required response to another management message UNCALIBRATED One or more master ports have been detected in the domain This is a transient state to allow initialization of synchronization servos updating of data sets when a new master port has been selected and other implementation specific activity SLAVE The port is synchronizing to the selected master port In Slave mode reports the destination IP of the master The granted lease duration in seconds The uni
402. og number for electronic manuals on USB is C5USB JDSU has established processes in compliance with the Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC and the Battery Direc tive 2006 66 EC This product and the batteries used to power the product should not be dis posed of as unsorted municipal waste and should be collected separately and disposed of according to your national regulations In the European Union all Ethernet IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual equipment and batteries purchased from JDSU after 2005 08 13 can be returned for disposal at the end of its useful life JDSU will ensure that all waste equipment and batteries returned are reused recycled or disposed of in an environmentally friendly manner and in compliance with all applicable national and international waste legislation It is the responsibility of the equipment owner to return equipment and batteries to JDSU for appropriate disposal If the equipment or battery was imported by a reseller whose name or logo is marked on the equipment or battery then the owner should return the equipment or battery directly to the reseller Instructions for returning waste equipment and batteries to JDSU can be found in the Environmental section of JDSU s web site at www jdsu com If you have questions concerning disposal of your equipment or batteries contact JDSU s WEEE Program Management team at WEEE EMEA jdsu com Ethernet IP and TCP UDP Tes
403. ollowing GPS and Precision Timing on page 338 Use of GPS Hardware in Testing on page 338 GPS Option Hardware and Software on page 338 Outputs Connections on page 339 Ethernet IP TCP UDP Fibre Chan VoIP and Video Testing Manual 337 Appendix A GPS Option for Timing Verification and Analysis GPS and Precision Timing GPS and Precision Timing GPS is increasingly being used as a timing reference because it available almost everywhere providing a common reference between various field loca tions This provides the capability of one way delay measurements with greater accuracy than are possible utilizing existing round trip delay measure ments A GPS receiver provides accurate ToD and 1PPS signal which when aver aged over a long time period provide very precise sginals that can be used to create common timestamps and as reference clock for other precision system measurements Use of GPS Hardware in Testing Currently the GPS receivers are used to assist in making the following measurements when connected to the instrument One Way Delay OWD for more information on how the GPS receiver is used in measuring OWD between components in a network see About the One Way Delay test option and accessory kit on page 104 GPS Option Hardware and Software GPS Option List of Contents 338 Each GPS option shipped should include the items listed in Table 75 Table 75 G
404. on 4 A count of Ethernet IP packets with a length greater than 1500 bytes 1024 1500 Byte Packets A count of Ethernet IP packets with lengths between 1024 and 1500 bytes inclusive 128 255 Byte Packets A count of Ethernet IP packets with lengths between 128 and 255 bytes inclusive 20 45 Byte Packets 256 511 Byte Packets 46 63 Byte Packets 512 1023 Byte Packets A count of Ethernet IP packets with lengths between 20 and 45 bytes inclusive A count of Ethernet IP packets with lengths between 256 and 511 bytes inclusive A count of Ethernet IP packets with lengths between 46 and 63 bytes inclusive A count of Ethernet IP packets with lengths between 512 and 1023 bytes inclusive 64 127 Byte Packets A count of Ethernet IP packets with lengths between 64 and 127 bytes inclusive Broadcast Packets The number of Ethernet broadcast IP packets received since the last test restart Multicast Packets Received Packets Rx Router Advertisements 294 2J 4 2J 4 4 F 4 amp The number of Ethernet multicast IP packets received since the last test restart A count of IP packets received since the last test restart including errored packets 24 lt 4 4 4 amp A count of received router advertisement mes sages when running an IPv6 application This count is not reset when you restart a test to reset the count you must bring down the link rees
405. on 3 Wait for the Main screen to appear and then proceed to Step 2 Config uring a test on page 2 The test application is selected NOTE Only the applications for currently inserted SFPs will appear on the Test menu For example if you do not have a 5800 chassis that supports PDH you will not see selectable test options for PDH Step 2 Configuring a test Before you configure a test be certain to complete the information that you want to include when you generate reports of your test results For details refer to the Getting Started manual Configuring a test involves displaying the setup screens specifying test settings and optionally saving the test setup Key settings are also available on the Main screen on the Quick Config tabs Changing key settings while running a test for example changing the pattern transmitted triggers an auto matic restart of the test To display the setup screens 1 Using the Test menu select a test application see Step 1 Selecting a test application on page 2 2 Select the Setup soft key A setup screen with a series of tabs appears The tabs displayed vary based on the test application you selected 3 To navigate to a different setup screen select the corresponding tab at the top of the screen For example to display the Traffic setup screen select the Traffic tab Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 1 Basic Testing Step 3 Connect
406. on 4 Select the Laser action bar and then do one of the following To increase the frequency by 1 PPM press Freq Offset 1 To decrease the frequency by 1 PPM press Freq Offset 1 You increase or decrease the frequency up to 100 PPM 5 On the transmitting unit observe the values for the following results in the Interface result group Signal category Tx Freq Max Deviation ppm Tx Frequency Deviation ppm 6 On the receiving unit verify that the values for the following results match the transmitted frequency values Rx Freq Max Deviation ppm Rx Frequency Deviation ppm The frequency was adjusted Enabling automatic traffic transmission 32 Prerequisites for traffic transmission Issues to consider You can optionally set up Ethernet LAN IP and TCP UDP test applications to generate and transmit traffic automatically whenever you turn the laser on for optical applications If you enable automatic traffic generated traffic is transmitted after the following occurs You turn the laser ON using the Laser ON action button A signal is acquired Synchronization is acquired A link is established If you are running a layer 3 IP application and ARP is enabled ARP must be successful If ARP is not enabled the destination IP address must be available As always you can turn traffic off at any time using the Stop Traffic action button Consider the
407. on If you want to negotiate capabilities with another switch select On oth erwise select Off Auto Negotiation is only avail able in Monitor mode FDX Capable HDX Capable By default the instrument advertises it is capable of full and half duplex transmission Yes If you need to advertise that it is not capable select No This setting only appears if auto negotiation is On Pause Capable By default the instrument advertises it is capable of transmitting and inter preting received pause frames Both If you need to change the default capabilities select Neither Tx Only or Rx Only This setting only appears if auto negotiation is On Flow Control Select On if you want the instru ment to adjust the transmitted bandwidth when it receives pause frames or Off to ignore pause frames This setting only appears if auto negotia tion is Off Pause Length Quanta Select the field to enter the quanta to be carried by transmitted pause frames To determine the pause duration the receiving device performs the following cal culation 1 GigE optical Quanta x 512 ns 42 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Specifying Ethernet frame settings Things to consider Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 2 testing Interface Settings 10 Gigabit LAN Flow Control Select On if you want the instru 10 Gigabit WAN ment to adjust the transmitted bandwidth when it receives pause frames or Off to ignore pause
408. on configuration on page 211 Test profiles that configure all parameters of TrueSAM may have been previ ously saved into the memory These tests can be loaded and run without any changes or may be used as templates where any number of parameters may be modified after loading NOTE Any TrueSAM AMS profile from T BERD MTS 5800 software prior to v 4 is not compatible with the subsequent versions of the application These profiles must be re configured and saved again to remove the incompatible settings Attempts to configure a unit programmed with T BERD MTS 5800 software older than v 4 with profiles saved on a current unit transferred on USB stick over network etc will also be unsuccessful Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 223 Chapter 10 Automated Testing TrueSAM 224 Running TrueSAM Loading profile from memory The Profile selection window appears A am P1 1GigE Optical True t Load a saved profile Mtests acterna user disk bert tests E E File type AMS Profiles Eth1G ams j k W Delete all Delete Load Profle mm Figure 65 Saved Profiles window The filenames of the saved profiles will be listed in the center of the window Do the following 1 The default display will be of saved profiles for the currently selected inter face To select a configuration saved from another interface select from the drop down list accessible by clicking on th
409. on page 148 for a list of applications Select the Setup soft key and then select the Interface tab to specify the settings required to initialize the link see Specifying interface settings on page 41 Configure the test For details refer to Enabling multiple streams on page 152 Enabling multiple streams on page 152 Specifying the load type for all streams on page 152 Specifying the load unit on a stream with burst on page 153 Specifying layer 2 stream settings on page 156 Specifying layer 3 stream settings on page 157 Specifying layer 4 stream settings on page 158 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 159 Chapter 6 Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing Triple Play testing 4 Select Results to return to the Main screen 5 Select Start Traffic to transmit the streams over the circuit Multiple streams are transmitted For an overview of the test results presented when transmitting multiple streams see Understanding multiple streams test results on page 149 Triple Play testing Triple Play test applications Understanding the LED panel 160 If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so you can use it to transmit and analyze traffic emulating Triple Play services When running Triple Play applications you can configure each type of stream voice video or data with unique layer 2 or layer 3
410. ons or turning OFF the instrument You will lose the entire contents of the capture buffer if you launch a new application on the port that you are capturing packets on or if you turn your instrument OFF To ensure that the packets are stored save the capture buffer before changing applications or turning the instrument OFF 6 Select Save Capture Buffer and then specify the file name and other parameters as needed For more information see Saving or exporting captured packets on page 94 192 Ethernet IP TCP UDP Fibre Chan VoIP and Video Testing Manual Chapter 8 VoIP Testing Capturing packets for analysis Analyzing Audio Packets Audio packets captured with the VoIP application can be analyzed using the PVA 1000 VoIP Analyzer software from JDSU PVA 1000 software provides automated capture and detailed analysis of VoIP calls It provides details of signaling and quality performance issues When capturing packets in the VoIP application it is recommended that you do not save the captured packets until the call is ended the phone is on hook Ethernet IP TCP UDP Fibre Chan VoIP and Video Testing Manual 193 Chapter 8 VoIP Testing Capturing packets for analysis 194 Ethernet IP TCP UDP Fibre Chan VoIP and Video Testing Manual Fibre Channel Testing This chapter provides information on testing Fibre Channel services Topics discussed in this chapter include the following About Fibre Chann
411. oop Finally the status of the remote loop up appears 4 Ifthe loopup is successful indicated with a green arrows to and from the remote unit or green loop arrow at remote the instrument moves on to transmit traffic over the link at 100 of the line rate to verify the link s ability to support a full load of traffic If the test is successful the button under Measured Throughput displays the expected throughput Up and Down if appropriate Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 245 Chapter 10 Automated Testing Automated RFC 2544 246 Green graphics on the screen indicate that an action was successful yellow indicates an action is currently taking place for example connecting the local port to the link and red indicates that an action failed for example the remote loop failed Run J QuickCheck Remote Press Start to run at line rate Measured Throughput WILL be used for RFC 2544 tests Load Test packet size 256 bytes Not what you wanted Remote Loop Measured Throughput Run Tests Figure 70 J Quick Check Complete When J QuickCheck has reported acceptable results select Next the green arrow Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 10 Automated Testing Automated RFC 2544 Initiating Enhanced RFC 2544 or FC test The RFC 2544 testing status screen keeps the user informed of the progress and the success or failure of the tests while they are run
412. optical dBm interfaces using average power consumption Optical Rx Overload Displays current status of Optical Rx Overload condition On Off Rx Frequency Hz Frequency of the clock recovered from the received sig nal expressed in Hz Rx Freq Deviation Current received frequency deviation Displayed in PPM ppm Rx Freq Max Devia Maximum received frequency deviation tion ppm Signal Losses Number of times signal was lost during current test Signal Loss Sec Number of seconds during which a signal was not pres onds ent Sync Loss Seconds Number of seconds during which a synchronization was not present Tx Clock Source Shows the source of the transmit timing standard Tx Frequency Hz Current transmitter clock frequency expressed in Hz Tx Freq Deviation Current transmitted frequency deviation Displayed in ppm PPM Tx Max Freq Devia Maximum transmitted frequency deviation tion ppm 286 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual CPRI OBSAI Error Stats Chapter 11 Test Results CPRI OBSAI test results Table 28 shows the CPRI OBSAI Error Stats test results Table 28 CPRI OBSAI Error Stats results Word Sync Loss Events Word Sync Loss Seconds Code Violations Code Violations Rate Code Violations Seconds Rx K30 7 Words Frame Sync Loss Events Frame Sync Loss Seconds CPRI OBSAI Counts results A count of the number of word sync loss events that have occurred since the la
413. or MPLS Layer Specifies the layer that OAM is operating on PW LSP or Section PW is only available if the Control Word field is set to ON on the Ethernet setup tab Label Specifies the OAM encoding type in label 13 GAL or label 14 OAL ACH Channel Specifies the channel type field in the associated channel Type header ACH Only appears if the Label Type is label 13 Traffic Class Specifies the traffic class field in the generic associated channel label GAL Only appears if the Label Type is label 13 and if using the Section or LSP layer TTL Specifies the time to live TTL field If the Label Type is label 13 this only appears if using Section or LSP layer For label 14 it is always available Per the y 17tom specification this setting is applicable when LBM LBR is enabled If LBM LBR is not enabled this field is fixed to 1 even if set to something else b In the options list on the left side of the tab select CCM and then specify the settings Setting Description Continuity Checking Specifies whether to transmit receive CCM messages LOC threshold Specifies the number of messages required to reach the LOC threshold Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Setting CCM Rate MEG End Point ID Maintenance Domain Level Specify Domain ID Maintenance Association ID Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 2 testing Description Specifies the rate at which CCM frames are transmi
414. ording to your national regula m ONS Table 4 Safety definitions WARNING AN Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury CAUTION AN Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury Safety and compliance information Safety and compliance information for the instrument are provided in printed form and ship with your instrument xviii Ethernet IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual About this Manual Technical assistance Technical assistance Table 5 lists contact information for technical assistance For the latest TAC information go to www jdsu com or contact your local sales office for assis tance Contact information for regional sales headquarters is listed on the back cover of this manual Table 5 Technical assistance centers Region Americas Phone Number 1 866 ACTERNA option 2 301 353 1550 1 866 228 3762 option 2 tac jdsu com Europe Africa and Mid East 49 0 7121 86 1345 hotline europe jdsu com JDSU Germany Asia and the Pacific 852 2892 0990 Hong Kong 86 10 6655 5988 Beijing China During off hours you can request assistance by doing one of the following leave a voice mail message at the Technical Assistance number e mail the North American Technical Assistance Center tac jdsu com or submit your question using our onlin
415. ort on another device MDI X inter faces transmit using pins 3 and 6 and receive using pins 1 and 2 The E1 Tester supports cable diagnostics of MDI X inter faces MEG Maintenance Entity Group MFAS Multi Frame Alignment Signal MPLS Multiple Protocol Label Switching A mechanism using labels rather than routing tables to transmit layer 3 IP traffic over a layer 2 Ethernet network MPTS Multiple program transport stream MSC Mobility Switching Center Msg Message MSPP Multi service provisioning plat form Typically next generation SONET multiplexors capable of aggregating multiple access technologies such as Ethernet TDM and ATM onto a SONET ring MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Multipat Multiple patterns An auto mated sequence of 5 BERT patterns for three minutes each The Multipat sequence consists of ALL ONES 1 7 2 in 8 3 in 24 and QRSS N NDF New data flag NE Near end Used by ITU perfor mance measurements to indicate which end of the network is being tested NetFlow NetFlow is a network protocol developed by Cisco Systems to run on Cisco OS enabled equipment for collecting IP traffic information NID Network Interface Device Device located on the customer premises used by carriers to properly demark and manage their network NIU Network Interface Unit Electronic device at the point of interconnection between the service p
416. oute the traffic the Priority and the TTL value NOTE MPLS settings are only available when configuring layer 3 test applications Optional lf you want to configure a second MPLS label for your traffic in MPLS Label select 2 and then repeat step 1 for the second label NOTE When a unit is in LLB mode it always uses the labels specified for the transmitted traffic therefore If your near end instrument is in LLB mode and is configured to transmit traffic with a second MPLS label but the instrument s link partner is configured to transmit traffic with a single label the out of sequence and lost frames counts reported by the instrument s link partner may increment if the incoming frame rate is too high If your near end instrument is in LLB mode and is configured to transmit traffic with a single MPLS label but the instrument s link partner is configured to transmit traffic with more than one label the near end instrument s receive bandwidth utilization will exceed its transmit bandwidth utilization Based on your settings the unit automatically calculates and displays the frame size in the Calc Frame Size field Return to step 8 on page 46 of Specifying Ethernet frame settings for details on specifying the remaining settings MPLS settings are specified To configure LBM Traffic 1 After selecting LBM Traffic as the Test Mode see step 4 in Specifying the settings on page 44 on the frame gra
417. oves the MPLS header and then forwards the layer 3 IP traffic to the far end unit which is emulating a CE router for layer 3 analysis Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Configuring IPv4 and IPv6 Table 11 Feature Source IP Configuration Source IP Address Automatic MAC Address Resolution tests IPv4 In IPOE mode uses DHCP or manual configuration Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing About Ethernet and IP testing PE router to PE router emulation For this application you configure a unit on the near end to emulate an ingress PE router transmitting MPLS encapsu lated traffic to a second unit on the far end The far end unit is configured to emulate an egress PE router lf the network uses routers which do not use ARP you may also need to specify the MAC address of the PE router that your near end unit is connected to Transmitted traffic is then routed through the MPLS network using the MPLS header settings you specified The far end unit emulating the egress PE router removes the MPLS header and analyzes the layer 3 IP traffic Core router testing For this application you configure a unit on the near end to emulate an ingress PE router which then transmits MPLS encapsulated traffic to a core router on the MPLS network Using the label you specified for the traffic originated by the near end unit the core router forwards the traffic to a second far end unit which is configured to emulate
418. ow Up The rate of received follow up frames Rx Frame Rates Delay Response The rate of received delay response frames Rx Frame Rates Signaling The rate of received signaling frames Rx Frame Rates Management The rate of received management frames Tx Frame Rates Delay Request The rate of transmitted delay request messages Tx Frame Rates Signaling The rate of transmitted signaling frames Tx Frame Rates Management The rate of transmitted management frames 324 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual PTP Link Stats results Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results Table 66 describes the PTP Link Stats results The results that appear vary depending on whether you are using Master or Slave mode Table 66 PTP Link Stats results Test Result Port State Source IP Address Unicast Lease Duration Grandmaster ID Grandmaster Clock Class Grandmaster Clock Accuracy Grandmaster Time Source Grandmaster Priority 1 Grandmaster Priority 2 Mean Path Delay Average Mean Path Delay Current Mean Path Delay Minimum Mean Path Delay Maximum Description Reports the state of the PTP port INITIALIZING the port initializes its data sets hardware and communication facilities If one port of a boundary clock is in the INITIALIZING state then all ports shall be in the INITIALIZING state FAULTY The fault state
419. p items The setup items available vary depending on the call control Auto Phone Number 5554321 G711Ulaw64K 40 Answer Dalby Dest Phone Number Primary Codec Jitter Buffer Summary Summary Status Figure 47 VoIP call bar SIP call control VoIP results are available that allow you to verify the quality of the physical layer the link the transport quality of audio streams and the quality of the audio itself The layered view appears on the Main screen the first time you launch a VoIP application Color coded quality buttons appear which immediately indicate the current and historical status of the physical layer and link the transport of the audio streams using IP UDP and RTP and the audio streams themselves Figure 48 illustrates the view when all results are OK and there is no history of errors at any layer Content Figure 48 Layered View All Results OK Ethernet Quality Physical Link Quality Selecting this button will display aggregate results such as the bandwidth utilization interface layer 1 and Ethernet layer 2 errors for the link Transaction Log Selecting this button will display a running list of all trans actions with the far end including communication with Call Manager Gate keeper Proxy and call status Transport Quality Selecting this button will display test results for each moni tored IP UDP or RTP voice stream Content Quality Selecting this bu
420. page 244 Running Enhanced RFC 2544 After configuration has been completed the Enhanced RFC 2544 or FC tests and FC tests can be run The first test to be run is the J QuickCheck test The J QuickCheck application uses the configured parameters for the connection to either run a bi directional test or establish a loopback to verify that the link can support 100 traffic utili zation allowing the other tests to be run effectively The balance of the tests will run without any user intervention necessary after initiation Initiating J QuickCheck test 1 The screen in Figure 69 appears Notes appear on the left side of the screen indicating the current settings to be used for the test If different settings are desired for throughput and Frame parameters click the Not what you wanted link a Select the Test using configured RFC 2544 Max Bandwidth or Use the Measured Throughput measurement as the RFC2544 MAx Bandwidth check boxes and or enter a new frame size value via the pop up keypad b Select Back to return to previous screen 2 To initiate the J QuickCheck test press the Start button 3 Observe the network diagram The following occurs 244 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 10 Automated Testing Automated RFC 2544 Run J GQuickCheck Not Running Local S Remote Press Start to run at line rate Measured Throughput will NOT be used for RFC 2544 tests Load Test packet s
421. payload to measure round trip delay If a unit is in loopback mode or if the far end unit is not looped back invalid results appear because the unit is not originating the traffic Before measuring delay on 10 Gigabit Ethernet circuits you can indicate whether or not you want to make the measurement using a high or low degree of precision If your delay results say Out of Range change your setting to low precision and then restart the measurement Current The current rate of filtered frames taken over the prior second of test time Average The average rate is calculated over the time period that elapsed since the last test restart Minimum The minimum rate is taken over a one second period Peak The maximum rate is taken over a one second period since frame detection All rates are expressed in frames per second The average maximum and minimum size of filtered frames since frame detection Displays the following for the last filtered backbone frame Value Displays the value carried in the I Tag field Service ID Priority DEI Use Customer Address in a hexadecimal format Service ID Displays the service ID carried in the last frame Priority Displays the priority carried in the last frame DEI Displays the drop eligible bit carried in the last frame Use Customer Address Displays the use customer address bit carried in the last frame Displays label 1 of the last f
422. phic select LBM Specify the Maintenance Domain Level to which the transmitting unit belongs If desired also select the Enable Sender TLV checkbox to include the unit identifier defined on the Network Visibility tab of the Inter face setup page in the header data LBM settings are specified Before transmitting traffic you can specify settings that indicate the expected received payload and determine which frames or packets will pass through the filter and be counted in the test result categories for filtered traffic For example you can set up the filter to observe results for all traffic sent to a specific desti nation address The filter settings may also impact other results NOTE During layer 2 BER testing incoming frames must pass the filter to be ana lyzed for a BERT pattern Local loopback is also only performed on frames that pass the filter Use the filter to analyze BERT frames when non test frames are present such as spanning tree frames Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 49 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 2 testing If you are transmitting Q in Q VPLS or MPLS encapsulated traffic refer to Filtering traffic using Q in Q criteria on page 52 Filtering traffic using VPLS criteria on page 54 Filtering traffic using MPLS criteria on page 55 To specify Ethernet filter settings 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the test app
423. ports ELP exchange through distance extension equipment when turning up a circuit allowing you to login to another module at the far end Before logging into another module you can specify the number of buffer credits to verify that flow control is functioning properly Frame verification You can verify that the size and format of Fibre Channel frames conform to ANSI X3T11 requirements ensuring that network elements can support reliable communications BER testing You can verify circuit performance by sending BERT patterns over switched layer 2 and unswitched layer 1 networks Explicit Fabric N Port login fabric topology You can use your instrument to login to an N_Port and then verify that it can establish an operating environment with a fabric and communicate with other destination N Ports by indicating that the service you are testing uses a fabric topology When testing on a fabric topology you specify source and destination N Port and Node names for the login process Explicit Fabric N Port login point to point topology yYou can use your instrument to login to an N_Port and then verify that it can communicate with other destination N Ports by indicating that the network you are testing uses a point to point topology When testing on a point to point topology you specify a source N Port and Node name and a destination and source ID for the login process Understanding the graphical When you configure yo
424. press the Pause Frame Insert button me NOTE When inserting code errors at a rate of 1E 3 on 10 GigE circuits the large volume of errors will bring down the Ethernet link Per IEEE 802 3ae a maximum of 16 code violations invalid synchroniza tion headers are to be counted per 125 us Therefore inserting a burst of code errors with a quantity greater than 16 will typically be counted as 16 code violations on the receiver Error or pause frame insertion starts If you are inserting errors at a particular rate the associated button turns yellow To stop insertion press the corre sponding button again Error insertion stops and the associated button turns gray Inserting alarms or defects You can insert multiple types of alarms or defects simultaneously into a single or multiple streams To insert alarms or defects 1 Using the Test Menu select the terminate test application for the signal rate and payload you are testing refer to Table 7 on page 25 for a list of applications 2 Connect a cable from the appropriate TX connector to the network s RECEIVE access connector Select the Laser button 4 Select an alarm or defect type For alarms that apply to multi lane applications specify the number of the lane in which the alarm is to be inserted or select All 6 Press the Alarm Insert or Defect Insert button The module inserts an alarm or defect and the button turns yellow To stop insertion Multiple a
425. psulation is set to MPLS 3 Select the Filters tab In the panel on the left side of the tab select Ethernet then specify the following a Above the graphic of the frame set the MPLS Type Filter to Enable b In EtherType select MPLS Unicast or MPLS Multicast Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 55 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 2 testing c Onthe graphic of the frame select MPLS Label 1 and then specify the following Setting Value MPLS1 Label If you want to filter received traffic based on the label set the filter to Yes otherwise select Don t Care MPLS1 Label If you indicated that you want to filter traffic for a specific label enter the label MPLS1 Priority If you want to filter received traffic based on the priority set the filter to Yes otherwise select Don t Care MPLS1 Priority If you indicated that you want to filter traffic for a specific priority select the priority number 4 Ifyou want to specify additional criteria for MPLS2 on the graphic of the frame select MPLS Label 2 then repeat step 3 5 Return to Specifying Ethernet filter settings to verify or specify additional filter settings MPLS filter criteria is specified Filtering traffic using byte pattern If you want to do so you can specify criteria to filter based on the byte pattern criteria To filter traffic using byte pattern criteria 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to sel
426. que identifier for the grandmaster clock This is a 64 bit unique identifier derived from the master s 48 bit MAC address but it is not the MAC address itself The formula for computing the expanded ID is lt First three bytes of MAC gt FF FE lt last three bytes of MAC gt Displays the traceability of the time or frequency distributed by the grandmaster clock Displays the characterization of the grandmaster clock for the purpose of the best grand master clock algorithm Indicates the source of the time used by the grandmaster clock Displays the priority 1 value used in the execution of the best master clock algorithm Lower values take precedence Displays the priority 2 value used in the execution of the best master clock algorithm Lower values take precedence Mean Path Delay mean propagation time between a master and slave as computed by the slave and is calculated by Tms Tsm 2 It is calculated based on the current Delay Request propagation time Tsm and Sync propagation time Tms pair MPD Average average value of all MPDs since beginning of test since last test restart MPD 1 MPD 2 MPD 3 MPD N N MPD Current current 1 second value of MPD in this test MPD i where is i is the current second MPD Minimum smallest value of MPD in this test MPD Maximum largest value of MPD in this test Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 325 Chapter 11 Test Results Ethe
427. quency deviation Displayed in PPM Tx Freq Max Deviation ppm Maximum transmitted frequency deviation Wavelength Displays the current wavelength of the SFP in use L2 Link Stats results Table 38 describes the L2 Link Stats and L2 Customer Link Stats results such as the average frame rate peak frame rate and the maximum minimum and average round trip delay measurements Only results that are applicable to your test appear in the category For example the MPLS results only appear when your unit is configured to test using layer 3 MPLS encapsulated traffic If your unit is configured for a layer 2 test MPLS results will not appear 296 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results When testing VPLS or MPLS TP encapsulated traffic link statistic results appear in the L2 Customer Link Stats and the L2 SP Link Stats categories When testing MiM encapsulated traffic link statistic results appear in the L2 Customer Link Stats and the L2 Backbone Link Stats categories Table 38 L2 Link Stats results Test Result B Tag Current Util Delay us Frame Rate Frame Size Description Displays the following for the last received backbone frame Value Displays the value carried in the B Tag field VLAN ID Priority Drop Eligible in a hexadecimal format VLAN ID Displays the ID for the backbone VLAN used as the path to the desti
428. r 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 2 testing Monitoring layer 1 BER Use the layer 1 BERT monitor application to analyze the received signal and then pass the signal bit for bit through the unit s transmitter if you select Connect Rx to Tx muy NOTE If you are monitoring traffic on an optical circuit be certain to turn the laser on using the Laser button on the Main screen To monitor layer 1 BERT 1 N Oo oO FF OW Using the Test Menu select the Layer 1 BERT monitor through test appli cation for the interface you are testing To specify the BER pattern for the traffic you are monitoring select the Setup soft key select the Pattern tab and then select the Rx Pattern Press Results to return to the Main screen Connect the instrument to the circuit If you are testing an optical interface select the Laser button Verify that the green Signal LED is illuminated Select Connect Rx to Tx to pass the received pattern through to the transmitter At a minimum observe the test results in the following categories Summary Error Stats Monitoring layer 1 BERT is complete Layer 2 testing Using the instrument you can transmit monitor and analyze layer 2 Ethernet traffic Step by step instructions are provided in this section for the following Specifying interface settings on page 41 Specifying Ethernet frame settings on page 43 Specifying Ethernet filter settings on page 49 Spec
429. r Start Ramp for ramped loads to transmit traffic over the circuit 10 Verify that the green Signal Present Sync Acquired Link Active and Frame Detect LEDs are illuminated 11 At a minimum observe the summary layer 2 link statistics and counts layer 2 filter statistics and counts error statistics and layer 2 BERT statis tics You have analyzed layer 2 traffic Loop back testing Loop back testing allows you to transmit traffic from one JDSU test set and then loop the traffic back through a second unit on the far end of a circuit For details refer to Chapter 7 Loop back Testing Transmitting and analyzing patterns Using the instrument you can stress the jitter and noise characteristics of 1 Gigabit 2 Gigabit and 4 Gigabit Fibre Channel components and systems by transmitting continuous random test patterns CRPAT continuous jitter test patterns CUPAT and the compliant supply noise pattern CSPAT These patterns are always transmitted automatically when you turn the laser on To transmit a pattern 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the layer 2 pattern test application for the interface you are testing refer to Table 22 on page 197 for a list of applications 2 Select the Setup soft key The Setup tab appears 3 Selecta pattern To Select Emulate a worst case scenario for deterministic CRPAT jitter by transmitting frames with a broad spec tral content Str
430. r TCP The current bandwidth utilized by the received TCP traffic expressed in megabits per second This measurement is an average taken over the prior second of test time Rx Mbps Cur UDP Rx Source Port Tx Mbps Cur L4 Detailed L4 Stats The current bandwidth utilized by the received UDP traffic expressed in megabits per second This measurement is an average taken over the prior second of test time Displays the Source Port number for the last layer 4 packet received The current bandwidth utilized by the transmitted TCP UDP traffic expressed in megabits per second This measurement is an average taken over the prior second of test time When running the TCP Wirespeed application detailed statistics are provided for each established connection including bandwidth measurements delay measurements window statistics and frame counts Table 70 describes the Detailed L4 Stats results Table 68 Detailed L4 Stats results Test Result Description Estab Indicates whether or not a connection was established Local Port Displays the local port number for the connection Negotiated MSS The value of the negotiated Max Segment Size Remote Port Displays the remote port number for the connection Rx Mbps Cur The current bandwidth utilized by the received traffic expressed in megabits per sec ond This measurement is an average taken over the prior second of test time Rx Mbps Avg The average bandwidth
431. r the traffic for 802 3 frames with the currently specified length If you want to analyze both DIX and 802 3 VLAN or Q in Q encapsulated traffic select Don t Care You must specify a frame type if you are filtering unencapsulated traffic c If you want the unit to filter for traffic carrying a particular destination address on the graphic of the frame select DA and then specify the following Seiting Destination Type Destination MAC Value If you want to analyze traffic with a specific type of destination address select one of the following Unicast Multicast Broadcast Otherwise select Don t Care to analyze traffic with any type of destination address If you are filtering traffic for a specific Unicast or Multicast destination address specify the address carried in the traffic that you want to analyze d If you want to filter traffic for a particular source address on the graphic of the frame select SA and then specify the following Setting Source Type Value If you want to analyze traffic with a Unicast source address select Unicast otherwise select Don t Care to analyze traffic with any type of destination address Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 51 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 2 testing Filtering traffic using Q in Q criteria 52 Setting Default MAC Value If you are filtering traffic for a specific Unicast source address sp
432. raffic 120 transmitting bursty 59 transmitting constant 58 transmitting ramped 61 Transparency testing about loop backs 69 configuring near end 70 initiating the loopback 72 observing results 73 results 306 starting the frame sequence 73 using Quick Config 71 verifying layer 2 69 Triggers 91 Triple Play testing about test results 161 applications 160 characterizing services 163 features and capabilities 146 graphical results changing properties 162 graphical results viewing 161 LEDs 160 looping back streams 165 specifying layer 2 and layer 3 settings 164 Streams Pipe 161 transmitting streams 164 Troubleshooting general 334 tests 334 Turning ON or OFF laser 3 U UDP traffic transmitting 136 Unnumbered frames decode message descriptions 338 V Viewing cable measurements 31 histograms 5 test results 4 VLAN testing automated 263 encapsulation settings 44 47 74 184 incrementing IDs for multiple streams 156 VolP about 178 button colors explained 181 button colors illustrated 181 calls placing 190 calls receiving 190 191 filters 189 navigating the display 182 settings specifying 185 188 understanding test results 180 VPLS testing about results 289 encapsulation settings 44 48 loop back settings 169 overview 27 specifying labels 43 184 W Well known ports 132 Ethernet IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Network and Service Enablement Regional Sales North A
433. raffic 122 125 results link counts 324 results link stats 325 Q Q in Q testing encapsulation settings 44 48 74 184 specifying SVLAN and CVLAN 43 184 R Ramped loads transmitting 61 RDI analysis turning ON 114 Receiving calls 190 191 Results See Test results RFC 2544 test optimizing test time 236 running classic 237 running J QuickCheck 244 Running cable diagnostics 30 classic RFC 2544 tests 237 multiple tests 5 S Safety information xviii SCCP 185 Service disruption time measuring Fibre Channel 206 Service disruption time measuring 107 Service layer testing OAM 108 Setting result group and category 4 Signal results Ethernet 296 SIP defined 185 test settings 185 Specifying test parameters 2 SSM See Sync Status Messages Stacked VLAN configuring 48 filtering traffic 53 results 301 304 Starting and stopping tests 3 Streams Pipe Multiple Streams 148 Triple Play streams 161 Summary results 284 Support xix Sync Status Messages 321 SyncE See Synchronous Ethernet Sync Status Messages 321 Ethernet IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Index Synchronous Ethernet testing 122 System Recovery testing about 234 T TCP UDP test results 328 L4 Filter Counts 329 L4 Filter Stats 329 L4 Link Stats 327 TCP UDP testing about 128 applications 129 ATP listen port 130 capturing packets 87 191 classic RFC2544 test 237 configuring layer 4 traffic 131 configuring the traffic load 1
434. rames B BER Bit Error Rate BERT Bit error rate test A known pattern of bits is transmitted and errors received are counted to figure the BER The Bit Error Rate test is used to measure transmission quality Cc CCM Continuity Check Message CDP Cisco Discovery Protocol CE Customer Edge CFM Connectivity Fault Management Comprises capabilities for detecting veri fying and isolating connectivity failures in VLANs Concat Concatenated Curr Current Ethernet IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 341 Glossary 342 D DA Destination address DAD IPv6 duplicate address detec tion When going through the Multicast Listener Discovery process to obtain or verify a link local address a device issues a neighbor solicitation using the tentative address to determine if the address is already used This process is referred to as DAD DB 9 Standard 9 pin RS 232 serial port or connector DB 25 25 pin RS 232 serial port or connector Dec Decrement DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol A communications protocol that assigns IP addresses dynamically as needed Also supports static IP address assignment DIX Digital Intel and Xerox Ethernet Type II frame format DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point A method for specifying IP packets to be queued while waiting to be forwarded within a router E EDD Ethernet demarcatio
435. rames 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the test appli cation for the interface you are testing Refer to Table 7 on page 25 through Table 8 on page 25 for a list of layer 2 and layer 3 applications Table 15 on page 129 lists layer 4 applications 2 On the Main screen select the Capture tool bar then enable the capture feature 3 Select the Setup soft key and then select the Filters tab By default a summary of all currently configured filter settings appear Ethernet IP and TCP UDP 4 Ifyou would like to clear the filters to specify new settings for the capture process select Clear All Filters 5 If you launched a layer 2 application the panel on the left of the tab displays the Summary and Ethernet selections If you launched a layer 3 or layer 4 application the panel displays the Summary Basic Ethernet IP and if applicable TCP UDP selections Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 89 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Capturing packets for analysis 90 Capturing packets Manually capturing packets Do one of the following Ifyou launched a layer 2 application select Ethernet and then specify the settings that capture the received traffic that you want to analyze see Specifying Ethernet filter settings on page 49 Ifyou launched a layer 3 or layer 4 application and you want to specify basic filter information select Basic and then specify th
436. ransmit packets with a time stamp and sequence number select Acterna 78 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Specifying IPv4 filter settings 9 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 3 testing Indicate whether you want the payload to carry a BERT pattern or a Fill Byte pattern then specify the pattern If you are measuring round trip delay on a 10 Gigabit circuit in RTD Setup indicate whether you want to measure delay with a high degree of precision or a low degree of precision In most instances you should select High Precision Low Delay NOTE You must select an Acterna payload to measure round trip delay and count lost packets If you want to populate the payload by repeating a specific pattern of bytes select Fill Byte type the byte value using a 1 byte hexadecimal format and then specify the Protocol If you need to specify other settings for the test select the appropriate tab otherwise press Results to return to the Main screen The transmitted IPv4 packet settings are specified Before transmitting layer 3 IPv4 traffic you can optionally specify settings that indicate the expected received payload and determine which packets will pass through the receive filter and be counted in the test result categories for filtered IP traffic The settings may also impact other results To specify received IPv4 packet settings 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the
437. ransmit stacked VLAN frames select Stacked VLAN and then refer to Configuring stacked VLAN traffic on page 48 VPLS If you are testing on a VPLS network and you want to transmit traffic with a VPLS header select VPLS and then refer to Configuring VPLS traffic on page 48 When you select VPLS encapsulation the Frame Type label changes to SP Frame Type and the L2 Transparency setting disappears NOTE If you selected a Terminate application and you want to filter received traffic using VPLS criteria you must select VPLS encapsulation for transmitted traffic Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 4 muy NOTE If the LBM LBR testing mode is required in RFC 2544 testing it must be configured prior to initializing the RFC 2544 application muy NOTE LBM LBR testing mode is not valid for any automatic scripting application other than RFC 2544 5 6 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 2 testing In Test Mode specify the category of testing being done Traffic Standard mode that transmits unicast frames that satisfy the receiving unit s filter criteria J Proof For verifying layer 2 transparency requiring loop back of all test frames including control frames and frames carrying a broadcast or multicast address not applicable in multiple streams LBM Traffic For Loopback Message Loopback Reply LBM LBR frame analysis where the far end unit any equipm
438. re 37 Graph Legend Multiple Streams application The Graph properties dialog box appears see Figure 38 on page 151 2 Under Graph properties select one of the following Stream Frame Size CVLAN ID SVLAN ID MPLS1 ID MPLS2 ID Graph properties Stream a v Li onyomwmpsp won 9 10 TCP Host L4 Close v Y Y Y yY v Y Y Y v Figure 38 Graph properties dialog box 3 Clear the boxes next to the types of streams the frame sizes or the SVLAN CVLAN MPLS IDs for streams that you do not want to observe 4 Select Close to return to the Main screen The graph displays data for streams with the selected properties Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 151 Chapter 6 Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing Multiple Streams testing Enabling multiple streams If you selected a Multiple Streams application you enable streams on the Load Distribution dialog box using the following procedure To enable multiple streams 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the Multiple Streams test application for the interface you are testing refer to Table 18 on page 160 for a list of applications 2 Select the Streams Pipe soft key 3 Select Configure Streams The Load Distribution screen appears Load Distribution Stream Type Load v Stream 1 Constant 33 333 v Stream 2 Constant 33 333 v Stream 3 Constant 33 333 Stream 4 Constant 0 Stream 5 Constant D St
439. re that the instrument is authenticated for TAM testing Password Enter the password required to log on to the NE Enable Password Enter the password required to access privileged functions after logging on to the NE 4 Select the Test Port tab then specify the following settings Setting NE Type Value Method Any Indicate whether you intend to monitor the NE or emulate a router on the network end of an ETS Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 10 Automated Testing Testing using TAM automation Setting NE Type Value Test Port Any Enter the port identifier for the port that your instrument is connected to for testing this is not the same port specified as the NE s management port Ifthe NE Type is 167x the port ID must be in a p p format where the last p is optional Ifthe NE Type is 7x50 the port ID must be in a format Test VLAN Any Enter the VLAN ID carried in the traffic transmitted or monitored on the instru ment s test port when the instrument is emulating a router Ingress Flow Alcatel 1675 Enter the name of the inbound flow Alcatel 1678 Egress Flow Alcatel 1675 Enter the name of the outbound flow Alcatel 1678 Service ID Alcatel 7750 Enter the ID for the epipe Alcatel 7450 Customer Alcatel 7750 Enter the port identifier for the customer Port Alcatel 7450 port Customer Alcatel 7750 Enter the VLAN ID for the customer port VLAN Alcatel 7
440. ream 6 Constant 0 Stream 7 Constant 10 Stream 8 a Stream 9 Constant 10 Stream 10 Constant D Total 99 999 Max Util Threshold 100 Sa M a f oubuee 0K f ceren 4 Select the streams you want to transmit Streams are enabled If you have already specified the load type for each stream see Specifying the load type for all streams on page 152 you can specify the load mes NOTE The Auto Distribute button is disabled if one or more traffic streams is con figured to transmit a ramped load of traffic Specifying the load type for If you selected a Multiple Streams application you can transmit a constant load all streams ora ramped load of traffic in a stream muy NOTE A single stream may be defined as having a a burst load See Specifying the load unit on a stream with burst on page 153 To specify the load type for each stream 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the Multiple Streams test application for the interface you are testing refer to Table 16 on page 148 for a list of applications 152 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Specifying the load unit on a stream with burst Chapter 6 Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing Multiple Streams testing Select the Setup soft key By default the module transmits a constant load of traffic for each enabled stream If this is acceptable proceed to step 4 If you want to transmit a ramped load of traffic
441. refer to the Getting Started Manual that shipped with your instrument or upgrade 2 Specify the settings required to initialize the link see Specifying interface settings on page 41 3 Press Setup and then do the following to configure your test a Specify the layer 2 Ethernet settings see Layer 2 testing on page 40 b Specify the layer 3 IP settings see Layer 3 testing on page 73 c If you are running a Layer 4 Traffic application specify the layer 4 TCP settings see Specifying layer 4 settings on page 131 4 Launch the TCP Throughput test see Launching a single automated test on page 225 and then wait for the Estimated TCP Throughput dialog box to appear Depending on the number of processes you have running this may take several seconds 5 Estimated throughput for each of the window sizes appear in a tabular format The number of parallel sessions needed to obtain maximum throughput for each window size is provided at the bottom of the dialog box The TCP Throughput test is complete TrueSpeed Test 268 TrueSpeed test steps If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so you can use it to run the TrueSpeed Test This test uses the Wirespeed application to test the upstream and downstream links for transmission parameters There are two distinct functions for which the TrueSpeed test may be used circuit troubleshooting and circuit turnup Distinctly different configur
442. rial RJ45 DB9 B Cable BNC SMA_M 50 ohm E optional 6 ft Cable serial DB9 USB Figure 97 Connection Diagram for MSAMv1 w MTS6000A Ethernet IP TCP UDP Fibre Chan VolP and Video Testing Manual 339 Appendix A GPS Option for Timing Verification and Analysis Outputs Connections 340 Ethernet IP TCP UDP Fibre Chan VoIP and Video Testing Manual Glossary Symbols Numerics 10G Used to represent 10 Gigabit Ethernet 10GigE Used throughout this manual to represent 10 Gigabit Ethernet 2M See E1 The E1 application is used when testing 2M interfaces 802 11b IEEE standard for wireless LANs You can establish wireless LAN connections to the T BERD MTS 5800 using an 802 11 PCMCIA card 802 3 The IEEE specification for Ethernet 802 3 also specifies a frame type that places the frame length in the Length Type field of the Ethernet header as opposed to the DIX Type II frame type which utilizes the Length Type field to identify the payload Ethertype A AC Alternating Current An AC power adapter is supplied with the instrument ARP Address Resolution Protocol Method for determining a host s hardware address if only the IP address is known The instrument automatically sends ARP requests during layer 3 IP testing ATP Acterna test packet A test packet that contains a time stamp and sequence number for measuring round trip delay and counting out of sequence f
443. rnet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results Table 66 PTP Link Stats results Continued Test Result Offset from Master Average Offset from Master Current Offset from Master Minimum Offset from Master Maximum Sync PDV Average Sync PDV Current Sync PDV Minimum Sync PDV Maximum Delay Request IPDV Aver age Delay Request IPDV Current Delay Request IPDV Mini mum Delay Request IPDV Maxi mum PTP Graphs 326 Description The average offset from master from test restart The current offset from master from test restart The minimum offset from master from test restart The maximum offset from master from test restart The average variation in Sync packet delay master to slave from the minimum Sync packet delay The current variation in Sync packet delay master to slave from the minimum Sync packet delay The minimum variation in Sync packet delay master to slave from the minimum Sync packet delay The maximum variation in Sync packet delay master to slave from the minimum Sync packet delay The average variation in Delay Request packet delay slave to master from the minimum Delay Request packet delay The current variation in Delay Request packet delay slave to master from the minimum Delay Request packet delay The minimum variation in Delay Request packet delay slave to master from the minimum Delay Request packet delay The maximum variation in Delay Request packet delay slave to master f
444. rnup Configuration The Advanced button provides access to additional parameters to define the Port Connection TCP Pass and whether Multiple Connections are desired When these have been defined select the Back left green arrow After all parameters have been specified select Next the green arrow 4 The Save Profiles window appears If no Profile is to be saved at his time select the Skip Profiles arrow at the bottom of the window Go to Running the TrueSpeed test on page 276 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 273 Chapter 10 Automated Testing TrueSpeed Test 274 If it is desired that the configuration be saved to memory disk or USB specify the filename and the location where it is to be stored If it is desired that subsequent users be restricted from being able modify this profile check the box Save as read only To save the file to memory select the Save Profiles button Then select Next the green arrow The test will begin Go to step 3 on page 277 TrueSpeed Circuit Troubleshooting Option The Connection Settings screen appears ye UN A Connection Settings LI Not Running Local Settings Source MAC Factory Default gt Default Source MAC 00 80 16 8A 86 BD IP Type Static Single gt IP Address 192 168 1 11 Default Gateway 192 168 1 10 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Encapsulation None a TCP Host Server Settings IP Address 192 168 1
445. rnup process of a single service the TrueSAM function provides a simple and complete method to run multiple tests on the system without having to reconfigure each time a test is run After answering a few prompts the tests will run automatically without input from the user and store the test results in a report TrueSAM contains a number of different predefined testing options that are readily available and allows selection of the following automated tests J Quick Check RFC 2544 or SAMComplete J Proof TrueSpeed NOTE Depending upon how your unit is optioned and configured your unit may not have all of these options available To assist the user in the configuration process TrueSAM has implemented a Guide Me feature to step through the necessary configuration sequence This allows technicians with less experience to be able to effectively run the tests for the environment in which they are operating To simplify the interface TrueSAM now provides the complete interactively linked map of the configuration process as an optional display for the more advanced user This navigational aid is especially useful when reconfiguring a saved profile After configuring the test settings the setup profile can be saved for future use TrueSAM operates with the following constraints TrueSAM does not support one way delay OWD measurements TrueSAM is not available for the 40 100G Transport Module The following topics are
446. rom the minimum Delay Request packet delay The following PTP results are available in graphical form Mean Path Delay The current and average mean path delay from test restart Offset from Master The current and average offset from master from test restart Delay Request PDV The current and average delay request PDV from test restart Sync PDV The current and average sync PDV from test restart Delay Request IPDV The current and average delay request PDV from test restart Master to Slave OWD The current and average One Way Delay from Master to Slave from test restart Slave to Master OWD The current and average One Way Delay from Slave to Master from test restart Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual L4 Link Stats results Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results Table 67 describes the L4 Link Stats results such as the source and destina tion port carried in the last layer 4 packet received and the current bandwidth utilized by TCP or UDP traffic Table 67 L4 Link Stats results Test Result Rx Destination Port Rx Mbps Cur L4 Description Displays the Destination Port number for the last layer 4 packet received The current bandwidth utilized by the received layer 4 TCP UDP traffic expressed in megabits per second This measurement is an average taken over the prior second of test time Rx Mbps Cu
447. rovider communi cations facilities and terminal equipment at a subscriber s premises NOC Network Operations Center The organization responsible for maintaining a network NSA Non service affecting O OAM Operations Administration and Maintenance The instrument allows you to run link and service layer OAM applica tions ODU Optical channel data unit OOF Out of framing OOM Out of multi framing OOS Out of sequence OPU Optical channel payload unit Ethernet IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual OTN Optical Transport Network Network protocol that facilitates the trans mission of different types of client signals such as SONET SDH and Ethernet over a single optical network through the use of an OTN wrapper which provides the overhead required for proper network management OTU1 Used on the user interface to identify the test applications used for 2 7G OTN testing OTU2 Used on the user interface to identify the test applications used for 10 7G 11 05G and 11 1G OTN testing P Packet Bundle of data configured for transmission Consists of data to be transmitted and control information Packet Delay Variation The differ ence in one way delay as experienced by a series of packets PAT Program Association Table Pattern sync The condition occurring when the data received matches the data that is expected for a period of time defi
448. rried in the filtered traffic can be the source port of the near end instru ment or port or the source port of the far end instrument or port Traffic from either source will be reflected in the L4 Filter Counts and L4 Filter Stats result categories 6 On the graphic of the TCP UDP packet specify the following Setting Parameter Source Port Two filters are available If you define a single fil if filter is Enabled ter traffic must match the criteria in the filter If you define both filters traffic must match the cri teria for either filter Under Filter 1 if you want to filter traffic for a particular service type or source port select the box to the left of Source Service Type To analyze traffic originating from one of the pre defined specific service types select the type The port number is assigned automati cally for you To analyze traffic originating from a different port select User Defined then specify the port number If you would like to define a second filter specify the settings for Filter 2 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 135 Chapter 5 TCP UDP Testing Transmitting layer 4 traffic Setting Parameter Destination Port Two filters are available If you define a single fil if filter is Enabled ter traffic must match the criteria in the filter If you define both filters traffic must match the cri teria for either filter Under Filter 1 if you want
449. rs 1 2 3 6 7 8 frame 6 is detected immediately following frame 3 the out of sequence count is incremented by one resulting in a count of one instance of out of sequence frames If the T BERD MTS 5800 then detects sequence numbers 9 10 14 15 16 frame 14 is detected immediately following frame 10 the out of sequence number is incremented again by one resulting in a total count of two instances of out of sequence frames A count of Ethernet frames under the minimum 64 byte frame length containing Frame Check Sequence FCS errors A count of 1 Gigabit Ethernet 1 Gigabit 2 Gigabit Fibre Channel receive frames with at least one code violation A count of frames under the minimum 64 byte with a good FCS For layer 3 test applications to view the layer 3 Error Stats results described in Table 59 set the result category to Error Stats Table 59 Error Stats results layer 3 traffic Test Result Acterna Payload Errors Code Violation Rate Code Violation Seconds Code Violations Errored Frames Description A count of received IP packets containing Acterna Payload checksum errors NOTE This result only appears if you receive an Acterna payload The ratio of code violations to bits received since the last test restart A count of the number of seconds during which code violations occurred A count of each invalid 66 bit code word in the bit stream due to synchronization header errors For 10GigE streams code wor
450. rt Name Displays the name of the destination N port Dest Node Name Displays the name of the destination node Source N Port ID Displays the port ID for the source N port Source N Port Name Displays the name of the source N port Source Node Name Displays the name of the source node PTP Link Counts results Table 65 describes the PTP Link Counts results The results that appear vary depending on whether you are using Master or Slave mode Table 65 PTP Link Counts results Test Result Domain Mismatches Description The count of domain mismatched messages Rx Frame Counts Announce The count of received announce messages Rx Frame Counts Sync The count of received sync frames Rx Frame Counts Follow Up The count of received follow up frames Rx Frame Counts Delay Response The count of received delay response frames Rx Frame Counts Signaling The count of received signaling frames Rx Frame Counts Management The count of received management frames Tx Frame Counts Delay Request The count of transmitted delay request messages Tx Frame Counts Signaling The count of transmitted signaling frames Tx Frame Counts Management The count of received management frames Rx Frame Rates Announce The rate of received announce messages Rx Frame Rates Sync The rate of received sync frames Rx Frame Rates Foll
451. rting Fibre Channel 206 Ethernet test results AutoNeg Status 321 Error Stats layer 1 317 Error Stats layer 2 318 Error Stats layer 3 319 L2 BERT Stats 307 L2 Filtered Counts 305 L2 Filtered Stats 302 L2 Link Counts 299 L2 Link Stats 296 LEDs 291 OAM 309 310 311 Ping 316 Signal 296 Transparency 306 Ethernet testing about 127 BER testing layer 1 38 40 BER testing layer 2 62 capturing packets 87 191 classic RFC 2544 test 237 F Fault results 294 Features and capabilities Ethernet 22 Fibre Channel 196 Multiple Streams testing 146 TCP UDP testing 128 Triple Play testing 146 Fibre Channel test results Login Status 323 See also Ethernet results Fibre Channel testing about N_Port login 196 applications 197 features and capabilities 196 filter settings 202 frame settings 201 implicit and explicit logins 200 inserting errors 206 interface settings 199 layer 1 BER 198 measuring delay 207 measuring service disruption 206 monitoring traffic 208 topologies 200 traffic loads 203 transmitting patterns 205 transmitting traffic 204 Filter settings Ethernet 49 Fibre Channel 202 for packet capture 89 191 IP 79 81 IP Video 184 MiM traffic 118 TCP UDP 134 VoIP 189 Frame settings Ethernet 43 184 Fibre Channel 201 MiM traffic 115 FTP Throughput test automated 264 G G 826 results 320 Graphs about 5 H H 323 185 186 187 Help technical assistance xix Ethernet IP and TCP UDP Testing
452. rument on the far end Broadcast commands are used to loop up the first instrument on the circuit that responds Used for loop back Message loop back Reply LBM LBR frame analysis where the far end unit any equipment that responds to LBM messages loops back any packet containing the LBM message The loop back unit uses the same IDs and priorities assigned to the received traffic and loops the traffic back on the same virtual LAN using the same priority The labels for traffic received by the loop back unit are replaced with the labels specified for transmitted traffic on the Ethernet tab before the traffic is passed through to the loop back unit s transmitter If you are looping back multiple streams of VPLS traffic you can specify a unique tunnel label and VC label for each individual stream or you can specify the labels for one stream and then copy them to the other streams When looping back VPLS traffic the loop back unit swaps the service provider destination address SP DA and service provider source address SP SA carried in received traffic before looping the traffic through to the transmitter When configuring traffic on the local unit you must specify the service provider source address of the loop back unit as the service provider destination address for all traffic transmitted from the local unit This is because when looping back VPLS traffic the local unit will not issue a broadcast request to loopup the next JDSU Eth
453. rument to View the NE s cross connect definitions Delete cross connect definitions Activate specific ingress and egress flows in the command line interfaces CLIs for the switch ports Before running a TAM test you must connect the instrument to the manage ment network that the NE resides on using the Ethernet management port on your instrument and a straight through Ethernet cable To connect the instrument to the network 1 Insert one end of a straight through Ethernet cable into the Ethernet management port on your instrument On the MTS T BERD 5800 the port is located on the right side of the instrument 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the access port on the management network that the NE resides on The instrument is physically connected to the network To establish a complete connection proceed to Setting up a TAM test on page 280 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 279 Chapter 10 Automated Testing Testing using TAM automation Connecting to the test network Setting up a TAM test 280 In addition to the management connection you must establish a connection for the traffic transmitted by the instrument and received from the network element The ports and cables used to connect the instrument to the circuit for testing vary depending on the line rate of the test interface For details on connecting the instrument to the circuit for testing refer to the Getti
454. rver Reconnect the physical Ethernet link The instrument will attempt to reconnect to the server Try to establish a new session with the server Try to establish a new session with the server Try to establish a new session with the server After testing is complete you must manually terminate the PPPoE session To terminate a PPPoE session Press the PPPoE Client Log Off or PPPoE Server Log Off Action key Before you transmit layer 3 IPv4 traffic you can specify the IP characteristics of the traffic such as the destination IP address the type of payload and the type of service Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 77 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 3 testing To specify transmitted IPv4 packet settings 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the layer 3 or layer 4 IPv4 test application for the interface you are testing Refer to Table 7 on page 25 through Table 8 on page 25 for a list of layer 3 applica tions Table 15 on page 129 lists layer 4 applications Select the Setup soft key and then select the IP tab 3 In Length Type indicate whether you want to specify the length as a frame size or as a packet length Frame Size If you select Frame Size you must specify the size on the Ethernet tab then return to the IP tab to specify the remaining settings Packet Length If you select Packet Length select a pre defined length or select User Def
455. s SCCP is the call control used on Cisco VoIP systems H 323 Fast connect minimizes the number of messages exchanged If you selected SIP call control specify the following settings Setting Source Alias Outbound Alias Dest Phone Number Dest Name URI Email SIP Vendor 100 Rel Usage Description Enter the source phone number alias Select how to dial the destination Dial by Phone Number or Dial by Name URI Email If you selected Dial by Phone Number for Out bound Alias enter the destination phone number If you selected Dial by Name URI Emai for Out bound Alias enter the destination name UTI Email Specify the vendor Specify whether 100rel is required supported or disabled 100 Rel provides reliable provisional response mes sages by appending the 100rel tag to the value of the required header of initial signalling messages If you selected SCCP call control specify the following Setting Dest Phone Number Device Type Device Name Description Enter the destination phone number Specify the Device Type If checked click on the field and use the keypad to enter the device name Ethernet IP TCP UDP Fibre Chan VoIP and Video Testing Manual 185 Chapter 8 VoIP Testing Specifying VoIP settings e If you selected H 323 call control specify the following settings Setting Source Alias Dest Phone Number H 3231D Bear Cap Calling Party Number Plan Call
456. s been performed since initial pattern synchronization expressed as a percentage Pattern Losses Count of the number of times pattern synchronization was lost since initially acquir ing pattern synchronization Pattern Loss Seconds Count of the number of seconds during which pattern synchronization was lost since initially acquiring pattern synchronization CDMA Receiver Status results Table 44 describes the CDMA Receiver Status results used when testing one way delay Table 44 CDMA Receiver results Test Result Signal Processor State Base Station Pseudo Noise Offset Description Displays the state of the signal processor in the Pr cis Cf device Displays the PNO code of the base station that the Preecis Cf device is listening to between 0 and 511 Automatic Gain Control Displays automatic gain control DAC byte between 0 and 255 but typically between 150 and 220 Carrier Signal to nose Ratio Displays the signal to noise ratio SNR for received CDMA broadcast channel between 0 0 and 99 9 but typically between 2 5 and 11 0 Sync Channel Frame Error Rate TCXO Control No Signal Time Out Hardware Failure Detected Displays the Sync Channel Frame Error Rate Displays the status of TCXO voltage control If the TCXO voltage control starts falling outside of the typical range the Praecis Cf device should be returned to the factory Indicates that the Preecis Cf unit was not abl
457. s communicate directly with the GPS satellites instead of via terrestrial based radio Before measuring one way delay consider the following Two GPS synchronized instruments are required to accurately measure one way delay No communication is required over the Transport network to synchronize the time Both instruments must operate within a CDMA or GPS network to attain GPS synchronization Both ports can be used on the instruments for one way delay testing In Figure 22 on page 102 one port is used to transmit traffic and measure delay from instrument A to B and a second port is used to transmit traffic and measure delay from instrument B to A A GPS synchronized instrument and an unsynchronized instrument can be used for testing however they can not be used to measure one way delay Neither instrument will provide one way delay measurements Follow the guidelines included in the documentation shipped with the GPS receiver regarding preparation time and hold over stability to ensure maximum accuracy and stability Acterna traffic can be looped back from an unsynchronized instrument however the receiving synchronized instrument will not be able to measure one way delay on the looped back traffic Round trip delay will be measured instead If instrument B is synchronized and traffic from instrument A is looped back through B toA instrument B will measure one way delay from A to B but instrument A
458. s complete Monitoring 3 072G Optical Layer 1 To monitor 3 072G Optical Layer1 1 Using the Test Menu select the 3 072G Optical Layer 1 BERT Monitor Thru application 2 To specify the BER pattern do the following a Select the Setup soft key and then the Pattern tab b Specify the Rx Pattern To monitor round trip delay use the Delay pattern muy NOTE The Rx Pattern selection specifies which pattern to analyze it does not change the transmit data from the terminating unit c Press Results to return to the Main screen Connect the instrument to the circuit Select the Laser button Verify that the green Signal LED is illuminated Press the Restart soft key N Oo oO RARA OQ Observe the test results in the following categories Interface Signal BERT Error Stats such as Bit Error Rate and Error Free Seconds if using typical BERT patterns or if using the Delay pattern Round Trip Delay You are monitoring 3 072G Optical layer 1 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 9 Chapter 2 3 072G Optical Testing Monitoring 3 072G Optical Layer 1 10 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual CPRI OBSAI Testing This chapter provides information on testing CPRI services using the MSAM Topics discussed in this chapter include the following About CPRI OBSAI testing on page 12 Layer 1 BER CPRI or OBSAI Testing on page 12 Layer 2 CPRI testing on
459. s established 3 Verify that you are not running a timed test on any port Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual About the Refresh key Sorting discovered instruments Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Discovering another JDSU test instrument using J Connect 4 Ifyou haven t already done so select the J Connect tab on the Main screen then select Discover Units A message appears asking you to wait while the instrument discovers devices If the instrument discovered other test instruments their unit identifiers appear on the Discovered Devices screen If the instrument does not discover any other test instruments a message appears stating that no devices were discovered and instructing you to press Refresh to start the process again NOTE The J Connect feature is also available when specifying destination MAC or IP addresses or port numbers for transmitted traffic or source MAC or IP addresses or port numbers for filtered traffic The Refresh key appears whenever the Discovered Devices screen is displayed Use the button to rediscover devices on the subnet for example if you suspect a discovered device is no longer connected to the circuit By default discovered instruments are listed by their unit identifiers You can optionally sort them by serial number application name MAC or IP address To sort discovered instruments 1 Discover the instruments 2 On the Discovered Devices screen se
460. s for all streams select Copy Setups to other Streams Traffic load settings are not copied Load settings must be configured for each individual stream The source IP address is not copied If you want to use the same source IP address for each stream select Static as the Source Type on the All Streams or All Services tab and then specify the shared Source IP address If you do not need to specify other settings select the Results soft key to return to the Main screen The layer 3 traffic characteristics are specified When running layer 4 Multiple Streams applications you can specify layer 4 settings for each individual stream After specifying settings for a stream you can optionally copy the settings to every enabled stream To specify layer 4 stream settings 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the Multiple Streams test application for the interface you are testing refer to Table 16 on page 148 for a list of applications Select the Setup soft key and then select the tab corresponding the stream you are configuring Select the TCP UDP tab and then specify the traffic mode TCP or UDP the listen port service type and if applicable listen port number the source port number the destination port number and the payload Acterna or Fill Byte For details refer to Specifying layer 4 settings on page 131 Specify the traffic load for the stream see Specifying the load type for
461. s gray Measuring round trip delay When you perform loopback tests you can measure round trip delay by trans mitting an Acterna payload Frames with an Acterna payload carry time stamps enabling the instrument to calculate the delay NOTE If you perform an end to end Fibre Channel test invalid delay results appear You must use a loop back configuration when measuring round trip delay For details refer to Chapter 7 Loop back Testing To measure round trip delay 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the layer 2 terminate test application for the interface you are testing refer to Table 22 on page 197 for a list of applications 2 Select the Setup soft key and then select the Fibre Channel tab 3 Under Tx Payload select an Acterna payload The Acterna payload trans mits frames with a time stamp and sequence number You must select an Acterna payload to measure round trip delay 4 In Frame Length select one of the listed frame lengths or select User Defined and then enter a specific frame length in the USER Frame Length field 5 If you need to specify other settings for the test select the appropriate tab otherwise press Results to return to the Main screen Connect the module to the circuit 7 On the Main screen select the Laser button 8 Select Start Traffic for constant bursty or flood loads or Start Ramp for ramped loads to transmit traffic over the circuit 9 Verify
462. s not include the preamble or start of frame delimiter The count does include errored frames A count of received MPLS frames since the test was started including errored frames Rx Q in Q Frames A count of received QinQ frames since the test was started including errored frames Rx R_RDYs A count of received Fibre Channel Rx_RDY primitives since the last test start or restart Rx Stacked VLAN Frames A count of received stacked VLAN frames as defined in IEEE 802 p q since the test was started including errored frames Rx VLAN Frames Rx VPLS Frames Span Tree Frames Transmitted Frames Tx Acterna Frames Tx R_LRDYs A count of received VLAN frames as defined in IEEE 802 p q since the test was started including errored frames A count of received VPLS frames since the test was started including errored frames Appears in the L2 SP Link Counts category A count of received 802 1d spanning tree frames since frame detection after the last test start or restart A count of transmitted frames since the last test restart A count of transmitted Acterna frames since the last test restart A count of transmitted Fibre Channel Rx_RDY primitives since the last test start or restart Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 301 Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results Table 39 L2 Link Counts results Continued Test Result Tx Avail B B Credit
463. s tab and then select LLB 5 On the local unit select the Actions tab and then select one of the following Start Traffic if you configured a constant or bursty load Start Ramp if you configured a ramped traffic load Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 173 Chapter 7 Loop back Testing Using Loop Up to initiate a loop back from the local unit When the loop back unit receives the traffic it does the following Determines which frames or packets satisfy its filter criteria Only traffic that satisfies the criteria will be looped back to the near end unit Swaps the destination and source addresses or port IDs and if appli cable port number for every frame or packet it receives Transmits the traffic back to the local unit Traffic is looped back to the local unit Using Loop Up to initiate a loop back from the local unit You can select the Loop Up button on the local traffic generating unit to loop up another unit on the circuit After sending the Loop Up frame a confirmation message from the loop back unit appears in the message bar of the Main screen of your local unit informing you that the loop back is successful Before sending the Loop Up frame your unit must be configured as follows If you are looping back layer 2 non VPLS Ethernet traffic the near end unit automatically detects the MAC address for the next unit on the circuit therefore you do not need to conf
464. se the layer 1 BERT terminate application to generate and receive layer 1 test patterns NOTE For 10 Gigabit Ethernet patterns refer to IEEE 802 3ae 2002 Sections 49 2 8 49 2 12 and 52 9 1 for detailed descriptions of each pattern For 1 Gigabit Ethernet MF LF and HF patterns refer to the IEEE 802 3 2000 Edition Annex 26A For 1 Gigabit Ethernet RDPAT JTPAT and SNPAT pat terns refer to the NCITS TR 25 1999 specifications Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 1 BER testing To BER test layer 1 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the Layer 1 BERT terminate application for the circuit you are testing Select the Setup soft key 3 Select the Pattern tab and then do the following a Specify the TX Pattern b If you wish to do so check the box for Use same pattern for Tx and Rx and then specify a Tx pattern If using the Delay pattern the box should be checked Tx Rx If the check the box for Use same pattern for Tx and Rx is not checked select an Rx Pattern and a Tx Pattern 4 Connect the test instruments to the circuit 5 On both instruments if you are testing an optical interface select the Laser button 6 On both instruments verify that the green Signal Present and Sync Acquired LEDs are illuminated If using the Delay pattern only the Signal Present LED appears Sync Acquired is not used 7 On both instruments
465. set the result group and category 1 Using the Test menu select a test application see Step 1 Selecting a test application on page 2 and then configure your test see Step 2 Config uring a test on page 2 2 Select the Results soft key to return to the Main screen 3 Connect your instrument to the circuit see Step 3 Connecting the instru ment to the circuit on page 3 4 Ifyou are testing an optical interface select the Laser button 5 If you selected an Ethernet or SONET SDH test application select the Start Traffic button to start generating and analyzing traffic Results appear in the Results Windows 6 Optional Insert errors or anomalies into the traffic stream or use the Action buttons to perform other actions These buttons only appear if appli cable to your test application 7 Use the Group and Category buttons to specify the type of results you want to observe Figure 1 illustrates buttons for a standard Ethernet appli cation Ethernet L2 Link Stats gt Figure 1 Result Group and Category buttons Results for the category you selected appear in the result window 8 Optional To observe results for a different group or category in another result window press the buttons at the top of the window to specify the group and category For descriptions of each result refer to Chapter 11 Test Results TIP If you want to provide a screen shot of key test results on the Main scr
466. settings Login To verify that both devices use Ni Ni Ni Ni FlowControl is On flow control and no login is required select Implicit and then specify the Tx Buffer to Buffer credits To discover another instrument or device s settings select Explicit E Port and then specify the Rx Buffer to Buffer credits Tologin to an N Port on a circuit using a Point to Point or Fabric topology select Explicit Fab ric N Port and then specify the Rx Buffer to Buffer Credits Tx Buffer to Buffer If you specified an Implicit login 4 N A N A N A Credits select this field and then type the Near end B B number of buffer credits the far end device can support This number should match the receive buffer size for the far end device Rx Buffer to Buffer If you specified an Explicit E Port N A 4 N 4 Credits or Explicit Fabric N Port login Far end B B select this field and then type the number of buffer credits the instru ment will advertise that it can sup port during the ELP login exchange with the far end device Topology To login to an N Port and then N A N A 4 verify that it can communicate with other destination N Ports select Point to Point To login to an N_Port and then verify that it can establish an operating environment with a fabric and communicate with other destination N Ports select Fabric Source N Port Specify the source port name car N A N A Name ried in the
467. settings and then specify the Latency Bandwidth Select Back to return to previous screen Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 10 Automated Testing Automated RFC 2544 Select Next the green arrow d On the Frame Loss Test screen select the test procedure to be used RFC 2544 Transmits traffic at the maximum bandwidth and then decreases the bandwidth for each trial by the granularity you specify The test ends after two successive trials with no frames lost This proce dure also requires specification of Bandwidth Granularity in Mbps Top Down Transmits traffic at the maximum bandwidth specified in the Test Range setting and then decreases the bandwidth for each trial by the Number of Steps specified until the minimum bandwidth is reached for the specified Test Range Bottom Up Transmits traffic at the minimum bandwidth specified in the Test Range setting and then increases the bandwidth for each trial by the Number of Steps specified until the maximum bandwidth is reached for the specified Test Range To further refine the frame loss configuration select Set advanced Frame Loss measurement settings and then choose whether to Measure Latency or Measure Packet Jitter by selecting their checkbox Select Back to return to previous screen Select Next the green arrow e For the Back to Back Test screen define the Max Duration Upstream and or Downstream for non symmetric test of each test and B
468. settings are specified You can verify the login status and observe test results associated with the login process by displaying the Fibre Channel Login Status result category see Login Status results on page 323 Before you transmit layer 2 traffic you can specify the frame characteristics of the traffic such as the frame length and the type of payload carried in the frames You can also optionally specify the destination source sequence originator exchange and responder IDs for transmitted frames NOTE If you change the frame length when the unit is already transmitting traffic the unit resets your test results but some residual frames of the old length may be counted if they are already in the traffic stream To specify Fibre Channel settings 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the layer 2 terminate test application for the interface you are testing refer to Table 22 on page 197 for a list of applications 2 Select the Setup soft key and then select the Fibre Channel tab 3 In Tx Payload select one of the following Acterna To transmit frames that contain a sequence number and time stamp so that lost frames and round trip delay can be calculated select Acterna Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 201 Chapter 9 Fibre Channel Testing Configuring layer 2 Fibre Channel tests 202 Specifying Fibre Channel filter settings If you are measuring round trip
469. seudo wire inside a specific tunnel and MPLS traffic analyze any MPLS TP ITU T G 8113 1 T MPLS ITU T G 8114 or MPLS ITU Y 1711 traffic present on the Ethernet link 64 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual About MPLS TP Analyzing MPLS TP OAM Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 2 testing The differences between MPLS T MPLS OAM and MPLS TP OAM are MPLS and T MPLS OAM uses the reserved Label 14 as the identifier and MPLS TP uses the label 13 together with Associated Channel Header ACH T MPLS and MPLS TP can use Loop Back Message and Loop Back Reply LEBM LBR while MPLS must use Continuity Verification CV However MPLS T MPLS and MPLS TP OAMs all support multiple layers section layer tunnel trunk layer or label switched path LSP and pseudo wire PW layer or virtual circuit VC MPLS TP is a connection oriented packet switched transport technology The main features of MPLS TP are Connection oriented Subset of MPLS without IP functionality Packet based service support via point to point connection No dynamic control protocol Simplified data plane and forwarding End to end OAM Protection switching MPLS TP provides transport service using pseudo wire emulation edge to edge PWE3 technology Figure 16 summarizes the evolution of MPLS TP from MPLS via T MPLS MPLS TP Figure 16 MPLS TP evolution You can use the instrument to sen
470. since initially acquiring pattern synchronization Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results Table 32 CPRI OBSAI Payload BERT results Pattern Sync Loss Seconds Bit Error Rate Bit Errors Bit Errored Seconds Error Free Seconds Error Free Seconds Total Bits Received Round Trip Delay Current us Round Trip Delay Average us Round Trip Delay Minimum us Round Trip Delay Maximum us The number of seconds in which pattern sync was lost since initially acquiring pattern synchronization The ratio of pattern bit errors to received pattern bits since initially acquiring pattern synchronization Count of the number of bit errors received since initially acquiring pattern synchronization Count of the number of seconds containing bit errors since initially acquiring pattern synchronization Count of the number of seconds containing no bit errors since initially acquiring pattern synchronization The ratio of Errored Seconds to Error Free Seconds since initially acquiring pattern synchronization The total number of bits received since initially acquiring pattern synchronization The currently calculated round trip delay expressed in microseconds The average round trip delay over the last second expressed in microseconds The minimum round trip delay since the last restart of the test expressed i
471. ssary 348 Ethernet IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Index Numerics 10 Gigabit Ethernet WAN testing about results 289 default overhead values 26 1G Pair Status result 295 3 072G optical BERT 8 12 monitoring 9 17 802 3ae overhead values 26 A Address book populating 183 Alarm LEDs Ethernet 296 Fibre Channel 296 IP 296 TCP UDP 296 Analyzing MPLS TP traffic 65 69 Applications loop back 167 MiM 25 26 Multiple Streams 148 selecting 2 TCP UDP 129 Triple Play 160 Asymmetric test 228 231 234 236 253 271 273 ATP listen port explained 130 Automated tests applications 225 FTP Throughput test 264 HTTP Throughput test 266 launching 225 saving test report data 282 specifying external settings 237 TCP Throughput 267 VLAN 263 AutoNeg Status results 321 BER testing 3 072G optical 8 12 Ethernet results 307 Ethernet layer 1 40 Ethernet layer 2 62 Fibre Channel layer 1 198 BERT results Ethernet 307 Fibre Channel 307 Buffer capacity captured packets 88 Bursty loads transmitting 59 Byte pattern filter 56 C Cable diagnostics about 30 running 30 test results explained 293 viewing measurements 31 Call control standard 185 Calls placing 190 receiving 190 191 Capturing packets about 87 191 based on a trigger 91 94 buffer capacity 88 Capture toolbar 89 191 capturing packets 90 191 estimated time to save buffer data 96 exporting buffer data 94 packe
472. ssing the circuit IP Address Displays the destination IP address for the packet The Error Stats category lists error statistics such as the number of bit errors FCS or CRC errored frames jabbers runts and code violations for the layer 1 BERT CPRI layer 1 BERT and layer 2 traffic test applications Table 57 describes the test results for the Layer 1 BERT patterns Table 57 Error Stats results B Seed A Seed and PRBS31 patterns Test Result Bit Error Rate Description The ratio of pattern bit errors to received pattern bits since initially acquiring pat tern synchronization Pattern 1 B Seed Pattern 2 A Seed Pattern 3 PRBS31 Ni Bit Errors A count of the number of received bits in a recognized pattern that do not match the expected value Code Violation Rate Code Violation Seconds Code Violations The ratio of code violations to bits received since the last test restart A count of the number of seconds during which code violations occurred A count of each invalid 66 bit code word in the bit stream due to synchronization header errors For 10GigE streams code words with PCS block errors are also counted as code violations Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 317 Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results Table 57 Error Stats results B Seed A Seed and PRBS31 patterns Continued Test Result
473. st Menu to select the J Profiler test application for the interface you are testing 2 Select the Setup soft key and then select the Interface tab to specify settings that control the Ethernet interface see Specifying interface settings on page 41 Disable J Profiler before changing IPv6 address modes Failure to do so may cause the instrument to lock up 3 If you want to discover streams sharing specific criteria such as a partic ular VLAN Source MAC address or well known TCP UDP port select the Filter tab then specify the settings For details see Specifying Ethernet filter settings on page 49 Specifying IPv4 filter settings on page 79 Filtering received traffic using layer 4 criteria on page 134 Only streams that satisfy the filter criteria will be discovered and displayed Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 125 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Discovering traffic using J Profiler 4 Select the Profile tab The illustration in Figure 28 appears to guide you through the profile process All incoming traffic Filters optional Filtered Traffic Profiler Streams ll Ln a al a al Sal mee ee SS a Figure 28 J Profiler illustration 5 Specify how the discovered and optionally filtered traffic will be displayed VLAN ID Both the VLAN ID and SVLAN ID will be considered Traffic must contain at least one VLAN tag to be included in the profile
474. st is configured If everything appears as desired select Next the green arrow until it displays the Run Tests button on the bottom of the screen Select Run Tests 5 As the test are running a scrollable overall result view including screen shots of the various tests will be available that shows real time status of the tests as they execute The test will also display a green Passed or Red Failed banner at the top of the screen when the test is completed When all test are completed the report is automatically generated and saved to memory 6 Select the Next the green arrow The TrueSAM Edit Run screen appears Go to step 4 of TrueSAM Initia tion and communication configuration on page 211 Launching a single automated test The TrueSAM function is ideal for service turn ups But if the service is already functioning and a specific problem needs to be examined there are automatic test that can be run individually Before launching an automated test select the appropriate Traffic or Multiple Streams application in Terminate or Dual Terminate mode When running a script in Dual Terminate mode you can only launch a script for one port You can not run scripts from both ports CAUTION CORRUPTED RESULTS Pressing Restart during a test could corrupt the results To ensure accurate script results wait for the script to complete before pressing Restart Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 225
475. st restart A count of the number of seconds in which a 10b word loss occurred since the last restart The number of code violations that have been received since the last test restart The ratio of code violations to bits received since the last test restart The number of seconds in which code violations have been received since the last test restart The number of K30 7 words received since the last test restart The number of frame sync losses that have been received since the last test restart The number of seconds in which frame sync losses have been received since the last test restart Table 29 shows the CPRI OBSAI Counts results Table 29 CPRI OBSAI Counts results Rx Code Words Tx Code Words Rx Frames Tx Frames Rx Message Groups The total number of 10b code words received since last test restart The total number of 10b code words transmitted since last test restart The total number of hyperframes CPRI or master frames OBSAI received since last test restart The total number of hyperframes CPRI or master frames OBSAI transmitted since last test restart A count of the number of different groups received Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 287 Chapter 11 Test Results CPRI OBSAI test results CPRI L1 Inband Protocol results OBSAI Status Results CPRI OBSAI Payload BERT results 288 Table 29 CPRI OBSAI Counts results Rx Messages A count of the m
476. stination IP addresses maximum number of hops and the response time To run traceroute 1 Use the Test Menu to select the Traceroute application for the interface you are testing refer to Table 7 on page 25 through Table 8 on page 25 for a list of applications 2 Select the Setup soft key and then select the Interface tab to specify settings that control the Ethernet interface see Specifying interface settings on page 41 3 Select the Setup soft key select the Ethernet tab and then specify the Ethernet frame settings see Specifying Ethernet frame settings on page 43 Be certain to set the data mode IPoE or PPPoE 4 Select the IP tab and then specify the IP settings for the traceroute see Specifying IP settings for Ping and Traceroute testing on page 83 5 Press Results to return to the Main screen Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 85 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 3 testing 86 Monitoring IP traffic Connect the instrument to the circuit If you are testing an optical interface select the Laser button Verify that the green Signal Present Sync Acquired and Link Active LEDs are illuminated Using the View menu set the result display to Single view and then select the Traceroute result category 10 Press the Traceroute action button 11 Observe the traceroute The traceroute application is finished You can use the instrument to monitor IP traffic w
477. streams of traffic carrying voice video or data payloads to verify triple play service on 10 100 1000 1 GigE Optical and 10 GigE LAN circuits When testing triple play can transmit an actual audio stream pre recorded tone or actual voice to test the audio quality of a triple play network with specific traffic levels before deployment Layer 4 TCP UDP streams lIf you purchased the TCP UDP option you can transmit and analyze multiple streams of traffic with TCP or UDP headers in terminate mode For details see Specifying layer 4 stream settings on page 158 TCP throughput measurements lIf you purchased the TCP UDP option you can establish a TCP connection to a peer and then measure layer 3 IP and layer 4 TCP throughput to demonstrate that poor application performance is not due to IP network issues Unique MAC and IP addresses per stream When running Layer 2 or Layer 3 Triple Play or Multiple Streams applications you can assign a unique destination MAC and IP address to each individual stream or you can continue to use the same addresses for all streams For details see Specifying layer 2 stream settings on page 156 and Specifying layer 3 stream settings on page 157 Packet capture and analysis lf your instrument is configured and optioned to do so you can use it to capture transmitted and received data save it on the instrument or to a USB key and then either send the data to ano
478. sults are displayed see Figure 95 Summary Status a Signal Present Signal Loss Seconds Figure 95 Errored Summary Status results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 11 Test Results CPRI OBSAI test results This allows you to immediately view errored results without searching through each category The errored results are listed by group and category To see all results for the group category select the arrow key to the right of the group category name You can also collapse or expand the results by selecting the box to the left of the name If OOS out of sequence Layer 3 Packets B8ZS Detect Path Pointer Adjust ment or correctable FEC conditions occur and no other errors occurred the background is yellow indicating you should research each condition displayed In some instances the conditions constitute errors in other instances the conditions are expected and should not be interpreted as errors CPRI OBSAI test results CPRI and OBSAI LEDs BERT results pertaining to frequency characteristics code violations and sync and pattern errors are reported in the results pane on the UI when using Layer 1 applications Layer 2 applications additionally report on framing errors and other CPRI specific data Categories discussed in this section include the following CPRI and OBSAI LEDs on page 285 Interface Signal results on page 286 CPRI OBSAI Error Sta
479. t some tests will be unavailable with certain connections or in combinations with other tests When all desired tests have been chosen select Next the green arrow 3 Depending upon which test s have been selected there are a number of parameters that must be set to define the results a On the Utilization screen the Bandwidth Unit and the Max Band width can be selected To choose whether the bandwidth units used for the tests are chosen from Layer 1 or Layer 2 make the selection in the Bandwidth Unit drop down box Then enter the Max Bandwidth in Mbps in the entry box Upstream and or Downstream for non symmetric test To further refine the Utilization configuration select Set advanced Utili zation settings and then select Allow True 100 Traffic if desired Select Back to return to previous screen Select Next the green arrow b On the Frame Lengths screen select the number of frame lengths to be tested by checking the appropriate number of boxes and then entering a value for each checked Upstream and or Downstream Frame length to be tested Select Next the green arrow c Onthe Throughput Test screen select whether the RFC 2544 Stan dard or JDSU Enhanced version of the test is to be used for the Zeroing in Process and the level of Measurement Accuracy Upstream and or Downstream for non symmetric test To further refine the Zeroing in Process configuration select Set advanced Throughput Latency measurement
480. t Failure Detection FFD Backward Defect Indication BDI and Forward Defect Indication FDI for MPL S applica tions Specify thresholds for declaring a loss of continuity LOC if the number of consecutive missing CCM exceeds the number of messages expected within the calculated interval This state may be used by Maintenance End Point devices to initiate a switch to a protect line Fast OAM heartbeat messages CCM FFD for Y 1731 OAM for Ethernet G 8114 G 8113 1 OAM for T MPLS Y 1711 OAM for MPLS When using your instrument for link layer OAM testing you can do the following Discover an OAM peer and automatically detect its capabilities Indicate whether you want the instrument to serve in an active or passive role Specify the Vendor OUI Organizationally Unique Identifier for the instru ment Indicate whether the instrument will advertise that it provides unidirectional support for failure detection remote loopback link events and variable retrieval Indicate whether you want the instrument to generate link faults dying gasps and critical events Indicate whether you want the instrument to issue a remote loopback command to place its peer in loopback mode if the instrument is in active mode and its peer is capable of remote loopbacks OAM settings are specified for the traffic originating instrument on the OAM setup tab when configuring Layer 2 Traffic tests in Terminate mode To spe
481. t Use Filters as to Trigger 4 Select the Filters tab and then in the panel on the left side select Summary o Select the Clear All Filters button to clear any current filter settings In the panel on the left side select Byte Pattern Set the Use Byte Pattern as to Trigger and then specify the trigger filter as described in Specifying filter settings on page 89 8 Select the Capture tab and specify a Post Trigger Size This is the amount of data in MB to capture after the trigger event occurs If set to zero the capture stops immediately after the trigger event w NOTE When capturing packets based on a trigger the capture buffer saves in wrap around mode overwrite the oldest packets with new packets when the buffer becomes full 9 Select the Capture toolbar and then select Start Capture A message appears in the message bar indicating that the capture has started and the action key states Capture Started Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 93 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Capturing packets for analysis Saving or exporting captured packets 94 The capture will begin when the trigger event occurs which will be when the data matches the filter criteria and byte pattern criteria Captured packets are stored temporarily in the capture buffer A count of the number of packets processed is provided in the Ethernet result group in the Capture category WARNING Changing applica
482. t period To modify the settings for the transmitted frame a If you want to name the frame select the Test Frame setting to launch a keypad and then type a name using up to twenty characters Select OK to close the keypad b In Protocol select the control protocol format for the frame c In Encap select None VLAN or Q in Q If you select VLAN or Q in Q be certain to do the following VLAN Select the VLAN field on the image of the outgoing frame at the bottom of the tab and then specify the VLAN ID and User Priority for the frame If you want the PBit to increment for each transmitted frame select PBit Increment For details on VLAN settings refer to Config uring VLAN tagged traffic on page 47 Q in Q Select the SVLAN field on the image of the outgoing frame at the bottom of the tab and then specify the service provider s SVLAN ID SVLAN User Priority DEI Bit and SVLAN TPID for the frame If you want the PBit to increment for each transmitted frame select PBit Incre ment Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Using Quick Config to configure test frames Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 2 testing Select the CVLAN field and then specify the customer VLAN ID and User Priority for the frame If you want the PBit to increment for each transmitted frame select PBit Increment For details on Q in Q settings refer to Configuring Q in Q traffic on page 48 d In Count specify th
483. t slicing 88 saving buffer data 94 specifying filter settings 89 191 test results 320 321 test traffic and control plane traffic de fined 88 VoIP 189 Ethernet IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 349 Index 350 CDMA receiver 102 104 results 308 CJPAT pattern 63 205 Collapsing measurements 5 Compliance information xviii Configuring tests 2 Connecting instrument to circuit 3 Constant loads transmitting 58 Conventions xvii CRPAT pattern 63 205 CSPAT pattern 63 205 Custom test results creating 5 maintaining 5 Customer services technical assistance xix features and capabilities 22 filter settings 49 frame settings 43 184 interface settings 41 74 Layer 2 transparency 69 monitoring traffic 64 122 MPLS 28 OAM service layer 108 test results 289 321 traffic loads 58 transmitting traffic 62 verifying layer 2 transparency 69 VPLS 27 Expanding measurements 5 Explicit Fabric N port logins 196 D D channel decode messages LAPD unnumbered frames 338 Delay measuring Fibre Channel 207 Delay measuring MiM 121 Diagnostics running cable 30 Discovering traffic using J Profiler 125 Discovering network devices 37 Discovering other JDSU instruments 33 Displaying test results 4 E Encapsulation MiM 116 118 MPLS 28 49 74 Q in Q 44 48 74 184 VLAN 44 47 74 184 VPLS 27 44 48 Error Stats results Ethernet layer 1 317 Ethernet layer 2 318 Ethernet layer 3 319 Errors inse
484. t test restart A count of filtered IP packets received since the last test restart including errored packets The number of filtered Ethernet unicast IP packets received since the last test restart Table 54 describes the L3 Config Status or IP Config Status results associated with the assignment of static IP addresses or the assignment if IP addresses by a DHCP server Table 54 L3 IP Config Status results Test Result IPv4 IPv6 Description Data Mode 4 Indicates whether you are testing in IPOE or PPPoE mode Destination IP Address Ni Ni Displays the destination IP address as defined for the currently selected port Destination MAC Address 4 Displays the hardware MAC address of either the gateway or the destination host as resolved by ARP for the currently selected port IP Gateway Ni 4 Displays the Gateway address assigned by the DHCP server for the currently selected port IP Subnet Mask Displays the Subnet mask assigned by the DHCP server for the currently selected port Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 315 Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results Table 54 L3 IP Config Status results Continued Test Result IPv4 IPv6 Description PPPoE Status Displays one of the following messages that indicate the current status of the PPPoE session INACTIVE PPPOE ACTIVE PPP ACTIVE PPPOE UP USER REQUESTED INACTIVE PPPOE TIME
485. t the CPRI or OBSAI Layer 1 BERT Terminate application Protocol Frequency Layer 1 BERT Applications CPRI 614 4M P1 Terminate P2 Terminate 1228 8M P1 Terminate P2 Terminate 2457 6M P1 Terminate P2 Terminate 3072 0M P1 Terminate P2 Terminate 9830 4M P1 Terminate P2 Terminate OBSAI 768M P1 Terminate P2 Terminate 1536M P1 Terminate P2 Terminate 3072 0M P1 Terminate P2 Terminate 2 To specify the BER pattern do the following a Select the Setup soft key and then the Pattern tab Ethernet IP TCP UDP Fibre Chan VoIP and Video Testing Manual Chapter 3 CPRI OBSAI Testing Layer 1 BER CPRI or OBSAI Testing b Select a pattern Pattern Description 2423 1 ANSI Selects the 223 1 pseudorandom pattern which gener ates a maximum of 22 sequential Os and 23 sequential 1s Usually used to simulate live data for DS3 and SONET circuits 2423 1 Inv ANSI Selects the inverted 225 1 pseudorandom pattern which generates a maximum of 22 sequential 1s and 23 sequential Os Usually used to simulate live data for DS3 and SONET circuits Delay 273 4 PRBS with multi Bit Error Insertion for Latency Measurement This is an unframed Layer 1 Pattern This pattern delivers energy across the entire frequency spectrum delivering a good basic Bit Error Test for the optical transmission line The periodic insertion of multi ple bit errors permit a high accuracy measurement of timing in the 100s of nanoseconds range Test Patter
486. t to the types of streams the frame sizes or the SVLAN CVLAN VLAN ID for streams that you do not want to observe 4 Select Close to return to the Main screen The graph displays data for streams with the selected properties Before transmitting multiple streams of Triple Play traffic you must charac terize each type of service and indicate the number of calls VoIP channels SDTV and or HDTV and data streams that you intend to transmit and analyze The maximum utilization threshold is equal to the line rate for the application therefore if you utilize all of the bandwidth for one type of stream you can not transmit the other types concurrently To characterize each type of service 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the Triple Play test application for the interface you are testing refer to Table 18 on page 160 for a list of applications Select the Setup soft key and then select the All Services tab 3 Do one of the following Layer 2 Triple Play To specify a single source MAC address shared by all streams in Source MAC Mode select Single and then indicate whether you want to use the factory default address or specify your own To specify a source MAC address for each stream in Source MAC Mode select Per Stream and then specify the addresses on the tabs corresponding to each type of service see Specifying layer 2 and layer 3 settings for Triple Play services on page 164
487. tab lish the link and then start the test again Transmitted Packets Tx Router Solicitations A count of IP packets transmitted since the last test restart This result does not appear when test ing in Monitor mode A count of transmitted router solicitation mes sages when running an IPv6 application This count is not reset when you restart a test to reset the count you must bring down the link reestab lish the link and then start the test again Unicast Packets L3 Filter Stats results The number of Ethernet unicast IP packets received since the last test restart Table 52 lists the L3 Filter Stats results for filtered traffic such as the average packet rate peak packet rate and the maximum minimum and average packet sizes Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 313 Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results L3 Filter Stats and Filter Counts exclude errored frames Table 52 L3 Filter Stats results Test Result Packet Rate Packet Size Rx Mbps Cur L3 Total Util L3 Filter Counts results Description Average The average rate of filtered packets calculated over the time period elapsed since the last test restart Current The current rate of filtered packets This measurement is an average taken over the prior second of test time Minimum The minimum rate of filtered packets over a one second per
488. ted 11 Ata minimum observe the summary link statistics and counts filter statis tics and counts error statistics and layer 2 BERT statistics results You have analyzed layer 2 traffic Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Transmitting and analyzing layer 2 patterns Monitoring layer 2 traffic Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 2 testing Using the instrument you can stress the jitter and noise characteristics of 1 Gigabit components and systems by transmitting continuous random test patterns CRPAT continuous jitter test patterns CJPAT and the compliant supply noise pattern CSPAT These patterns are always transmitted automat ically when you turn the laser on NOTE You must run pattern tests using an end to end configuration at all times These patterns are designed to test physical layer networks By definition these framed patterns populate the Ethernet header with invalid address information therefore these frames will not traverse a layer 2 switched net work For the same reason if the pattern frames are transmitted to a far end instrument that is looped up the far end instrument tries to swap the source address and destination address for the pattern frames As a result the pat terns received by the near end instrument are modified and the results are not valid To transmit a pattern 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the Layer 2 Patterns
489. ter face transmitting IP traffic Uses ARP as DHCPV6 Stateless Auto configuration Manual configuration Two IP addresses are assigned Link local address this source address is assigned locally and must always go through duplicate address detection DAD Global address This second source address is not used locally it is used to transmit traffic beyond the router Uses Neighbor Solicitation Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 29 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Cable Diagnostics Table 11 IPv4 and IPv6 applications Continued Feature IPv4 IPv6 Traffic Uses one of the following Uses the following prioritization Layer 2 VLAN or Q in Q encapsulation VLAN or Q in Q encapsulation Layer 3 MPLS encapsulation which uses Flowlabels The instrument allows you to labels and tunnel priorities configure traffic with flow labels simply to determine whether routers on the circuit support the labels MPLS encapsulation is not supported IP Header Checksums Checksum error insertion supported Does not use checksums Error Messages ICMPv4 messages appear ICMPv6 messages appear Cable Diagnostics Before testing 10 100 1000 electrical Ethernet IP IPoE or TCP UDP circuits you can use the instrument to examine the state of the cables used to transmit electrical signals Typically this involves out of service testing to determine the link status the pair status of each MD
490. ter 10 Automated Testing TrueSpeed Test 2 The Connection Settings screen appears see Figure 85 ye WS F Connection Settings Not Running Local Settings Source MAC Factory Default Default Source MAC 00 80 16 8A 86 BD IP Type Static Single IP Address 192 168 1 11 Default Gateway 192 168 1 10 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Encapsulation None Remote Settings IP Address 192 168 1 11 va Ping Connect to Remote KJ Skip Connect Connect TrueSpeed Ctl Figure 85 TrueSpeed Turnup Connection Settings Do the following a Inthe Local Settings portion of the window define the parameters of the local connection including MAC IP addresses and encapsulation if any b Inthe Remote portion of the window define the IP address of the remote connection To verify that there is a device at the address spec ified select the Ping button If there is a device a green check mark will appear beside the Remote IP address c To establish a valid connection for running the test select the Connect to Remote button When the connection is determined to be valid the button will turn yellow If the connection is invalid a message window will appear providing some information as to why the connection is invalid This connection issue must be resolved before the test can be run although configuration may continue To continue with the configuration select the green arrow on the right at
491. ter selecting VPLS as your encapsulation under Configure outgoing frames select Tunnel Label and then specify the Tunnel ID the label the network will use to route the traffic the Tunnel Priority and the Tunnel TTL value NOTE VPLS settings are only available when configuring layer 2 test applications 2 To specify a virtual circuit VC label for the transmitted traffic select VC Label and then specify the VC ID the label the network will use to route the traffic on the channel to the appropriate interface the VC Priority and the VC TTL value 3 To specify the customer destination address source address type and payload select Data and then specify each of the settings 4 Based on your settings the unit automatically calculates and displays the service provider s overall frame size in the Calc SP Frame Size field Return to step 8 on page 46 of Specifying Ethernet frame settings for details on specifying the remaining settings VPLS settings are specified Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Configuring MPLS traffic Configuring LBM Traffic Specifying Ethernet filter settings Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 2 testing To configure MPLS traffic 1 After selecting MPLS as your encapsulation do the following a In EtherType select MPLS Unicast or MPLS Multicast b Under Configure outgoing frames select MPLS1 Label and then specify the label the network will use to r
492. tes whether Flow Control is turned On or Off on your unit Indicates whether the Ethernet link partner is half duplex capable YES or NO Indicates that the TBERD MTS 5800 has received a valid auto negotiation capa bility advertisement from the Ethernet link partner and sent an acknowledgement Indicates that the Ethernet link partner has acknowledged the receipt of a valid auto negotiation capability advertisement from the T BERD MTS 5800 Indicates the flow control capabilities of the Ethernet link partner Those capabilities are Tx Only The Ethernet link partner will transmit PAUSE frames to alert the E1 Tester to reduce the transmitted bandwidth momentarily however it will not reduce its trans mitted bandwidth if it receives PAUSE frames Rx Only The Ethernet link partner will reduce its transmitted bandwidth momentarily if it receives PAUSE frames but it will not transmit PAUSE frames to alert the E1 Tes ter to reduce the transmitted bandwidth Both Rx and Tx The Ethernet link partner will transmit PAUSE frames to alert the E1 Tester to reduce the transmitted bandwidth momentarily and it will reduce its transmitted bandwidth momentarily if it receives PAUSE frames Neither Rx or Tx The Ethernet link partner will not transmit PAUSE frames to alert the E1 Tester to reduce the transmitted bandwidth and it will not reduce its transmitted bandwidth if it receives PAUSE frames If supported by the Ethernet link par
493. test frames 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the Layer 2 Traffic test application for the interface you are testing Refer to Table 7 on page 25 for a list of layer 2 applications 2 Select the Setup soft key and then select the Interface tab to specify settings that control the Ethernet interface see Specifying interface settings on page 41 3 Select the Ethernet tab and then do the following a In Test Mode select J Proof b Specify the settings for the outgoing loop up frame see step 3 on page 70 of Configuring the traffic originating instrument 4 Select the J Proof tab and then select the Quick Config softkey The Quick Config dialog box appears Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 71 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 2 testing Verifying the far end filter settings Initiating the transparent loopback 72 5 Specify the following settings Setting Value Intensity Select one of the following Full Select full to transmit 100 frames per protocol Quick Select Quick to transmit 10 frames per pro tocol Family Select one of the following Al Select All to transmit frames for every sup ported protocol Spanning Tree Select Spanning to transmit STP RSTP and MSTP frames Cisco Select Cisco to transmit CDP VTP PagP UDLD DTP PVST PVST ISL and STP ULFAST frames IEEE Select IEEE to transmit GMRP GVRP
494. the load unit on a stream with burst on page 153 Specify unique traffic characteristics for each enabled stream or type of stream For example you can verify that a network handles VLAN tagged traffic properly by assigning a high priority to one stream and a lower priority to a second stream Or you can configure and transmit unencapsu lated layer 3 VoIP streams and VLAN tagged SDTV streams For details see Specifying layer 2 stream settings on page 156 Speci fying layer 3 stream settings on page 157 Specifying layer 4 stream settings on page 158 and Specifying layer 2 and layer 3 settings for Triple Play services on page 164 Specify the load for each enabled stream or let the module automatically distribute the load evenly between enabled streams For example if you specify the load unit as a percent and enable 4 traffic streams selecting Auto Distribute distributes a 25 traffic load to each stream For details see Specifying the load type for all streams on page 152 If you intend to run the TCP Host application additional settings are required see Running the TCP Host script on page 165 If you are running a Triple Play application see Transmitting multiple Triple Play streams on page 164 To transmit multiple streams 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the Multiple Streams test application for the interface you are testing refer to Table 16
495. the bottom of the screen legend text will vary whether the connection has been made or is to be skipped 3 The TrueSpeed Controls window will appear See Figure 86 and Figure 87 272 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 10 Automated Testing TrueSpeed Test This window provides for the configuration of the parameters pertaining to the Committed Information Rate CIR and TCP Threshold among others which will be used on all subsequent TrueSpeed tests TrueSpeed Controls LJ This step will configure global settings for all subsequent TrueSpeed steps This includes the CIR imat wees Committed Information Rate and TCP Pass which is the percent of the CIR required to pass the throughput test Connect to Port 5001 E Total Test Time s 240 g TCP Pass 95 0 Automatically find MTU size Local Remote CIR Mbps Type TOS 100 0 Type Tos TOS 000000 TOS 000000 TrueSpeed Controls aw This step will configure global settings for all subsequent TrueSpeed steps This includes the CIR fees Committed Information Rate and TCP Pass which is the percent of the CIR required to pass the throughput test Connect to Port 5001 Total Test Time s 240 TCP Pass 950 lt i Automatically find MTU size Local Downstream CIR Mbps Remote 100 0 Type Tos Type Tos aj TOS 000000 TOS 000000 Upstream CIR Mbps 100 0 Figure 87 TrueSpeed Asymmetrical Tu
496. the criteria that must be carried in the analyzed filtered traffic For descriptions of each of these settings see Specifying transmitted IPv4 packet settings on page 77 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 79 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 3 testing Specifying transmitted IPv6 packet settings 80 If you want the instrument to monitor and analyze live Ethernet traffic in the panel on the left side of the tab select Rx Payload then turn Payload Analysis Off The instrument will suppress lost frames LF in their associ ated result counts and as triggers for LEDs If you need to specify other settings for the test select the appropriate tab otherwise press Results to return to the Main screen The filter settings for IPv4 packets are specified Before you transmit layer 3 IPv6 traffic you can specify the IP characteristics of the traffic such as the source type and default gateway To specify transmitted IPv6 packet settings 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the layer 3 or layer 4 IPv6 test application for the interface you are testing Refer to Table 7 on page 25 through Table 8 on page 25 for a list of layer 3 applica tions Table 15 on page 129 lists layer 4 applications Select the Setup soft key and then select the IP tab In Length Type indicate whether you want to specify the length as a frame size or as a packet length Frame Size If
497. the green Signal Present Sync Acquired and Link Active LEDs are illuminated At a minimum observe the summary layer 2 link statistics and counts layer 2 filter statistics and counts error statistics and layer 2 BERT statis tics test results Layer 2 traffic is monitored 208 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Automated Testing This chapter provides information on using the automated scripting programs that are available depending on the how the unit is equipped and configured These programs include TrueSAM Automated RFC 2544 SAMComplete Fiber Channel FTP Throughput HTTP Throughput TCP Throughput and the proprietary TrueSpeed sequence of tests that includes a Walk the Window test The following topics are discussed in this chapter TrueSAM on page 210 Launching a single automated test on page 225 Automated RFC 2544 on page 227 SAMComplete on page 250 Automated VLAN tests on page 263 Automated FTP Throughput tests on page 264 Automated HTTP Throughput tests on page 266 Automated TCP Throughput tests on page 267 TrueSpeed Test on page 268 Testing using TAM automation on page 278 Saving automated test report data on page 282 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 209 Chapter 10 Automated Testing TrueSAM TrueSAM 210 Setting up TrueSAM To assist in the tu
498. the preamble start of frame delimiter and minimum inter frame gap A count of received stacked VLAN frames as defined in IEEE 802 p q since the test was started including errored frames Displays the SVLAN ID priority and DEI of each VLAN in the stack The service disruption time maximum inter frame gap when service switches to a protect line calculated in microseconds 304 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results Table 40 L2 Filter Stats results Continued Test Result Total Util VLAN ID VLAN User Priority VPLS Tunnel Label VPLS Tunnel Priority VPLS Tunnel TTL VPLS VC Label VPLS VC Priority VPLS VC TTL L2 Filter Counts results Description Average The average bandwidth utilized by the filtered traffic expressed as a percentage of the line rate of available bandwidth calculated over the time period since the last test restart Current The current bandwidth utilized by the filtered traffic expressed as a percentage of the line rate of available bandwidth This measurement is an average taken over the prior second of test time Minimum The minimum bandwidth utilized by the filtered traffic since the last test restart expressed as a percentage of the line rate of available bandwidth Peak The peak bandwidth utilized by the filtered traffic since the last test restart expressed as a percentag
499. the test indicates that the test failed If you intend to run the Packet Jitter test as part of the test you must also run the Throughput test The Packet Jitter test transmits traffic at the maximum bandwidth at which no frames were lost determined using the Throughput test for each frame length you selected The packet jitter is then measured after transmitting traffic for each frame length for the period of time that you specified as the Packet Jitter Trial Duration The test measures the average packet jitter and maximum packet jitter for each trial specified as the Number of Packet Jitter Trials and then each measurement is added to a running total After all of the trials are complete the running total is divided by the number of trials to come up with a total trial average measurement If the Throughput test reached the lowest bandwidth limit without ever success fully receiving all transmitted frames in otherworlds it lost frames the packet jitter measurements will also be unavailable Unavailable average or maximum average measurements are not included in the total trial average Packet Jitter results are presented statistically You can configure the test to optionally indicate whether the Packet Jitter test passed or failed To do so you specify the Packet Jitter Pass Threshold For each frame length you selected the test compares the average packet jitter for the trial to the value that you specified as the threshold
500. ther technician for analysis or analyze it yourself using the Wireshark protocol analyzer provided on the instrument For details see Capturing packets for analysis on page 87 In addition if capturing VoIP packets the data can by analyzed with the PVA 1000 utility from JDSU Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Streams Pipe soft key Using the action buttons Chapter 6 Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing Multiple Streams testing NOTE PVA 1000 is used for VoIP analysis only Streamlined filter configuration Ethernet IP and TCP UDP filter settings are available on the same setup tab reducing the need to move from tab to tab when you configure your test For details see Filtering received traffic using layer 4 criteria on page 134 Play audio clips When running layer 3 triple play applications you can transmit an actual audio stream pre recorded tone or voice This allows testing of the audio quality of a triple play network with specific traffic levels before deployment You can press the Streams Pipe soft key to observe summarized test results and information for each individual stream For details see Streams pipe multiple streams on page 148 and Streams pipe Triple Play streams on page 161 Depending on the application you are running a variety of views are provided for the pipe Overview This view provides key source and destination addresses and t
501. tialize the link see Specifying interface settings on page 41 3 Configure the test For details refer to Characterizing Triple Play services on page 163 Specifying layer 2 and layer 3 settings for Triple Play services on page 164 4 Select Results to return to the Main screen 5 Select Start Traffic to transmit the streams over the circuit Multiple Triple Play streams are transmitted For an overview of the test results presented when transmitting Triple Play traffic see Understanding Triple Play test results on page 161 If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so you can use it to run the SAM Complete test This test is a multi stream test based on ITU T Y 156sam that performs a two phase test First the test verifies whether each Ethernet service is properly configured Second multiple Ethernet service instances are verified simultaneously each meeting its assigned Committed Information Rate CIR See SAMComplete on page 250 Looping back multiple streams Loop back testing allows you to transmit traffic from one JDSU Ethernet test set and then loop the traffic back through a second unit on the far end of a circuit For details refer to Chapter 7 Loop back Testing Running the TCP Host script When running layer 3 and layer 4 multiple streams applications you can configure and run the TCP Host script to establish a stateful TCP connection with another device and
502. tiation UP 1000 FD Discovery Server Communications Channel Connect to Remote The last step is the connection to the remote test set When connected the Communications Channel display turns green Select Next the green arrow If Skip Connect is selected the config uration will advance to the next step without making the connection 7 The Local Network Settings page appears Do the following a If a multistream application is being configured select the number of services to be configured Select the Service Name for each of the services being configured This specifies which service you are configuring Select configure Triple Play if needed The Triple Play properties screen appears You can specify the properties for Voice Data HDTV and SDTV Repeat for each of the services defined Choose from the drop down list which encapsulation is desired None VLAN or Q in Q Select the Frame type desired DIX or 802 3 If layer 2 loopback is being tested select whether the test mode is to be Traffic or LBM Traffic Select the Layer for bit rate layer definition mode When L2 is selected the max value of the Load unit will remain in terms of L1 L2 utilization is affected by frame size and therefore a value may be selected that is greater than can actually be transmitted For Layer 2 applications select the frame size from the values in the drop down box To specify the MAC address for the destination
503. ting on page 108 MAC in MAC testing on page 114 Synchronous Ethernet testing on page 122 Transmitting and analyzing PTP 1588 traffic on page 122 Discovering traffic using J Profiler on page 125 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 21 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing About Ethernet and IP testing About Ethernet and IP testing If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so you can use it to provi sion Ethernet and IP service verify end to end connectivity and analyze link performance by simulating different traffic conditions Features and capabilities 22 Features and capabilities include the following when testing Ethernet or IP service 10 100 1000 1 Gigabit Ethernet 10 Gigabit LAN and 10 Gigabit WAN testing Testing on each of theses circuits is supported JDSU Discovery You can automatically detect other JDSU test equip ment on the network and determine their services and capabilities For details see Discovering another JDSU test instrument using J Connect on page 33 Cable diagnostics You can use the T BERD MTS 5800 to examine the state of the cables used to transmit 10 100 1000 electrical signals before you begin testing For details see Cable Diagnostics on page 30 Automatic traffic transmission You can optionally set up optical Ethernet IP and TCP UDP Traffic Multiple Streams and Triple Play applications to ge
504. ting Layer 2 testing Jumbo frames are not supported for 802 3 traffic per the 802 3 specifica tion 8 If you are configuring layer 2 traffic use the graphical display of a frame to specify the following Frame Label Setting DA Destination Type Destination MAC Loop Type SA Source Type User MAC Auto Increment MAC MACs in Sequence Value Select the type corresponding to the Destination Address that will be inserted in the transmit frames Unicast If you select Unicast the least sig nificant bit of the leftmost byte in the MAC address is forced to 0 Multicast If you select Multicast the least significant bit of the leftmost byte in the MAC address is forced to 1 Broadcast If you select Broadcast the MAC address is automatically FFFFFFFFFFFF If you specified Unicast or Multicast as the destination type enter the destina tion address using a 6 byte hexadeci mal format Select one of the following Unicast The unit will issue a uni cast message and loop up the device with the Destination MAC address that you specified Broadcast The unit will issue a broadcast hello message and will then send a unicast loop up to the first device on the circuit that responds to the hello Select Factory Default or User Defined If you specified User Defined enter the unicast source MAC address using a 6 byte hexadecimal format If you would like the unit to automati call
505. ting Manual iii Ethernet IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Contents About this Manual Xv Purpose and SCOPC 00 00 e cece eee eee eee xvi ASSUMPUOMNS toi 6 5 c 6c dee edea a a cee ete ee ied eee ee xvi Terminology sire eet oe ade ae eee i xvi Ethernet IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual xvii CONVENTIONS ic2605 0s ete eed ae ea ee Ae es xvii Safety and compliance information 2200eeees xviii Technical assistance 00 cece eee xix Chapter 1 Basic Testing 1 Step 1 Selecting a test application 00 eee 2 Step 2 Configuring atest 0c e eee 2 Step 3 Connecting the instrument to the circuit 3 Step 4 Starting the test 0 0 eee eee 3 Step 5 Viewing test results 0 0 00 eee 4 Setting the result group and category 0 0 0 cee eens 4 Additional test result information 2 0 0 0 0 00 cece eee ee 5 Running multiple tests 0 cee eee 5 Chapter 2 3 072G Optical Testing 7 About 3 072G Optical testing 00 cece eee eee 8 BER Testing 3 072G Optical Layer 1 20 cee eee eee eee 8 Monitoring 3 072G Optical Layer 1 00 e cece e eee eee 9 Chapter 3 CPRI OBSAI Testing 11 About CPRI OBSAI testing 0000 c eee eee ees 12 Layer 1 BER CPRI or OBSAI Testing 000 cece eee eeee 12 Layer 2 CPRI testing 20 e sees 15 Inserting
506. ting an optical interface select the Laser button 9 Verify that the green Signal Present and Link Active LEDs are illuminated 10 Select Start Traffic to transmit traffic over the circuit 11 Use the OAM action buttons to manually insert an AIS RDI or LBM AIS when AIS is enabled RDI when CCM is enabled or LBM when LBM is enabled 12 Observe the Ethernet Service OAM results You have analyzed L2 MPLS TP OAM To transmit and analyze L2 MPLS TP traffic If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the L2 MPLS TP application for the interface you are testing Refer to Table 9 on page 26 for a list of applications 2 Select the Setup soft key and then select the Ethernet tab 3 Specify the MPLS TP frame settings Frame Type Source Address Desti nation Address Tunnel Label Tunnel Priority Tunnel TTL VC Label VC Priority VC TTL and the customer frame in Data section For more information on the settings see Specifying Ethernet frame settings on page 43 4 Select Control Word and specify whether an optional control word fixed to all zeroes is inserted before the payload Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Using J Proof to verify layer 2 transparency Understanding transparent loopbacks Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 2 testing Press Results to return to the Main screen Connect the instrument to the circuit 5 6 7 Ifyou are testing an optical int
507. ting to a server as a client specify the IP address for the server The port that the TCP client is connecting to The port that the TCP server is listening on The TCP window size for the connection Be certain to indicate the unit of measure for the size KB MB or bytes In Client Mode the actual window size used may be lower and will be based on the negotiated MSS The maximum segment size in bytes sup ported by the connection This is typically 40 bytes less than the maximum transmission unit to accommodate the TCP IP header data The default is 1460 bytes The type of service supported by the connec tion Low Cost Low Delay Reliability or Throughput If you want to transmit traffic without a particu lar TOS select None 0x00 will be carried in the TOS field Indicate whether you intend to transmit a spe cific number of Bytes or traffic for a specific length of Time If you set the transmit mode to Bytes specify the number of bytes you intend to transmit If you set the transmit mode to Time specify the number of seconds that traffic will be transmitted Specify the number of connections to the server you want to establish Indicate whether you want the instrument to report throughput in kilobits Kb megabits Mb kilobytes KB or megabytes MB Specify the interval at which the instrument is to refresh reported test results The TCP Host settings are specified Ethernet Fibre Chan
508. tings Chapter 5 TCP UDP Testing Running TCP Host applications Before running the TCP Host application you must first configure the traffic streams To configure the traffic streams 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the Layer 4 Multiple Streams application for the circuit you are testing 2 Configure the streams by doing the following a Specify the load unit see Enabling multiple streams on page 152 for traffic carried on the streams b Enable the streams you intend to transmit see Enabling multiple streams on page 152 and then specify the traffic load for each stream see Specifying the load type for all streams on page 152 c Specify the settings that are common to all enabled streams see Specifying the load unit on a stream with burst on page 153 d Specify the layer 2 see Specifying layer 2 stream settings on page 156 layer 3 see Specifying layer 3 stream settings on page 157 and if applicable layer 4 settings see Specifying layer 4 stream settings on page 158 for each enabled stream You can optionally copy the settings for one stream to all other streams by selecting the Copy Setups to other Streams button Frame or packet characteristics will be copied Traffic load settings can not be copied you must specify the type of load Constant or Ramp for each individual stream on the Traffic tab The actual load for each enable stream is sp
509. tion you can configure your unit to generate transmit and analyze MPLS and VPLS encapsulated frames when testing and qualifying core and metro networks For details see Configuring MPLS over Ethernet tests on page 28 and Configuring Ethernet VPLS tests on page 27 Q in Q testing You can configure transmit and analyze traffic carrying SVLAN and CVLAN tags per IEEE 802 1ad to verify that your network can support and prioritize traffic for multiple customers without conflicts You can also specify a user defined TPID for the service provider when trans mitting and filtering Q in Q encapsulated traffic For details see Config uring Q in Q traffic on page 48 MiM testing lf you purchase the MiM testing option you can transmit and analyze MAC in MAC Ethernet traffic over a PBB Provider Backbone Bridged network to verify end to end connectivity and analyze link perfor mance For details see MAC in MAC testing on page 114 Link and service layer OAM testing OAM messages are supported enabling you to identify trunk problems so you can initiate a switch to a protection path When testing Ethernet First Mile OAM communications you can loop back an adjacent node or Ethernet demarcation device EDD and then exchange messages with the node or device to verify that auto discovery and error notification are functioning properly For details see OAM service and link layer testing on page 108
510. tion IP Address and Destination Port ATP Listen IP carried in received traffic with Unit A s Source IP UNIT A s Source IP Address Address and Source Port Sends ATP traffic back to ATP Listen Port Unit A UNIT A s Source Port Figure 32 ATP Listen Scenario LLB initiated from Unit B For details see Specifying TCP UDP settings for transmitted traffic on page 132 Specifying layer 2 and layer 3 settings Before you transmit layer 4 traffic you must first initialize the link and specify the appropriate layer 2 and layer 3 settings for the traffic such as the frame type frame encapsulation time to live and type of service After you initialize the link and specify the layer 2 and layer 3 settings you then specify the required layer 4 settings before transmitting the traffic over the circuit For details on link initialization see Specifying interface settings on page 41 For details on specifying layer 2 and layer 3 settings see Layer 2 testing on page 40 and Layer 3 testing on page 73 Specifying layer 4 settings After initializing the link and specifying layer 2 and layer 3 settings you specify the layer 4 settings before transmitting traffic over the circuit Step by step instructions are provided in this section for the following Specifying TCP UDP settings for transmitted traffic on page 132 Configuring the traffic load on page 133 Specifying the frame or pac
511. tion IP of the remote unit on the network or select Help me find the Destination IP which will scan the subnet for connected IP addresses After highlighting the desired unit in the list of available units found select Use selected NOTE If you are testing L3 services and are using DHCP to get an IP address for the remote unit communication issues may occur when using TrueSAM This is because the local end will switch tests on the far end as necessary in order to run the selected tests This test switching may cause the far end to acquire a new IP address in which case the near end would not be able to communicate with it anymore As an alternative you could try using longer DHCP leases on the far end so the IP address will be maintained for lon ger or use static IP addresses 213 Chapter 10 Automated Testing TrueSAM 214 To verify that the address entered is accessible select Ping After address has been confirmed select Connect to Channel to establish communica tions with the remote unit After the physical link has been established the button turns yellow NOTE Upon connection to the remote unit if there is some form of incompatibility a message will appear on the screen and make a suggestion to alleviate the situation e g upgrade the software on one of the units For assistance in this process see Synchronizing to the StrataSync Server in the Getting Started Manual shipped with this unit Select the
512. tions such as the Mac in Mac applications only appear if you purchased the associated testing option SFP transceivers are designed for specific interfaces and line rates Verify that the SFP you are using is designed to support the interface you are connected to for testing This information is provided on the Interface setup tab of the T BERD MTS 5800 user interface Performing tests Optical Overload Protection message Resolution Inconsistent test results Resolution Result values are blank Resolution 334 The following section addresses questions that may be asked about performing tests using the TBERD MTS 5800 When in optical mode the instrument displays a warning that the Optical Over load Protection is activated or the instrument does not detect a signal Applied power must not exceed the power level specified in the vendor speci fications provided for your SFP or XFP am getting inconsistent test results Verify the following Verify that your test leads are good and are connected properly for the test you are performing Verify that the correct timing source is selected on the Interface setup screen Verify that the correct line interface is selected Verify that the correct mapping tributaries and analysis rates are selected Why are the result values blank Results are blank if gating criteria have not been met Criteria examples include Signal Present Frame Sync Pr
513. tions or turning OFF the instrument You will lose the entire contents of the capture buffer if you launch a new application on the port that you are capturing packets on or if you turn your instrument OFF To ensure that the packets are stored save the capture buffer before changing applications or turning the instrument OFF After capturing packets you can save the packets in the buffer to the internal USB drive or export it to an external USB drive You can save the entire buffer or you can indicate that you want to save part of the buffer You can also option ally turn on gzip compression You can also optionally import a pcap file from an external USB drive to analyze it on your unit Many factors contribute to the length of time it takes to save a captured file For example if you configure a capture for a large buffer size for example 128 MB with small packets for example 46 byte ping packets it will take a long time to save the file due to the large number of packets stored in the buffer Essentially the packet density and the capture size determine the length of time it takes to save the packets If you are running a TCP Host application saving captured packets takes a long time therefore we recommend stopping the TCP Host application before saving the captured packets To save the packets in the capture buffer 1 Capture the packets see Capturing packets on page 90 2 Select Save Capture Buffer The Sav
514. tner indicates a reason for auto negotiation fail ure If auto negotiation succeeded the result will read NO Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Login Status results Implicit or Explicit E Port login Table 63 Login Status results Test Result Login Status RX ELP Accept RX ELP Ack1 RX ELP Reject RX ELP Request TX ELP Accept Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results The Login Status category displays results associated with the login status between two Fibre Channel devices Table 63 describes each of the results when using an Implicit or Explicit E Port login Implicit or Explicit E Port login Description Indicates the status of the Fibre Channel login process by displaying one of the follow ing IN PROGRESS COMPLETE FAILED LOOP Count of accept messages received in response to login requests Count of acknowledgements received in response to login requests or accept reject messages Count of rejections received in response to login requests Count of login requests received from another JDSU compliant Ethernet tester or a dis tance extension device Count of accept messages transmitted in response to login requests from another JDSU compliant Ethernet tester or a distance extension device TX ELP Ack Count of acknowledgements transmitted in response to login requests or accept reject messages from another JDSU co
515. to communicate with another Ethernet device when requesting video traffic using IGMP For details on the various connectors used to connect to the circuit refer to the printed Getting Started User s Manual that shipped with your unit For details on specifying the information required to establish a link to another device see Specifying interface settings on page 41 of Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Specifying Ethernet frame and IP settings 184 Before you transmit traffic you can specify the frame characteristics of the traffic such as the frame type DIX 802 3 encapsulation VLAN Q in Q and IP settings such as IP type gateway and subnet mask To specify Ethernet frame settings 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the test appli cation for the interface you are testing Refer to Table 21 on page 183 fora list of applications 2 Select the Setup soft key and then select the Ethernet IP tab 3 In Encapsulation select one of the following None If you do not want to encapsulate transmitted frames select None VLAN If you want to transmit VLAN tagged frames select VLAN and then refer to Configuring VLAN tagged traffic on page 47 Q in Q If you want to transmit VLAN stacked Q in Q frames select Q in Q and then refer to Configuring Q in Q traffic on page 48 4 In Frame Type specify the type of frame you are transmitting DIX or 802 3
516. to filter traffic for a particular service type or destination port select the box to the left of Destination Ser vice Type To analyze traffic destined for one of the pre defined specific service types select the type The port number is assigned automatically for you To analyze traffic destined for a different port select User Defined then specify the port number If you would like to define a second filter specify the settings for Filter 2 If you want to specify received payload settings see Filtering traffic using payload criteria on page 57 If you need to specify other settings for the test select the appropriate tab otherwise press Results to return to the Main screen The unit is configured to analyze received traffic satisfying the layer 4 filter criteria Transmitting layer 4 traffic 136 After you configure the layer 4 settings you are ready to transmit traffic over the circuit To transmit layer 4 traffic 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the Layer 4 Traffic application for the circuit you are testing refer to Table 15 on page 129 for a list of applications Specify the settings required to initialize the link see Specifying interface settings on page 41 Configure the instrument as appropriate for your test see the appropriate procedures below Specifying Ethernet frame settings on page 43 Specifying Ethernet filter
517. to the local and remote instrument must be defined a The first screen specifies the local settings These parameters are Frame Type and IP Settings Source IP Gateway and Subnet Mask Other optional settings are accessed via the Advanced button they are MAC Address Source and Number ARP Mode and Source IP type When all local settings have been specified select Next the green arrow b The Remote configuration screen defines the number of VLANs and the Destination IP To verify the Destination instrument is available select the Ping button To establish the connection with the remote instrument select the Connect to Remote button If the test is being configured for future use and or the remote instrument is not available to continue with the configuration select the Skip Connect right arrow button 4 The next set of parameters to be defined pertain to network configuration Depending upon the symmetry scheme selected screens defining the following will appear in sequence Unit Parameter Options Layer 2 Frame Type DIX 802 3 Encapsulation NONE VLAN Q in Q Stacked VLAN Source IP User entry Default Gateway User entry Subnet Mask User entry Advanced Source MAC ARP Mode L3 L4 Source IP type L3 L4 Layer 3 L3 amp IP Prioritization NONE L4 applica TOS tions only DSCP PPPoE TOS User entry Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 10 Automated Testing
518. to verify that the GPS is able to provide the stable signal required for this use Figure 24 illustrates the required connections for a CDMA receiver connected to an MTS5800 Right side view Top view Figure 24 CDMA connection for one way delay measurements To connect a CDMA receiver to your instrument 1 Verify that power on your instrument is OFF 2 Connect one end of the Ethernet cable that was supplied in your acces sory kit to the serial RJ 45 port of the CDMA receiver 3 Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to the RJ 45 port on your instrument 4 Connect one end of the SMA to SMA cable to the SMA connector on the CDMA receiver 5 Connect the other end of the SMA to SMA cable to the SMA connector on your instrument 6 Repeat step 1 through step 5 on the second instrument The receivers are connected to your instruments and ready to be synchro nized The GPS receiver provides a Time of Day ToD and a 1PPS signal which are used to generate accurate time stamps that are encoded into the data trans mitted between the local and remote instruments To connect the GPS receiver to your instrument 1 Verify that power on your instrument is OFF 2 Connect the ToD signal between the GPS receiver and the instrument using the RJ45 to DB9 cable from the DB9 Time Port on the GPS receiver to the RJ45 serial connector RS 232 on the instrument as shown in Figure 25 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing
519. tomatically taken out of loop up mode Before verifying layer 2 transparency you must place the traffic originating instrument into J Proof mode specify the settings for the outgoing loop up frame and configure the outgoing control frames To configure the traffic originating instrument 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the Layer 2 Traffic test application for the interface you are testing Refer to Table 7 on page 25 for a list of layer 2 applications 2 Select the Setup soft key and then select the Interface tab to specify settings that control the Ethernet interface see Specifying interface settings on page 41 3 Select the Ethernet tab and then do the following a In Test Mode select J Proof b Specify the remaining settings that define the characteristics of the transmitted loop back frame see Specifying Ethernet frame settings on page 43 If you are looping up a specific test instrument be certain to specify a unicast destination address for the frame Bear in mind that the encapsulation settings for outgoing control frames as opposed to the loop up frame are specified on the J Proof tab for each type of control frame 4 Select the J Proof tab By default a single test frame appears in the frame list You can specify a name for the frame the control protocol format encapsulation settings the number of frame of this type to transmit the count the frame rate and the timeou
520. tor mode in IP Version select IPv6 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 81 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 3 testing Transmitting and analyzing IP 82 traffic 7 b In Address Filter select one of the following Single Direction To pass through the filter traffic must satisfy the source and destination address criteria you specified for the filter to be reflected in the L3 Filter Counts and L3 Filter Stats result categories Either Direction The filter will not care which direction the traffic is coming from therefore the source address carried in the filtered traffic can be the source address of the near end unit or port or the source address of the far end unit or port Traffic from either source will be reflected in the L3 Filter Counts and L3 Filter Stats result categories c On the illustration of the IP packet select the Traffic Class Next Header Source Address or Destination Address field and then enter the filter criteria This is the criteria that must be carried in the analyzed filtered traffic For descriptions of each of these settings see Specifying transmitted IPv6 packet settings on page 80 If you want the instrument to monitor and analyze live Ethernet traffic in the panel on the left side of the tab select Rx Payload then turn Payload Analysis Off The instrument will suppress lost frames LF in their associ ated result counts and as triggers for LEDs If
521. tru ment is required at the remote location d Select Next the green arrow 5 The Local Settings page appears Do the following a Specify the IP Settings Source IP Gateway and Subnet Mask for Remote Connections Channel to Far End This is not applicable for Loopback testing so there is nothing to define 254 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual c Chapter 10 Automated Testing SAMComplete Advanced users Select the Advanced button to specify other settings Frame Type MAC Address ARP mode Source IP Type Source MAC User Source MAC Auto Increment MAC of MACs in sequence Disable IP Ether Type Disable OS Results Select Next the green arrow For Loopback go to step 7 on page 256 6 The Connect to Remote page appears a b Specify the type of tagging employed by selecting the radio button for the desired type If your network is using a discovery server click the Discovery Server settings link and then do the following For more information on the discovery server see the Service Discovery Daemon User Guide Check the box next to Enable Discovery Server The discovery server provides the destination IP to the T BERD MTS 5800 so it can locate the remote test set Specify the server IP and port and the PassPhrase Enter the requested lease time 1 1440 minutes 24 hrs The Lease Time Granted is the value returned from the discovery server that indicates how long the leas
522. ts ARP settings Address swapping Filter criteria on the loop back unit Loop types LBM Traffic VLAN and Q in Q traffic VPLS labels VPLS service provider and customer destination addresses Chapter 7 Loop back Testing About Loop back testing The following concepts apply when configuring loop back applications If you are looping back layer 3 or layer 4 traffic and you want to use ARP to obtain the units MAC addresses be certain to enable ARP on both units If ARP is disabled on all units on the circuit you can issue a broadcast request to loop up the first device that responds rather than a specific unit On the loop back unit received frames and packets are looped through to the transmitter after the destination and source MAC addresses layer 2 3 and 4 loop backs IP addresses layer 3 and 4 loop backs and if applicable port numbers layer 4 loop backs are swapped Only Unicast frames that pass the filter criteria specified on the loop back unit are looped back to the local unit If the Ethernet filter settings are all Don t Care and or the IP and TCP UDP filters are both disabled traffic carrying any payload will pass through the filter for analysis When configuring the local traffic generating unit you can specify that you want to issue a Unicast loop up command or a Broadcast loop up command If you are running an Ethernet application Unicast commands are used to loop up a specific test inst
523. ts on page 287 CPRI OBSAI Counts results on page 287 CPRI L1 Inband Protocol results on page 288 CPRI OBSAI Payload BERT results on page 288 If the instrument loses any of the LED events the green Status LED extin guishes and the red Alarm LED in the history column illuminates indicating an error condition has occurred Table 26 describes the LEDs and indicates whether each LED is applicable when testing a CPRI or OBSAI circuit Table 26 CPRI OBSAI LEDs LED Indicates CPRI OBSAI Slgnal Present Green T y A signal is present Red Received signal has been lost since the last test start or restart Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 285 Chapter 11 Test Results CPRI OBSAI test results Table 26 CPRI OBSAI LEDs LED Indicates CPRI OBSAI Sync Acquired Green V V Synchronization is estab lished Red Synchronization has been lost since the last test restart Frame Sync Green y V Frame alignment has been achieved Red Frame alignment has been lost Pattern Sync Green y y Synchronization with the received test patterns has been achieved Red Synchronization has been lost since the last test restart Interface Signal results Table 27 describes the CPRI and OBSAI Interface Signal results Table 27 CPRI OBSAI Interface Signal Results Test Result Description Optical Rx Level Displays the receive level in dBm when testing
524. ts can be observed graphically by selecting the All Streams group and then the cate gory with the results you want to observe When observing graphical results it s helpful to view the entire result window by selecting View gt Result Windows gt Single Figure 36 illustrates the Throughput Graph for multiple traffic streams All Streams Throughput Graph SS A Q amp Scale Mean a EI 160 120 N 100 80 x 60 40 20 0 T T T T T T T T T T T T T 1 00 00 00 00 00 05 00 00 10 00 00 15 Time ILI 2 93 4 85 6 7 8 9 10 XTCP Host L4 Figure 36 Throughput Graph Multiple Streams application A color coded legend appears under the graph indicating which color is used to present results for each of the analyzed streams In Figure 36 the green lines provide results for Stream 3 the blue lines provide results for Stream 1 and the bright pink line provides results for Stream 8 To simplify the graph you can select the legend and then choose the data that you want to observe for each analyzed stream and hide the rest You can also focus on a subset of streams by hiding those that you do not want to observe anymore Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 6 Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing Multiple Streams testing To change graph properties 1 Select the legend at the bottom of the graph see Figure 37 Pili 283 4 95 6 87 8 29 10 STCP Host L4 Figu
525. ts for analysis How long will it take to save the PCAP file Analyzing the packets using 96 Wireshark The length of time it takes to save the PCAP file varies based on a number of factors including the capture buffer size the length of the packets captured the system resources used and whether or not you chose to compress the file Table 14 provides estimates for a 100 full 256 MB buffer for two packet lengths The estimates assume you did not compress the file and that you are not running another application on the other port Table 14 Estimated time to save a 256 MB PCAP file Packet Length Estimated time to save 64 bytes 9 minutes 512 byte frames 8 minutes After saving the packets in the capture buffer to a PCAP file you can analyze the packets in detail on the instrument using the Wireshark protocol analyzer Files exceeding 16 MB should not be analyzed on the instrument large files should be exported for analysis on another device If you attempt to analyze a file with more than 50 000 packets the instrument will alert you that the file should be exported for analysis One way to think of the buffer size in relationship to the length of packets is in terms of density A small 1 MB buffer populated with 256 byte packets is not as dense as a 1 MB buffer populated with 64 byte packets because less 256 byte packets are required to fill the 1 MB buffer Due to the reduced density of the file opening the file for
526. tted and the rate at which they are expected to be received Specifies the local and peer MEG End Point ID Specifies the Maintenance Domain Level Specifies whether the Domain ID needs to be specified Specifies the Maintenance Association c Inthe options list on the left side of the tab select AIS and then specify the settings Setting AIS State Maintenance Domain Level AIS Rate Description Specifies whether to enable AIS Specifies the Maintenance Domain Level Specifies the rate at which AIS indications are sent It is fixed to 1 second if the Label type is Label 14 OAL d Inthe options list on the left side of the tab select LBM LBR except when Y 1711 MPLS was selected for type and then specify the settings Setting LBM LBR ping Maintenance Domain Level MEG End Point ID Maintenance Association ID Description Specifies whether to transmit receive LBM LBR messages Specifies the Maintenance Domain Level Specifies the local and peer MEG End Point ID Specifies the Maintenance Association e Inthe options list on the left side of the tab if the Common Header type is set to Y 1711 MPLS select CV FFD to turn on and set the Connec tivity Verification and Fast Forward Detection settings Setting CV FFD Type LSP TTSI LSR ID IPv6 LSP ID Tunnel ID Expected LSP TTSI Description Specifies whether the Connectivity Verification is activated Specifies the type of Connect
527. ttings for Triple Play services Transmitting multiple Triple 164 Play streams NOTE Increasing the sampling rate reduces required bandwidth increasing the number of calls utilizes additional bandwidth If you utilize all of the bandwidth for voice data you can not transmit SDTV HDTV or data traffic at the same time IMPORTANT The Codec type on the receiving and transmitting unit must match for the audio to work properly Video service If you intend to emulate and analyze SDTV and or HDTV traffic select the corresponding checkbox and then specify the number of channels and the compression rate MPEG 2 at 4 00 Mbps or 19 00 Mbps or MPEG 4 at 2 00 Mbps or 7 00 Mbps NOTE Each additional SDTV channel increases the rate by 4 0 or 2 0 Mbps Each additional HDTV channel increases the rate by 19 0 or 7 0 Mbps If you utilize all of the bandwidth for video data you can not transmit voice and data traffic with the video traffic Data streams If you intend to emulate and analyze data traffic select one or both of the checkboxes and then configure the rate up to the maximum utilization threshold and a constant or ramped load of traffic for the selected data streams If you select Ramp specify the Time Step in seconds and Load Step in Mbps Finally specify the frame size to transmit in Bytes or select the Random check box to transmit frames of randomly generated sizes After specifying the settings sele
528. tton will display test results for each moni tored voice stream Navigation Tip You can always return to the layered view by setting the results group to Summary and the category to Status Ethernet IP TCP UDP Fibre Chan VoIP and Video Testing Manual Layered View Button Colors Chapter 8 VoIP Testing Understanding the graphical user interface Figure 49 illustrates the view when the instrument has lost the physical connection so there is a history of errors at the physical layer History Transaction Log i Ethernet Quality No Signal Detected Figure 49 Layered View Errored physical link Table 20 explains each of the colors used for the current and history buttons Table 20 Current and History Button Colors Color Green Yellow Red Current Indicates that all results are OK for that particular quality group For an example see Figure 48 on page 180 Indicates that at least one result at that particular layer triggered a minor alarm or error based on the established thresholds Indicates that at least one result at that particular layer triggered a major alarm or error based on the established thresholds History N A Indicates that at least one result occurred during the test that triggered a minor alarm or error based on the established thresholds Indicates that at least one result triggered a major alarm or error based on the established thresholds during the
529. turn to the Main screen Connect the instrument to the circuit 8 If you are testing an optical interface select the Laser button Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Inserting errors or pause frames Measuring round trip delay and packet jitter Measuring service disruption time Monitoring layer 2 MiM traffic Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing MAC in MAC testing 9 Select Start Traffic to transmit traffic over the circuit 10 Verify that the green Signal Present Sync Acquired Link Active and PBB Frame Detect LEDs are illuminated 11 At a minimum observe the test results in the Summary Status result cate gory You have analyzed layer 2 MiM traffic Action buttons on the Main screen allow you to insert errors and pause frames into the traffic stream If you turn on a particular error insertion rate the error insertion continues even after you restart a test or change the test configura tion For detailed instructions on error and pause frame insertion see Inserting errors or pause frames on page 99 You can measure round trip delay and packet jitter by transmitting traffic carrying an Acterna payload Frames with an Acterna payload provide time stamps enabling the unit to calculate the delay and jitter For instructions on looping back a unit see Chapter 7 Loop back Testing For detailed instructions see Measuring round trip delay or packet jitter on page 101 You can use
530. tus of the loop back the messages will identify each unit using the identifier For details see Specifying a unit identifier on page 172 174 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 7 Loop back Testing Using Loop Up to initiate a loop back from the local unit To initiate a loop back from the local unit 1 If you haven t already done so launch the layer 2 layer 3 layer 4 triple play or multiple streams application for the circuit you are testing see Step 1 Selecting a test application on page 2 Refer to the sections below for a list of available applications Ethernet and IP applications on page 25 MiM applications on page 25 TCP and UDP applications on page 129 Multiple Streams testing on page 147 On the local unit specify the link initialization settings see Specifying interface settings on page 41 On the local unit specify the settings for transmitted traffic Depending on the application you selected see Layer 2 testing on page 40 Layer 3 testing on page 73 Configuring layer 2 MAC in MAC tests on page 115 Specifying layer 4 settings on page 131 Enabling multiple streams on page 152 Specifying layer 2 stream settings on page 156 Specifying layer 3 stream settings on page 157 Specifying layer 4 stream settings on page 158 Specifying la
531. ty result indicates the polarity of each MDI pair on active 1G elec trical links indicating how each pair is physically wired to the unit s port Normal indicates a normal polarity for the pair Inverted indicates an inverted polarity for the pair The Pair results for 1G electrical links provide the current pair assignments for the link MDI pairs for 1G electrical links are assigned during the process of auto negotiation therefore if for any reason the link becomes inactive and then the link is re established the pair assignments could potentially change For example the first time you establish a link after auto negotiation the following pairs could be assigned Table 35 MDI pair assignments MDIO MDI1 MDI2 MDI3 1 2 3 6 4 5 7 8 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 295 Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results If the link goes down becomes inactive and then is re established the following pairs could be assigned Table 36 MDIX pair assignments MDIO MDI1 MDI2 MDI3 3 6 1 2 7 8 4 5 SLA KPI The Summary SLA KPI results provide the results relevant to the Service Level Agreement SLA and Key Performance Indicators KPI Interface results Table 37 describes the Interface results Table 37 Interface results Test Result Description Link Loss Seconds Number of seconds during which the link was down lost Local Fault Seconds Displays the number of test se
532. uccessful and link is established with the instruments link partner Red A link to the instrument s link partner has been lost since the last test restart Green No local faults have occurred since the last test restart Red A local fault occurred since the last test restart Only applicable when testing 10 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces Ethernet IP TCP UDP Fibre Channel Pause Frame Detect Green Pause frames have been detected Red Pause frames were detected and then were not present for gt 1 second PBB Frame Detect Remote Fault Detect Signal Present Green PBB MAC in MAC frames have been detected Red PBB frames were detected and then were not present for gt 1 second Green No remote faults have been detected Red The E1 Tester is transmitting a remote fault indi cation in response to the receipt of a remote fault indication from its link partner Only applicable when testing 10 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces Green A signal is present Red Received signal has been lost since the last test start or restart 292 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Table 33 Ethernet IP and TCP UDP LEDs Continued LED Status SVLAN Frame Detect Sync Acquired Indicates Green NA Red An error has been recorded by the instrument as shown in a red Summary Status window
533. ugh or Dual Through mode select the tab corresponding to the second SFP jack and then repeat step a through step c 3 Connect the module to the circuit On the Main screen select the Laser button 5 Verify that the green Signal Present and Pattern Sync LEDs are illumi nated 6 Ata minimum observe the test results in the following categories Summary Error Stats Layer 1 BER testing is complete When running the L1 BERT application your LEDs may indicate that you have L1 Pattern Sync without word sync The word sync status is indicated on your unit using a red Syne Acquired LED if word sync was obtained then lost or an extinguished LED if word sync was never obtained since starting your test This is usually due to a temporary loss of signal or word sync when receiving an L1 pattern that does not contain Fibre Channel compliant link characters for example IDLE To resolve this stop transmitting the L1 pattern momen tarily to allow the receiver to regain sync and then begin transmitting the pattern again If this occurs be certain to determine why the signal or word sync was lost temporarily Use the layer 1 BERT monitor application to analyze the received signal NOTE To pass the signal through to the unit s transmitter you must turn the laser on using the button on the Main screen To monitor layer 1 BERT 1 Using the Test Menu select the layer 1 BERT monitor through test appli cation for the inter
534. un checked Payload filter criteria is specified Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 57 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 2 testing 58 Specifying traffic load settings Transmitting a constant load Before transmitting traffic you can specify the type of traffic load the unit will transmit Constant Bursty or Ramp The settings vary depending on the type of load When configuring a load you can specify the bandwidth of the trans mitted traffic in 0 001 increments NOTE If you configure the instrument to transmit a bursty or ramped load of 100 the instrument is designed to transmit slightly less than 100 traffic 99 999 for 10 Gigabit Ethernet 99 996 for 1 Gigabit Ethernet and 99 99 for 10 100 1000 Ethernet as a safeguard against overrunning net work elements that can not support 100 If you are certain the elements can support true 100 traffic select the Allow flooding check box when configuring the Constant load With a constant load the instrument transmits frames continuously with a fixed bandwidth utilization You can specify the load as a percent or a bit rate See Figure 13 Bandwidth configurable either as or in kbps or Mbps Time gt Figure 13 Constant traffic When you setup a constant traffic load if you are running a standard Ethernet application you can specify the bandwidth as a percentage of the line rate BW or at a specific bit rat
535. up soft key then select the Filters tab 3 Inthe panel on the left side of the tab select Basic then set the Filter Mode to Detailed 4 Specify the Ethernet and the IP filter settings see Specifying Ethernet filter settings on page 49 Specifying IPv4 filter settings on page 79 or Specifying IPv6 filter settings on page 81 of Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 5 TCP UDP Testing Specifying layer 4 settings 5 To specify layer 4 filter settings in the panel on the left side of the tab select TCP UDP and then specify values for the following settings Setting Parameter Filter Enable Ifyou want to filter received traffic using layer 4 criteria select Enable If you want to ana lyze only layer 4 traffic you must enable the filter If you do not want to filter received traffic using layer 4 criteria select Disable Protocol To analyze TCP traffic select TCP if filter is Enabled To analyze UDP traffic select UDP To analyze all layer 4 traffic select Don t Care Port Filter Single Direction To pass through the filter traffic must satisfy the source and destination port criteria you specified for the filter to be reflected in the L4 Filter Counts and L4 Filter Stats result categories Either Direction The filter will not care which direction the traffic is coming from therefore the source port ca
536. ur instrument for testing graphical displays of Fibre user interface Channel frames are provided on the setup tabs for the application you selected You can specify frame characteristics for transmitted and filtered traffic by selecting the corresponding field on the graphic and then entering the value for transmitted or filtered traffic Colored and white fields can be edited fields in gray can not be modified 196 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 9 Fibre Channel Testing Configuring layer 1 tests Figure 54 illustrates the Frame Details for a layer 2 traffic test Interface Fibre Channel Fibre Channel Filter Traffic Timed Test Tx Payload Acterna a Frame Length 256 Frame Channel Details Figure 54 Frame Details For details on specifying frame characteristics see Specifying Fibre Channel frame settings on page 201 and Specifying Fibre Channel filter settings on page 202 Fibre Channel test This release supports the applications listed in Table 22 when testing applications 1 Gigabit 2 Gigabit and 4 Gigabit Fibre Channel circuits Table 22 Fibre Channel applications Signal Rate Application Test Mode 1Gig 2Gig and 4Gig Layer 1 BERT Terminate Monitor Through Dual Through Layer 2 Patterns Terminate Layer 2 Traffic Terminate Monitor Through Dual Through a You must use two Fibre Channel SFPs to test in monitor through and dual through
537. urst Granularity in kB To further refine the Back to Back test select Set advanced Back to Back settings and then choose the Ignore Pause Frames checkbox Select Back to return to previous screen f Forthe Burst Test screen select the Burst Test Type either Committed Burst Size CBS Policing MEF 34 or Burst Hunt and the CBS in kB Upstream and or Downstream for non symmetric test CBS Duration and Burst Sizes kB Upstream and or Down stream for non symmetric test depending on which Burst test type is chosen g For the Extended Load test screen enter Throughput Scaling and Frame Length values Select Next the green arrow h For the Buffer Credit screen FC only enter the Flow Control Login Type Implicit or Explicit the Max Buffer Size and the Duration of each test in seconds When the individual tests have been configured select Next the green arrow 4 The overall test control configuration items need to be set a On the Test Duration screen specify whether all tests are to have common durations or are individual tests to have their durations speci fied separately by selecting Yes or No radio button If Yes is chosen specify the Durations and the Number of Trials Select Next the green arrow b On the Test Thresholds screen specify whether Pass Fail indications are to be shown for individual tests and what is the pass fail Threshold value Upstream and or Downstream for non symmetric test for each
538. ustomer To specify an address for each stream in Source Type select Static Per Stream and then specify the addresses on the tabs corresponding to each enabled stream see Specifying layer 3 stream settings on page 157 Layer 4 streams Specify the source MAC address enable or disable ARP mode and then specify the source IP address default gateway and subnet mask for the customer The source MAC and IP addresses will be carried in each enabled stream of traffic Under Layer 4 indicate whether you want to use the unit s source IP address as the ATP Listen IP Address by setting the ATP Listen IP Type to Auto Obtained or select User Defined and then assign your own address If you do not want to use the default fill pattern AA to populate the payloads specify a different pattern Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 155 Chapter 6 Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing Multiple Streams testing Specifying layer 2 stream settings Automatically incrementing configured MAC addresses 156 or VLAN IDs 4 To specify the parameters located in the Stream Selection section of the window follow the procedures for Specifying the load type for all streams on page 152 Specifying the load unit on a stream with burst on page 153 or Specifying the load unit for multiple streams on page 154 5 10 GigE applications only In Delay indicate whether you want to make measurements using
539. ut their user interfaces They are compat ible with the J Proof applications When a JDSU Ethernet test instrument sends a standard loop up message the receiving test instrument only loops back unicast test frames that satisfy its filter criteria Pause frames control frames and broadcast or multicast frames are not looped back When you verify layer 2 transparency you need the receiving test instrument to loopback all test frames including control frames and frames carrying a broadcast or multicast address To do so you must place the traffic originating instrument into J Proof transparency mode and then specify the settings for the outgoing loop up frame When the receiving instrument receives the trans parent loop up frame it is automatically placed into transparent loopback mode and it returns all received test frames You do not need to specify filter settings on the receiving instrument Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 69 Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 2 testing Configuring the traffic originating instrument 70 When initiating a transparent loopback from the traffic originating instrument you can send the loop up frame to a specific test instrument by specifying the appropriate unicast destination address or you can send a broadcast loopup frame to loop up the first test instrument that replies within the broadcast boundary When the test is completed the far end instrument is au
540. utilized by the received traffic since starting the test expressed in megabits per second Rx Mbps Min The minimum bandwidth utilized by the received traffic since starting the test expressed in megabits per second Rx Mbps Max The maximum bandwidth utilized by the received traffic since starting the test expressed in megabits per second Tx Mbps Cur The current bandwidth utilized by the transmitted traffic expressed in megabits per sec ond This measurement is an average taken over the prior second of test time Tx Mbps Avg The average bandwidth utilized by the transmitted traffic since starting the test expressed in megabits per second Tx Mbps Min The minimum bandwidth utilized by the transmitted traffic since starting the test expressed in megabits per second Tx Mbps Max The maximum bandwidth utilized by the transmitted traffic since starting the test Rx Send Wind Clsd Cnt expressed in megabits per second Count of times the far end window closed as a result of reaching its limit Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 327 Chapter 11 Test Results Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP results Table 68 Detailed L4 Stats results Continued Test Result Description Tx Total Retrans Frames Count of the total number of frames retransmitted Send Window Cur The current window size This measurement is an average taken over the prior second of test time Send Window Min The minimum window size util
541. utomatically answered and the following information is logged Time the call was answered Caller s IP address Time the call ended 3 Tap the Hang up action button to end the call Capturing packets for analysis Understanding the Capture toolbar Specifying filter settings Capturing packets If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so you can use it to capture transmitted and received packets save it on the instrument or to an external USB key and then either send the packets to another technician for analysis or analyze it yourself using the PVA 1000 VoIP Analyzer software The buttons on the Capture toolbar illustrated in Figure 53 are used to enable or disable the capture feature start and stop the capture process save the packets in the capture buffer to the internal USB drive or an external drive or launch Wireshark or J Mentor to analyze the packets on the instrument Main Capture Enable Filters Save Capture an Capture Active Buffer Wireshark lt j J Mentor Buffer fj 38 Figure 53 Capture Toolbar The Buffer Full gauge shows the percentage of the available buffer capacity that is used When you capture traffic at a high bandwidth or specify a small buffer size if you configure the capture to wrap overwrite the oldest packets in the buffer with new captured packets in 1 MB increments the buffer gauge may appear to jump around If you do not wrap the packets
542. ve the bandwidth utilized and a count of transmitted received and lost frames for each individual stream Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 147 Chapter 6 Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing Multiple Streams testing Multiple Streams test This release supports the Multiple Streams applications listed in Table 16 applications Loop back applications are listed in Table 16 on page 148 of Chapter 7 Loop back Testing Table 16 Multiple Streams applications Circuit Application Test Mode 10 100 1000 Layer 2 Multiple Streams Terminate Layer 3 Multiple Streams Terminate Layer 4 Multiple Streams Terminate 1GigE Optical Layer 2 Multiple Streams Terminate Layer 3 Multiple Streams Terminate Layer 4 Multiple Streams Terminate 10GigE LAN Layer 2 Multiple Streams Terminate Layer 3 Multiple Streams Terminate Layer 4 Multiple Streams Terminate 10GigE WAN Layer 2 Multiple Streams Terminate Layer 3 Multiple Streams Terminate Layer 4 Multiple Streams Terminate Understanding the LED panel When you select a Multiple Streams application the module provides LEDs in the panel for each enabled traffic streams see Figure 33 FramesiPackets Fi 5 a gt gt a a Figure 33 Multiple Stream LEDs Layer 4 If you run a Multiple Streams application in Dual Terminate mode LEDs are provided for both ports Streams pipe multiple When running multiple streams applications you can use the Streams Pipe streams soft
543. ving instrument to observe test results for traffic sharing the same B TAG tag settings for the backbone frame I TAG tag settings for the customer frames customer frame settings such as the frame type encapsulation values and the pattern carried in the customer frame payload When the instrument is configured for MiM testing a subset of the standard layer 2 test results is provided for the backbone and customer frames see CPRI OBSAI test results on page 285 of Chapter 11 Test Results When observing results for the backbone frames B TAG and I TAG information is also provided In addition to the standard LEDs provided for layer 2 Ethernet testing a PBB Frame Detect LED is available which indicates whether the unit has detected MiM traffic on the circuit Before transmitting or analyzing traffic on a PBB trunk you must select the appropriate MAC in MAC MiM test application specify interface settings specify frame and frame filter settings and then configure the traffic load Instructions are provided in this section for the following Specifying interface settings on page 115 Specifying Ethernet frame settings on page 115 Specifying Ethernet filter settings for MiM traffic on page 118 Specifying traffic load settings on page 120 Before you transmit layer 2 MiM traffic you can specify interface settings that provide the speed and duplex settings for 10 100 1000 Ethernet traf
544. vision network elements for example switches and routers from a Mobility Switching Center MSC by issuing TL1 commands See Figure 92 VLAN Z Remote D Switch VLAN N Trunk port carries traffic for both VLANs 802 1q tags are added to contain the VLAN ID Switch Non trunk ports carry traffic to a portion of the customer s network No 802 1q tags are OR Test Access Mgmt in this traffic Serial Port Via Ethernet Test Port Test Access Mgmt Test Instrument Figure 92 Provisioning NE using TAM 278 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Before testing Connecting to the management network Chapter 10 Automated Testing Testing using TAM automation You can also use it to emulate a router on the network end of the Ethernet Transport Service ETS then run an RFC 2554 script see Automated RFC 2544 on page 227 The script puts a Network Interface Device NID in loop back mode then transmits traffic from the instrument The NID loops the traffic back to the instrument where you can analyze results for the traffic to deter mine link characteristics such as throughput and latency Test Instrument ETS 2 VLAN y LAN eis Figure 93 Router emulation configuration Before connecting to an NE using the TAM tool establish a Username and Password for the test instrument Be certain to grant privileges that allow the inst
545. will not run System Recovery results are presented statistically and graphically The Frame Lost test measures bandwidth until no frames are lost For each frame length you select beginning at the maximum test bandwidth you specified the instrument transmits traffic for the amount of time you spec ified as the Frame Loss Trial Duration If frames are lost during that time frame the instrument reduces the transmitted bandwidth by the amount you specified as the Frame Loss Bandwidth Granularity and then transmits the traffic at the reduced bandwidth The test decreases the transmitted bandwidth accordingly until either no frames are lost during the duration specified or the transmitted bandwidth reaches the lowest bandwidth limit Specified as the Frame Loss Bandwidth Granularity If the instrument succeeds in transmitting frames without losing any at a partic ular bandwidth it then reduces the bandwidth one more time by the granu larity amount If no frames are lost the test stops If frames are lost the instrument starts the entire process over again until two successive trials occur without losing frames Frame Loss results are presented in a tabular format illustrating the frame loss rate versus the percent of the bandwidth This test determines the maximum back to back burst size supported by the network under test Using the frame length and other settings such as the frame type and encap sulation the instrument cal
546. wing Setting Description Proxy Mode Specify whether your circuit has a Static Proxy or No Proxy Address Type If your circuit uses a static Proxy specify whether the address is an IP Address or DNS Name Proxy IP Enter the IP address of the proxy This is the outbound proxy or the device from which the instrument will send and receive all SIP mes sages If you have a network that uses one server for registration and another for placing and receiving calls the Proxy IP specifies the address for placing and receiving calls Proxy User name Enter a user name used to access the Proxy Proxy Password Enter the password associated with the user name 186 Ethernet IP TCP UDP Fibre Chan VoIP and Video Testing Manual Setting DNS Name Proxy Port Call Control Port Chapter 8 VoIP Testing Specifying VoIP settings Description If the address type is DNS Name enter the DNS name for the proxy Enter the proxy port number Enter the call control port number 5 If you selected SCCP call control in the panel on the left side of the tab select Call Manager and then specify the following Setting Call Manager IP Call Manager Port Description Enter the IP address of the call manager Enter a number for the call manager port 6 If you selected H 323 call control in the panel on the left side of the tab select Gatekeeper and then specify the following Setting Gatekeeper Mode Authentication Gatekeeper
547. with User Defined TPID If you want to analyze detect Stacked VLAN traffic carrying the same TPID that you specified for transmitted traffic check the box for Use Tx User SVLAN TPID 5 Ifyou need to specify other settings for the test select the appropriate tab otherwise press Results to return to the Main screen The stacked VLAN filter settings are specified Filtering traffic using VPLS criteria If your unit is configured to transmit VPLS encapsulated traffic you can filter received traffic using VPLS criteria To filter traffic using VPLS header criteria 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the layer 2 test application for the interface you are testing Refer to Table 7 on page 25 through Table 8 on page 25 for lists of layer 2 applications 2 Select the Setup soft key and then select the Ethernet tab Verify that VPLS is specified as the encapsulation 3 Select the Filters tab In the panel on the left side of the tab select Ethernet then specify the following 54 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 2 testing a On the graphic of the frame select Tunnel Label and then specify the following Seiting Value Tunnel Label If you want to filter received traffic based on the tunnel label set the Tunnel Label filter to Yes otherwise select Don t Care Tunnel Label If you indicated that you want to filter traffic for a specific tunne
548. y 71 00 00 00 00 00 05 00 00 10 00 00 15 00 00 20 00 00 25 00 00 30 Time Sim voice SDTV HDTV Datal Data2 Figure 41 Throughput Graph A color coded legend appears under the graph indicating which color is used to present results for each type of analyzed streams In Figure 41 the green line provides results for HDTV traffic the red line provides results for SDTV traffic and the purple and light blue lines provide results for the data traffic The bright blue line provides results for simulated voice traffic NOTE The bright blue reflects simulated voice not the audio frames If you would like to focus on results for a specific type of stream frame size CVLAN SVLAN or VLAN ID you can change the graph properties To change graph properties 1 Select the legend at the bottom of the graph see Figure 42 a Sim Voice SDT HDTY Datal Dataz Figure 42 Graph Legend Triple Play application The Graph properties dialog box appears see Figure 43 on page 162 2 Under Graph properties select one of the following Stream Frame Size CVLAN ID SVLAN ID VLAN ID Grep properies A Stream a ply Sim Voice SDTV v HDTV Data 1 y Data 2 Close Figure 43 Graph properties dialog box Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Characterizing Triple Play services Chapter 6 Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing Triple Play testing 3 Clear the boxes nex
549. y and count lost packets If you want to populate the payload by repeating a specific pattern of bytes select Fill Byte type the byte value using a 1 byte hexadecimal format and then specify the Protocol 11 If you need to specify other settings for the test select the appropriate tab otherwise press Results to return to the Main screen The transmitted IPv6 packet settings are specified Before transmitting layer 3 IPv6 traffic you can optionally specify settings that indicate the expected received payload and determine which packets will pass through the receive filter and be counted in the test result categories for filtered IPv6 traffic The settings may also impact other results To specify received IPv6 packet settings 1 If you haven t already done so use the Test Menu to select the IPv6 test application for the interface you are testing Refer to Table 7 on page 25 through Table 8 on page 25 for lists of layer 3 applications Table 15 on page 129 lists layer 4 applications 2 Select the Setup soft key and then select the Filters tab 3 In the panel on the left side of the tab select Basic then set the Filter Mode to Detailed 4 Specify the Ethernet filter settings see Specifying Ethernet filter settings on page 49 5 To specify layer 3 filter settings in the panel on the left side of the tab select IP 6 Set the IP Filter to Enable then do the following a If you are running an application in Moni
550. y and measurements are taken locally Downstream and Upstream Traffic is generated locally and remotely and measurements are taken in Requires remote JDSU test each direction J q J instrument Configure Connect Local Settings Figure 76 Symmetric Connection Bidirectional Option NOTE The Delay measurement types available when doing bidirectional testing is dependent upon the capabilities of the two units Both units must be capable of One Way Delay to use One Way Delay and both must be capable of Bidi rectional RTD to do Bidirectional RTD Asymmetric used where upstream and downstream parameters in a bi directional test are individually specified and may be different Symmetry 1 ee Throughput D Symmetric Downstream and Upstream throughputs are the same Remote Asymmetric Downstream and Upstream throughputs are different D Unidirectional J T Only test the network in one direction Measurements iat Downstream and Upstream P Traffic is generated locally and remotely and measurements are taken in each direction Requires remote JDSU test NS instrument Configure Connect Local Settings Figure 77 Asymmetric Connection Option Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 253 Chapter 10 Automated Testing SAMComplete muy NOTE ARP must be enabled on both units if running a bi directional SAMComplete test in L3 or Wirespeed applications Unidirectiona
551. y delay test results in the Ethernet L2 Link Stats or L3 Link Stats category and the L2 Filter Stats or L3 Filter Stats category CDMA GPS Receiver results are also available for review You have measured one way delay Measuring service disruption time You can use two instruments in an end to end configuration to measure the service disruption time resulting from a switch in service to a protect line The traffic originating unit must transmit a constant rate of traffic to obtain accurate measurements By default all units stop Tx traffic when they detect a break in the Rx link This means that recorded Service Disruption times will include the time that the Rx line was down plus the time needed to restart traffic and auto negotiate if enabled With some optical applications 100M 1G and 10G LAN configured with full duplex communication it is possible to decouple the Rx line from the Tx line and prevent this condition from occurring thus achieving a much more accu rate Service Disruption measurement If the unit is capable of decoupling there will be an active Decouple Tx Rx option next to the Reset Service Disruption Test button on the Actions tab at the bottom of the main screen muy NOTE Decoupling the Tx and Rx links is only applicable to the Service Disruption measurement on Ethernet interfaces except L4 TCP Wirespeed In order for the decoupling to occur the circuit must support ethernet service disrup tion
552. y increment the MAC address car ried in each frame by one select Yes If you indicated that you would like the unit to increment the MAC addresses specify the number of MACs in the sequence The addresses will be assigned in succession and will repeat after the number specified for the sequence is complete 46 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Configuring VLAN tagged traffic Chapter 4 Ethernet and IP Testing Layer 2 testing Frame Label Setting Value Disable IP Ether If you indicated that you would like the Type unit to increment the MAC addresses LAG routers can be prevented from acting static IP header IF Ether Type is Disabled EtherType field visible by selecting Type on graphical display will change to 0x8885 from 0x0800 default No Disable OoS If you indicated that you would like the Results unit to increment the MAC addresses any results derived from the out of sequence result lost frames will show N A in the results display 9 Select DATA and then specify the Tx Payload Acterna To transmit frames that contain a sequence number and time stamp so that lost frames round trip delay and jitter can be calculated select Acterna Indicate whether you want the payload to carry a BERT pattern ora Fill Byte pattern then specify the pattern If you are measuring round trip delay on a 10 Gigabit circuit in RTD Setup indicate whether you want to measure delay
553. y test 0 0 0 cee eee eee 235 System Recovery test results 0 0000 c eee eee 235 Frame Loss test coc a arr ts Sant Oe a Ree eles Sa eels 235 About the frame loss test 00 ee 235 Frame Loss test results 2 0 0 0 0 0 eee 235 Back to Back Frames test Burst test 0 0000 235 About the Back to Back Frames test 0 00000 235 Back to Back test results 0 0 eee eee 236 Optimizing the test time 0 0 eee 236 Importing and exporting RFC config filles 236 Configuring the Enhanced RFC 2544 or Fibre Channel tests 237 Specifying the external test settings 004 237 Setting Connection parameters 0 000 eee 238 Configuration methods 0 0 cece eee 238 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual xi Contents Test selection ae nt els age tatu Gad heb a a a ea Paes 241 Running Enhanced RFC 2544 and FC tests 20 244 SAMComplete 00 0 e eee eee eee 250 Initiating the SAMComplete Test 0 0 0 e eee eee 250 Configuring SAMComplete test settings 005 251 Choosing SAMComplete tests 0 0 00 eee eee 259 Running SAMComplete tests 000 0 00 cee eee eee 260 Automated VLAN tests 0 0 cece eee eee eee eee 263 Automated FTP Throughput tests 2200 cece ee eeee 264 Automated HTTP Throughput tests 00 cece eee ee e
554. yer 2 and layer 3 settings for Triple Play services on page 164 If you are looping back a single stream of non VPLS layer 2 traffic proceed to step 8 If you are looping back a single stream of traffic on the local unit do the following as appropriate for your particular test otherwise if you are looping back multiple streams of traffic proceed to step 6 lf you are looping back layer 2 VPLS traffic specify the far end unit s source MAC address as the destination MAC address for transmitted traffic If you are looping back layer 3 or layer 4 traffic specify the far end unit s source IP address as the destination IP address for transmitted traffic If you are looping back layer 4 traffic specify the far end unit s source port number as the destination port for transmitted traffic If you are looping back multiple streams of traffic source MAC addresses and IP addresses can be specified for all enabled streams on the All Streams tab or on a stream by stream basis on the Ethernet or IP sub tab for each individual stream When looping back multiple streams of layer 4 TCP UDP traffic you can specify a unique source service type and port number for each stream or you can specify the information for one stream and then copy it to all other streams Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual 175 Chapter 7 Loop back Testing Using Loop Up to initiate a loop back from the local unit 176
555. ype muy NOTE Bidirectional tests must be initiated on a T BERD MTS 5800 The remote unit may be a MSAM T BERD MTS 5800 Transport Module or a QT 600 The QT 600 supports asymmetrical testing only An HST 3000 with Ether net SIM cannot be used for bidirectional tests Symmetric used where only one set of throughput parameters are defined because upstream and downstream transmission is identical as the signal is being looped back to the source or transmitted both down stream and upstream simultaneously Symmetry 1 Ca Throughput Symmetric Downstream and Upstream throughputs are the same Asymmetric Downstream and Upstream throughputs are different Unidirectional Only test the network in one direction Measurements Loopback Local Traffic is generated locally and measurements are taken locally Downstream and Upstream Traffic is generated locally and remotely and measurements are taken in each direction Configure Connect Local Settings Figure 75 Symmetric Connection Loopback Option 252 Ethernet Fibre Channel IP and TCP UDP Testing Manual Chapter 10 Automated Testing SAMComplete Symmetry 1 eae Throughput Symmetric Downstream and Upstream throughputs are the same Oo Remote Asymmetric Downstream and Upstream throughputs are different D Unidirectional Only test the network in one direction Measurements Loopback fe cal Traffic is generated locall

T-BERD/MTS 5800 Ethernet Testing Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents